WO2018030334A1 - Transfer sheet, method for manufacturing transfer sheet, and method for manufacturing decorative molded article - Google Patents
Transfer sheet, method for manufacturing transfer sheet, and method for manufacturing decorative molded article Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2018030334A1 WO2018030334A1 PCT/JP2017/028568 JP2017028568W WO2018030334A1 WO 2018030334 A1 WO2018030334 A1 WO 2018030334A1 JP 2017028568 W JP2017028568 W JP 2017028568W WO 2018030334 A1 WO2018030334 A1 WO 2018030334A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- layer
- transfer
- region
- transfer sheet
- protrusion
- Prior art date
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B27/00—Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B44—DECORATIVE ARTS
- B44C—PRODUCING DECORATIVE EFFECTS; MOSAICS; TARSIA WORK; PAPERHANGING
- B44C1/00—Processes, not specifically provided for elsewhere, for producing decorative surface effects
- B44C1/16—Processes, not specifically provided for elsewhere, for producing decorative surface effects for applying transfer pictures or the like
- B44C1/165—Processes, not specifically provided for elsewhere, for producing decorative surface effects for applying transfer pictures or the like for decalcomanias; sheet material therefor
- B44C1/17—Dry transfer
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a transfer sheet, a transfer sheet manufacturing method, and a decorative molded product manufacturing method.
- the surface of an article may be decorated by a transfer method.
- a transfer sheet having a release layer, a design layer, an adhesive layer, or the like formed on a base material is adhered to an article to be transferred, and then the base material is peeled off.
- the transfer layer is transferred to the surface of the transfer product to decorate.
- Patent Document 1 discloses a release layer containing a matting agent entirely on a base sheet, a mask layer partially containing an active energy ray-curable resin, a release layer and a design layer as a transfer layer.
- a partial mat transfer sheet characterized in that is formed is disclosed.
- the present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, a transfer sheet capable of transferring a transfer layer to an accurate position of a transfer object, a method for producing the transfer sheet, and decorative molding using the transfer sheet It aims at providing the manufacturing method of goods.
- the present invention provides the following [1] to [12].
- [1] A transfer sheet having a transfer layer on a release sheet, wherein the release sheet has a base material layer having a first region and a second region on a surface on the transfer layer side, and the base material
- the transfer sheet which has a protrusion part in the 2nd field of a layer, and has a colored layer on the protrusion part further.
- [2] The method for producing a transfer sheet according to [1], wherein the release sheet is produced by the following steps (A1) to (A3), and then a transfer layer is formed on at least a part of the release sheet.
- A1 The process of apply
- A2) Using a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region, the uncured resin layer is shaped, and simultaneously irradiated with ionizing radiation to cure the shaped resin layer and support The process of obtaining the base material layer in which the resin layer was formed on the body.
- A3) The process of forming a colored layer on the protrusion part in the 2nd area
- a transfer sheet having a transfer layer on a release sheet having a base material layer having a first region and a second region on a surface on the transfer layer side, and the base material
- the second region of the layer has a protrusion and a peripheral region located around the protrusion, and the peripheral region includes a plurality of peripheral protrusions partially disposed,
- the transfer sheet which has a colored layer on a protrusion part and the said periphery protrusion part.
- A1 The process of apply
- A2) Using a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region, the uncured resin layer is shaped, and simultaneously irradiated with ionizing radiation to cure the shaped resin layer and support The process of obtaining the base material layer in which the resin layer was formed on the body.
- A3) The process of forming a colored layer on the protrusion part in a 2nd area
- a transfer sheet having a transfer layer on a release sheet, the release sheet having a first region for transferring to a transfer target and a second region for providing an alignment pattern.
- the second region has a protrusion on the surface side of the transfer layer, and the transfer layer has a protrusion on the surface opposite to the surface on which the release sheet is provided.
- a transfer sheet comprising an alignment pattern portion having a color layer on the protruding portion.
- a method for producing a transfer sheet according to [7] [9] A method for producing a decorative molded product, comprising: a step of transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet according to [7] to a transfer target; and a step of peeling the release sheet of the transfer sheet.
- a transfer sheet having a transfer layer on a release sheet, the release sheet having a first region for transferring to a transfer object and a second region for providing an alignment pattern.
- the second layer of the base material layer has a convex portion on the surface side of the transfer layer, and the transfer layer has the convex surface on the surface opposite to the release sheet.
- a pattern portion for alignment having a follow-up projecting portion based on the portion, the height h of the convex portion is 1.0 to 6.0 ⁇ m, and the distance d between the end portions of the convex portion is 10
- a transfer sheet having a thickness of 500 ⁇ m.
- a transfer sheet that can transfer a transfer layer to an accurate position of a transfer object, a method for manufacturing the transfer sheet, and a method for manufacturing a decorative molded product using the transfer sheet.
- the transfer sheet according to the first embodiment of the present invention is a transfer sheet having a transfer layer on a release sheet, and the release sheet has a first region and a second region on a surface on the transfer layer side.
- the substrate layer has a protruding portion in the second region of the substrate layer, and further has a colored layer on the protruding portion.
- 1 to 4 are sectional views of a transfer sheet 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
- the transfer sheet 100 has a transfer layer 20 on a release sheet 10.
- the release sheet 10 includes a base material layer 11 having a first region R 1 and a second region R 2 on the surface on the transfer layer 20 side, and the second base material layer 11 has a second layer.
- the protrusion 3 is provided in the region R 2
- the colored layer 12 is further provided on the protrusion 3.
- the release sheet 10 is composed of a support 1, a base material layer 11 including a resin layer 2 and a protruding portion 3, a colored layer 12 and a release layer 13. Yes.
- the transfer layer 20 includes a protective layer 21, an adhesive layer 22, and a print layer 23. 1 to 4 show an embodiment of the transfer sheet of the present invention, and the transfer sheet of the present invention is not limited to the configuration of FIGS.
- the release sheet has a base material layer having a first region and a second region on the surface on the transfer layer side, a protrusion in the second region of the base material layer, and a colored layer on the protrusion It is what has.
- the release sheet is peeled off after the transfer layer is transferred to a transfer object such as a resin molded body.
- Base layer 11 As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, having a first region R 1 and the second region R 2 on the surface of the transfer layer 20 side. Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 to 4, the base material layer 11 may further have another region R n on the surface on the transfer layer 20 side.
- the base material layer 11 is formed of, for example, a support 1 and a resin layer 2 as shown in FIGS.
- the base material layer 11 may be a single layer of the support 1 or the resin layer 2 or may have a configuration of three or more layers having layers other than the support 1 and the resin layer 2.
- Examples of the support 1 constituting the base layer 11 include polyolefin resins such as polyethylene and polypropylene, polyvinyl chloride, polyvinylidene chloride, polyvinyl alcohol, ethylene / vinyl acetate copolymer, ethylene / vinyl alcohol copolymer, and the like.
- Polyester resins such as vinyl resins, polyethylene terephthalate, polyethylene naphthalate, polybutylene terephthalate, acrylic resins such as poly (meth) methyl acrylate and poly (meth) ethyl acrylate, styrene resins such as polystyrene, nylon 6
- a plastic film made of a resin such as a polyamide-based resin typified by nylon 66 can be used.
- a biaxially stretched polyester film that is excellent in heat resistance, dimensional stability, and alignment suitability is suitable.
- the thickness of the support 1 is preferably 12 to 150 ⁇ m, and more preferably 25 to 100 ⁇ m, from the viewpoints of moldability, shape followability, and handling.
- the surface of the support 1 is preliminarily subjected to physical treatment such as corona discharge treatment and oxidation treatment and application of a paint called an anchor agent or a primer in order to enhance the adhesion with the resin layer 2 and the like. Also good.
- the resin layer 2 is preferably composed mainly of resin components such as a thermoplastic resin, a cured product of a thermosetting resin composition, and a cured product of an ionizing radiation curable resin composition.
- the resin component used for forming the resin layer 2 preferably has a solid content of 20 to 100% by mass, more preferably 25 to 95% by mass, and even more preferably 30 to 90% by mass.
- a cured product of an ionizing radiation curable resin composition that is excellent in strength and capable of giving an accurate and precise shape because it is instantly cured is preferable.
- the ionizing radiation curable resin composition it is preferable to include 70 mass% or more of a cured product of the ionizing radiation curable resin composition among all the resin components constituting the resin layer 2. More preferably, 90% by mass or more is included, more preferably 95% by mass or more, and even more preferably 100% by mass.
- the resin layer 2 may be formed by coating, but from the viewpoint of forming an accurate and precise shape, the resin layer 2 may be formed by printing using a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region. preferable. When the resin layer 2 has other regions, it is preferable that the plate further has a shape complementary to the other regions. Details of the method of forming the resin layer 2 using a plate will be described later.
- thermoplastic resin examples include acrylic resins, cellulose resins, urethane resins, vinyl chloride resins, polyester resins, polyolefin resins, polycarbonate, nylon, polystyrene, and ABS resins.
- the thermosetting resin composition is a composition containing at least a thermosetting resin, and is a resin composition that is cured by heating.
- thermosetting resin examples include acrylic resins, urethane resins, phenol resins, urea melamine resins, epoxy resins, unsaturated polyester resins, silicone resins, and the like. In the thermosetting resin composition, a curing agent is added to these curable resins as necessary.
- the ionizing radiation curable resin composition is a composition containing a compound having an ionizing radiation curable functional group (hereinafter also referred to as “ionizing radiation curable compound”).
- a compound having an ionizing radiation curable functional group include an ethylenically unsaturated bond group such as a (meth) acryloyl group, a vinyl group, and an allyl group, an epoxy group, and an oxetanyl group.
- a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group is preferable.
- the ionizing radiation curable resin is more preferably a compound having two or more ethylenically unsaturated bond groups, and in particular, an ethylenically unsaturated group.
- a polyfunctional (meth) acrylate compound having two or more saturated bonding groups is more preferable.
- the polyfunctional (meth) acrylate compound any of a monomer and an oligomer can be used.
- the ionizing radiation means an electromagnetic wave or a charged particle beam having an energy quantum capable of polymerizing or cross-linking molecules, and usually ultraviolet (UV) or electron beam (EB) is used. Electromagnetic waves such as X-rays and ⁇ -rays, and charged particle beams such as ⁇ -rays and ion beams can also be used.
- bifunctional (meth) acrylate monomers include ethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, bisphenol A tetraethoxydiacrylate, bisphenol A tetrapropoxydiacrylate, and 1,6-hexane. Examples thereof include diol diacrylate.
- Examples of the tri- or higher functional (meth) acrylate monomer include trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, di Examples include pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate and isocyanuric acid-modified tri (meth) acrylate.
- the (meth) acrylate-based monomer may be modified by partially modifying the molecular skeleton, and is modified with ethylene oxide, propylene oxide, caprolactone, isocyanuric acid, alkyl, cyclic alkyl, aromatic, bisphenol, or the like. Can also be used.
- examples of the polyfunctional (meth) acrylate oligomer include acrylate polymers such as urethane (meth) acrylate, epoxy (meth) acrylate, polyester (meth) acrylate, and polyether (meth) acrylate.
- Urethane (meth) acrylate is obtained by reaction of polyhydric alcohol and organic diisocyanate with hydroxy (meth) acrylate, for example.
- a preferable epoxy (meth) acrylate is a (meth) acrylate obtained by reacting (meth) acrylic acid with a tri- or higher functional aromatic epoxy resin, alicyclic epoxy resin, aliphatic epoxy resin or the like.
- (Meth) acrylates obtained by reacting the above aromatic epoxy resins, alicyclic epoxy resins, aliphatic epoxy resins and the like with polybasic acids and (meth) acrylic acid, and bifunctional or higher functional aromatic epoxy resins, It is a (meth) acrylate obtained by reacting an alicyclic epoxy resin, an aliphatic epoxy resin or the like with a phenol and (meth) acrylic acid.
- the ionizing radiation curable resin can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- the resin layer forming ink preferably contains additives such as a photopolymerization initiator and a photopolymerization accelerator.
- a photopolymerization initiator include one or more selected from acetophenone, benzophenone, ⁇ -hydroxyalkylphenone, Michler's ketone, benzoin, benzyldimethyl ketal, benzoylbenzoate, ⁇ -acyloxime ester, thioxanthones and the like.
- the photopolymerization accelerator can reduce polymerization inhibition by air during curing and increase the curing speed. For example, p-dimethylaminobenzoic acid isoamyl ester, p-dimethylaminobenzoic acid ethyl ester, etc. One or more selected may be mentioned.
- the thickness (t) of the resin layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 15 ⁇ m, more preferably 2 to 12 ⁇ m, and further preferably 3 to 10 ⁇ m.
- the surface shape of the first region of the base material layer is not particularly limited.
- the surface shape of the first region R 1 of the base layer 11 may be a substantially smooth as shown in FIG. 1, or may be uneven as in FIGS. 2-4.
- FIG. 1 when the surface shape of the first region R 1 of the base layer 11 is substantially smooth, it can be made substantially smooth surface shape of the transfer layer 20 has been transferred to the transfer target, the resulting pressure The gloss of the decorative molded product can be increased.
- FIGS. 2 to 4 when the first region R 1 has the concavo-convex portion 5, the transferred material has a transfer layer 20 having a shape complementary to the concavo-convex portion (on the concavo-convex portion 5.
- the transfer layer 20) having a concavo-convex complementary shape relaxed by the release layer 13 is transferred, and the concavo-convex shape can be imparted to the surface of the resulting decorative molded product.
- grooved part and the protrusion part mentioned later satisfy
- the colored layer can be easily adhered to the top of the protruding portion, and alignment can be performed accurately.
- [the maximum height of the uneven portion in the first region / the height of the protruding portion] is preferably 0.50 or less, and more preferably 0.40 or less.
- the [average roughness of the uneven portion in the first region / height of the protruding portion] is preferably 0.20 or less, and more preferably 0.15 or less.
- the maximum height means the maximum height roughness Rz of JIS B0601: 2001 at a cutoff value of 0.8 mm
- the average roughness means JIS B0601: 2001 at a cutoff value of 0.8 mm.
- numerical values related to height, roughness, width, and thickness are average values of values measured ten times unless otherwise specified.
- the absolute value of the degree of unevenness in the first region is not particularly limited, but the maximum height roughness Rz is about 0.2 to 4.0 ⁇ m. It is preferable to do.
- the arithmetic average roughness Ra is preferably about 0.05 to 2.0 ⁇ m.
- the release sheet 10 has a protruding portion 3 in the second region R 2 of the base material layer 11, and further has a colored layer 12 on the protruding portion 3.
- the second region R 2 and the first region R 1 described above are formed at different locations in the width direction (TD: Transverse Direction) of the release sheet 10. preferable.
- the colored layer 12 is not formed in the first region R 1, but on the protruding portion 3 of the second region R 2.
- the colored layer 12 can be easily formed. 5 to 7 show a state in which the surface of the release sheet is visible through the transfer layer.
- the portion having the protruding portion and the colored layer in the second region is different in light transmittance or light reflectance from the surrounding portions.
- the transfer sheet can be aligned in an arbitrary process.
- the light transmittance may be any of transmittance in the normal transmission direction, diffuse transmittance, and total transmittance.
- the light reflectance may be any of transmittance in the regular reflection direction, diffuse reflectance, and total reflectance.
- Examples of the optional step of aligning include a step of slitting the transfer sheet in a long length, a step of punching the transfer sheet into a sheet, and a step of transferring the transfer sheet to a transfer object. A specific method of alignment will be described later.
- the protruding portion is formed of an arbitrary structure, and the shape and the like of the structure are not particularly limited, but the shapes and the like exemplified below are preferable.
- the height (H) of the protrusion is preferably 1 to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably 2 to 7 ⁇ m, and further preferably 3 to 6 ⁇ m.
- the height of the protruding portion 3 is set to 1 ⁇ m or more, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, it becomes easy to form a fine protrusion on the surface of the transfer sheet 100 on the transfer layer 20 side. It is possible to easily suppress blocking when winding a sheet or stacking single transfer sheets.
- the height of the protruding portion is hardly deformed by a load, and the alignment accuracy can be easily maintained.
- the difference in light transmittance between the portion having the protrusion and the surrounding portion is 30% or more.
- the difference in light reflectance between the portion having the protruding portion and the surrounding portion is 30% or more.
- the width (W) of the protrusion is preferably 0.1 to 10.0 mm, more preferably 1.0 to 7.0 mm, and still more preferably 3.0 to 6.0 mm.
- the width of the protruding portion is 0.1 mm or more, the distinction from the peripheral portion becomes clear and alignment can be easily performed.
- the effect which suppresses the blocking mentioned above also improves by making the width
- the protrusion has a ratio of height (H) to width (W) of 1: 10,000 to 1:10 from the viewpoint of the balance between the effects of height (H) and width (W) described above. Is more preferably 1: 3,000 to 1: 140, and even more preferably 1: 1,350 to 1: 500.
- the height (H) of the protrusion is orthogonal to the extending direction of the structure (eg, the direction of “d” in FIGS. 5 to 7) of the structure forming the protrusion.
- the width (W) of the protruding portion refers to the width of the bottom portion of a cross section obtained by cutting the structure forming the protruding portion in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the structure.
- the protrusion 3 is preferably formed from a row of structures extending in a direction parallel to any one side of the transfer sheet 100.
- the row-like structures are continuously stretched without interruption, but the row-like structures may be intermittently stretched as shown in FIG. 6.
- the interval (P 2 ) between the ends of each structure is preferably 0.1 to 10.0 mm, and 1.0 to 7.0 mm. More preferably, the thickness is 3.0 to 6.0 mm.
- the direction in which the row-shaped structures are stretched is preferably the flow direction (MD: Machine Direction) of the transfer sheet 100.
- the on the second region R 2 may have a protruding portion 3 alone, or may be plural have. Also, if having a plurality of protrusions 3 in the second region R 2, as shown in FIGS. 2-7, it is preferable that at least one pair of projecting portions 3 are parallel to each other. In addition, it is more preferable that at least one pair of protrusions 3 are parallel to each other in the flow direction of the transfer sheet 100. By arranging at least one set of protrusions 3 in parallel with each other, when forming the colored layer 12, the colored layer 12 is easily formed on the protrusions 3, while between the pair of protrusions 3. The colored layer 12 is hardly formed.
- the contrast of the light transmittance or the light reflectance between the part having the protrusions 3 and the part between the pair of protrusions 3 becomes clear, and alignment can be facilitated.
- the depth of the plate forming the colored layer is increased, so that the space between the set of protrusions 3 is as shown in FIGS. Even if the colored layer 12 is formed in the peripheral portion of the protruding portion 3 excluding the portion, the colored layer 12 is difficult to be formed between the pair of protruding portions 3, so that the alignment is possible.
- the alignment can be performed even if the accuracy of pattern printing for alignment is slightly reduced.
- the contrast for alignment can be easily clarified even if the height of the protrusions 3 is low.
- the contrast of light transmittance or light reflectance can be formed linearly, and the alignment accuracy can be improved, and the above-described blocking is suppressed. To improve the effect.
- the interval (P 1 ) between the ends of the pair of protrusions 3 is preferably 0.1 to 10.0 mm, and 1.0 to 7.0 mm. More preferably, the thickness is 1.5 to 5.0 mm.
- a set of protrusion part 3 is the row-shaped structure mentioned above. Furthermore, it is more preferable that the set of protrusions 3 is one that extends intermittently in the above-described row of structures.
- the cross section obtained by cutting the structure forming the protruding portion in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the structure has a substantially rectangular shape.
- the protrusion and the transfer layer described later preferably satisfy the relationship of [the height of the protrusion / the thickness of the transfer layer] of 0.1 to 5.0, preferably 0.2 to 3.5. It is more preferable to satisfy the relationship, and it is further preferable to satisfy the relationship of 0.3 to 1.0.
- the ratio By setting the ratio to be 0.1 or more, it is possible to easily suppress blocking when winding a long transfer sheet or stacking single transfer sheets, and the ratio is set to 5.0 or less. As a result, the protruding portion is not easily deformed by the load, and the alignment accuracy can be easily maintained.
- the timing for removing the second region is, for example, (1) when the transfer sheet is slit long, (2) when the transfer sheet is cut into sheets, and (3) the transfer sheet is transferred. And the like during the trimming process after the transfer.
- the colored layer is formed on the protruding portion and has a role of causing a light transmittance or a light reflectance contrast with the peripheral portion.
- the “colored layer” in this specification includes a layer that looks whitish due to light diffusion (for example, a layer that looks like frosted glass).
- the colored layer is preferably mainly composed of a binder resin and a pigment and / or a matting agent.
- the pigment of the colored layer it is preferable to include a pigment having high concealability or a pigment having high reflectance.
- a black pigment such as carbon black is preferable as the pigment having high concealability.
- the pigment having high reflectance include barium sulfate, titanium oxide, and pearl pigment.
- the matting agent for the colored layer can be used without any particular limitation as long as it provides irregularities on the surface of the colored layer and causes external haze.
- examples of the matting agent include inorganic particles such as silica and alumina, and organic particles such as acrylic particles and styrene particles.
- the binder resin of the colored layer is not particularly limited, and a general-purpose thermoplastic resin, a cured product of a thermosetting resin composition, or a cured product of an ionizing radiation curable resin composition can be used.
- the thickness of the colored layer may be adjusted within a range where contrast for alignment is obtained, and is usually about 0.3 to 5.0 ⁇ m.
- the surface of the release sheet on the transfer layer side may have other regions other than the first region and the second region. By having other regions, the alignment accuracy can be further improved, and the design of the transfer object can be further improved.
- the position in the direction orthogonal to the flow direction is higher than the configuration of the second region R 2. Alignment is possible, but alignment in the flow direction is not possible. In such a case, by forming a position detector in the other region R n, it is possible to further improve the accuracy of the alignment.
- Position detection unit for example, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, the second protrusion 6 formed in the other region R n of the base layer 11, formed on the protruding portion 6 of the second
- the structure which consists of the made 2nd colored layer 14 is mentioned.
- Second protrusion 6 may be formed on at least a portion of the other region R n.
- the second protrusion 6 preferably has a straight line parallel to the width direction of the transfer sheet when observed from the plane direction, and has a substantially rectangular shape having a straight line parallel to the width direction of the transfer sheet. Is more preferable, and a substantially rectangular shape having straight lines parallel to the width direction and the flow direction of the transfer sheet is more preferable.
- the length of the straight line is preferably 2 to 20 mm, more preferably 3 to 15 mm. More preferably, it is 10 mm.
- the height of the second protrusion 6 is preferably 1 to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably 2 to 7 ⁇ m, and even more preferably 3 to 6 ⁇ m.
- the height of the second protrusion 6 is preferably the same as the height of the protrusion 3 in the second region.
- the contrast of the light transmittance or the light reflectance between the portion having the second projecting portion 6 and its peripheral portion becomes clear, and the alignment can be facilitated.
- the height of the protruding portion 3 is set to 1 ⁇ m or more, as shown in FIG. It is easy to suppress blocking when taking or stacking a single transfer sheet. Further, by setting the height of the protruding portion 3 to 10 ⁇ m or less, the protruding portion is hardly deformed by a load, and the alignment accuracy can be easily maintained.
- the difference in light transmittance between the portion having the second protrusion 6 and the surrounding portion is preferably 30% or more. Moreover, when detecting a position by the difference in light reflectance, it is preferable that the difference in light reflectance between the location having the second protrusion 6 and the surrounding location is 30% or more.
- grooved part is mentioned.
- the degree of unevenness of the second uneven portion 7 is reduced, the second colored layer 14 is easily formed not only on the second uneven portion 7 but also around the second uneven portion 7.
- the thickness of the second colored layer 14 formed around the second uneven portion 7 is thick overall. For this reason, a contrast of light transmittance or light reflectance occurs between the second uneven portion 7 and the periphery of the second uneven portion 7 due to the difference in the adhesion density of the second colored layer 14. The position can be detected.
- the second colored layer 14 is easily formed on the protruded portion of the second uneven portion 7, while the recessed portion of the second uneven portion 7 is formed.
- the second concave-convex part 7 may be formed on at least a portion of the other region R n. Further, the second concavo-convex portion 7 preferably has a straight line parallel to the width direction of the transfer sheet when observed from the plane direction, and has a substantially rectangular shape having a straight line parallel to the width direction of the transfer sheet. Is more preferable, and it is more preferable that the transfer sheet has a substantially rectangular shape having straight lines parallel to the width direction and the flow direction of the transfer sheet.
- the length of the straight line is preferably 2 to 20 mm, more preferably 3 to 15 mm. More preferably, it is 10 mm.
- the second uneven portion 7 preferably satisfies the relationship [maximum height of the second uneven portion ⁇ height of the protruding portion of the second region].
- [Maximum height of the second uneven portion / height of the protruding portion of the second region] is preferably 0.50 or less, and more preferably 0.40 or less.
- [Average roughness of second uneven portion / height of protruding portion of second region] is preferably 0.20 or less, and more preferably 0.15 or less.
- the maximum height roughness Rz of the second uneven portion 7 is preferably 0.2 to 4.0 ⁇ m.
- the arithmetic average roughness Ra of the second uneven portion 7 is preferably 0.05 to 2.0 ⁇ m.
- the second colored layer 14 is preferably mainly composed of a binder resin and a pigment and / or a matting agent.
- the embodiment of the binder resin, pigment, and matting agent of the second colored layer 14 is the same as the embodiment of the binder resin, pigment, and matting agent of the colored layer 12 formed on the protruding portion.
- the thickness of the second colored layer 14 may be adjusted within a range in which a contrast for alignment is obtained, and is usually about 0.3 to 5.0 ⁇ m.
- the release sheet 10 is formed at different places in the width direction. With this positional relationship, positioning in the flow direction when forming the second colored layer 14 becomes unnecessary (the second colored layer 14 can be continuously formed in the flow direction), and workability can be improved.
- the position detection means described above When the position detection means described above is formed in other areas, it is preferable to remove the other areas when they are transferred to the transfer object and a decorative molded product is obtained.
- the timing for removing the other regions include (1) the process of slitting the transfer sheet into a long length, (2) the process of punching the transfer sheet into a sheet, and (3) the transfer sheet to be transferred. And the like during the trimming process after the transfer.
- a shape different from the shape of the first region may be formed in other regions. For example, (a) when the first region has a concavo-convex shape, make the shape of the other region substantially smooth, and (b) when the first region has a concavo-convex shape, change the shape of the other region to the first region. It is conceivable that the concavo-convex shape is different from the concavo-convex shape, and (c) when the shape of the first region is substantially smooth, the shape of the other region is the concavo-convex shape.
- the surface shape of the transfer layer transferred to the transfer object can be changed depending on the location. For this reason, the obtained decorative molded product has different glossiness depending on the place, and can improve the design.
- the release sheet 10 of the transfer sheet 100 is formed so as to be peelable at the interface with the transfer layer 20 when it is in close contact with the transfer object.
- the release sheet 10 preferably has a release layer 13 on at least a part of the surface in contact with the transfer layer 20. Further, from the viewpoint of uniform release property within the surface of the transfer sheet 100, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the release sheet 10 has a release layer on the entire surface on the side in contact with the transfer layer 20. 13 is preferable.
- corrugation is relieve
- “glare” refers to a phenomenon in which minute luminance variations are seen in image light due to the uneven structure on the surface. That is, by forming the release layer on the concavo-convex portion, glare can be suppressed when a decorative molded product is used on the front surface of the display element.
- the release layer 13 is mainly composed of a resin.
- the resin of the release layer 13 is not particularly limited as long as it has a predetermined film strength and has a low adhesive strength with the transfer layer 20, and is a general-purpose thermoplastic resin, a cured product of a thermosetting resin composition, Examples include a cured product of an ionizing radiation curable resin composition. Specifically, fluorine resin, silicone resin, acrylic resin, polyester resin, polyolefin resin, polystyrene resin, polyurethane resin, cellulose resin, vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate copolymer resin, nitrified cotton Etc. Among these, the hardened
- the release layer 13 may further contain a release agent in order to improve the release property.
- a release agent examples include waxes such as synthetic wax and natural washes.
- the synthetic wax is preferably a polyolefin wax such as polyethylene wax or polypropylene wax.
- the thickness of the release layer 13 is preferably 0.1 to 5.0 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.2 to 3.0 ⁇ m, and further preferably 0.3 to 1.0 ⁇ m.
- the thickness of the release layer 13 and the average roughness of the uneven shape of the first region are 0.05 ⁇ [ It is preferable that the relationship of the thickness of the release layer / the average roughness of the unevenness in the first region] ⁇ 100 is satisfied, and 0.3 ⁇ [the thickness of the release layer / the average roughness of the unevenness in the first region] ] ⁇ 10 is more preferable, and it is more preferable that the relationship 0.5 ⁇ [thickness of release layer / average roughness of the unevenness of the first region] ⁇ 3.0 is satisfied.
- the release sheet 10 may have other layers. Examples of other layers include an antistatic layer. When the release sheet 10 has an antistatic layer, it is possible to suppress the release charge when the release sheet is peeled off, and to improve the transfer workability.
- the antistatic layer preferably contains an antistatic agent such as an electron conductive antistatic agent or an ion conductive antistatic agent, and a binder resin.
- the antistatic layer is preferably formed on the surface of the release sheet opposite to the surface in contact with the transfer layer.
- the antistatic layer preferably has a surface resistivity adjusted to a range of 1.0 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 9 ⁇ / ⁇ to 1.0 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 12 ⁇ / ⁇ .
- An antistatic agent may be contained in another layer such as a resin layer to exhibit antistatic properties.
- the release sheet can be produced, for example, by the following steps (A1) to (A3).
- (A1) The process of apply
- (A2) Using a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region, the uncured resin layer is shaped, and simultaneously irradiated with ionizing radiation to cure the shaped resin layer and support The process of obtaining the base material layer in which the resin layer was formed on the body.
- (A3) The process of forming a colored layer on the protrusion part in the 2nd area
- the ionizing radiation curable resin composition contains a solvent
- the release sheet has a release layer
- a plate having a shape complementary to the first region, the second region, and the other regions may be used as the plate in the step (A2).
- the second colored layer is formed on the second concavo-convex portion of the other region and its peripheral portion simultaneously with the step (A3) or in a separate step. It is preferable to do.
- the plate used in the step (A2) can be obtained by engraving the surface of the cylinder into a desired shape by, for example, etching, sandblasting, cutting and laser processing, or a combination thereof.
- a long male plate (a plate having the same shape as the first region and the second region) is prepared by laser engraving, stereolithography, and the like, and is obtained by wrapping an inverted version around the cylinder surface. be able to.
- the surface of these plates is preferably hard-plated with chromium or the like.
- the release sheet can also be produced, for example, by the following steps (a1) to (a3).
- A1 A step of filling a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region with resin layer forming ink.
- A2) The resin layer forming ink filled in the plate is transferred onto a support, dried and cured as necessary to form a resin layer, and a base material layer having a resin layer formed on the support is formed. Obtaining step.
- (A3) The process of forming a colored layer on the protrusion part in the 2nd area
- a step of forming a release layer on at least part of the resin layer and / or the colored layer may be performed.
- the release sheet has other regions, a plate having a shape complementary to the first region, the second region, and the other regions may be used as the plate in the step (a2).
- the second colored layer is formed on the second concavo-convex part of the other region and its peripheral part simultaneously with the step (a3) or in a separate step. It is preferable to do.
- the transfer sheet is preferably manufactured with multiple impositions as shown in FIG. 7 from the viewpoint of manufacturing efficiency. Similarly, it is preferable that the release sheet is also manufactured by multiple imposition. For this reason, it is preferable that the plate used in the step (A2) or the step (a1) is a plate corresponding to the multi-page imposition.
- the first region and the second region are arranged at accurate positions.
- the arrangement of the first region and the second region is important.
- a plate in which the first region and the second region are arranged at accurate positions can be manufactured by the following steps (y1) to (y4).
- a concave portion 40 having a shape complementary to the protruding portion of the second region is formed on the surface of the cylinder 30 (FIG. 9A).
- Y2 Using the concave portion as a reference for alignment, the surface of the cylinder 30 is covered with a mask 50 in which a portion 60 for forming the concave portion in the first region is punched (FIG. 9B).
- Y3 Irregularities having a shape complementary to the irregularities in the first region are formed at locations not covered with the mask 50.
- the mask 50 is removed (FIG. 9C), and the surface of the cylinder is hard-plated.
- the step (y1) can be performed by etching, for example.
- the cylinder preferably has a surface plated with a thick film.
- the recess 40 is formed, and a recess 70 having a shape complementary to the second protrusion of the other region is formed (FIG. 9A). )
- a mask in which a portion for forming the concavo-convex shape in other regions is punched may be used.
- the step (y3) can be performed by, for example, etching or blasting. Blasting is preferred from the viewpoint of lowering the height than the protruding portion of the second region and the ease of adjusting the matte feeling.
- the particle shape (spherical, indeterminate), particle diameter, particle material (glass beads, organic particles, inorganic particles, iron, sand, etc.) used for blasting, and the distance to inject the particles
- the speed, time, angle, etc. By adjusting the speed, time, angle, etc., the shape to be imparted by blasting can be adjusted.
- the hard plating in the step (y4) include chrome plating.
- a transfer layer 20 is formed on at least a part of the release sheet 10.
- the transfer layer 20 is a layer to be transferred to the transfer object, and has, for example, a protective layer 21 and an adhesive layer 22 in order from the side close to the release sheet 10 as shown in FIGS.
- Transfer layer 20 is preferably formed on the whole of the portion corresponding to the first region R 1 of the base layer 11, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, more be formed on the entire surface of the release sheet 10 preferable.
- the protective layer 21 has a role of protecting the decorative molded product from abrasion, light, chemicals, and the like after the transfer layer 20 is transferred from the transfer sheet 100 to the transfer target.
- the protective layer 21 which has a shape complementary to this uneven
- the protective layer 21 with the substantially smooth surface is provided to the surface of a decorative molded product, and the glossiness of a decorative molded product can be made high.
- the protective layer 21 preferably contains a resin component such as a thermoplastic resin, a cured product of a thermosetting resin composition, and a cured product of an ionizing radiation curable resin composition as a main component.
- the main component means 50% by mass or more of the total solid content constituting the protective layer, and the ratio is preferably 70% by mass or more, and more preferably 80% by mass or more.
- the resin components a cured product of an ionizing radiation curable resin composition having excellent strength is preferable.
- 70% by mass or more of a cured product of the ionizing radiation curable resin composition is included among all resin components constituting the protective layer, More preferably, it is contained more than 95 mass%, more preferably more than 95 mass%, and still more preferably 100 mass%.
- the embodiment of the resin component such as the ionizing radiation curable resin composition of the protective layer 21 is the same as the embodiment of the resin component of the resin layer described above.
- a thermosetting resin composition and / or ionizing radiation curable resin composition as a material which forms the protective layer 21, from the viewpoint of moldability, at the time of forming the protective layer 21, a thermosetting resin is used.
- the composition and / or the ionizing radiation curable resin composition is left in a semi-cured state, and after being transferred to the transfer object, the curing of the thermosetting resin composition and / or the ionizing radiation curable resin composition proceeds. It is preferable to completely cure.
- the protective layer 21 may contain particles such as organic particles and inorganic particles. By containing particles in the protective layer 21, glare and defects can be made inconspicuous due to the expression of internal haze due to the difference in refractive index from the resin component. For the same purpose, these particles may be contained in an adhesive layer, an anchor layer, etc. described later.
- organic particles examples include particles made of polymethyl methacrylate, polyacryl-styrene copolymer, melamine resin, polycarbonate, polystyrene, polyvinyl chloride, benzoguanamine-melamine-formaldehyde condensate, silicone, fluorine resin, polyester resin, and the like. Can be mentioned.
- examples of the inorganic particles include particles made of silica, alumina, antimony, zirconia, titania and the like.
- the average particle size of the particles is preferably 0.05 to 5.0 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.5 to 3.0 ⁇ m.
- the average particle diameter is a 50% particle diameter (d50: median diameter) when the particles in a solution are measured by a dynamic light scattering method and the particle diameter distribution is represented by a cumulative mass distribution.
- the 50% particle diameter can be measured using, for example, a Microtrac particle size analyzer (manufactured by Nikkiso Co., Ltd.).
- the content of the particles is preferably 0.1 to 20 parts by mass, and more preferably 1 to 10 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the resin component of the protective layer 21.
- the thickness of the protective layer 21 is preferably 0.5 to 30 ⁇ m, more preferably 1.0 to 20 ⁇ m, and more preferably 2.0 to 10 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of the balance between surface hardness and moldability. Is more preferable.
- the adhesive layer 22 has a role of improving the transfer work by improving the adhesion between the transfer object 20 such as a resin molded body and the transfer layer 20. In addition, when the adhesiveness between the protective layer 21 and the transfer object is good, the adhesive layer need not be provided.
- the adhesive layer 22 is preferably made of a heat sensitive or pressure sensitive resin suitable for the material of the transfer object.
- a heat sensitive or pressure sensitive resin suitable for the material of the transfer object.
- the material of the transfer object is an acrylic resin
- the material of the transferred material is polyphenylene oxide / polystyrene resin, polycarbonate resin, or styrene resin, use an acrylic resin, polystyrene resin, polyamide resin, or the like that has an affinity for these resins. Is preferred.
- the material of the transfer object is a polypropylene resin
- a chlorinated polyolefin resin a chlorinated ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer resin, a cyclized rubber, or a coumarone indene resin.
- the adhesive layer 22 may contain additives such as an ultraviolet absorber and an infrared absorber.
- the ultraviolet absorber may be inorganic or organic, but an organic ultraviolet absorber is preferable from the viewpoint of excellent transparency. Examples of inorganic ultraviolet absorbers include titanium dioxide, cerium oxide, and zinc oxide.
- organic UV absorbers examples include benzotriazole UV absorbers, triazine UV absorbers, benzophenone UV absorbers, salicylate UV absorbers, benzoate UV absorbers, cyanoacrylate UV absorbers, hydroxy A phenyl triazine type ultraviolet absorber, a nickel chelate type ultraviolet absorber, etc. are mentioned.
- the infrared absorber examples include titanium oxide, zinc oxide, indium oxide, tin-doped indium oxide (ITO), tin oxide, antimony-doped tin oxide (ATO), and zinc sulfide metal oxide-based infrared absorber.
- the thickness of the adhesive layer is preferably 0.1 to 20 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.5 to 15 ⁇ m, and further preferably 1.0 to 10 ⁇ m.
- the anchor layer is a layer provided as necessary to improve heat resistance when placed in a high temperature environment such as in-mold molding.
- the anchor layer is preferably formed between the protective layer 21 and the adhesive layer 22.
- the anchor layer preferably contains a cured product of the curable resin composition.
- the curable resin composition include a thermosetting resin composition and an ionizing radiation curable resin composition.
- the embodiments of the thermosetting resin composition and ionizing radiation curable resin composition of the anchor layer are the same as the embodiments of the thermosetting resin composition and ionizing radiation curable resin composition of the resin layer.
- the thickness of the anchor layer is preferably 0.1 to 6 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.3 to 5 ⁇ m, and even more preferably 0.5 to 4 ⁇ m.
- the transfer layer 20 may further have a print layer 23 as shown in FIGS.
- the printed layer 23 has a role of imparting a desired design property to the decorative molded product.
- the print layer 23 is preferably arranged so as to be positioned at least in a part of the first region of the base material layer 11 when the transfer sheet 100 is observed from the planar direction. Further, the position in the thickness direction of the printing layer 23 may be arranged on the adhesive layer 22 as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4 or may be arranged between the adhesive layer 22 and the protective layer 21. Alternatively, it may be disposed between the protective layer 21 and the release sheet 10. From the viewpoint of protection of the printing layer 23 and adhesion to the transfer object, it is preferable to dispose the printing layer 23 between the adhesive layer 22 and the protection layer 21. Further, from the viewpoint of handling small lot products, it is preferable to dispose the printing layer 23 on the adhesive layer 22. When the printing layer 23 is disposed on the adhesive layer 22, the resin component of the printing layer 23 is a resin of the same type as the resin component of the adhesive layer from the viewpoint of uniform adhesion to the transfer target. It is preferable to use the same resin.
- the pattern of the printing layer 23 is arbitrary, and examples thereof include wood grain, stone grain, cloth grain, sand grain, circle, square, polygon, geometric pattern, character, solid printing, and the like.
- the print layer 23 preferably contains a binder resin such as a polyvinyl resin, a polyester resin, an acrylic resin, a polyvinyl acetal resin, or a cellulose resin, and a pigment and / or a dye.
- the thickness of the printing layer 23 is preferably 0.25 to 20 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.5 to 15 ⁇ m, and further preferably 0.7 to 10 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of design.
- the printing layer 23 is accurately adjusted by the protruding portion 5 in the second region, the colored layer 12 on the protruding portion, and the position detecting portion in other regions. Can be formed in position.
- Each layer such as the protective layer 21, the adhesive layer 22, the anchor layer, and the printing layer 23 constituting the transfer layer 23 is prepared, for example, by adjusting ink containing the constituent components of each layer, and on the release sheet, a gravure coating method, a roll It can be formed by coating and drying by a coating method such as a coating method, a gravure printing method, a screen printing method or the like, and curing by irradiation with ionizing radiation as required.
- the method for manufacturing a transfer sheet according to the first embodiment of the present invention is such that after a release sheet is manufactured by the following steps (A1) to (A3), a transfer layer is formed on at least a part of the release sheet. It is.
- (A1) The process of apply
- (A2) Using a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region, the uncured resin layer is shaped, and simultaneously irradiated with ionizing radiation to cure the shaped resin layer and support The process of obtaining the base material layer in which the resin layer was formed on the body.
- (A3) The process of forming a colored layer on the protrusion part in the 2nd area
- the transfer sheet is preferably manufactured with multiple impositions as shown in FIG.
- the transfer sheet manufactured in such a multi-face manner is subjected to a transfer process as a long transfer sheet or a single sheet transfer sheet.
- the transfer sheet manufactured by the above process can easily form a colored layer, which is a pattern printing for alignment, on the protruding portion, and the light transmittance or light between the portion having the protruding portion and its peripheral portion.
- the contrast of the reflectivity becomes clear and can be easily aligned.
- Examples of the optional step of aligning include a step of slitting the transfer sheet in a long length, a step of punching the transfer sheet into a sheet, and a step of transferring the transfer sheet to a transfer object.
- a second projecting portion 3 of the region R 2 are formed continuously in the flow direction of the transfer sheet, the contrast occurring in a direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the second region R 2 as shown in FIG. 7
- the position in the direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the transfer sheet can be aligned, and the transfer sheet can be accurately slit in a long length.
- FIG. 7 and a position detecting means to other regions R n.
- the transfer sheet It can be accurately punched into single wafers. Also, orthogonal in slitting step and die cutting step described above, if leaving the second region R 2 and / or other regions R n, in transferring the transfer sheet to the transfer target, in the flow direction of the transfer sheet Can be aligned in the direction and / or flow direction and transferred to the correct position.
- the contrast of the light transmittance difference can be detected by, for example, a light source installed below the transfer sheet and a light detection unit installed at a position facing the light source above the transfer sheet.
- the contrast of the light reflectance difference can be detected by, for example, a light source and a light detection unit installed at an arbitrary angle above the transfer sheet.
- the method for manufacturing a decorative molded product according to the first embodiment of the present invention includes the step of transferring the transfer layer 20 of the transfer sheet 100 of the present invention described above to the transfer object, and the release sheet 10 of the transfer sheet 100. And a step of peeling.
- Examples of the material to be transferred include a resin molded body.
- a known transfer method can be used for the method of manufacturing the decorative molded product. For example, (i) a method in which a transfer sheet is attached to a preliminarily molded transfer object, the transfer layer of the transfer sheet is transferred, and then the release sheet of the transfer sheet is peeled off; A method of sticking a transfer sheet to a transfer material, transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet, peeling off the release sheet of the transfer sheet, and then forming a transfer material on which the transfer layer is laminated, (iii) ) A method of integrating a transfer material with a transfer sheet at the time of injection molding and then peeling the release sheet of the transfer sheet [in-mold molding (injection molding simultaneous transfer decoration method)]. Among them, according to in-mold molding (injection molding simultaneous transfer decoration method), it is possible to perform decorative molding on a resin molded body having a complicated surface shape such as a three-dimensional curved surface.
- the transfer sheet is arranged at an accurate position of the mold using these contrasts. be able to. Note that after the step (z4), it is preferable to trim (remove) unnecessary portions as necessary. When the position detectors of the second region and / or other regions remain, it is preferable to trim (remove) these regions.
- thermoplastic resin As the resin molding, it is preferable to use a thermoplastic resin or a thermosetting resin that can be injection-molded, and various known resins can be used.
- a thermoplastic resin examples include polystyrene resins, polyolefin resins, ABS resins (including heat-resistant ABS resins), AS resins, AN resins, polyphenylene oxide resins, polycarbonate resins, polyacetal resins, acrylic resins, Examples thereof include polyethylene terephthalate resin, polybutylene terephthalate resin, polysulfone resin, and polyphenylene sulfide resin.
- FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view showing an embodiment of a decorative molded product according to the present invention.
- the decorative molded product 300 has a printed layer 23, an adhesive layer 22, and a protective layer 21 on one surface of a resin molded body (transfer object) 200.
- a resin molded body transfer object
- the second embodiment of the present invention has been made in view of the problem that the number of steps increases when the pattern for alignment is printed after the transfer sheet is completed. It is an object of the present invention to provide a transfer sheet capable of transferring a transfer layer to any position, a method for producing the transfer sheet, and a method for producing a decorative molded product using the transfer sheet.
- the transfer sheet according to the second embodiment of the present invention is a transfer sheet having a transfer layer on a release sheet, and the release sheet has a first region and a second region on the transfer layer side surface.
- the second region of the base material layer has a protruding portion and a peripheral region positioned around the protruding portion, and is partially disposed in the peripheral region.
- 10 to 12 are sectional views of the transfer sheet 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
- the transfer sheet 100 has a transfer layer 20 on the release sheet 10.
- the release sheet 10 has a base layer 11 having a first region R 1 and second regions R 2 , R 2A , R 2B on the surface on the transfer layer 20 side.
- the second region of the timber layer 11 has projecting portions 3, 3A, and 3B
- the peripheral area X is positioned around the projecting portion, X a, and X B, in the peripheral region is partially disposed
- a plurality of peripheral protrusions 4, 4A, 4B are provided, and colored layers 12, 12A, 12B are provided on the protrusions and the peripheral protrusions. Describing more specifically with respect to FIG.
- the release sheet 10 includes a support 1, a resin layer 2, a base layer 11 including a protrusion 3 and a peripheral protrusion 4, a colored layer 12, and a release layer. 13.
- the transfer layer 20 includes a protective layer 21, an adhesive layer 22, and a print layer 23. 10 to 12 show an embodiment of the transfer sheet of the present invention, and the transfer sheet of the present invention is not limited to the configuration of FIGS. 10 to 12. In the second embodiment, description of what is substantially the same as the first embodiment is omitted.
- the release sheet has a base material layer having a first region and a second region on the surface on the transfer layer side.
- the second region of the base material layer includes a protrusion and a peripheral region located around the protrusion.
- the peripheral region there are a plurality of peripheral protrusions partially arranged, and a coloring layer is provided on the protrusions and the peripheral protrusions.
- the release sheet is peeled off after the transfer layer is transferred to a transfer object such as a resin molded body.
- the base material layer 11 has a first region R 1 and second regions R 2 , R 2A , R 2B on the surface on the transfer layer 20 side. Further, although not shown, the base material layer may further have other regions on the surface on the transfer layer side.
- the base layer 11 can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
- the resin layer 2 can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
- the surface shape of the first region of the base material layer is not particularly limited.
- the surface shape of the first region R 1 of the base layer 11 may be a substantially smooth as shown in FIG. 10 may be uneven shape as shown in FIGS. 11 to 12.
- FIG. 10 when the surface shape of the first region R 1 of the base layer 11 is substantially smooth, it can be made substantially smooth surface shape of the transfer layer 20 has been transferred to the transfer target, the resulting pressure The gloss of the decorative molded product can be increased. Further, as shown in FIGS.
- the transferred material has a transfer layer 20 having a shape complementary to the concavo-convex portion (separated on the concavo-convex portion 5).
- the transfer layer 20) having a concavo-convex complementary shape relaxed by the release layer 13 is transferred, and the concavo-convex shape can be imparted to the surface of the resulting decorative molded product.
- the uneven portion and the later-described protrusion and the peripheral protrusion satisfy the relationship of [maximum height of the uneven portion ⁇ the height of the protrusion and the peripheral protrusion]. preferable.
- the maximum height of the concavo-convex portion / the height of the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion is preferably 0.50 or less, and more preferably 0.40 or less.
- the [average roughness of the uneven portion / height of the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion] is preferably 0.20 or less, and more preferably 0.15 or less.
- the protrusions it is preferable that all the protrusions satisfy the above relationship.
- all of the plurality of peripheral protrusions satisfy the above relationship.
- the absolute value of the degree of unevenness in the first region is not particularly limited, but the maximum height roughness Rz is about 0.2 to 4.0 ⁇ m. It is preferable to do.
- the arithmetic average roughness Ra is preferably about 0.05 to 2.0 ⁇ m.
- the first region may be divided into two or more locations.
- the surface shape of each first region may be different.
- the design of the decorative molded product can be improved by dividing the first region into two or more locations and making the surface shape of each first region different.
- the release sheet 10 is located in the second regions R 2 , R 2A , R 2B of the base material layer 11 in the vicinity of the protrusions 3, 3 A, 3 B and the protrusions.
- a peripheral region X that has a plurality of peripheral protrusions 4, 4 ⁇ / b> A, 4 ⁇ / b> B partially disposed in the peripheral region, and the colored layers 12, 12 ⁇ / b> A, 12 ⁇ / b> B are formed on the protrusions and the peripheral protrusions. have.
- the second regions R 2 , R 2A , R 2B and the first region R 1 described above are preferably formed at different locations in the width direction.
- the second region and the first region as described above, it is difficult to form the colored layer in the first region while forming the colored layer on the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion of the second region. it can.
- a printing plate that does not have ink in a portion corresponding to the first region and has ink in the entire surface corresponding to the second region. 13 to 16 illustrate a state where the surface of the release sheet is visible through the transfer layer.
- the “second region” means a region formed by the following four straight lines (1) to (4).
- (1) A straight line drawn in parallel to the flow direction from a position located at the leftmost end of the peripheral protrusion when the transfer sheet is observed from the planar direction.
- (2) A straight line drawn parallel to the flow direction from the position located at the rightmost end of the peripheral protrusion when the transfer sheet is observed from the plane direction.
- (3) A straight line drawn in parallel to the width direction from the position located at the uppermost end of the peripheral protrusion when the transfer sheet is observed from the plane direction.
- (4) A straight line drawn in parallel to the width direction from the position located at the lowest end of the peripheral protrusion when the transfer sheet is observed from the plane direction.
- the “peripheral region in the second region” means a region obtained by removing the protruding portion from the second region.
- the width direction means the TD direction (Transverse Direction) of the transfer sheet
- the flow direction means the MD direction (Machine Direction) of the transfer sheet. Means.
- a colored layer is formed on substantially the entire surface on the protruding portion of the second region.
- the peripheral region located around the protrusion has a protrusion (peripheral protrusion), and a colored layer is formed on the peripheral protrusion, but the peripheral protrusion is partially disposed in the peripheral region. Remains. Therefore, when the protrusion part of a 2nd area
- the light transmittance may be any of transmittance in the normal transmission direction, diffuse transmittance, and total transmittance.
- the light reflectance may be any of transmittance in the regular reflection direction, diffuse reflectance, and total reflectance.
- the ratio of the area of the peripheral protrusions to the total area of the peripheral region is preferably 15 to 85%, more preferably 20 to 80%, and further preferably 30 to 70%. By setting the ratio of the area of the peripheral protrusions to 15% or more, it is possible to suppress the formation of a colored layer in the peripheral area where the peripheral protrusions are not formed, and to improve the contrast of light transmittance or light reflectance. It is easy to clarify.
- the optional step of aligning include a step of slitting the transfer sheet in a long length, a step of punching the transfer sheet into a sheet, and a step of transferring the transfer sheet to a transfer object. A specific method of alignment will be described later.
- Distance P 1 of the ends of the peripheral projecting portion adjacent the second region is preferably 2.0mm or less, more preferably 1.0mm or less, still more preferably 0.7mm or less .
- the distance P 1 and 2.0mm or less to prevent the colored layer at a position near the projecting portion of the peripheral region is not formed is formed, it is possible to increase the accuracy of the alignment.
- the interval P 1 is too narrow, it can adversely affect alignment. For example, when the light source used for alignment is not parallel light, or even if the light source is parallel light, alignment is performed based on the contrast of light transmittance when the emission surface of the light source is not horizontal.
- the end interval P 1 between the peripheral projecting portion is preferably at 0.01mm or more, more preferably 0.05mm or more, more preferably at least 0.10 mm.
- a protrusion interval P 2 between the peripheral projecting portion proximate the protruding portion, from the viewpoint of suppressing the colored layer on the interval is formed, preferably at 2.0mm or less, at 1.0mm or less More preferably, it is 0.7 mm or less.
- the interval P 2 is preferably 0.01mm or more, 0.05 mm or more It is more preferable that it is 0.10 mm or more.
- the “outer edge shape of the protruding portion” means a shape formed from the outer edge of the protruding portion when the protruding portion is observed from the planar direction.
- the difference in light transmittance between the protruding portion of the second region and the peripheral region of the second region is preferably 30% or more.
- the difference in light reflectance between the portion having the protrusion and the surrounding portion is 30% or more.
- the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion are formed from an arbitrary structure, and the shape and the like of the structure are not particularly limited, but the shapes exemplified below are preferable.
- the height (H) of the protrusion and the peripheral protrusion is preferably 1 to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably 2 to 7 ⁇ m, and further preferably 3 to 6 ⁇ m. Even if the printing position is slightly shifted by setting the height of the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion to 1 ⁇ m or more, a colored layer is formed on the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion. A colored layer can be made difficult to form. That is, by setting the heights of the protrusions and the peripheral protrusions to 1 ⁇ m or more, the alignment pattern can be easily printed at an accurate location, and the alignment accuracy can be increased.
- the height of the protruding portion 3 and the peripheral protruding portion 4 are set to 1 ⁇ m or more, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, a fine protrusion is easily formed on the surface of the transfer sheet 100 on the transfer layer 20 side.
- the blocking of the first region can be easily suppressed.
- the height of the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion is set to 10 ⁇ m or less, the protruding portion is hardly deformed by a load, and the alignment accuracy can be easily maintained.
- the heights of the protrusions and the peripheral protrusions need not all be the same.
- the height of the protruding portion and the height of the peripheral protruding portion may be changed, or the height of each peripheral protruding portion may be changed.
- the heights of the protrusions and the peripheral protrusions are all the same.
- the height (H) of the projecting portion and the peripheral projecting portion refers to the structure forming the projecting portion and the peripheral projecting portion in the extending direction of the structure (for example, In the case of the peripheral protrusions in FIGS. 13 to 15, it means the height of the central part of the cross section cut in a direction orthogonal to the direction “d”.
- the height (H) means the height of the central part of the cross section cut in the width direction.
- the width (W 1 ) of the protrusion and the width (W 2 ) of the peripheral protrusion preferably satisfy the relationship of W 2 ⁇ W 1 .
- W 2 / W 1 is preferably 0.8 or less, more preferably 0.7 or less, and further preferably 0.5 or less.
- W 2 / W 1 is preferably 0.8 or less, more preferably 0.7 or less, and further preferably 0.5 or less.
- W 2 / W 1 is preferably 0.005 or more, more preferably 0.010 or more.
- the width of the protrusion (W 1 ) and the width of the peripheral protrusion (W 2 ) are the structures that form the central protrusion and the peripheral protrusion.
- the width of the bottom of the cross section cut in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the structure for example, the direction of “d” in the case of the peripheral protrusions in FIGS. 13 to 15.
- the width of the peripheral protrusion (W 2 ) refer to the width of the bottom of the cross section cut in the width direction.
- the width (W 1 ) of the protrusion is preferably 1.0 to 10.0 mm, more preferably 1.0 to 7.0 mm, and still more preferably 3.0 to 6.0 mm. .
- the width of the protruding portion is preferably 1.0 to 10.0 mm, more preferably 1.0 to 7.0 mm, and still more preferably 3.0 to 6.0 mm. .
- the protrusion has a ratio of height (H) to width (W 1 ) of 1: 10,000 to 1:10 from the viewpoint of the balance between the effects of height (H) and width (W 1 ) described above.
- it is 1: 3,000 to 1: 140, more preferably 1: 1,350 to 1: 500.
- the protrusions 3, 3 A, and 3 B are formed from a row of structures extending in a direction parallel to any one side of the transfer sheet 100 as shown in the second region R 2 A of FIGS. It is preferable.
- the protrusions 3, 3 ⁇ / b> A, 3 ⁇ / b> B have this configuration, alignment can be facilitated.
- this arbitrary one side is a flow direction from a viewpoint of making it easy to form a colored layer uniformly.
- the row-like structures 3 and 3A are continuously extended without interruption, but like the second region R 2A of FIG. 14 and FIG.
- the structure 3A may be intermittently extended to form a peripheral region between the structures.
- the interval (P 3 ) between the ends of each structure is preferably 1.0 to 10.0 mm, and is 1.0 to 7.0 mm. More preferably, the thickness is 3.0 to 6.0 mm.
- the protruding portion has a straight line whose outer edge shape is parallel to the width direction of the transfer sheet and / or straight line parallel to the flow direction of the transfer sheet. It is preferable that it is the substantially square shape which has. By setting the protruding portion to this configuration, alignment can be facilitated. Further, it is more preferable that the protruding portion has a substantially quadrangular shape whose outer edge shape has a straight line parallel to the width direction and the flow direction of the transfer sheet. By setting the protruding portion as such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate alignment in both the width direction and the flow direction.
- the length of one side is preferably 2 to 20 mm, more preferably 3 to 15 mm, and further preferably 5 to 10 mm.
- the protrusion part may have any one or more shapes chosen from polygonal shapes, such as a triangular shape, square shape, and pentagon shape, circular shape, and elliptical shape as the outer edge shape.
- the outer edge shape of the protruding portion is any shape selected from a polygonal shape, a circular shape, and an elliptical shape
- the outer edge shape of the peripheral protruding portion is preferably a shape different from these (for example, a linear shape).
- the peripheral protrusion is formed from a columnar structure extending in an arbitrary direction.
- the arbitrary direction is not particularly limited, and may be an oblique direction (for example, 45 degrees with respect to the width direction of the transfer sheet).
- any one side of the transfer sheet 100 Is preferably parallel to the flow direction, and more preferably in the flow direction of the transfer sheet 100.
- the peripheral protrusions 4 have this configuration, alignment can be facilitated.
- the directions of the plurality of peripheral protrusions are parallel to each other.
- peripheral protrusions 4, 4 ⁇ / b> A, 4 ⁇ / b> B are formed continuously without interruption in any direction in the second region, like the second region R 2 in FIG. 13 and the second region R 2A in FIG. 16. it may be, but the second region R 2A of FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, R 2B, as in the second region R 2B in FIG. 16, the projecting portions 3A, may be divided at a position overlapping with 3B. Further, as in the second region R2B of FIG. 15, the extension in the arbitrary direction of the peripheral protrusion 4B may be partially interrupted even in a portion that does not overlap with the protrusions 3A and 3B.
- the width (W 2 ) of the peripheral protrusion is preferably 0.05 to 3.0 mm, more preferably 0.1 to 2.0 mm, and further preferably 0.2 to 1.0 mm. preferable.
- the width of the peripheral protrusion is preferably 0.05 to 3.0 mm, more preferably 0.1 to 2.0 mm, and further preferably 0.2 to 1.0 mm. preferable.
- the ratio in terms of the balance of the effect of height above (H) and width (W 2), the height (H) and width (W 2) is 1: 1,000 to 1: 5
- the ratio is 1: 500 to 1:10, more preferably 1: 300 to 1:15.
- the ratio [P 1 / height of the peripheral protrusion] of the interval P 1 between the ends of the adjacent peripheral protrusions in the second region and the height of the peripheral protrusion is preferably 400 or less, and 200 or less. More preferably, it is 140 or less.
- the ratio is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 10 or more, and further preferably 20 or more.
- a preferred embodiment of the ratio [P 2 / height of the protrusion and the peripheral protrusion] of the distance P 2 between the protrusion and the peripheral protrusion adjacent to the protrusion and the height of the protrusion and the peripheral protrusion is: This is the same as the above-described preferred embodiment of [P 1 / height of the peripheral protrusion].
- the cross section obtained by cutting the structure forming the protrusion and the peripheral protrusion in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the structure is preferably substantially rectangular.
- the protruding portion has two straight lines parallel to the flow direction of the transfer sheet and / or two straight lines parallel to the width direction of the transfer sheet as the outer edge shape thereof. It is preferable that the peripheral region and the peripheral protrusion satisfy any one of the following conditions 1 to 3 in relation to the protrusion.
- ⁇ Condition 1> When there are two straight lines parallel to the flow direction of the transfer sheet as the outer edge shape of the protrusion, peripheral areas are arranged on both sides in the width direction of the protrusion.
- peripheral areas are arranged on both sides of the protrusion in the flow direction.
- the alignment in the width direction can be performed more accurately.
- the alignment in the flow direction can be performed more accurately.
- the alignment in the width direction and / or the flow direction can be performed more accurately.
- the above conditions 1 to 3 further include the following additional conditions.
- ⁇ Additional conditions for condition 1> The ratio [L 2 / L] between the width L 2 of the peripheral region arranged on both sides in the width direction of the protrusion and the distance L 1 between two straight lines parallel to the flow direction, which is the outer edge shape of the protrusion 1 ] is 1.0 or more.
- ⁇ Additional conditions for condition 2> The ratio of the length L 4 of the peripheral region arranged on both sides in the flow direction of the protrusion and the distance L 3 between two straight lines parallel to the width direction, which is the outer edge shape of the protrusion [L 4 / L 3 ] is configured to be 1.0 or more.
- ⁇ Additional conditions for condition 3> The [L 2 / L 1 ] is configured to be 1.0 or more and / or the [L 4 / L 3 ] is configured to be 1.0 or more.
- the conditions 1 to 3 include the above-described additional conditions, a sufficient area for determining the contrast between the protrusion and the peripheral area is secured, and the alignment accuracy can be improved. Further, when forming the colored layer, even if the colored layer is formed outside the second region due to soiling caused by printing pressure or the like, the conditions 1 to 3 include the above-described additional conditions. Since a sufficient area for determining the contrast between the portion and the peripheral area is secured, adverse effects on the alignment can be suppressed.
- the upper limit of the ratio of the additional conditions may be appropriately determined in consideration of the arrangement relationship between the first region and the second region, the yield, manufacturing efficiency, and the like.
- the protrusion and the peripheral protrusion and the transfer layer described later preferably satisfy the relationship of [height of the protrusion / thickness of the transfer layer] of 0.1 to 5.0, and 0.2 to 3. More preferably, the relationship of 5 is satisfied, and it is more preferable that the relationship of 0.3 to 1.0 is satisfied.
- the ratio By setting the ratio to 0.1 or more, blocking of the first region when winding a long transfer sheet or stacking single transfer sheets can be easily suppressed.
- the ratio to 5.0 or less the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion are not easily deformed by the load, and the alignment accuracy can be easily maintained.
- the transfer sheet of this embodiment may have two or more second regions.
- the transfer sheet of the present embodiment may have a second area A and a second area B as the second area.
- the second region A is configured to satisfy the condition 1
- the second region B is configured to satisfy the condition 2.
- the conditions 1 and 2 further include the additional conditions described above.
- the second region A and the second region B may be gathered on one side, but FIG. 12, FIG. 14 to FIG. 16, the second region A and the second region B are divided and arranged, in other words, the first region between the second region A (R 2A ) and the second region B (R 2B ).
- R 1 is preferably arranged.
- the second region A (R 2A ) and the second region B (R 2B ) are preferably arranged separately in the width direction as shown in FIGS. 12 and 14 to 16. Since the second region A (R 2A ) and the second region B (R 2B ) are divided in the width direction, the protrusions 3, 3 A, and 3 B are provided on both sides of the first region R 1. will be there, regardless of the rewinding number of the transfer sheet, without the width direction of the position of the pattern for alignment with respect to the first region R 1 (alignment mark) is changed, it is possible to improve the accuracy of positioning , Productivity can be improved.
- the interval P 4 is preferably 20 ⁇ 200 mm, and more preferably 30 ⁇ 180 mm.
- the timing for removing the second region is, for example, (1) when the transfer sheet is slit long, (2) when the transfer sheet is cut into sheets, and (3) the transfer sheet is transferred. And the like during the trimming process after the transfer. From the viewpoint of transferring the transfer layer to an accurate position of the transfer object, it is preferable to remove the second region at the timing of (3).
- the colored layer is formed on the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion, and has a role of causing a light transmittance or a light reflectance contrast between the protruding portion and the peripheral region in the second region.
- the “colored layer” in this specification includes a layer that looks whitish due to light diffusion (for example, a layer that looks like frosted glass).
- the same color layer as described in the first embodiment can be used for the colored layer.
- the release sheet 10 of the transfer sheet 100 is formed so as to be peelable at the interface with the transfer layer 20 when it is in close contact with the transfer object.
- the release sheet 10 preferably has a release layer 13 on at least a part of the surface in contact with the transfer layer 20. Further, from the viewpoint of uniform release property within the surface of the transfer sheet 100, the release sheet 10 is formed on the entire surface on the side in contact with the transfer layer 20, as shown in FIGS. 13 is preferable.
- corrugation is relieve
- the release layer 13 may be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
- the release sheet 10 may have other layers. Examples of other layers include an antistatic layer. When the release sheet 10 has an antistatic layer, it is possible to suppress the release charge when the release sheet is peeled off, and to improve the transfer workability.
- the same antistatic layer as that described in the first embodiment can be used.
- FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view showing a modification of the second embodiment of the transfer sheet 100 of the present invention.
- the base material layer 11 in the present embodiment includes a resin layer 2 provided with the protrusions 3 and the peripheral protrusions 4, and a release layer 13 provided on the resin layer 2.
- the transfer layer 20 in the present embodiment has a protective layer 21.
- the colored layer 12 in this embodiment is provided in contact with the release layer 13 provided on the protruding portion 3 and the peripheral protruding portion 4, and is provided in contact with the protective layer 21.
- the resin of the release layer 13 in the present embodiment preferably contains a cured product of a resin composition containing acrylic polyol and isocyanate.
- the resin of the protective layer 21 in the present embodiment preferably includes a cured product of a resin composition containing urethane acrylate having a hydroxyl group. It is preferable that resin of the colored layer 12 in this embodiment contains the hardened
- the colored layer 12 is made of the same material as the resin of the release layer 13, so that it is integrated and bonded to the release layer 13. Further, the colored layer 12 is bonded to the protective layer 21 by the urethane group and the isocyanate group of the protective layer 21 reacting to form a urethane bond. That is, the colored layer 12 is bonded to both the release layer 13 and the protective layer 21 because of the configuration and the material.
- the transfer sheet 100 when the transfer sheet 100 is cut in a process of slitting the transfer sheet 100 in a long length, a process of punching the transfer sheet 100 into a sheet, and a process of punching after transferring the transfer sheet 100 to a transfer object, Since the colored layer 12 is bonded to both the release layer 13 and the protective layer 21, it does not peel off at the place where the colored layer 12 is provided, so that no foil dust is generated, and the appearance of the final product Good articles can be produced.
- the release sheet can be produced, for example, by the following steps (A1) to (A3).
- (A1) The process of apply
- (A2) Using a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region, the uncured resin layer is shaped, and simultaneously irradiated with ionizing radiation to cure the shaped resin layer and support The process of obtaining the base material layer in which the resin layer was formed on the body.
- (A3) The process of forming a colored layer on the protrusion part in a 2nd area
- the ionizing radiation curable resin composition contains a solvent
- a step of forming a release layer on at least part of the resin layer and / or the colored layer may be performed.
- the release sheet has a release layer and has a colored layer in contact with the release layer, the release layer is formed on the resin layer (A5) before the step (A3). Steps may be performed.
- a plate having a shape complementary to the first region, the second region, and the other regions may be used as the plate in the step (A2).
- the plate used in the step (A2) can be obtained by engraving the surface of the cylinder into a desired shape by, for example, etching, sandblasting, cutting and laser processing, or a combination thereof.
- a long male plate (a plate having the same shape as the first region and the second region) is prepared by laser engraving, stereolithography, and the like, and is obtained by wrapping an inverted version around the cylinder surface. be able to.
- the surface of these plates is preferably hard-plated with chromium or the like.
- the release sheet can also be produced, for example, by the following steps (a1) to (a3).
- A2) The resin layer forming ink filled in the plate is transferred onto a support, dried and cured as necessary to form a resin layer, and a base material layer having a resin layer formed on the support is formed. Obtaining step.
- A3 The process of forming a colored layer on the protrusion part in a 2nd area
- a step of forming a release layer on at least part of the resin layer and / or the colored layer may be performed. Further, when the release sheet has a release layer and has a colored layer in contact with the release layer, the release layer is formed on the resin layer (a5) before the step (a3). Steps may be performed.
- the release sheet has other regions, a plate having a shape complementary to the first region, the second region, and the other regions may be used as the plate in the step (a2).
- the transfer sheet is preferably manufactured with multiple impositions as shown in FIG. 16 from the viewpoint of manufacturing efficiency. Similarly, it is preferable that the release sheet is also manufactured by multiple imposition. For this reason, it is preferable that the plate used in the step (A2) or the step (a1) is a plate corresponding to the multi-page imposition.
- the first region and the second region are arranged at accurate positions.
- the arrangement of the first region and the second region is important.
- a plate in which the first region and the second region are arranged at accurate positions can be manufactured by the following steps (y1) to (y4).
- the step (y1) can be performed by etching, for example.
- the cylinder preferably has a surface plated with a thick film.
- the groove 40 is formed in the step (y1) and a groove having a shape complementary to the surface shape of the other region is formed.
- other regions are formed. It is also possible to use a mask in which a portion corresponding to is cut out.
- the step (y3) can be performed by, for example, etching or blasting. Blasting is preferable from the viewpoint of lowering the height than the protrusions in the second region and the peripheral protrusions and from the viewpoint of ease of adjusting the matte feeling.
- the particle shape (spherical, indeterminate), particle diameter, particle material (glass beads, organic particles, inorganic particles, iron, sand, etc.) used for blasting, and the distance to inject the particles
- the speed, time, angle, etc. By adjusting the speed, time, angle, etc., the shape to be imparted by blasting can be adjusted.
- the hard plating in the step (y4) include chrome plating.
- a transfer layer 20 is formed on at least a part of the release sheet 10.
- the transfer layer 20 is a layer to be transferred to the transfer object, and for example, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, has a protective layer 21 and an adhesive layer 22 in order from the side closer to the release sheet.
- Transfer layer 20 is preferably formed on the whole of the portion corresponding to the first region R 1 of the base layer 11, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, more be formed on the entire surface of the release sheet 10 preferable.
- the protective layer 21 has a role of protecting the decorative molded product from abrasion, light, chemicals and the like after the transfer layer is transferred from the transfer sheet to the transfer object.
- the protective layer 21 which has a shape complementary to this uneven
- the protective layer 21 with the substantially smooth surface is provided to the surface of a decorative molded product, and the glossiness of a decorative molded product can be made high.
- the protective layer 21 can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
- the adhesive layer 22 has a role of improving the transfer work by improving the adhesion between the transfer object such as a resin molded body and the transfer layer. In addition, when the adhesiveness between the protective layer 21 and the transfer target is good, the adhesive layer 22 may not be provided.
- the same adhesive layer 22 as that described in the first embodiment can be used.
- the anchor layer is a layer provided as necessary to improve heat resistance when placed in a high temperature environment such as in-mold molding.
- the anchor layer is preferably formed between the protective layer 21 and the adhesive layer 22.
- the anchor layer can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
- the transfer layer 20 may further include a print layer 23 as shown in FIGS.
- the printed layer 23 has a role of imparting a desired design property to the decorative molded product.
- the print layer 23 is preferably arranged so as to be positioned at least in a part of the first region of the base material layer 11 when the transfer sheet 100 is observed from the planar direction. Further, the position in the thickness direction of the printing layer 23 may be arranged on the adhesive layer 22 as shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, or may be arranged between the adhesive layer 22 and the protective layer 21. It may be arranged between the protective layer 21 and the release sheet 10. From the viewpoint of protection of the printing layer 23 and adhesion to the transfer object, it is preferable to dispose the printing layer 23 between the adhesive layer 22 and the protection layer 21. Further, from the viewpoint of handling small lot products, it is preferable to dispose the printing layer 23 on the adhesive layer 22. When the printing layer 23 is disposed on the adhesive layer 22, the resin component of the printing layer 23 is a resin of the same type as the resin component of the adhesive layer from the viewpoint of uniform adhesion to the transfer target. It is preferable to use the same resin.
- the printing layer 23 can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
- the method for manufacturing a transfer sheet according to the second embodiment of the present invention is such that after a release sheet is manufactured by the following steps (A1) to (A3), a transfer layer is formed on at least a part of the release sheet. It is.
- (A1) The process of apply
- (A2) Using a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region, the uncured resin layer is shaped, and simultaneously irradiated with ionizing radiation to cure the shaped resin layer and support The process of obtaining the base material layer in which the resin layer was formed on the body.
- (A3) The process of forming a colored layer on the protrusion part in a 2nd area
- the transfer sheet is preferably manufactured with multiple impositions as shown in FIG.
- the transfer sheet manufactured in such a multi-face manner is subjected to a transfer process as a long transfer sheet or a single sheet transfer sheet.
- the transfer sheet manufactured by the above process can easily form a colored layer, which is a pattern printing for alignment, on the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion, and the light transmittance or light reflection between the protruding portion and the peripheral region.
- the rate contrast is clear and can be easily aligned.
- Examples of the optional step of aligning include a step of slitting the transfer sheet in a long length, a step of punching the transfer sheet into a sheet, and a step of transferring the transfer sheet to a transfer object. For example, as shown in FIGS.
- the projecting portions 3B of the second region R 2B is, as the outer edge shape of the protruding portion, satisfies the case (the condition 2 with two straight lines parallel to the width direction of the transfer sheet If), the projecting portion 3B in the second region R 2B, utilizing occur are contrast (light transmittance difference or the light reflectance difference) between the peripheral region X B, perpendicular to the width direction of the transfer sheet
- contrast light transmittance difference or the light reflectance difference
- the positions in the width direction and the flow direction can be accurately matched.
- the width direction and / or flow of the transfer sheet is transferred when the transfer sheet is transferred to the transfer object.
- Directional alignment can be performed and transfer can be performed at an accurate position.
- the contrast of the light transmittance difference can be detected by, for example, a light source installed below the transfer sheet and a light detection unit installed at a position facing the light source above the transfer sheet.
- the contrast of the light reflectance difference can be detected by, for example, a light source and a light detection unit installed at an arbitrary angle above the transfer sheet.
- the method for producing a decorative molded product according to the second embodiment of the present invention includes a step of transferring the transfer layer 20 of the transfer sheet 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention described above to a transfer object, Separating the release sheet 10 of the transfer sheet 100.
- Examples of the material to be transferred include a resin molded body.
- a known transfer method can be used for the method of manufacturing the decorative molded product. For example, (i) a method in which a transfer sheet is attached to a preliminarily molded transfer object, the transfer layer of the transfer sheet is transferred, and then the release sheet of the transfer sheet is peeled off; A method of sticking a transfer sheet to a transfer material, transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet, peeling off the release sheet of the transfer sheet, and then forming a transfer material on which the transfer layer is laminated, (iii) ) A method of integrating a transfer material with a transfer sheet at the time of injection molding and then peeling the release sheet of the transfer sheet [in-mold molding (injection molding simultaneous transfer decoration method)]. Among them, according to in-mold molding (injection molding simultaneous transfer decoration method), it is possible to perform decorative molding on a resin molded body having a complicated surface shape such as a three-dimensional curved surface.
- the transfer sheet is placed at an accurate position of the mold using the contrast between the protruding portion of the second region and the peripheral protruding portion. be able to. Note that after the step (z4), it is preferable to trim (remove) unnecessary portions as necessary. When the second region remains after the step (z4), it is preferable to trim (remove) the region.
- thermoplastic resin As the resin molding, it is preferable to use a thermoplastic resin or a thermosetting resin that can be injection-molded, and various known resins can be used.
- a thermoplastic resin examples include polystyrene resins, polyolefin resins, ABS resins (including heat-resistant ABS resins), AS resins, AN resins, polyphenylene oxide resins, polycarbonate resins, polyacetal resins, acrylic resins, Examples thereof include polyethylene terephthalate resin, polybutylene terephthalate resin, polysulfone resin, and polyphenylene sulfide resin.
- FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view showing an embodiment of a decorative molded product according to the present invention.
- the decorative molded product 300 has a printed layer 23, an adhesive layer 22, and a protective layer 21 on one surface of a resin molded body (transfer object) 200.
- a resin molded body transfer object
- a transfer sheet capable of transferring a transfer layer to an exact position of a transfer object, a method for producing the transfer sheet, and a method for producing a decorative molded product using the transfer sheet Can be provided.
- the third embodiment of the present invention is made in view of such circumstances, a transfer sheet capable of transferring a transfer layer that suppresses the generation of foil dust and improves the appearance of a decorative molded product, It aims at providing the manufacturing method of this transfer sheet, and the manufacturing method of a decorative molded product using this transfer sheet.
- the transfer sheet 100 is a transfer sheet having a transfer layer 20 on the release sheet 10, and the release sheet 10 is a transfer object.
- a second region R 2 for providing the first region R 1 and the alignment pattern for transferring have the convex portion 24 on the side of the transfer layer 20 side
- the transfer The layer 20 includes an alignment pattern portion AL having a tracking protrusion 25 based on the convex portion 24 on the surface opposite to the surface on which the release sheet 10 is provided, and the colored layer 30 is provided on the tracking protrusion 25. It is what has.
- description of what is substantially the same as the first embodiment is omitted.
- the release sheet 10 includes a support 1, a resin layer 2, and a release layer 13.
- the release sheet 10 is peeled off after the transfer layer 20 is transferred to a transfer object such as a resin molded body.
- the surface of the support 1 may be preliminarily subjected to physical treatment such as corona discharge treatment or oxidation treatment, or application of a coating material called an anchor agent or a primer in order to enhance the adhesion with the resin layer 2 or the like. .
- the resin layer 2 can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
- Resin layer 2 may be formed by coating, accurately and in terms of forming a precise shape, by printing using a plate having a first region R 1 and the second region R 2 and the complementary shape It is preferable to form.
- the plate preferably further has a shape complementary to the other regions. Details of the method of forming the resin layer 2 using a plate will be described later.
- the release sheet 10 of the transfer sheet 100 is formed so as to be peelable at the interface with the transfer layer 20 when it is in close contact with the transfer object.
- the release sheet 10 preferably has a release layer 13 on at least a part of the surface in contact with the transfer layer 20. Further, from the viewpoint of uniform release property within the surface of the transfer sheet 100, the release sheet 10 has a release layer 13 on the entire surface on the side in contact with the transfer layer 20, as shown in FIG. It is preferable.
- the release layer 13 is formed on the concavo-convex portion 5 to relieve the concavo-convex shape and form a concavo-convex shape with less high-frequency components on the surface of the decorative molded product. It is possible to suppress whitening and glare of the decorative molded product.
- the release layer 13 may be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
- the release sheet 10 may have other layers. Examples of other layers include an antistatic layer. When the release sheet 10 has an antistatic layer, it is possible to suppress the release charge when the release sheet is peeled off, and to improve the transfer workability.
- Antistatic layer As the antistatic layer, the same materials as those described in the first embodiment can be used.
- the first region R 1 of the release sheet 10 is a region for providing the transfer layer 20 to be transferred to the transfer target.
- Surface shape of the first region R 1 is not particularly limited. Surface shape of the first region R 1 is, for example, as shown in FIG. 20, may have an irregular shape, may be substantially smooth.
- a transfer layer 20 having a shape complementary to the uneven portion 5 (the release layer 13 on the uneven portion 5 is included in the transfer object.
- the transfer layer 20) having a concavo-convex complementary shape alleviated by the release layer 13 is transferred, and the concavo-convex shape can be imparted to the surface of the resulting decorative molded product.
- the surface shape of the first region R 1 is substantially smooth, increasing the substantially can be made smooth, gloss resulting decorative molded article surface shape of the transfer layer 20 has been transferred to the transfer target Can do.
- the absolute value of the degree of unevenness in the first region R 1 is not particularly limited, but the maximum height roughness Rz is 0.2 to 4.0 ⁇ m. It is preferable to set the degree.
- the arithmetic average roughness Ra is preferably about 0.05 to 2.0 ⁇ m.
- the first region R 1 may be formed by dividing the first region R 1 to two or more locations. In that case, it may be each of the first region R 1 of the surface shape as different.
- the second region R 2 of the release sheet 10 is a region for providing the alignment pattern used for transferring the transfer target (alignment marks).
- the second region R 2 has a partially deployed convex portion 24 to the basis of the alignment pattern.
- the convex part 24 is preferably formed on the resin layer 2 by printing using a plate having a shape complementary to the second region R 2 from the viewpoint of forming an accurate and precise shape.
- the convex part 24 is formed from the linear structure extended
- the arbitrary direction is not particularly limited and may be an oblique direction (for example, 45 degrees with respect to the width direction of the transfer sheet), but is preferably a direction parallel to any one side of the transfer sheet 100.
- the flow direction of the transfer sheet 100 is more preferable.
- each direction of the some convex part 24 is parallel.
- the convex portion 24 may be formed continuously without interruption in any direction in the second inner region R 2, but may be one that extends in any direction partially interrupted.
- the height h of the convex portion 24 is preferably 1.0 to 10.0 ⁇ m, more preferably 1.5 to 9.0 ⁇ m, and still more preferably 2.0 to 8.0 ⁇ m.
- the height h of the convex portion 24 is preferably 1.0 to 10.0 ⁇ m, more preferably 1.5 to 9.0 ⁇ m, and still more preferably 2.0 to 8.0 ⁇ m.
- the height h of the protrusion 24 are preferably the same.
- the height h of the convex part 24 means the height of the center part of the cross section which cut
- the interval between the end portions of the convex portion 24 is preferably 0.05 to 2.0 mm, more preferably 0.075 to 1.0 mm, and further preferably 0.10 to 0.7 mm. preferable.
- the recognition rate of the alignment mark can be improved by setting the interval between the ends of the convex portions 24 to 0.01 mm or more. Further, by making the interval of ends of the protrusions 24 and 2.0mm or less, it is possible to suppress the area of the second region R 2 is wider than necessary.
- the width of the convex portion 24 is preferably 0.01 to 2.0 mm, more preferably 0.025 to 1.0 mm, and still more preferably 0.05 to 0.5 mm.
- the width of the convex portion 24 is preferably 0.01 to 2.0 mm, more preferably 0.025 to 1.0 mm, and still more preferably 0.05 to 0.5 mm.
- the cross section obtained by cutting the structure forming the convex portion 24 in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the structure is preferably substantially rectangular.
- the convex portion 24 and the transfer layer 20 described later satisfy the relationship of [the height of the convex portion / the thickness of the transfer layer] of 0.1 to 5.0, preferably 0.1 to 3.5. It is more preferable to satisfy the relationship, and it is further preferable to satisfy the relationship of 0.1 to 1.0.
- the ratio By setting the ratio to 0.1 or more, it is possible to easily form the tracking protrusion 25 based on the protrusion 24 on the surface of the transfer layer 20. Further, by setting the ratio to 5.0 or less, the convex portion 24 is not easily deformed by a load, and the alignment accuracy can be easily maintained.
- Transfer sheet 100 of the present embodiment may have a second region R 2 of two or more. If a second region R 2 of two or more, it is preferable to change the role of each area. For example, when having a plurality of second regions R 2, either one aligns the width direction, it is preferably configured to perform the alignment of the flow direction in the other. By configuring the second region R 2 as described above, it is possible to align in both directions in the width direction and the flow direction, thereby improving the accuracy of alignment.
- the second region R 2 is provided on both sides of the first region R 1 , and the alignment pattern portion (alignment mark) AL is the uneven portion 5. It is preferable to be provided on both sides.
- the alignment pattern portion AL is provided on both sides of the uneven portion 5, the position in the width direction of the alignment pattern portion AL with respect to the uneven portion 5 can be changed regardless of the number of times the transfer sheet 100 is rewound. Therefore, the alignment accuracy can be increased, and the productivity can be improved.
- the second region R 2 are transferred to the transfer target, preferably be removed at the stage to obtain a decorated molded article.
- the transfer layer 20 from the viewpoint of transferring the exact position of the object to be transferred, it is preferable to remove the second region R 2 at the timing of (3).
- a transfer layer 20 is formed on at least a part of the release sheet 10.
- the transfer layer 20 is a layer to be transferred to the transfer object, and includes, for example, a protective layer 21 and an adhesive layer 22 in order from the side closer to the release sheet 10 as shown in FIG.
- the transfer layer 20 has a tracking protrusion 25 based on the protrusion 24 on the surface.
- the transfer layer 20 is preferably formed on the entire surface of the release sheet 10 as shown in FIG.
- Each layer such as the protective layer 21 and the adhesive layer 22 constituting the transfer layer 20 is prepared by, for example, adjusting ink containing the constituent components of each layer and applying a coating method such as a gravure coating method or a roll coating method on the release sheet 10. It can be formed by coating and drying by a printing method such as gravure printing or screen printing, and curing by irradiation with ionizing radiation as required.
- the ink for forming the transfer layer for forming the transfer layer 20 has a solvent ratio of 90% by mass or less from the viewpoint of facilitating formation of the follow-up protrusion 25 that follows the protrusion 24. Is preferred.
- the height H of the follow-up protrusion 25 is preferably 1.0 to 10.0 ⁇ m, more preferably 1.5 to 9.0 ⁇ m, and even more preferably 2.0 to 8.0 ⁇ m. .
- the height H of the tracking protrusion 25 is preferably 1.0 to 10.0 ⁇ m, more preferably 1.5 to 9.0 ⁇ m, and even more preferably 2.0 to 8.0 ⁇ m. .
- the height H of the follow-up protrusion 25 refers to the height of the central portion of a cross section obtained by cutting the structure forming the follow-up protrusion 25 in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the structure.
- the interval W between the end portions of the follow-up protrusion 25 is preferably 0.05 to 3.0 mm, more preferably 0.07 to 2.0 mm, and 0.1 to 1.0 mm. Is more preferable.
- the interval W between the end portions of the follow-up protrusion 25 is too narrow, the colored layers 30 stick to each other, which may adversely affect the alignment.
- the interval W between the end portions of the tracking protrusion 25 is 0.05 mm or more, it is possible to avoid the adjacent colored layers 30 from adhering to each other when the colored layer 30 is formed. Moreover, it can suppress that the area of the pattern part AL for alignment becomes large more than necessary by making the space
- the interval W between the end portions of the follow-up protrusions 25 refers to the distance between the ends of the tails of the follow-up protrusions 25. Is the distance in the flat adhesive layer 22.
- the protective layer 21 has a role of protecting the decorative molded product from abrasion, light, chemicals, and the like after the transfer layer 20 is transferred from the transfer sheet 100 to the transfer target. If having a concave-convex portion 5 release sheets first region R 1 of 10, protective layer 21 having a complementary shape to the irregular shape is imparted to the surface of the decorative molded article. Further, when the first region R 1 of the release sheet 10 is substantially smooth, it can be surface substantially smooth protective layer 21 is applied to the surface of the decorative molded article, increasing the gloss of the decorative molded article.
- the protective layer 21 can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
- the transfer layer forming ink for forming the protective layer 21 preferably has a solvent ratio of 60 to 90% by mass or less from the viewpoint of facilitating the formation of the follow-up protrusion 25 that follows the protrusion 24. It is more preferably 65 to 90% by mass, and further preferably 70 to 90% by mass.
- the adhesive layer 22 has a role of improving the transfer work by improving the adhesion between the transfer object 20 such as a resin molded body and the transfer layer 20.
- the surface of the transfer layer 20 is provided with an alignment pattern portion AL having a follow-up protruding portion 25 based on the convex portion 24.
- an alignment pattern portion AL having a tracking protrusion 25 based on the protrusion 24 is provided on the surface of the adhesive layer 22.
- the following protrusion 25 is formed by following the protrusion 24 by providing the transfer layer 20 including the protective layer 21 and the adhesive layer 22 on the protrusion 24 provided on the release sheet 10. It is a part to do.
- the adhesive layer 22 can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
- the ink for forming the adhesive layer for forming the adhesive layer 22 preferably has a solvent ratio of 80 to 90% or less from the viewpoint of facilitating the formation of the follow-up protrusion 25 that follows the protrusion 24. More preferably, it is 85 to 90% by mass.
- the adhesive layer 22 may be configured to include two types of layers, an anchor coat layer and an adhesive layer.
- the thickness of the anchor coat layer is preferably 0.5 to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably 1.0 to 8.0 ⁇ m, and 2.0 to 6. More preferably, it is 0 ⁇ m.
- the thickness of the adhesive layer is preferably from 0.1 to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably from 0.5 to 8.0 ⁇ m, and even more preferably from 1.0 to 5.0 ⁇ m.
- the colored layer 30 is provided on the following protrusion 25 of the alignment pattern portion AL provided on the surface of the transfer layer 20.
- the colored layer 30 has a role of causing a contrast of light transmittance or light reflectance between a portion where the colored layer 30 is present and a portion where the colored layer 30 is not present in the alignment pattern portion AL.
- the colored layer 30 is disposed so as to be positioned at least at a part of the alignment pattern portion AL of the transfer layer 20 (adhesive layer 22) as shown in FIG. It is preferable to do.
- the colored layer 30 is preferably composed of three parts: a line portion 30a, a solid coating center portion 30b, and a solid coating portion 31.
- the line portion 30a and the solid coating center portion 30b have different light transmittance or light reflectance, and the transfer sheet 100 can be aligned in an arbitrary process using the contrast of the light transmittance or light reflectance. It becomes.
- the light transmittance may be any of transmittance in the normal transmission direction, diffuse transmittance, and total transmittance.
- the light reflectance may be any of transmittance in the regular reflection direction, diffuse reflectance, and total reflectance.
- the ratio of the area of the line portion 30a in the colored layer 30 in the second region R 2 is preferably 15 to 85%, more preferably 20 to 80%, more preferably 30 to 70% .
- the ratio of the area of the line portion 30a within the above range, the contrast of the light transmittance or the light reflectance between the solid coating center portion 30b and the solid coating portion 31 can be easily clarified, and the alignment accuracy can be improved. Can do.
- the solid color portion 31 may be wider than the second region R 2 of the line portion 30a is wide is preferably easier to see more alignment pattern portion AL in different width.
- the colored layer 30 is preferably a linear pattern having an average line width L of 0.01 to 4.0 mm from the viewpoint of easy alignment when the transfer sheet 100 is observed from the planar direction.
- the average value of the line width L of the colored layer 30 is more preferably 0.01 to 2.0 mm, further preferably 0.025 to 1.0 mm, and 0.05 to 0.00. More preferably, it is 5 mm.
- the average value of the line width L means what averaged the value which measured the line width of the colored layer 30 ten or more places.
- the colored layer 30 preferably has a variation in the line width L of 10% or less, more preferably 7% or less, and still more preferably 5% or less.
- the fluctuation of the line width L within 10% means that all the line widths are within ⁇ 10% with respect to the average value of the line width L.
- wire width L arises from the shape change of the tracking protrusion part 25 which arises by forming a protective layer, an adhesive bond layer, etc.
- the thickness of the colored layer 30 is preferably 0.3 to 5.0 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.4 to 4.0 ⁇ m, from the viewpoint of easily obtaining contrast for alignment. More preferably, it is 5 to 3.0 ⁇ m.
- the colored layer 30 is composed of, for example, a binder resin and a pigment.
- a pigment of the colored layer 30 it is preferable to include a pigment with high concealability.
- a black pigment such as carbon black is preferable as the pigment having high concealability.
- the binder resin of the colored layer 30 is not particularly limited.
- EVA resin vinyl acetate copolymer resin
- ionomer resin olefin- ⁇ olefin copolymer resin fat
- polyurethane resin polyester resin, acrylic resin, epoxy resin, phenol resin, urea resin, polyester resin Curable resins such as melamine resin, alkyd resin, polyimide resin, silicone resin, amide functional copoly
- the curable resin includes a thermosetting resin, an ionizing radiation curable resin, a two-component curable resin, and the like.
- the binder resin of the colored layer 30 is preferably a thermoplastic resin from the viewpoint of suppressing foil dust.
- the colored layer 30 does not contain a hardening
- the colored layer 30 can be formed, for example, by transferring the colored layer forming ink onto the following protrusion 25 of the alignment pattern portion AL by a transfer method such as fusion thermal transfer or sublimation thermal transfer.
- a transfer method for forming the colored layer 30 fusion heat transfer is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing foil dust.
- the colored layer 30 may also be formed by applying a colored layer forming ink on the follow-up protruding portion 25 of the alignment pattern portion AL and then drying by a printing method such as gravure reverse printing or gravure printing. Can do.
- melting heat transfer from the plane direction with the microscope is shown in FIG.
- the photograph which observed the colored layer 30 formed by gravure reverse printing from the plane direction with the microscope is shown in FIG. Comparing the photographs of FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, the colored layer 30 formed by the fusion thermal transfer of FIG. 23 is clearer and more suitable.
- the colored layer 30 formed by the gravure reverse printing in FIG. 24 has some background stains, but the sharpness for alignment is maintained.
- the thickness of the colored layer 30 is preferably 0.3 to 5.0 ⁇ m, and preferably 0.4 to 4.0 ⁇ m, from the viewpoint that the contrast for alignment may be adjusted. Is more preferably 0.5 to 3.0 ⁇ m.
- the transfer layer 20 may have other layers. Examples of other layers include an anchor layer and a printing layer.
- the anchor layer is a layer provided as necessary to improve heat resistance when placed in a high temperature environment such as in-mold molding.
- the anchor layer is preferably formed between the protective layer 21 and the adhesive layer 22.
- the anchor layer can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
- the transfer layer 20 may further have a printing layer.
- the printed layer has a role of imparting a desired design property to the decorative molded product.
- Printed layer when observed the transfer sheet 100 from the planar direction, is preferably disposed so as to be positioned on at least a portion of the first region R 1. Further, the position in the thickness direction of the printing layer may be disposed on the adhesive layer 22, may be disposed between the adhesive layer 22 and the protective layer 21, or may be disposed between the protective layer 21 and the release layer. You may arrange
- the resin component of a printing layer is made into resin of the same system as the resin component of the adhesive bond layer 22 from a viewpoint of equalization of adhesiveness with a to-be-transferred material. It is preferable to use the same resin.
- the pattern of the printing layer is arbitrary, and examples thereof include wood grain, stone grain, cloth grain, sand grain, circle, square, polygon, geometric pattern, character, solid printing, and the like.
- the printing layer can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
- the print layer can be formed at an accurate position by performing alignment using the alignment pattern portion AL.
- a resin layer forming ink containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition is applied onto a support 1 to form an uncured resin layer 2.
- the uncured resin layer 2 was shaped and simultaneously irradiated with ionizing radiation.
- the step of forming the protective layer 21 the step of applying the adhesive layer forming ink on the protective layer 21 to form the adhesive layer 22, and the second region R 2 in the adhesive layer 22.
- a colored layer forming ink is applied onto the follow-up protrusion 25 formed at the corresponding position, and the colored layer And forming a 0.
- a plate having a shape complementary to the first region R 1 and the second region R 2 is formed by engraving the surface of the cylinder into a desired shape by, for example, etching, sand blasting, cutting and laser processing, or a combination thereof. Can be obtained. Alternatively, laser engraving, by stereolithography or the like to prepare a plate of male long (plate having a first region R 1 and the second region R 2 and the same shape), a material obtained by inverting it to the surface of the cylinder It can be obtained by wrapping.
- the surface of these plates is preferably hard-plated with chromium or the like.
- the transfer sheet 100 is preferably manufactured with multiple impositions from the viewpoint of manufacturing efficiency.
- the transfer sheet 100 manufactured in such a multi-face manner is subjected to a transfer process as a long transfer sheet or a single sheet transfer sheet.
- the transfer sheet 100 manufactured by the above-described process can easily form the colored layer 30 that is a pattern printing for alignment on the follow-up protrusion 25, and the light in the alignment pattern formed by the colored layer 30 can be obtained.
- the contrast of transmittance or light reflectance becomes clear, and alignment can be facilitated.
- Examples of the optional step of aligning include a step of slitting the transfer sheet 100 in a long length, a step of punching the transfer sheet 100 into a sheet, and a step of transferring the transfer sheet 100 to a transfer object.
- the alignment is performed by the light transmittance by the colored layer 30 that is the pattern printing for alignment
- the light source installed below the transfer sheet 100 and the light source above the transfer sheet 100 are installed at positions facing the light source.
- Position alignment can be performed by detection by the light detection means.
- the detection can be performed by a light source and a light detection unit installed at an arbitrary angle above the transfer sheet 100.
- the method for manufacturing a decorative molded product according to the third embodiment of the present invention includes the step of transferring the transfer layer 20 of the transfer sheet 100 of the present invention described above to the transfer object, and the release sheet 10 of the transfer sheet 100. And a step of peeling.
- Examples of the material to be transferred include a resin molded body.
- the decorative molded product produced by the above process does not generate foil dust on the transfer sheet 100 to be used, and can improve the appearance after being transferred.
- a known transfer method can be used for the method of manufacturing the decorative molded product. For example, (i) a method in which a transfer sheet is attached to a preliminarily molded transfer object, the transfer layer of the transfer sheet is transferred, and then the release sheet of the transfer sheet is peeled off; A method of sticking a transfer sheet to a transfer material, transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet, peeling off the release sheet of the transfer sheet, and then forming a transfer material on which the transfer layer is laminated, (iii) ) A method of integrating a transfer material with a transfer sheet at the time of injection molding and then peeling the release sheet of the transfer sheet [in-mold molding (injection molding simultaneous transfer decoration method)]. Among them, according to in-mold molding (injection molding simultaneous transfer decoration method), it is possible to perform decorative molding on a resin molded body having a complicated surface shape such as a three-dimensional curved surface.
- the transfer layer side of the above-mentioned transfer sheet is arranged facing the inside of the mold for in-mold molding.
- a step of injecting and injecting a resin into the in-mold mold (2) a step of integrating the transfer sheet and the resin and transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet onto the surface of the resin molded body (transfer object); and (4) a resin molded body (transfer target).
- the transfer sheet is arranged at an accurate position of the mold using the alignment pattern portion of the second region R 2. be able to. After the step (4), it is preferable to trim (remove) unnecessary portions as necessary. (4) When the second region R 2 after step are still present, it is preferred to trim (remove) the region.
- thermoplastic resin As the resin molding, it is preferable to use a thermoplastic resin or a thermosetting resin that can be injection-molded, and various known resins can be used.
- a thermoplastic resin examples include polystyrene resins, polyolefin resins, ABS resins (including heat-resistant ABS resins), AS resins, AN resins, polyphenylene oxide resins, polycarbonate resins, polyacetal resins, acrylic resins, Examples thereof include polyethylene terephthalate resin, polybutylene terephthalate resin, polysulfone resin, and polyphenylene sulfide resin.
- a transfer sheet capable of transferring a transfer layer that suppresses generation of foil dust and improves the appearance of a decorative molded product, a method for producing the transfer sheet, and the transfer sheet The manufacturing method of the decorative molded product using this can be provided.
- the transfer sheet 100 is a transfer sheet having a transfer layer 20 on the release sheet 10, and the release sheet 10 is a transfer object.
- a second region R 2 base layer 11 having a for providing the first region R 1 and the alignment pattern for transferring, to the second region R 2 of the base layer 11, transfer layer 20 side
- the transfer layer 20 includes an alignment pattern portion AL having a follow-up protruding portion 25 based on the convex portion 24 on the surface opposite to the release sheet 10. is there.
- description of what is substantially the same as the first embodiment is omitted.
- the release sheet 10 includes a base material layer 11 and a release layer 13.
- the release sheet 10 is peeled off after the transfer layer 20 is transferred to a transfer object such as a resin molded body.
- the base material layer 11 is formed from the support body 1 and the resin layer 2, for example, as shown in FIG.
- the base material layer 11 may be a single layer of the support 1 or the resin layer 2, or may have a configuration of three or more layers having layers other than the support 1 and the resin layer 2. Further, although not shown, the base material layer 11 may further have other regions on the surface on the transfer layer 20 side.
- the resin layer 2 can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
- Resin layer 2 may be formed by coating, accurately and in terms of forming a precise shape, by printing using a plate having a first region R 1 and the second region R 2 and the complementary shape It is preferable to form.
- the plate preferably further has a shape complementary to the other regions. Details of the method of forming the resin layer 2 using a plate will be described later.
- the first region R 1 of the base layer 11 is a region for providing the transfer layer 20 to be transferred to the transfer target.
- Surface shape of the first region R 1 is not particularly limited. Surface shape of the first region R 1 is, for example, as shown in FIG. 26, may have an irregular shape, may be substantially smooth. As shown in FIG. 26, when the concavo-convex portion 5 is provided in the first region R 1 , the transfer layer 20 having a shape complementary to the concavo-convex portion 5 (the release layer 13 on the concavo-convex portion 5 is included).
- the transfer layer 20) having a concavo-convex complementary shape alleviated by the release layer 13 is transferred, and the concavo-convex shape can be imparted to the surface of the resulting decorative molded product. Further, when the surface shape of the first region R 1 is substantially smooth, increasing the substantially can be made smooth, gloss resulting decorative molded article surface shape of the transfer layer 20 has been transferred to the transfer target Can do.
- the absolute value of the degree of unevenness in the first region R 1 is not particularly limited, but the maximum height roughness Rz is 0.2 to 4.0 ⁇ m. It is preferable to set the degree.
- the arithmetic average roughness Ra is preferably about 0.05 to 2.0 ⁇ m.
- the first region R 1 may be formed by dividing the first region R 1 to two or more locations. In that case, it may be each of the first region R 1 of the surface shape as different.
- the second region R 2 of the base material layer 11 is a region for providing the for alignment used to transfer the transfer target pattern (alignment marks).
- the second region R 2 has a partially deployed convex portion 24 to the basis of the alignment pattern.
- the convex part 24 is preferably formed in the resin layer 2 by shaping using a plate having a shape complementary to the second region R 2 from the viewpoint of forming an accurate and precise shape.
- the height h of the convex portion 24 is 1.0 to 6.0 ⁇ m.
- the height h of the convex portion 24 is less than 1.0 ⁇ m, it is difficult to maintain the shape of the convex portion 24 every time the convex portion 24 is laminated, and the convex portion 24 is formed on the surface of the transfer layer 20. It becomes difficult to form the follow-up protrusion 25 as a base. If the follow-up protrusion 25 based on the convex portion 24 cannot be formed on the surface of the transfer layer 20, the photoelectric sensor cannot detect the light amount difference between the convex portion and the concave portion, and the pattern position for alignment is determined. It cannot be detected.
- the height h of the convex portion 24 is more than 6.0 ⁇ m, when laminating on the convex portion 24, the contact pressure of the convex portion 24 becomes high and a lot of ink rides on the convex portion 24, The bottom of the layer laminated on the convex portion 24 is likely to spread, and light is diffused at the bottom to adversely affect the alignment. And since the height h of the convex part 24 is more than 6.0 ⁇ m, the convex part 24 may be deformed by a load at the time of stacking on the convex part 24. It becomes difficult to maintain the accuracy of alignment.
- the height h of the convex portion 24 is preferably 1.5 to 5.5 ⁇ m, more preferably 2.0 to 5.0 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of forming the follow-up protrusion 25 having a desired shape. More preferably, it is 2.5 to 4.5 ⁇ m.
- the heights h of the convex portions 24 may not be the same. However, from the viewpoint of facilitating uniform formation of the height H of the tracking protrusion 25, it is preferable that all the heights h of the protrusions 24 be the same or approximate values.
- the height h of the convex part 24 means the structure forming the convex part 24 from the reference plane of the base material layer 11 having a cross section cut in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the structural body. The height of the center.
- the distance d between the end portions of the convex portion 24 is 10 to 500 ⁇ m.
- a skirt is formed due to the influence of ink dripping between the end portions of the convex portion 24 when laminating on the convex portion 24. It becomes difficult to maintain the accuracy of alignment.
- the tracking protrusions 25 based on the protrusions 24 adjacent to the surface of the transfer layer 20 may be connected to each other, and if the individual tracking protrusions 25 cannot be recognized, the alignment accuracy is maintained. Difficult to do.
- the distance d between the end portions of the convex portions 24 is more than 500 ⁇ m, when the layers are stacked on the convex portions 24, the contact pressure of the convex portions 24 is increased and a large amount of ink is loaded on the convex portions 24.
- the skirt of the layer laminated on the convex portion 24 is likely to spread, and light is diffused at the skirt to adversely affect the alignment.
- Interval d of ends of the convex portion 24 improves the recognition rate of the alignment mark, from the viewpoint of suppressing the area of the second region R 2 is wider than necessary, preferably from 15 ⁇ 450 [mu] m, It is more preferably 20 to 400 ⁇ m, and further preferably 25 to 350 ⁇ m.
- the distance d between the ends of the convex portion 24 refers to the distance between the ends of the bottom of the convex portion 24.
- the ratio h / d between the height h of the convex portion 24 and the distance d between the end portions of the convex portion 24 is preferably 0.003 to 0.100, and preferably 0.005 to 0.080. More preferably, it is 0.007 to 0.060.
- the width b of the convex portion 24 is preferably 5 to 200 ⁇ m, more preferably 10 to 150 ⁇ m, and even more preferably 15 to 100 ⁇ m.
- the width b of the convex portion 24 is preferably 5 to 200 ⁇ m, more preferably 10 to 150 ⁇ m, and even more preferably 15 to 100 ⁇ m.
- the width b of the convex part 4 means the width
- the ratio h / b between the height h of the convex portion and the width b of the convex portion is preferably 0.010 to 0.050, more preferably 0.015 to 0.045, and more preferably 0.020. More preferably, it is ⁇ 0.040.
- the ratio h / b 0.010 or more it can suppress the area of the second region R 2 is wider than necessary. Further, by setting the ratio h / b to 0.050 or less, it is possible to easily form the follow-up protrusion 25 that maintains the shape of the protrusion 24.
- the convex part 24 can be formed from a line-shaped structure, a dot-shaped structure or the like extending in an arbitrary direction, and is preferably formed from a line-shaped structure.
- the arbitrary direction is not particularly limited and may be an oblique direction (for example, 45 degrees with respect to the width direction of the transfer sheet), but is preferably a direction parallel to any one side of the transfer sheet 100.
- the flow direction of the transfer sheet 100 is more preferable.
- each direction of the some convex part 24 is parallel.
- the convex portion 24 may be formed continuously without interruption in any direction in the second inner region R 2, but may be one that extends in any direction partially interrupted.
- the cross section obtained by cutting the structure forming the convex portion 24 in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the structure is preferably substantially rectangular.
- the convex portion 24 and the transfer layer 20 described later satisfy the relationship of [the height of the convex portion / the thickness of the transfer layer] of 0.1 to 5.0, preferably 0.1 to 3.5. It is more preferable to satisfy the relationship, and it is further preferable to satisfy the relationship of 0.1 to 1.0.
- the ratio By setting the ratio to 0.1 or more, it is possible to easily form the tracking protrusion 25 based on the protrusion 24 on the surface of the transfer layer 20. Further, by setting the ratio to 5.0 or less, the convex portion 24 is not easily deformed by a load, and the alignment accuracy can be easily maintained.
- Transfer sheet 100 of the present embodiment may have a second region R 2 of two or more. If a second region R 2 of two or more, it is preferable to change the role of each area. For example, when having a plurality of second regions R 2, either one aligns the width direction, it is preferably configured to perform the alignment of the flow direction in the other. By configuring the second region R 2 as described above, it is possible to align in both directions in the width direction and the flow direction, thereby improving the accuracy of alignment.
- the second region R 2 is provided on both sides of the first region R 1 , and the alignment pattern portion (alignment mark) AL is the uneven portion 5. It is preferable to be provided on both sides.
- the alignment pattern portion AL is provided on both sides of the uneven portion 5, the position in the width direction of the alignment pattern portion AL with respect to the uneven portion 5 can be changed regardless of the number of times the transfer sheet 100 is rewound. Therefore, the alignment accuracy can be increased, and the productivity can be improved.
- the second region R 2 are transferred to the transfer target, preferably be removed at the stage to obtain a decorated molded article.
- the transfer layer 20 from the viewpoint of transferring the exact position of the object to be transferred, it is preferable to remove the second region R 2 at the timing of (3).
- the release sheet 10 of the transfer sheet 100 is formed so as to be peelable at the interface with the transfer layer 20 when it is in close contact with the transfer object.
- the release sheet 10 preferably has a release layer 13 on at least a part of the surface in contact with the transfer layer 20. Further, from the viewpoint of uniform release property within the surface of the transfer sheet 100, the release sheet 10 has a release layer 13 on the entire surface in contact with the transfer layer 20, as shown in FIG. It is preferable.
- the release layer 13 is formed on the concavo-convex portion 5 to relieve the concavo-convex shape and form a concavo-convex shape with less high-frequency components on the surface of the decorative molded product. It is possible to suppress whitening and glare of the decorative molded product.
- the release layer 13 may be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
- the release sheet 10 may have other layers. Examples of other layers include an antistatic layer. When the release sheet 10 has an antistatic layer, it is possible to suppress the release charge when the release sheet is peeled off, and to improve the transfer workability.
- Antistatic layer As the antistatic layer, the same materials as those described in the first embodiment can be used.
- a transfer layer 20 is formed on at least a part of the release sheet 10.
- the transfer layer 20 is a layer to be transferred to the transfer object, and includes, for example, a protective layer 21 and an adhesive layer 22 in order from the side close to the release sheet 10 as shown in FIG.
- the transfer layer 20 has a tracking protrusion 25 based on the protrusion 24 on the surface.
- the transfer layer 20 is preferably formed on the entire surface of the release sheet 10 as shown in FIG.
- Each layer such as the protective layer 21 and the adhesive layer 22 constituting the transfer layer 20 is prepared by, for example, adjusting ink containing the constituent components of each layer and applying a coating method such as a gravure coating method or a roll coating method on the release sheet 10. It can be formed by coating and drying by a printing method such as gravure printing or screen printing, and curing by irradiation with ionizing radiation as required.
- the ink for forming the transfer layer for forming the transfer layer 20 has a solvent ratio of 90% by mass or less from the viewpoint of facilitating formation of the follow-up protrusion 25 that follows the protrusion 24. Is preferred.
- the height H of the follow-up protrusion 25 is preferably 1.0 to 10.0 ⁇ m, more preferably 1.5 to 9.0 ⁇ m, and even more preferably 2.0 to 8.0 ⁇ m. .
- the height H of the follow-up projection 25 is preferably 1.0 to 10.0 ⁇ m, more preferably 1.5 to 9.0 ⁇ m, and even more preferably 2.0 to 8.0 ⁇ m. .
- the heights H of the follow-up protrusions 25 are all the same or approximate values from the viewpoint that the detection of the light amount difference between the protrusions and the recesses is uniform and easy.
- the height H of the follow-up protrusion 25 refers to the height of the central portion of a cross section obtained by cutting the structure forming the follow-up protrusion 25 in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the structure.
- the protective layer 21 has a role of protecting the decorative molded product from abrasion, light, chemicals, and the like after the transfer layer 20 is transferred from the transfer sheet 100 to the transfer target. If having a concave-convex portion 5 release sheets first region R 1 of 10, protective layer 21 having a complementary shape to the irregular shape is imparted to the surface of the decorative molded article. Further, when the first region R 1 of the release sheet 10 is substantially smooth, it can be surface substantially smooth protective layer 21 is applied to the surface of the decorative molded article, increasing the gloss of the decorative molded article.
- the protective layer 21 can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
- the transfer layer forming ink for forming the protective layer 21 preferably has a solvent ratio of 60 to 90% by mass or less from the viewpoint of facilitating the formation of the follow-up protrusion 25 that follows the protrusion 24. It is more preferably 65 to 90% by mass, and further preferably 70 to 90% by mass.
- the adhesive layer 22 has a role of improving the transfer work by improving the adhesion between the transfer object 20 such as a resin molded body and the transfer layer 20.
- the surface of the transfer layer 20 is provided with an alignment pattern portion AL having a follow-up protruding portion 25 based on the convex portion 24.
- an alignment pattern portion AL having a tracking protrusion 25 based on the protrusion 24 is provided on the surface of the adhesive layer 22.
- the following protrusion 25 is formed by following the protrusion 24 by providing the transfer layer 20 including the protective layer 21 and the adhesive layer 22 on the protrusion 24 provided on the release sheet 10. It is a part to do.
- the adhesive layer 22 can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
- the ink for forming the adhesive layer for forming the adhesive layer 22 preferably has a solvent ratio of 80 to 90% or less from the viewpoint of facilitating the formation of the follow-up protrusion 25 that follows the protrusion 24. More preferably, it is 85 to 90% by mass.
- the adhesive layer 22 may be configured to include two types of layers, an anchor coat layer and an adhesive layer.
- the thickness of the anchor coat layer is preferably 0.5 to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably 1.0 to 8.0 ⁇ m, and 2.0 to 6. More preferably, it is 0 ⁇ m.
- the thickness of the adhesive layer is preferably from 0.1 to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably from 0.5 to 8.0 ⁇ m, and even more preferably from 1.0 to 5.0 ⁇ m.
- the colored layer 30 may be provided on the tracking protrusion 25 as shown in FIG.
- the colored layer 30 is provided on the following protrusion 25 of the alignment pattern portion AL provided on the surface of the transfer layer 20.
- the colored layer 30 has a role of causing a contrast of light transmittance or light reflectance between a portion where the colored layer 30 is present and a portion where the colored layer 30 is not present in the alignment pattern portion AL.
- the colored layer 30 is disposed so as to be positioned at least at a part of the alignment pattern portion AL of the transfer layer 20 (adhesive layer 22) as shown in FIG. It is preferable to do.
- the colored layer 30 is preferably composed of three portions: a line portion 30 a, a solid coating center portion 30 b, and a solid coating portion 31.
- the line portion 30a and the solid coating center portion 30b have different light transmittance or light reflectance, and the transfer sheet 100 can be aligned in an arbitrary process using the contrast of the light transmittance or light reflectance. It becomes.
- the light transmittance may be any of transmittance in the normal transmission direction, diffuse transmittance, and total transmittance.
- the light reflectance may be any of transmittance in the regular reflection direction, diffuse reflectance, and total reflectance.
- the ratio of the area of the line portion 30a in the colored layer 30 in the second region R 2 is preferably 15 to 85%, more preferably 20 to 80%, more preferably 30 to 70% .
- the ratio of the area of the line portion 30a within the above range, the contrast of the light transmittance or the light reflectance between the solid coating center portion 30b and the solid coating portion 31 can be easily clarified, and the alignment accuracy can be improved. Can do.
- the solid color portion 31 may be wider than the second region R 2 of the line portion 30a is wide is preferably easier to see more alignment pattern portion AL in different width.
- the colored layer 30 can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
- the colored layer 30 can be formed, for example, by transferring the colored layer forming ink onto the following protrusion 25 of the alignment pattern portion AL by a transfer method such as fusion thermal transfer or sublimation thermal transfer.
- a transfer method for forming the colored layer 30 fusion heat transfer is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing foil dust.
- the colored layer 30 may also be formed by applying a colored layer forming ink on the follow-up protruding portion 25 of the alignment pattern portion AL and then drying by a printing method such as gravure reverse printing or gravure printing. Can do.
- gravure reverse printing is particularly preferable.
- the thickness of the colored layer 30 is preferably 0.3 to 5.0 ⁇ m, and preferably 0.4 to 4.0 ⁇ m, from the viewpoint that the contrast for alignment may be adjusted. Is more preferably 0.5 to 3.0 ⁇ m.
- the transfer layer 20 may have other layers. Examples of other layers include an anchor layer and a printing layer.
- the anchor layer is a layer provided as necessary to improve heat resistance when placed in a high temperature environment such as in-mold molding.
- the anchor layer is preferably formed between the protective layer 21 and the adhesive layer 22.
- the anchor layer can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
- the transfer layer 20 may further have a printing layer.
- the printed layer has a role of imparting a desired design property to the decorative molded product.
- Printed layer when observed the transfer sheet 100 from the planar direction, is preferably disposed so as to be positioned on at least a portion of the first region R 1. Further, the position in the thickness direction of the printing layer may be disposed on the adhesive layer 22, may be disposed between the adhesive layer 22 and the protective layer 21, or may be disposed between the protective layer 21 and the release layer. You may arrange
- the resin component of a printing layer is made into resin of the same system as the resin component of the adhesive bond layer 22 from a viewpoint of equalization of adhesiveness with a to-be-transferred material. It is preferable to use the same resin.
- the pattern of the printing layer is arbitrary, and examples thereof include wood grain, stone grain, cloth grain, sand grain, circle, square, polygon, geometric pattern, character, solid printing, and the like.
- the printing layer can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
- the print layer can be formed at an accurate position by performing alignment using the alignment pattern portion AL.
- a resin layer forming ink containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition is applied onto a support 1, and an uncured resin layer 2 is applied.
- the plate having a shape complementary to the forming step and the first region R 1 and the second region R 2 the uncured resin layer 2 was shaped and simultaneously irradiated with ionizing radiation.
- a step of curing the resin layer 2 a step of applying a release layer forming ink on the cured resin layer 2 to form a release layer 13, and a protective layer forming ink on the release layer 13 And forming the protective layer 21 and applying the adhesive layer forming ink on the protective layer 21 to form the adhesive layer 22.
- the colored layer forming ink is applied on the following protrusion 25 formed at a position corresponding to the second region R 2 in the adhesive layer 22. It is preferable to further include a step of applying and forming the colored layer 30. By further including the process of forming the colored layer 30, it can be set as the transfer layer 20 which has the colored layer 30 on the tracking protrusion part 25.
- a plate having a shape complementary to the first region R 1 and the second region R 2 is formed by engraving the surface of the cylinder into a desired shape by, for example, etching, sand blasting, cutting and laser processing, or a combination thereof. Can be obtained. Alternatively, laser engraving, by stereolithography or the like to prepare a plate of male long (plate having a first region R 1 and the second region R 2 and the same shape), a material obtained by inverting it to the surface of the cylinder It can be obtained by wrapping.
- the surface of these plates is preferably hard-plated with chromium or the like.
- the transfer sheet 100 is preferably manufactured with multiple impositions from the viewpoint of manufacturing efficiency.
- the transfer sheet 100 manufactured in such a multi-face manner is subjected to a transfer process as a long transfer sheet or a single sheet transfer sheet.
- the transfer sheet 100 manufactured by the above process detects the difference in light quantity between the convex portion and the concave portion, with the following protrusion 25 as a pattern for alignment being a convex portion, and between the end portions of the following protruding portion 25 as a concave portion. This makes it easier to align.
- Examples of the optional step of aligning include a step of slitting the transfer sheet 100 in a long length, a step of punching the transfer sheet 100 into a sheet, and a step of transferring the transfer sheet 100 to a transfer object. It is done.
- the tracking protrusion 25 as the pattern for alignment using the photoelectric sensor as a convex part, and between the end parts of the tracking protrusion 25 as a concave part, the convex part and the concave part It is preferable to include a first alignment step for detecting a difference in the amount of light and a second alignment step for detecting an alignment pattern using an image sensor.
- the pattern position for alignment can be detected by detecting a light amount difference between the convex portion and the concave portion by a retroreflective laser sensor (photoelectric sensor). The amount of light detected by scattering of light at the convex portion decreases.
- the first alignment step can be performed even when the transfer sheet 100 is flowing, and is a simple alignment step for reading the pattern position for alignment.
- the second alignment step light is emitted from the light source to the alignment pattern position detected in the first alignment step, and the specularly reflected light in the alignment pattern is measured by an image sensor such as a camera.
- the boundary between the convex portion and the concave portion can be detected.
- the transfer sheet 100 can be aligned.
- the second alignment step is basically a step that is performed when the transfer sheet 100 is stopped, such as a step of punching the transfer sheet 100 into a sheet and a step of transferring the transfer sheet 100 to a transfer object. This is an alignment process for accurately reading a pattern for alignment.
- the alignment is performed by the light transmittance by the colored layer 30 that is the pattern printing for alignment
- the light source installed below the transfer sheet 100 and the light source above the transfer sheet 100 are installed at positions facing the light source.
- Position detection can be performed by detection using an image sensor.
- the detection can be performed by a light source and an image sensor installed above the transfer sheet 100 at an arbitrary angle.
- the method for manufacturing a decorative molded product according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention includes a step of transferring the transfer layer 20 of the transfer sheet 100 of the present invention described above to a transfer object, and a release sheet 10 of the transfer sheet 100. And a step of peeling.
- Examples of the material to be transferred include a resin molded body.
- the decorative molded product manufactured by the above process improves the readability of the pattern for alignment and can transfer the transfer layer to the exact position of the transfer object, so that the appearance after transfer can be improved. it can.
- a known transfer method can be used for the method of manufacturing the decorative molded product. For example, (i) a method in which a transfer sheet is attached to a preliminarily molded transfer object, the transfer layer of the transfer sheet is transferred, and then the release sheet of the transfer sheet is peeled off; A method of sticking a transfer sheet to a transfer material, transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet, peeling off the release sheet of the transfer sheet, and then forming a transfer material on which the transfer layer is laminated, (iii) ) A method of integrating a transfer material with a transfer sheet at the time of injection molding and then peeling the release sheet of the transfer sheet [in-mold molding (injection molding simultaneous transfer decoration method)]. Among them, according to in-mold molding (injection molding simultaneous transfer decoration method), it is possible to perform decorative molding on a resin molded body having a complicated surface shape such as a three-dimensional curved surface.
- the transfer layer side of the above-mentioned transfer sheet is arranged facing the inside of the mold for in-mold molding.
- a step of injecting and injecting a resin into the in-mold mold (2) a step of integrating the transfer sheet and the resin and transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet onto the surface of the resin molded body (transfer object); and (4) a resin molded body (transfer target).
- the transfer sheet is arranged at an accurate position of the mold using the alignment pattern portion of the second region R 2. be able to. After the step (4), it is preferable to trim (remove) unnecessary portions as necessary. (4) When the second region R 2 after step are still present, it is preferred to trim (remove) the region.
- thermoplastic resin As the resin molding, it is preferable to use a thermoplastic resin or a thermosetting resin that can be injection-molded, and various known resins can be used.
- a thermoplastic resin examples include polystyrene resins, polyolefin resins, ABS resins (including heat-resistant ABS resins), AS resins, AN resins, polyphenylene oxide resins, polycarbonate resins, polyacetal resins, acrylic resins, Examples thereof include polyethylene terephthalate resin, polybutylene terephthalate resin, polysulfone resin, and polyphenylene sulfide resin.
- Example of transfer sheet according to the first embodiment (Example of transfer sheet according to the first embodiment) 1.
- Production of Plate A cylinder having a copper plating layer having a thickness of 200 ⁇ m was prepared.
- the surface of the cylinder was etched to form two grooves 40 as a set, and two sets of grooves 40 were formed in the flow direction (FIG. 9A).
- the depth of each groove was 5.0 ⁇ m and the width was 5.0 mm.
- the distance between ends of a pair of grooves (P 1) was 3.0 mm.
- the shape when observed from the plane direction by the etching process is a substantially square shape (a substantially square having a straight line parallel to both the flow direction and the width direction.
- the length of one side is 6 mm), and the depth is 5.
- a 0.0 ⁇ m recess 70 was formed at the same time (FIG. 9A).
- the entire surface of the cylinder was covered with a mask 50 in which a portion (60) for forming the uneven portion of the first region was cut (FIG. 9B).
- the uneven portion of the first region has a substantially rectangular shape 60 as shown in FIG.
- irregularities were formed at locations not covered with the mask 50 by blasting using glass beads.
- the maximum height roughness Rz of the irregularities obtained by reversing the irregularities was 1.5 ⁇ m, and the arithmetic average roughness Ra was 0.5 ⁇ m.
- the mask 50 was removed (FIG. 9C), and the surface of the cylinder was hard-plated (chrome plating) to obtain a two-sided plate.
- a resin layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied and dried to form an uncured resin layer having a thickness of 8.0 ⁇ m.
- an uncured resin layer is shaped, and at the same time, ionizing radiation is irradiated from the polyethylene terephthalate film side to cure the shaped resin layer.
- a base material layer having a resin layer formed thereon was obtained.
- the black ink is applied so that the amount of adhesion after drying is 1 g / m 2 (about 1 ⁇ m) on the protrusions in the second region of the base material layer and on the second protrusions in the other regions.
- a colored layer forming ink obtained by diluting made by Showa Ink Co., Ltd., trade name: EIS (NT) black
- EIS (NT) black was applied and dried to form a colored layer. There was substantially no ink in the colored layer between the set of protrusions in the second region.
- a release layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied to the entire surface and dried to form a release layer having a thickness of 0.5 ⁇ m, thereby obtaining a release sheet.
- ⁇ Ink for forming release layer> Acrylic polyol 70 parts by mass (manufactured by Soken Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name: Thermolac SU100A) ⁇ Isocyanate 25 parts by mass (Mitsui Chemicals, trade name: Takenate D-110N) ⁇ Ethyl acetate 161 parts by mass ⁇ Methyl isobutyl ketone 56 parts by mass
- the anchor layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied onto the protective layer so that the amount of adhesion after drying was 3.0 g / m 2, and after forming a coating film, the film was dried at 40 ° C. for 72 hours and cured. An anchor layer having a thickness of 2 ⁇ m was formed.
- an adhesive layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied onto the anchor layer so that the adhesion amount after drying was 2.5 g / m 2 to form a coating film.
- the coating film was dried to form an adhesive layer having a thickness of 2 ⁇ m to obtain a two-sided transfer sheet.
- ⁇ Coating solution for adhesive layer > -100 parts by mass of acrylic resin (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: TM-R600, solid content 20%) (Ethyl acetate / n-propyl / methyl ethyl ketone mixed solvent) ⁇ Methyl ethyl ketone 40 parts by mass
- the two-sided transfer sheet obtained in the above “3” was slit using the contrast of the light transmittance difference in the second region. As a result, it was possible to slit at an accurate position. Further, the two-sided transfer sheet obtained in the above “3” was punched into sheets using the contrast of the light transmittance difference between the second region and other regions. As a result, it was possible to perform punching at an accurate position.
- a decorative molded product was produced by the following steps (z1) to (z5) using a slit sheet and a transfer sheet punched into sheets.
- (Z1) a step of disposing the transfer layer side of the transfer sheet toward the inside of the in-mold mold (z2) a step of injecting and injecting resin into the in-mold mold, (Z3) a step of integrating the transfer sheet and the resin, and transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet onto the surface of the resin molded body (transfer object); (Z4) Step of peeling the release sheet of the transfer sheet after taking out the resin molded body (transfer object) from the mold (z5) Step of trimming (removing) the second region and / or other regions
- the transfer sheet when the transfer sheet is arranged in the step (z1), the transfer sheet is arranged at an accurate position of the mold using the contrast of the light transmittance difference between the second region and / or other regions. I was able to. For this reason, the transfer layer was able to be transferred to the exact position of the material to be transferred (resin molded product).
- the transfer sheet in which the second region remained had a fine protrusion formed on the transfer layer side surface of the transfer sheet. For this reason, blocking can be suppressed even if the slit-processed transfer sheet in which the second region remains is wound or a large number of single-sheet transfer sheets in which the second region remains are stacked.
- the entire surface of the cylinder was covered with a mask 50 in which a portion (60) for forming the concavo-convex portion of the first region was cut (FIG. 19B).
- the uneven portion in the first region has a substantially rectangular shape 60 as shown in FIG.
- irregularities were formed at locations not covered with the mask 50 by blasting using glass beads.
- the maximum height roughness Rz of the irregularities obtained by reversing the irregularities was 1.5 ⁇ m, and the arithmetic average roughness Ra was 0.5 ⁇ m.
- the mask 50 was removed (FIG. 19C), and the surface of the cylinder was hard-plated (chrome plating) to obtain a two-sided plate A.
- Plate B (Comparative Plate) A cylinder having a copper plating layer having a thickness of 200 ⁇ m was prepared. The surface of the cylinder was etched to form one groove (width 3.0 mm, depth 5.0 ⁇ m, continuously stretched in the flow direction of the cylinder). Next, using the groove as a reference for alignment, the entire surface of the cylinder was covered with a mask in which a portion where the uneven portion of the first region was formed was punched, and blasted under the same conditions as in the plate A. Next, the mask was removed, and the surface of the cylinder was hard-plated (chromium plating) to obtain a two-sided plate B.
- release sheet 2-1 Production of Release Sheet A (Release Sheet for Example 1) On a polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 50 ⁇ m, an ink for forming a resin layer having the following formulation was applied and dried, and an uncured resin having a thickness of 8.0 ⁇ m. A layer was formed.
- an uncured resin layer is shaped, and at the same time, the shaped resin layer is cured by irradiating ionizing radiation from the polyethylene terephthalate film side.
- a base material layer having a resin layer formed on a terephthalate film was obtained.
- black ink manufactured by Showa Ink Co., Ltd., trade name: so that the adhesion amount after drying is 1 g / m 2 (about 1 ⁇ m) on the protrusions in the second region of the base material layer and the peripheral protrusions.
- a colored layer forming ink obtained by diluting EIS (NT) black with a solvent was applied and dried to form a colored layer.
- a release layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied to the entire surface and dried to form a release layer having a thickness of 0.5 ⁇ m, whereby a release sheet A was obtained.
- a distance P 4 between the first region R 1 and the second regions R 2A and R 2B was 120 mm.
- ⁇ Ink for forming release layer> Acrylic polyol 70 parts by mass (manufactured by Soken Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name: Thermolac SU100A) ⁇ Isocyanate 25 parts by mass (Mitsui Chemicals, trade name: Takenate D-110N) ⁇ Ethyl acetate 161 parts by mass ⁇ Methyl isobutyl ketone 56 parts by mass
- Release Sheet B (Release Sheet for Comparative Example 1)
- the plate A is changed to the plate B produced in the above “1-2”, and a colored layer is formed on one protrusion. Except for the formation, release sheet B was obtained in the same manner as in 2-1. In the release sheet B, the colored layer was partially soiled around one protrusion.
- Release Sheet C (Release Sheet for Example 2)
- a resin layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied on a polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 50 ⁇ m and dried to obtain a thickness of 8.
- An uncured resin layer of 0 ⁇ m was formed.
- ⁇ Resin layer forming ink> Ionizing radiation curable resin composition 40 parts by mass (made by Kyoei Chemical Co., Ltd., acrylic resin) ⁇ Photopolymerization initiator 3 parts by mass ⁇ Methyl ethyl ketone 60 parts by mass ⁇ Silicone leveling agent 0.5 parts by mass
- a release layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied to the entire surface of the resin layer and dried to form a release layer having a thickness of 0.5 ⁇ m.
- ⁇ Ink for forming release layer> Acrylic polyol 70 parts by mass (manufactured by Soken Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name: Thermolac SU100A) ⁇ Isocyanate 25 parts by mass (Mitsui Chemicals, trade name: Takenate D-110N) ⁇ Ethyl acetate 161 parts by mass ⁇ Methyl isobutyl ketone 56 parts by mass
- the colored layer forming ink of the following formulation is applied on the protrusions in the second region of the release layer and the peripheral protrusions so that the adhesion amount after drying is 1 g / m 2 (about 1 ⁇ m).
- a colored layer was formed, and a release sheet C was obtained.
- a distance P 4 between the first region R 1 and the second regions R 2A and R 2B was 118 mm.
- Release Sheet D (Release Sheet for Comparative Example 2) Same as 2-3 above, except that in the above “2-3”, a colored layer was formed by changing to the colored layer forming ink having the following formulation. Thus, a release sheet D was obtained.
- a distance P 4 between the first region R 1 and the second regions R 2A and R 2B was 118 mm.
- the anchor layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied onto the protective layer so that the amount of adhesion after drying was 3.0 g / m 2, and after forming a coating film, the film was dried at 40 ° C. for 72 hours and cured. An anchor layer having a thickness of 2 ⁇ m was formed.
- ⁇ Ink for anchor layer> Acrylic polyol 100 parts by mass (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Kogyo Co., Ltd., trade name: TM-VMAC, solid content 25%) (Toluene / ethyl acetate / methyl ethyl ketone mixed solvent) ⁇ 10 parts by mass of xanthethylene diisocyanate (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Kogyo Co., Ltd., trade name: PTC-RC3) (Solid content 75%, solvent: ethyl acetate)
- an adhesive layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied onto the anchor layer so that the adhesion amount after drying was 2.5 g / m 2 to form a coating film.
- the coating film was dried to form an adhesive layer having a thickness of 2 ⁇ m to obtain a two-sided transfer sheet.
- ⁇ Coating solution for adhesive layer > -100 parts by mass of acrylic resin (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Kogyo Co., Ltd., trade name: TM-R600, solid content 20%) (Ethyl acetate / n-propyl / methyl ethyl ketone mixed solvent) ⁇ Methyl ethyl ketone 40 parts by mass
- Comparative Example 1 A two-sided transfer sheet was obtained in the same manner as in 3-1 (Example 1) except that the release sheet was changed to the release sheet B obtained in the above “2-2”.
- Example 2 A two-sided transfer sheet was obtained in the same manner as in 3-1 (Example 1) except that the release sheet was changed to the release sheet C obtained in “2-3” above.
- Comparative Example 2 A two-sided transfer sheet was obtained in the same manner as in 3-1 (Example 1) except that the release sheet was changed to the release sheet D obtained in the above “2-4”.
- the two-sided transfer sheet (transfer sheets of Examples 1 and 2 and Comparative Example 2) obtained in the above “3-1”, “3-3” and “3-4” is used as the second region R. Sheets were punched using the contrast of the light transmittance difference between 2A and R 2B . As a result, it was possible to perform punching at an accurate position.
- the two-sided transfer sheet obtained in the above “3-2” (transfer sheet of Comparative Example 1) has no alignment means in the flow direction, and there is no background stain around one protrusion. As a result, it was difficult to punch into a sheet at an accurate position.
- the two-sided transfer sheet obtained in the above “3-3” did not generate foil dust even when the colored layer was cut by slit processing and sheet cutting.
- the two-sided transfer sheet obtained in the above “3-4” generated foil dust when the colored layer was cut by slitting and punching a sheet. Oops.
- a decorative molded product was produced by the following steps (z1) to (z5) using a slit sheet and a transfer sheet punched into sheets.
- (Z1) a step of disposing the transfer layer side of the transfer sheet toward the inside of the in-mold mold (z2) a step of injecting and injecting resin into the in-mold mold, (Z3) a step of integrating the transfer sheet and the resin, and transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet onto the surface of the resin molded body (transfer object); (Z4) Step of removing the release sheet of the transfer sheet after removing the resin molded body (transfer object) from the mold (z5) Step of trimming (removing) the second region
- the transfer sheet when the transfer sheet is arranged in the step (z1), the transfer sheet is arranged at an accurate position of the mold using the contrast of the light transmittance difference between the second regions R 2A and R 2B. I was able to. For this reason, the transfer layer was able to be transferred to the exact position of the material to be transferred (resin molded product).
- the transfer sheet in which the second regions R 2A and R 2B remained had fine protrusions formed on the transfer layer side surface of the transfer sheet. Therefore, the second region R 2A, or wound transfer sheet was slit machining R 2B remained, the second region R 2A, even or overlaid many transfer sheet sheet remaining is R 2B, the first The blocking of the region could be suppressed.
- ⁇ Adhesion 2> After sticking a plant-based cellophane tape (Nichiban Co., Ltd., width 25 mm) to the release sheet of the transfer sheet prepared in the examples and comparative examples, hold the tip of the cellophane tape and keep the angle of 180 degrees 1 The film was pulled off in seconds and the adhesion was evaluated.
- ⁇ Clarity of alignment pattern> The alignment patterns of the transfer sheets prepared in Examples and Comparative Examples were photographed with micrographs, and the clarity of the alignment patterns was evaluated. Regarding the sharpness, the line widths of 10 colored layers were measured, and the following evaluation was performed. A: The variation of the line width of the colored layer when the transfer sheet is observed from the plane direction is within 5% B: The variation of the line width of the color layer when the transfer sheet is observed from the plane direction is within 10% C: The transfer sheet The variation of the line width of the colored layer when observed from the plane direction exceeds 10%
- Example 3 Production of Release Sheet On a polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 75 ⁇ m, a resin layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied and dried to form an uncured resin layer having a thickness of 8.0 ⁇ m.
- a release layer-forming ink having the following formulation was applied over the entire surface of the obtained resin layer, and then dried at 40 ° C. for 72 hours to form a release layer having a thickness of 0.5 ⁇ m.
- Got. ⁇ Ink for forming release layer> Acrylic polyol 70 parts by mass (manufactured by Soken Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name: Thermolac SU100A) ⁇ Isocyanate 25 parts by mass (Mitsui Chemicals, trade name: Takenate D-110N) ⁇ Ethyl acetate 161 parts by mass ⁇ Methyl isobutyl ketone 56 parts by mass
- a protective layer-forming ink having the following formulation was applied so that the adhesion amount after drying was 5.0 g / m 2 to form a coating film. Then, using a fusion UV lamp system, the protective layer was semi-cured by irradiating the light source under the conditions of an H bulb, a conveyance speed of 20 m / min, and an output of 40%. The integrated light quantity at this time was 15 mJ / m 2 as measured by an illuminance meter (trade name: UVPF-A1) manufactured by Eye Graphics.
- the anchor layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied onto the protective layer so that the amount of adhesion after drying was 3.0 g / m 2, and after forming a coating film, the film was dried at 40 ° C. for 72 hours and cured. An anchor layer having a thickness of 2 ⁇ m was formed.
- an adhesive layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied onto the anchor layer so that the adhesion amount after drying was 2.5 g / m 2 to form a coating film.
- the coating film was dried to form an adhesive layer having a thickness of 2 ⁇ m to obtain a transfer sheet.
- ⁇ Ink for forming the adhesive layer > -100 parts by mass of acrylic resin (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: TM-R600, solid content 20%) (Ethyl acetate / n-propyl / methyl ethyl ketone mixed solvent) ⁇ Methyl ethyl ketone 40 parts by mass ⁇ Hydroxyphenyl triazine ultraviolet absorber 1.28 parts by mass (trade name: Tinuvin 479, manufactured by BASF)
- the colored layer forming ink 1 having the following formulation is applied onto the protruding portion in the adhesive layer by a gravure reverse printing method so that the adhesion amount after drying is 1 g / m 2 , dried, and the colored layer. And a transfer sheet of Example 1 was obtained. Table 1 shows the evaluation results of the obtained transfer sheet.
- Example 4 The transfer sheet of Example 2 was obtained in the same manner as in Example 3 except that the heat transfer using a thermal transfer sheet was used as a method for forming the colored layer. Table 1 shows the evaluation results of the obtained transfer sheet.
- thermosensitive adhesive having the following composition was dissolved in xylene and gravure coated at a rate of 20 g / m 2 on a solid basis on art paper having a thickness of 70 ⁇ m. Then, a thermal transfer image receiving sheet was prepared. Next, gravure reverse printing is performed on the surface of a 6 ⁇ m-thick polyester film having a heat-resistant layer formed on the back so that the amount of adhesion after drying colored layer forming ink 2 having the following formulation is 1.5 g / m 2. It was applied by the method and dried to prepare a thermal transfer sheet.
- An image processing system manufactured by Keyence, product name: XG-8000
- a camera unit manufactured by Keyence, product name: XG-200M
- coaxial alignment illumination was used as a light source
- the alignment mark was irradiated with light
- an image was captured using an image sensor (2 million pixel area sensor).
- the following evaluation was performed on the imaging result of the alignment mark.
- B The boundary between the convex part and the concave part can be imaged somewhat unclear.
- C The boundary between the convex part and the concave part cannot be imaged.
- Example 5 Production of Release Sheet On a polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 75 ⁇ m, a resin layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied and dried to form an uncured resin layer having a thickness of 8.0 ⁇ m.
- a release layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied over the entire surface, and then dried at 40 ° C. for 72 hours to form a release layer having a thickness of 0.5 ⁇ m.
- a release sheet was obtained.
- ⁇ Ink for forming release layer> Acrylic polyol 70 parts by mass (manufactured by Soken Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name: Thermolac SU100A) ⁇ Isocyanate 25 parts by mass (Mitsui Chemicals, trade name: Takenate D-110N) ⁇ Ethyl acetate 161 parts by mass ⁇ Methyl isobutyl ketone 56 parts by mass
- a protective layer-forming ink having the following formulation was applied so that the adhesion amount after drying was 5.0 g / m 2 to form a coating film. Then, using a fusion UV lamp system, the protective layer was semi-cured by irradiating the light source under the conditions of an H bulb, a conveyance speed of 20 m / min, and an output of 40%. The integrated light quantity at this time was 15 mJ / m 2 as measured by an illuminance meter (trade name: UVPF-A1) manufactured by Eye Graphics.
- the anchor layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied onto the protective layer so that the amount of adhesion after drying was 3.0 g / m 2, and after forming a coating film, the film was dried at 40 ° C. for 72 hours and cured. An anchor layer having a thickness of 2 ⁇ m was formed.
- an adhesive layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied onto the anchor layer so that the adhesion amount after drying was 2.5 g / m 2 to form a coating film.
- the coating film was dried to form an adhesive layer having a thickness of 2 ⁇ m to obtain a transfer sheet.
- ⁇ Ink for forming the adhesive layer > -100 parts by mass of acrylic resin (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: TM-R600, solid content 20%) (Ethyl acetate / n-propyl / methyl ethyl ketone mixed solvent) ⁇ Methyl ethyl ketone 40 parts by mass ⁇ Hydroxyphenyl triazine ultraviolet absorber 1.28 parts by mass (trade name: Tinuvin 479, manufactured by BASF)
- Examples 6 to 9, Comparative Examples 4 to 7 A second region R 2 shown in Table 1 by using a plate having a complementary shape, and at the same time the uncured resin layer to shape, by irradiating ionizing radiation a polyethylene terephthalate film side, with vehicle resin layer Except for curing, transfer sheets of Examples 6 to 9 and Comparative Examples 4 to 7 were obtained in the same manner as Example 5.
- the transfer sheet of the present invention can be suitably used for the production of decorative molded products such as communication devices such as mobile phones, information devices inside automobiles, and home appliances.
- Support 2 Resin layer 3, 3A, 3B: Protrusion 4, 4A, 4B: Peripheral protrusion 5: Concavity and convexity 6: Second protrusion 7: Second concavity and convexity 11: Base material layer 12, 12A, 12B: Colored layer 13: Release layer 14: Second colored layer 10: Release sheet 20: Transfer layer 21: Protective layer 22: Adhesive layer 23: Print layer 24: Convex portion 25: Following protrusion 30 : Colored layer 100: Transfer sheet 200: Transfer object 300: Decorated molded product
Landscapes
- Decoration By Transfer Pictures (AREA)
- Laminated Bodies (AREA)
Abstract
Provided is a transfer sheet with which a transfer layer can be transferred to an accurate position of a transfer target object. The transfer sheet includes a transfer layer on a release sheet, and the release sheet comprises: a substrate layer including, on a transfer layer-side surface,, a first region for transferring to the transfer target object and a second region for providing a positioning pattern; a protruding part within the second region of the substrate layer; and a colored layer on the protruding part. Alternatively, the transfer sheet includes a transfer layer on a release sheet, wherein: the release sheet comprises a first region for transferring to the transfer target object and a second region for providing a positioning pattern; the second region has a convex part on a transfer layer-side surface; and the transfer layer is provided with a positioning pattern part that has a following protruding part, which is formed on the basis of the convex part, on the surface on the side opposite the surface to which the release sheet is provided.
Description
本発明は、転写シート、転写シートの製造方法、及び加飾成形品の製造方法に関する。
The present invention relates to a transfer sheet, a transfer sheet manufacturing method, and a decorative molded product manufacturing method.
家庭用電化製品、自動車内装品、及び雑貨品等の分野において、転写法により物品の表面を装飾する場合がある。
転写法は、基材上に、剥離層、図柄層、接着剤層などからなる転写層を形成した転写シートを、被転写物である物品に密着させた後、基材を剥離して、被転写物表面に転写層のみを転写して装飾を行う方法である。 In the fields of household appliances, automobile interior parts, general goods, etc., the surface of an article may be decorated by a transfer method.
In the transfer method, a transfer sheet having a release layer, a design layer, an adhesive layer, or the like formed on a base material is adhered to an article to be transferred, and then the base material is peeled off. In this method, only the transfer layer is transferred to the surface of the transfer product to decorate.
転写法は、基材上に、剥離層、図柄層、接着剤層などからなる転写層を形成した転写シートを、被転写物である物品に密着させた後、基材を剥離して、被転写物表面に転写層のみを転写して装飾を行う方法である。 In the fields of household appliances, automobile interior parts, general goods, etc., the surface of an article may be decorated by a transfer method.
In the transfer method, a transfer sheet having a release layer, a design layer, an adhesive layer, or the like formed on a base material is adhered to an article to be transferred, and then the base material is peeled off. In this method, only the transfer layer is transferred to the surface of the transfer product to decorate.
転写法では、転写層の構成を調整することにより、被転写物である物品に光沢感を付与したり、あるいは、逆に、光沢感を減らしてマット感を付与したりすることができる。
例えば、特許文献1には、基体シート上に全面的にマット剤を含有する離型層と、部分的に活性エネルギー線硬化性樹脂を含有するマスク層と、転写層として剥離層と図柄層とが形成されたことを特徴とする部分マット転写シートが開示されている。 In the transfer method, by adjusting the configuration of the transfer layer, it is possible to give a glossy feeling to an article to be transferred, or conversely, to reduce the glossiness and give a matte feeling.
For example,Patent Document 1 discloses a release layer containing a matting agent entirely on a base sheet, a mask layer partially containing an active energy ray-curable resin, a release layer and a design layer as a transfer layer. A partial mat transfer sheet characterized in that is formed is disclosed.
例えば、特許文献1には、基体シート上に全面的にマット剤を含有する離型層と、部分的に活性エネルギー線硬化性樹脂を含有するマスク層と、転写層として剥離層と図柄層とが形成されたことを特徴とする部分マット転写シートが開示されている。 In the transfer method, by adjusting the configuration of the transfer layer, it is possible to give a glossy feeling to an article to be transferred, or conversely, to reduce the glossiness and give a matte feeling.
For example,
被転写物である物品の表面に転写層を転写する場合、特許文献1の段落0034に記載されているように、位置合わせが極めて重要となる。
従来から印刷分野等において、トンボと呼ばれる位置合わせ用のパターンを印刷し、該パターンをセンサーで読み取ることによって、位置合わせが行われている。転写法においても、このように位置合わせ用のパターンを印刷して、位置合わせすることが考えられる。 When the transfer layer is transferred onto the surface of the article to be transferred, alignment is extremely important as described in paragraph 0034 ofPatent Document 1.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in the printing field or the like, alignment is performed by printing a registration pattern called a registration mark and reading the pattern with a sensor. Also in the transfer method, it is conceivable to perform alignment by printing a pattern for alignment in this way.
従来から印刷分野等において、トンボと呼ばれる位置合わせ用のパターンを印刷し、該パターンをセンサーで読み取ることによって、位置合わせが行われている。転写法においても、このように位置合わせ用のパターンを印刷して、位置合わせすることが考えられる。 When the transfer layer is transferred onto the surface of the article to be transferred, alignment is extremely important as described in paragraph 0034 of
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in the printing field or the like, alignment is performed by printing a registration pattern called a registration mark and reading the pattern with a sensor. Also in the transfer method, it is conceivable to perform alignment by printing a pattern for alignment in this way.
しかし、位置合わせ用のパターンを転写シートの正確な場所に印刷することが困難であり、被転写物の正確な位置に転写層を転写することが困難であるという問題があった。
また、そもそも転写シートが完成した後に位置合わせ用のパターンを印刷する場合、工程が増えて煩雑であるという問題もある。 However, there is a problem that it is difficult to print an alignment pattern at an accurate location on the transfer sheet, and it is difficult to transfer the transfer layer to an accurate position on the transfer object.
In the first place, when the pattern for alignment is printed after the transfer sheet is completed, there is a problem that the number of processes is increased and it is complicated.
また、そもそも転写シートが完成した後に位置合わせ用のパターンを印刷する場合、工程が増えて煩雑であるという問題もある。 However, there is a problem that it is difficult to print an alignment pattern at an accurate location on the transfer sheet, and it is difficult to transfer the transfer layer to an accurate position on the transfer object.
In the first place, when the pattern for alignment is printed after the transfer sheet is completed, there is a problem that the number of processes is increased and it is complicated.
本発明は、このような実情に鑑みてなされたものであり、被転写物の正確な位置に転写層を転写できる転写シート、該転写シートの製造方法、及び該転写シートを用いた加飾成形品の製造方法を提供することを目的とする。
The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, a transfer sheet capable of transferring a transfer layer to an accurate position of a transfer object, a method for producing the transfer sheet, and decorative molding using the transfer sheet It aims at providing the manufacturing method of goods.
すなわち、本発明は、以下の[1]~[12]を提供する。
[1]離型シート上に転写層を有する転写シートであって、前記離型シートは、前記転写層側の面に第1領域及び第2領域を有する基材層を有し、前記基材層の第2領域内に突出部を有し、さらに、前記突出部上に着色層を有する、転写シート。
[2]下記(A1)~(A3)工程により離型シートを製造した後、離型シートの少なくとも一部に転写層を形成する、上記[1]に記載の転写シートの製造方法。
(A1)支持体上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む樹脂層形成用インキを塗布し、未硬化の樹脂層を形成する工程。
(A2)第1領域及び第2領域と相補的な形状を有する版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層を賦形すると同時に、電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層を硬化させ、支持体上に樹脂層が形成された基材層を得る工程。
(A3)基材層の第2領域内の突出部上に着色層を形成する工程。
[3]上記[1]に記載の転写シートの転写層を被転写物に転写する工程と、前記転写シートの前記離型シートを剥離する工程とを有する、加飾成形品の製造方法。 That is, the present invention provides the following [1] to [12].
[1] A transfer sheet having a transfer layer on a release sheet, wherein the release sheet has a base material layer having a first region and a second region on a surface on the transfer layer side, and the base material The transfer sheet which has a protrusion part in the 2nd field of a layer, and has a colored layer on the protrusion part further.
[2] The method for producing a transfer sheet according to [1], wherein the release sheet is produced by the following steps (A1) to (A3), and then a transfer layer is formed on at least a part of the release sheet.
(A1) The process of apply | coating the ink for resin layer formation containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition on a support body, and forming an uncured resin layer.
(A2) Using a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region, the uncured resin layer is shaped, and simultaneously irradiated with ionizing radiation to cure the shaped resin layer and support The process of obtaining the base material layer in which the resin layer was formed on the body.
(A3) The process of forming a colored layer on the protrusion part in the 2nd area | region of a base material layer.
[3] A method for producing a decorative molded product, comprising: a step of transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet according to the above [1] to a transfer target; and a step of peeling the release sheet of the transfer sheet.
[1]離型シート上に転写層を有する転写シートであって、前記離型シートは、前記転写層側の面に第1領域及び第2領域を有する基材層を有し、前記基材層の第2領域内に突出部を有し、さらに、前記突出部上に着色層を有する、転写シート。
[2]下記(A1)~(A3)工程により離型シートを製造した後、離型シートの少なくとも一部に転写層を形成する、上記[1]に記載の転写シートの製造方法。
(A1)支持体上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む樹脂層形成用インキを塗布し、未硬化の樹脂層を形成する工程。
(A2)第1領域及び第2領域と相補的な形状を有する版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層を賦形すると同時に、電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層を硬化させ、支持体上に樹脂層が形成された基材層を得る工程。
(A3)基材層の第2領域内の突出部上に着色層を形成する工程。
[3]上記[1]に記載の転写シートの転写層を被転写物に転写する工程と、前記転写シートの前記離型シートを剥離する工程とを有する、加飾成形品の製造方法。 That is, the present invention provides the following [1] to [12].
[1] A transfer sheet having a transfer layer on a release sheet, wherein the release sheet has a base material layer having a first region and a second region on a surface on the transfer layer side, and the base material The transfer sheet which has a protrusion part in the 2nd field of a layer, and has a colored layer on the protrusion part further.
[2] The method for producing a transfer sheet according to [1], wherein the release sheet is produced by the following steps (A1) to (A3), and then a transfer layer is formed on at least a part of the release sheet.
(A1) The process of apply | coating the ink for resin layer formation containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition on a support body, and forming an uncured resin layer.
(A2) Using a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region, the uncured resin layer is shaped, and simultaneously irradiated with ionizing radiation to cure the shaped resin layer and support The process of obtaining the base material layer in which the resin layer was formed on the body.
(A3) The process of forming a colored layer on the protrusion part in the 2nd area | region of a base material layer.
[3] A method for producing a decorative molded product, comprising: a step of transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet according to the above [1] to a transfer target; and a step of peeling the release sheet of the transfer sheet.
[4]離型シート上に転写層を有する転写シートであって、前記離型シートは、前記転写層側の面に第1領域及び第2領域を有する基材層を有し、前記基材層の前記第2領域は、突出部と、前記突出部の周辺に位置する周辺領域とを有し、前記周辺領域内には、部分的に配置された複数の周辺突出部を有し、前記突出部及び前記周辺突出部上に着色層を有する、転写シート。
[5]下記(A1)~(A3)工程により離型シートを製造した後、離型シートの少なくとも一部に転写層を形成する、上記[4]に記載の転写シートの製造方法。
(A1)支持体上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む樹脂層形成用インキを塗布し、未硬化の樹脂層を形成する工程。
(A2)第1領域及び第2領域と相補的な形状を有する版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層を賦形すると同時に、電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層を硬化させ、支持体上に樹脂層が形成された基材層を得る工程。
(A3)基材層の第2領域内の突出部及び周辺突出部上に着色層を形成する工程。
[6]上記[4]に記載の転写シートの転写層を被転写物に転写する工程と、前記転写シートの前記離型シートを剥離する工程とを有する、加飾成形品の製造方法。 [4] A transfer sheet having a transfer layer on a release sheet, the release sheet having a base material layer having a first region and a second region on a surface on the transfer layer side, and the base material The second region of the layer has a protrusion and a peripheral region located around the protrusion, and the peripheral region includes a plurality of peripheral protrusions partially disposed, The transfer sheet which has a colored layer on a protrusion part and the said periphery protrusion part.
[5] The method for producing a transfer sheet according to the above [4], wherein after the release sheet is produced by the following steps (A1) to (A3), a transfer layer is formed on at least a part of the release sheet.
(A1) The process of apply | coating the ink for resin layer formation containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition on a support body, and forming an uncured resin layer.
(A2) Using a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region, the uncured resin layer is shaped, and simultaneously irradiated with ionizing radiation to cure the shaped resin layer and support The process of obtaining the base material layer in which the resin layer was formed on the body.
(A3) The process of forming a colored layer on the protrusion part in a 2nd area | region of a base material layer, and a peripheral protrusion part.
[6] A method for producing a decorative molded product, comprising: a step of transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet according to the above [4] to a transfer target; and a step of peeling the release sheet of the transfer sheet.
[5]下記(A1)~(A3)工程により離型シートを製造した後、離型シートの少なくとも一部に転写層を形成する、上記[4]に記載の転写シートの製造方法。
(A1)支持体上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む樹脂層形成用インキを塗布し、未硬化の樹脂層を形成する工程。
(A2)第1領域及び第2領域と相補的な形状を有する版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層を賦形すると同時に、電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層を硬化させ、支持体上に樹脂層が形成された基材層を得る工程。
(A3)基材層の第2領域内の突出部及び周辺突出部上に着色層を形成する工程。
[6]上記[4]に記載の転写シートの転写層を被転写物に転写する工程と、前記転写シートの前記離型シートを剥離する工程とを有する、加飾成形品の製造方法。 [4] A transfer sheet having a transfer layer on a release sheet, the release sheet having a base material layer having a first region and a second region on a surface on the transfer layer side, and the base material The second region of the layer has a protrusion and a peripheral region located around the protrusion, and the peripheral region includes a plurality of peripheral protrusions partially disposed, The transfer sheet which has a colored layer on a protrusion part and the said periphery protrusion part.
[5] The method for producing a transfer sheet according to the above [4], wherein after the release sheet is produced by the following steps (A1) to (A3), a transfer layer is formed on at least a part of the release sheet.
(A1) The process of apply | coating the ink for resin layer formation containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition on a support body, and forming an uncured resin layer.
(A2) Using a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region, the uncured resin layer is shaped, and simultaneously irradiated with ionizing radiation to cure the shaped resin layer and support The process of obtaining the base material layer in which the resin layer was formed on the body.
(A3) The process of forming a colored layer on the protrusion part in a 2nd area | region of a base material layer, and a peripheral protrusion part.
[6] A method for producing a decorative molded product, comprising: a step of transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet according to the above [4] to a transfer target; and a step of peeling the release sheet of the transfer sheet.
[7]離型シート上に転写層を有する転写シートであって、前記離型シートは、被転写物に転写するための第1領域及び位置合わせ用パターンを設けるための第2領域を有し、前記第2領域は、前記転写層側の面側に凸部を有し、前記転写層は、前記離型シートが設けられた面の反対側の表面に前記凸部を基礎とする突出部を有する位置合わせ用パターン部を備え、前記突出部上に着色層を有する、転写シート。
[8]支持体上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む樹脂層形成用インキを塗布し、未硬化の樹脂層を形成する工程と、第1領域及び第2領域と相補的な形状を有する版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層を賦形すると同時に、電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層を硬化させる工程と、硬化させた前記樹脂層上に、離型層形成用インキを塗布し、離型層を形成する工程と、前記離型層上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む保護層形成用インキを塗布し、保護層を形成する工程と、前記保護層上に、接着剤層形成用インキを塗布し、接着剤層を形成する工程と、前記接着剤層における前記第2領域に相当する位置に形成された突出部上に、着色層形成用インキを塗布し、着色層を形成する工程と、を含む[7]に記載の転写シートの製造方法。
[9][7]に記載の転写シートの転写層を被転写物に転写する工程と、前記転写シートの前記離型シートを剥離する工程とを有する、加飾成形品の製造方法。 [7] A transfer sheet having a transfer layer on a release sheet, the release sheet having a first region for transferring to a transfer target and a second region for providing an alignment pattern. The second region has a protrusion on the surface side of the transfer layer, and the transfer layer has a protrusion on the surface opposite to the surface on which the release sheet is provided. A transfer sheet comprising an alignment pattern portion having a color layer on the protruding portion.
[8] A step of applying an ink for forming a resin layer containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition on a support to form an uncured resin layer, and a shape complementary to the first region and the second region. And forming a non-cured resin layer at the same time by irradiating with ionizing radiation to cure the shaped resin layer, and releasing layer forming ink on the cured resin layer And forming a release layer, applying a protective layer forming ink containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition on the release layer, forming a protective layer, and on the protective layer In addition, the ink for forming the adhesive layer is applied to form the adhesive layer, and the ink for forming the colored layer is applied to the protruding portion formed at the position corresponding to the second region in the adhesive layer. And a step of forming a colored layer. The method for producing a transfer sheet according to [7]
[9] A method for producing a decorative molded product, comprising: a step of transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet according to [7] to a transfer target; and a step of peeling the release sheet of the transfer sheet.
[8]支持体上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む樹脂層形成用インキを塗布し、未硬化の樹脂層を形成する工程と、第1領域及び第2領域と相補的な形状を有する版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層を賦形すると同時に、電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層を硬化させる工程と、硬化させた前記樹脂層上に、離型層形成用インキを塗布し、離型層を形成する工程と、前記離型層上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む保護層形成用インキを塗布し、保護層を形成する工程と、前記保護層上に、接着剤層形成用インキを塗布し、接着剤層を形成する工程と、前記接着剤層における前記第2領域に相当する位置に形成された突出部上に、着色層形成用インキを塗布し、着色層を形成する工程と、を含む[7]に記載の転写シートの製造方法。
[9][7]に記載の転写シートの転写層を被転写物に転写する工程と、前記転写シートの前記離型シートを剥離する工程とを有する、加飾成形品の製造方法。 [7] A transfer sheet having a transfer layer on a release sheet, the release sheet having a first region for transferring to a transfer target and a second region for providing an alignment pattern. The second region has a protrusion on the surface side of the transfer layer, and the transfer layer has a protrusion on the surface opposite to the surface on which the release sheet is provided. A transfer sheet comprising an alignment pattern portion having a color layer on the protruding portion.
[8] A step of applying an ink for forming a resin layer containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition on a support to form an uncured resin layer, and a shape complementary to the first region and the second region. And forming a non-cured resin layer at the same time by irradiating with ionizing radiation to cure the shaped resin layer, and releasing layer forming ink on the cured resin layer And forming a release layer, applying a protective layer forming ink containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition on the release layer, forming a protective layer, and on the protective layer In addition, the ink for forming the adhesive layer is applied to form the adhesive layer, and the ink for forming the colored layer is applied to the protruding portion formed at the position corresponding to the second region in the adhesive layer. And a step of forming a colored layer. The method for producing a transfer sheet according to [7]
[9] A method for producing a decorative molded product, comprising: a step of transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet according to [7] to a transfer target; and a step of peeling the release sheet of the transfer sheet.
[10]離型シート上に転写層を有する転写シートであって、前記離型シートは、被転写物に転写するための第1領域及び位置合わせ用パターンを設けるための第2領域を有する基材層を有し、前記基材層の前記第2領域には、前記転写層側の面側に凸部を有し、前記転写層は、前記離型シートとは反対側の表面に前記凸部を基礎とする追従突出部を有する位置合わせ用パターン部を備え、前記凸部の高さhは、1.0~6.0μmであり、前記凸部の端部同士の間隔dは、10~500μmである、転写シート。
[11]支持体上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む樹脂層形成用インキを塗布し、未硬化の樹脂層を形成する工程と、前記第1領域及び前記第2領域と相補的な形状を有する版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層を賦形すると同時に、電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層を硬化させる工程と、硬化させた前記樹脂層上に、離型層形成用インキを塗布し、離型層を形成する工程と、前記離型層上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む保護層形成用インキを塗布し、保護層を形成する工程と、前記保護層上に、接着剤層形成用インキを塗布し、接着剤層を形成する工程と、を含む[10]に記載の転写シートの製造方法。
[12][10]に記載の転写シートの転写層を被転写物に転写する工程と、前記転写シートの前記離型シートを剥離する工程とを有する、加飾成形品の製造方法。 [10] A transfer sheet having a transfer layer on a release sheet, the release sheet having a first region for transferring to a transfer object and a second region for providing an alignment pattern. The second layer of the base material layer has a convex portion on the surface side of the transfer layer, and the transfer layer has the convex surface on the surface opposite to the release sheet. A pattern portion for alignment having a follow-up projecting portion based on the portion, the height h of the convex portion is 1.0 to 6.0 μm, and the distance d between the end portions of the convex portion is 10 A transfer sheet having a thickness of 500 μm.
[11] Applying a resin layer forming ink containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition on a support to form an uncured resin layer; and complementary to the first region and the second region Using a plate having a shape, an uncured resin layer is shaped and simultaneously irradiated with ionizing radiation to cure the shaped resin layer, and a release layer is formed on the cured resin layer A step of applying an ink for forming a release layer, a step of applying a protective layer forming ink containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition on the release layer, and forming a protective layer; The method for producing a transfer sheet according to [10], further comprising: applying an adhesive layer forming ink on the layer to form an adhesive layer.
[12] A method for producing a decorative molded product, comprising: a step of transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet according to [10] to a transfer target; and a step of peeling the release sheet of the transfer sheet.
[11]支持体上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む樹脂層形成用インキを塗布し、未硬化の樹脂層を形成する工程と、前記第1領域及び前記第2領域と相補的な形状を有する版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層を賦形すると同時に、電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層を硬化させる工程と、硬化させた前記樹脂層上に、離型層形成用インキを塗布し、離型層を形成する工程と、前記離型層上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む保護層形成用インキを塗布し、保護層を形成する工程と、前記保護層上に、接着剤層形成用インキを塗布し、接着剤層を形成する工程と、を含む[10]に記載の転写シートの製造方法。
[12][10]に記載の転写シートの転写層を被転写物に転写する工程と、前記転写シートの前記離型シートを剥離する工程とを有する、加飾成形品の製造方法。 [10] A transfer sheet having a transfer layer on a release sheet, the release sheet having a first region for transferring to a transfer object and a second region for providing an alignment pattern. The second layer of the base material layer has a convex portion on the surface side of the transfer layer, and the transfer layer has the convex surface on the surface opposite to the release sheet. A pattern portion for alignment having a follow-up projecting portion based on the portion, the height h of the convex portion is 1.0 to 6.0 μm, and the distance d between the end portions of the convex portion is 10 A transfer sheet having a thickness of 500 μm.
[11] Applying a resin layer forming ink containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition on a support to form an uncured resin layer; and complementary to the first region and the second region Using a plate having a shape, an uncured resin layer is shaped and simultaneously irradiated with ionizing radiation to cure the shaped resin layer, and a release layer is formed on the cured resin layer A step of applying an ink for forming a release layer, a step of applying a protective layer forming ink containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition on the release layer, and forming a protective layer; The method for producing a transfer sheet according to [10], further comprising: applying an adhesive layer forming ink on the layer to form an adhesive layer.
[12] A method for producing a decorative molded product, comprising: a step of transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet according to [10] to a transfer target; and a step of peeling the release sheet of the transfer sheet.
本発明によれば、被転写物の正確な位置に転写層を転写できる転写シート、該転写シートの製造方法、及び該転写シートを用いた加飾成形品の製造方法を提供することができる。
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a transfer sheet that can transfer a transfer layer to an accurate position of a transfer object, a method for manufacturing the transfer sheet, and a method for manufacturing a decorative molded product using the transfer sheet.
以下、本発明の実施の形態を説明する。
〔第1の実施の形態〕
[転写シート]
本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る転写シートは、離型シート上に転写層を有する転写シートであって、前記離型シートは、前記転写層側の面に第1領域及び第2領域を有する基材層を有し、前記基材層の第2領域内に突出部を有し、さらに、前記突出部上に着色層を有するものである。 Embodiments of the present invention will be described below.
[First Embodiment]
[Transfer sheet]
The transfer sheet according to the first embodiment of the present invention is a transfer sheet having a transfer layer on a release sheet, and the release sheet has a first region and a second region on a surface on the transfer layer side. The substrate layer has a protruding portion in the second region of the substrate layer, and further has a colored layer on the protruding portion.
〔第1の実施の形態〕
[転写シート]
本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る転写シートは、離型シート上に転写層を有する転写シートであって、前記離型シートは、前記転写層側の面に第1領域及び第2領域を有する基材層を有し、前記基材層の第2領域内に突出部を有し、さらに、前記突出部上に着色層を有するものである。 Embodiments of the present invention will be described below.
[First Embodiment]
[Transfer sheet]
The transfer sheet according to the first embodiment of the present invention is a transfer sheet having a transfer layer on a release sheet, and the release sheet has a first region and a second region on a surface on the transfer layer side. The substrate layer has a protruding portion in the second region of the substrate layer, and further has a colored layer on the protruding portion.
図1~図4は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る転写シート100の断面図である。
図1~図4において、転写シート100は、離型シート10上に転写層20を有している。
また、図1~図4において、離型シート10は、転写層20側の面に第1領域R1及び第2領域R2を有する基材層11を有し、基材層11の第2領域R2内に突出部3を有し、さらに、突出部3上に着色層12を有している。
代表図である図1に関してより具体的に説明すると、離型シート10は、支持体1、樹脂層2及び突出部3を含む基材層11、着色層12及び離型層13から構成されている。また、転写層20は、保護層21、接着剤層22及び印刷層23から構成されている。
なお、図1~図4は本発明の転写シートの実施の形態であり、本発明の転写シートは図1~図4の構成に限定されない。 1 to 4 are sectional views of atransfer sheet 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
1 to 4, thetransfer sheet 100 has a transfer layer 20 on a release sheet 10.
1 to 4, therelease sheet 10 includes a base material layer 11 having a first region R 1 and a second region R 2 on the surface on the transfer layer 20 side, and the second base material layer 11 has a second layer. The protrusion 3 is provided in the region R 2 , and the colored layer 12 is further provided on the protrusion 3.
Describing more specifically with respect to FIG. 1 which is a representative view, therelease sheet 10 is composed of a support 1, a base material layer 11 including a resin layer 2 and a protruding portion 3, a colored layer 12 and a release layer 13. Yes. The transfer layer 20 includes a protective layer 21, an adhesive layer 22, and a print layer 23.
1 to 4 show an embodiment of the transfer sheet of the present invention, and the transfer sheet of the present invention is not limited to the configuration of FIGS.
図1~図4において、転写シート100は、離型シート10上に転写層20を有している。
また、図1~図4において、離型シート10は、転写層20側の面に第1領域R1及び第2領域R2を有する基材層11を有し、基材層11の第2領域R2内に突出部3を有し、さらに、突出部3上に着色層12を有している。
代表図である図1に関してより具体的に説明すると、離型シート10は、支持体1、樹脂層2及び突出部3を含む基材層11、着色層12及び離型層13から構成されている。また、転写層20は、保護層21、接着剤層22及び印刷層23から構成されている。
なお、図1~図4は本発明の転写シートの実施の形態であり、本発明の転写シートは図1~図4の構成に限定されない。 1 to 4 are sectional views of a
1 to 4, the
1 to 4, the
Describing more specifically with respect to FIG. 1 which is a representative view, the
1 to 4 show an embodiment of the transfer sheet of the present invention, and the transfer sheet of the present invention is not limited to the configuration of FIGS.
<離型シート>
離型シートは、転写層側の面に第1領域及び第2領域を有する基材層を有し、基材層の第2領域内に突出部を有し、さらに、突出部上に着色層を有するものである。離型シートは、樹脂成形体等の被転写物に転写層を転写した後に剥離される。 <Release sheet>
The release sheet has a base material layer having a first region and a second region on the surface on the transfer layer side, a protrusion in the second region of the base material layer, and a colored layer on the protrusion It is what has. The release sheet is peeled off after the transfer layer is transferred to a transfer object such as a resin molded body.
離型シートは、転写層側の面に第1領域及び第2領域を有する基材層を有し、基材層の第2領域内に突出部を有し、さらに、突出部上に着色層を有するものである。離型シートは、樹脂成形体等の被転写物に転写層を転写した後に剥離される。 <Release sheet>
The release sheet has a base material layer having a first region and a second region on the surface on the transfer layer side, a protrusion in the second region of the base material layer, and a colored layer on the protrusion It is what has. The release sheet is peeled off after the transfer layer is transferred to a transfer object such as a resin molded body.
(基材層)
基材層11は、図1~図4に示すように、転写層20側の面に第1領域R1及び第2領域R2を有する。また、基材層11は、図3~図4に示すように、転写層20側の面に、さらにその他の領域Rnを有していてもよい。 (Base material layer)
Base layer 11, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, having a first region R 1 and the second region R 2 on the surface of the transfer layer 20 side. Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 to 4, the base material layer 11 may further have another region R n on the surface on the transfer layer 20 side.
基材層11は、図1~図4に示すように、転写層20側の面に第1領域R1及び第2領域R2を有する。また、基材層11は、図3~図4に示すように、転写層20側の面に、さらにその他の領域Rnを有していてもよい。 (Base material layer)
基材層11は、例えば、図1~図4に示すように、支持体1及び樹脂層2から形成される。もちろん、基材層11は、支持体1もしくは樹脂層2の単層でもよいし、支持体1及び樹脂層2以外の層を有する3層以上の構成であってもよい。
The base material layer 11 is formed of, for example, a support 1 and a resin layer 2 as shown in FIGS. Of course, the base material layer 11 may be a single layer of the support 1 or the resin layer 2 or may have a configuration of three or more layers having layers other than the support 1 and the resin layer 2.
基材層11を構成する支持体1としては、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレンなどのポリオレフィン系樹脂、ポリ塩化ビニル、ポリ塩化ビニリデン、ポリビニルアルコール、エチレン・酢酸ビニル共重合体、エチレン・ビニルアルコール共重合体などのビニル系樹脂、ポリエチレンテレフタレート、ポリエチレンナフタレート、ポリブチレンテレフタレートなどのポリエステル系樹脂、ポリ(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、ポリ(メタ)アクリル酸エチルなどのアクリル系樹脂、ポリスチレン等のスチレン系樹脂、ナイロン6又はナイロン66などで代表されるポリアミド系樹脂などの樹脂からなるプラスチックフィルムが挙げられる。
これらのプラスチックフィルムの中では、耐熱性、寸法安定性に優れ、位置合わせの適性に優れる2軸延伸ポリエステルフィルムが好適である。 Examples of thesupport 1 constituting the base layer 11 include polyolefin resins such as polyethylene and polypropylene, polyvinyl chloride, polyvinylidene chloride, polyvinyl alcohol, ethylene / vinyl acetate copolymer, ethylene / vinyl alcohol copolymer, and the like. Polyester resins such as vinyl resins, polyethylene terephthalate, polyethylene naphthalate, polybutylene terephthalate, acrylic resins such as poly (meth) methyl acrylate and poly (meth) ethyl acrylate, styrene resins such as polystyrene, nylon 6 Alternatively, a plastic film made of a resin such as a polyamide-based resin typified by nylon 66 can be used.
Among these plastic films, a biaxially stretched polyester film that is excellent in heat resistance, dimensional stability, and alignment suitability is suitable.
これらのプラスチックフィルムの中では、耐熱性、寸法安定性に優れ、位置合わせの適性に優れる2軸延伸ポリエステルフィルムが好適である。 Examples of the
Among these plastic films, a biaxially stretched polyester film that is excellent in heat resistance, dimensional stability, and alignment suitability is suitable.
支持体1の厚さは、成形性、形状追従性、取り扱いの観点から、12~150μmであることが好ましく、25~100μmであることがより好ましい。
また、支持体1の表面には、樹脂層2等との接着性を高めるために、コロナ放電処理、酸化処理等の物理的な処理や、アンカー剤又はプライマーと呼ばれる塗料の塗布を予め行ってもよい。 The thickness of thesupport 1 is preferably 12 to 150 μm, and more preferably 25 to 100 μm, from the viewpoints of moldability, shape followability, and handling.
The surface of thesupport 1 is preliminarily subjected to physical treatment such as corona discharge treatment and oxidation treatment and application of a paint called an anchor agent or a primer in order to enhance the adhesion with the resin layer 2 and the like. Also good.
また、支持体1の表面には、樹脂層2等との接着性を高めるために、コロナ放電処理、酸化処理等の物理的な処理や、アンカー剤又はプライマーと呼ばれる塗料の塗布を予め行ってもよい。 The thickness of the
The surface of the
(樹脂層)
樹脂層2は、主として、熱可塑性樹脂、熱硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物等の樹脂成分から構成することが好ましい。樹脂層2の形成に用いられる樹脂成分は、固形分が20~100質量%であることが好ましく、25~95質量%であることがより好ましく、30~90質量%であることがさらに好ましい。
上記の樹脂成分の中でも、強度に優れるとともに、瞬時に硬化するため正確かつ精密な形状を付与できる電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物が好適である。また、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物による効果を得やすくする観点から、樹脂層2を構成する全樹脂成分のうち、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物を70質量%以上含むことが好ましく、90質量%以上含むことがより好ましく、95質量%以上含むことがさらに好ましく、100質量%含むことがよりさらに好ましい。 (Resin layer)
Theresin layer 2 is preferably composed mainly of resin components such as a thermoplastic resin, a cured product of a thermosetting resin composition, and a cured product of an ionizing radiation curable resin composition. The resin component used for forming the resin layer 2 preferably has a solid content of 20 to 100% by mass, more preferably 25 to 95% by mass, and even more preferably 30 to 90% by mass.
Among the above resin components, a cured product of an ionizing radiation curable resin composition that is excellent in strength and capable of giving an accurate and precise shape because it is instantly cured is preferable. In addition, from the viewpoint of easily obtaining the effect of the ionizing radiation curable resin composition, it is preferable to include 70 mass% or more of a cured product of the ionizing radiation curable resin composition among all the resin components constituting theresin layer 2. More preferably, 90% by mass or more is included, more preferably 95% by mass or more, and even more preferably 100% by mass.
樹脂層2は、主として、熱可塑性樹脂、熱硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物等の樹脂成分から構成することが好ましい。樹脂層2の形成に用いられる樹脂成分は、固形分が20~100質量%であることが好ましく、25~95質量%であることがより好ましく、30~90質量%であることがさらに好ましい。
上記の樹脂成分の中でも、強度に優れるとともに、瞬時に硬化するため正確かつ精密な形状を付与できる電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物が好適である。また、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物による効果を得やすくする観点から、樹脂層2を構成する全樹脂成分のうち、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物を70質量%以上含むことが好ましく、90質量%以上含むことがより好ましく、95質量%以上含むことがさらに好ましく、100質量%含むことがよりさらに好ましい。 (Resin layer)
The
Among the above resin components, a cured product of an ionizing radiation curable resin composition that is excellent in strength and capable of giving an accurate and precise shape because it is instantly cured is preferable. In addition, from the viewpoint of easily obtaining the effect of the ionizing radiation curable resin composition, it is preferable to include 70 mass% or more of a cured product of the ionizing radiation curable resin composition among all the resin components constituting the
樹脂層2は、コーティングにより形成してもよいが、正確にかつ精密な形状を形成する観点から、第1領域及び第2領域と相補的な形状を有する版を用いた印刷により形成することが好ましい。樹脂層2がその他の領域を有する場合、該版は、さらに、その他の領域と相補的な形状を有することが好ましい。版を用いた樹脂層2の形成方法の詳細は後述する。
The resin layer 2 may be formed by coating, but from the viewpoint of forming an accurate and precise shape, the resin layer 2 may be formed by printing using a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region. preferable. When the resin layer 2 has other regions, it is preferable that the plate further has a shape complementary to the other regions. Details of the method of forming the resin layer 2 using a plate will be described later.
熱可塑性樹脂としては、アクリル系樹脂、セルロース系樹脂、ウレタン系樹脂、塩化ビニル系樹脂、ポリエステル系樹脂、ポリオレフィン系樹脂、ポリカーボネート、ナイロン、ポリスチレン及びABS樹脂等が挙げられる。
熱硬化性樹脂組成物は、少なくとも熱硬化性樹脂を含む組成物であり、加熱により、硬化する樹脂組成物である。熱硬化性樹脂としては、アクリル系樹脂、ウレタン系樹脂、フェノール系樹脂、尿素メラミン系樹脂、エポキシ系樹脂、不飽和ポリエステル系樹脂、シリコーン系樹脂等が挙げられる。熱硬化性樹脂組成物には、これら硬化性樹脂に、必要に応じて硬化剤が添加される。 Examples of the thermoplastic resin include acrylic resins, cellulose resins, urethane resins, vinyl chloride resins, polyester resins, polyolefin resins, polycarbonate, nylon, polystyrene, and ABS resins.
The thermosetting resin composition is a composition containing at least a thermosetting resin, and is a resin composition that is cured by heating. Examples of the thermosetting resin include acrylic resins, urethane resins, phenol resins, urea melamine resins, epoxy resins, unsaturated polyester resins, silicone resins, and the like. In the thermosetting resin composition, a curing agent is added to these curable resins as necessary.
熱硬化性樹脂組成物は、少なくとも熱硬化性樹脂を含む組成物であり、加熱により、硬化する樹脂組成物である。熱硬化性樹脂としては、アクリル系樹脂、ウレタン系樹脂、フェノール系樹脂、尿素メラミン系樹脂、エポキシ系樹脂、不飽和ポリエステル系樹脂、シリコーン系樹脂等が挙げられる。熱硬化性樹脂組成物には、これら硬化性樹脂に、必要に応じて硬化剤が添加される。 Examples of the thermoplastic resin include acrylic resins, cellulose resins, urethane resins, vinyl chloride resins, polyester resins, polyolefin resins, polycarbonate, nylon, polystyrene, and ABS resins.
The thermosetting resin composition is a composition containing at least a thermosetting resin, and is a resin composition that is cured by heating. Examples of the thermosetting resin include acrylic resins, urethane resins, phenol resins, urea melamine resins, epoxy resins, unsaturated polyester resins, silicone resins, and the like. In the thermosetting resin composition, a curing agent is added to these curable resins as necessary.
電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物は、電離放射線硬化性官能基を有する化合物(以下、「電離放射線硬化性化合物」ともいう)を含む組成物である。電離放射線硬化性官能基としては、(メタ)アクリロイル基、ビニル基、アリル基等のエチレン性不飽和結合基、及びエポキシ基、オキセタニル基等が挙げられる。
電離放射線硬化性樹脂としては、エチレン性不飽和結合基を有する化合物が好ましい。また、転写シートを製造する過程で樹脂層が傷つくことを抑制する観点からは、電離放射線硬化性樹脂としては、エチレン性不飽和結合基を2つ以上有する化合物がより好ましく、中でも、エチレン性不飽和結合基を2つ以上有する、多官能性(メタ)アクリレート系化合物が更に好ましい。多官能性(メタ)アクリレート系化合物としては、モノマー及びオリゴマーのいずれも用いることができる。
なお、電離放射線とは、電磁波又は荷電粒子線のうち、分子を重合又は架橋し得るエネルギー量子を有するものを意味し、通常、紫外線(UV)又は電子線(EB)が用いられるが、その他、X線、γ線等の電磁波、α線、イオン線等の荷電粒子線も使用可能である。 The ionizing radiation curable resin composition is a composition containing a compound having an ionizing radiation curable functional group (hereinafter also referred to as “ionizing radiation curable compound”). Examples of the ionizing radiation curable functional group include an ethylenically unsaturated bond group such as a (meth) acryloyl group, a vinyl group, and an allyl group, an epoxy group, and an oxetanyl group.
As the ionizing radiation curable resin, a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group is preferable. Further, from the viewpoint of suppressing damage to the resin layer in the process of producing a transfer sheet, the ionizing radiation curable resin is more preferably a compound having two or more ethylenically unsaturated bond groups, and in particular, an ethylenically unsaturated group. A polyfunctional (meth) acrylate compound having two or more saturated bonding groups is more preferable. As the polyfunctional (meth) acrylate compound, any of a monomer and an oligomer can be used.
The ionizing radiation means an electromagnetic wave or a charged particle beam having an energy quantum capable of polymerizing or cross-linking molecules, and usually ultraviolet (UV) or electron beam (EB) is used. Electromagnetic waves such as X-rays and γ-rays, and charged particle beams such as α-rays and ion beams can also be used.
電離放射線硬化性樹脂としては、エチレン性不飽和結合基を有する化合物が好ましい。また、転写シートを製造する過程で樹脂層が傷つくことを抑制する観点からは、電離放射線硬化性樹脂としては、エチレン性不飽和結合基を2つ以上有する化合物がより好ましく、中でも、エチレン性不飽和結合基を2つ以上有する、多官能性(メタ)アクリレート系化合物が更に好ましい。多官能性(メタ)アクリレート系化合物としては、モノマー及びオリゴマーのいずれも用いることができる。
なお、電離放射線とは、電磁波又は荷電粒子線のうち、分子を重合又は架橋し得るエネルギー量子を有するものを意味し、通常、紫外線(UV)又は電子線(EB)が用いられるが、その他、X線、γ線等の電磁波、α線、イオン線等の荷電粒子線も使用可能である。 The ionizing radiation curable resin composition is a composition containing a compound having an ionizing radiation curable functional group (hereinafter also referred to as “ionizing radiation curable compound”). Examples of the ionizing radiation curable functional group include an ethylenically unsaturated bond group such as a (meth) acryloyl group, a vinyl group, and an allyl group, an epoxy group, and an oxetanyl group.
As the ionizing radiation curable resin, a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond group is preferable. Further, from the viewpoint of suppressing damage to the resin layer in the process of producing a transfer sheet, the ionizing radiation curable resin is more preferably a compound having two or more ethylenically unsaturated bond groups, and in particular, an ethylenically unsaturated group. A polyfunctional (meth) acrylate compound having two or more saturated bonding groups is more preferable. As the polyfunctional (meth) acrylate compound, any of a monomer and an oligomer can be used.
The ionizing radiation means an electromagnetic wave or a charged particle beam having an energy quantum capable of polymerizing or cross-linking molecules, and usually ultraviolet (UV) or electron beam (EB) is used. Electromagnetic waves such as X-rays and γ-rays, and charged particle beams such as α-rays and ion beams can also be used.
多官能性(メタ)アクリレート系化合物のうち、2官能(メタ)アクリレート系モノマーとしては、エチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ビスフェノールAテトラエトキシジアクリレート、ビスフェノールAテトラプロポキシジアクリレート、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジアクリレート等が挙げられる。
3官能以上の(メタ)アクリレート系モノマーとしては、例えば、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、イソシアヌル酸変性トリ(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。
また、上記(メタ)アクリレート系モノマーは、分子骨格の一部を変性しているものでもよく、エチレンオキサイド、プロピレンオキサイド、カプロラクトン、イソシアヌル酸、アルキル、環状アルキル、芳香族、ビスフェノール等による変性がなされたものも使用することができる。 Among the polyfunctional (meth) acrylate compounds, bifunctional (meth) acrylate monomers include ethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, bisphenol A tetraethoxydiacrylate, bisphenol A tetrapropoxydiacrylate, and 1,6-hexane. Examples thereof include diol diacrylate.
Examples of the tri- or higher functional (meth) acrylate monomer include trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, di Examples include pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate and isocyanuric acid-modified tri (meth) acrylate.
The (meth) acrylate-based monomer may be modified by partially modifying the molecular skeleton, and is modified with ethylene oxide, propylene oxide, caprolactone, isocyanuric acid, alkyl, cyclic alkyl, aromatic, bisphenol, or the like. Can also be used.
3官能以上の(メタ)アクリレート系モノマーとしては、例えば、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、イソシアヌル酸変性トリ(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。
また、上記(メタ)アクリレート系モノマーは、分子骨格の一部を変性しているものでもよく、エチレンオキサイド、プロピレンオキサイド、カプロラクトン、イソシアヌル酸、アルキル、環状アルキル、芳香族、ビスフェノール等による変性がなされたものも使用することができる。 Among the polyfunctional (meth) acrylate compounds, bifunctional (meth) acrylate monomers include ethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, bisphenol A tetraethoxydiacrylate, bisphenol A tetrapropoxydiacrylate, and 1,6-hexane. Examples thereof include diol diacrylate.
Examples of the tri- or higher functional (meth) acrylate monomer include trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, di Examples include pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate and isocyanuric acid-modified tri (meth) acrylate.
The (meth) acrylate-based monomer may be modified by partially modifying the molecular skeleton, and is modified with ethylene oxide, propylene oxide, caprolactone, isocyanuric acid, alkyl, cyclic alkyl, aromatic, bisphenol, or the like. Can also be used.
また、多官能性(メタ)アクリレート系オリゴマーとしては、ウレタン(メタ)アクリレート、エポキシ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリエステル(メタ)アクリレート、ポリエーテル(メタ)アクリレート等のアクリレート系重合体等が挙げられる。
ウレタン(メタ)アクリレートは、例えば、多価アルコール及び有機ジイソシアネートとヒドロキシ(メタ)アクリレートとの反応によって得られる。
また、好ましいエポキシ(メタ)アクリレートは、3官能以上の芳香族エポキシ樹脂、脂環族エポキシ樹脂、脂肪族エポキシ樹脂等と(メタ)アクリル酸とを反応させて得られる(メタ)アクリレート、2官能以上の芳香族エポキシ樹脂、脂環族エポキシ樹脂、脂肪族エポキシ樹脂等と多塩基酸と(メタ)アクリル酸とを反応させて得られる(メタ)アクリレート、及び2官能以上の芳香族エポキシ樹脂、脂環族エポキシ樹脂、脂肪族エポキシ樹脂等とフェノール類と(メタ)アクリル酸とを反応させて得られる(メタ)アクリレートである。
上記電離放射線硬化性樹脂は1種を単独で、又は2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。 Moreover, examples of the polyfunctional (meth) acrylate oligomer include acrylate polymers such as urethane (meth) acrylate, epoxy (meth) acrylate, polyester (meth) acrylate, and polyether (meth) acrylate.
Urethane (meth) acrylate is obtained by reaction of polyhydric alcohol and organic diisocyanate with hydroxy (meth) acrylate, for example.
A preferable epoxy (meth) acrylate is a (meth) acrylate obtained by reacting (meth) acrylic acid with a tri- or higher functional aromatic epoxy resin, alicyclic epoxy resin, aliphatic epoxy resin or the like. (Meth) acrylates obtained by reacting the above aromatic epoxy resins, alicyclic epoxy resins, aliphatic epoxy resins and the like with polybasic acids and (meth) acrylic acid, and bifunctional or higher functional aromatic epoxy resins, It is a (meth) acrylate obtained by reacting an alicyclic epoxy resin, an aliphatic epoxy resin or the like with a phenol and (meth) acrylic acid.
The ionizing radiation curable resin can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
ウレタン(メタ)アクリレートは、例えば、多価アルコール及び有機ジイソシアネートとヒドロキシ(メタ)アクリレートとの反応によって得られる。
また、好ましいエポキシ(メタ)アクリレートは、3官能以上の芳香族エポキシ樹脂、脂環族エポキシ樹脂、脂肪族エポキシ樹脂等と(メタ)アクリル酸とを反応させて得られる(メタ)アクリレート、2官能以上の芳香族エポキシ樹脂、脂環族エポキシ樹脂、脂肪族エポキシ樹脂等と多塩基酸と(メタ)アクリル酸とを反応させて得られる(メタ)アクリレート、及び2官能以上の芳香族エポキシ樹脂、脂環族エポキシ樹脂、脂肪族エポキシ樹脂等とフェノール類と(メタ)アクリル酸とを反応させて得られる(メタ)アクリレートである。
上記電離放射線硬化性樹脂は1種を単独で、又は2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。 Moreover, examples of the polyfunctional (meth) acrylate oligomer include acrylate polymers such as urethane (meth) acrylate, epoxy (meth) acrylate, polyester (meth) acrylate, and polyether (meth) acrylate.
Urethane (meth) acrylate is obtained by reaction of polyhydric alcohol and organic diisocyanate with hydroxy (meth) acrylate, for example.
A preferable epoxy (meth) acrylate is a (meth) acrylate obtained by reacting (meth) acrylic acid with a tri- or higher functional aromatic epoxy resin, alicyclic epoxy resin, aliphatic epoxy resin or the like. (Meth) acrylates obtained by reacting the above aromatic epoxy resins, alicyclic epoxy resins, aliphatic epoxy resins and the like with polybasic acids and (meth) acrylic acid, and bifunctional or higher functional aromatic epoxy resins, It is a (meth) acrylate obtained by reacting an alicyclic epoxy resin, an aliphatic epoxy resin or the like with a phenol and (meth) acrylic acid.
The ionizing radiation curable resin can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
電離放射線硬化性樹脂が紫外線硬化性樹脂である場合には、樹脂層形成用インキは、光重合開始剤や光重合促進剤等の添加剤を含むことが好ましい。
光重合開始剤としては、アセトフェノン、ベンゾフェノン、α-ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン、ミヒラーケトン、ベンゾイン、ベンジルジメチルケタール、ベンゾイルベンゾエート、α-アシルオキシムエステル、チオキサンソン類等から選ばれる1種以上が挙げられる。
また、光重合促進剤は、硬化時の空気による重合阻害を軽減させ硬化速度を速めることができるものであり、例えば、p-ジメチルアミノ安息香酸イソアミルエステル、p-ジメチルアミノ安息香酸エチルエステル等から選ばれる1種以上が挙げられる。 When the ionizing radiation curable resin is an ultraviolet curable resin, the resin layer forming ink preferably contains additives such as a photopolymerization initiator and a photopolymerization accelerator.
Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include one or more selected from acetophenone, benzophenone, α-hydroxyalkylphenone, Michler's ketone, benzoin, benzyldimethyl ketal, benzoylbenzoate, α-acyloxime ester, thioxanthones and the like.
The photopolymerization accelerator can reduce polymerization inhibition by air during curing and increase the curing speed. For example, p-dimethylaminobenzoic acid isoamyl ester, p-dimethylaminobenzoic acid ethyl ester, etc. One or more selected may be mentioned.
光重合開始剤としては、アセトフェノン、ベンゾフェノン、α-ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン、ミヒラーケトン、ベンゾイン、ベンジルジメチルケタール、ベンゾイルベンゾエート、α-アシルオキシムエステル、チオキサンソン類等から選ばれる1種以上が挙げられる。
また、光重合促進剤は、硬化時の空気による重合阻害を軽減させ硬化速度を速めることができるものであり、例えば、p-ジメチルアミノ安息香酸イソアミルエステル、p-ジメチルアミノ安息香酸エチルエステル等から選ばれる1種以上が挙げられる。 When the ionizing radiation curable resin is an ultraviolet curable resin, the resin layer forming ink preferably contains additives such as a photopolymerization initiator and a photopolymerization accelerator.
Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include one or more selected from acetophenone, benzophenone, α-hydroxyalkylphenone, Michler's ketone, benzoin, benzyldimethyl ketal, benzoylbenzoate, α-acyloxime ester, thioxanthones and the like.
The photopolymerization accelerator can reduce polymerization inhibition by air during curing and increase the curing speed. For example, p-dimethylaminobenzoic acid isoamyl ester, p-dimethylaminobenzoic acid ethyl ester, etc. One or more selected may be mentioned.
樹脂層の厚さ(t)は、特に限定されないが、1~15μmであることが好ましく、2~12μmであることがより好ましく、3~10μmであることがさらに好ましい。
The thickness (t) of the resin layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 15 μm, more preferably 2 to 12 μm, and further preferably 3 to 10 μm.
(第1領域)
基材層の第1領域の表面形状は特に限定されない。例えば、基材層11の第1領域R1の表面形状は、図1のように略平滑であってもよいし、図2~図4のように凹凸形状であってもよい。
図1のように、基材層11の第1領域R1の表面形状が略平滑である場合、被転写物に転写した転写層20の表面形状を略平滑にすることができ、得られる加飾成形品の光沢を高くすることができる。
また、図2~図4のように、第1領域R1内に凹凸部5を有する場合、被転写物には、該凹凸部の相補的形状を有する転写層20(凹凸部5上に離型層13を有する場合、離型層13によって緩和された凹凸形状の相補的形状を有する転写層20)が転写され、得られる加飾成形品の表面に凹凸形状を付与することができる。 (First area)
The surface shape of the first region of the base material layer is not particularly limited. For example, the surface shape of the first region R 1 of thebase layer 11 may be a substantially smooth as shown in FIG. 1, or may be uneven as in FIGS. 2-4.
As in FIG. 1, when the surface shape of the first region R 1 of thebase layer 11 is substantially smooth, it can be made substantially smooth surface shape of the transfer layer 20 has been transferred to the transfer target, the resulting pressure The gloss of the decorative molded product can be increased.
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, when the first region R 1 has the concavo-convex portion 5, the transferred material has a transfer layer 20 having a shape complementary to the concavo-convex portion (on the concavo-convex portion 5. In the case of having the mold layer 13, the transfer layer 20) having a concavo-convex complementary shape relaxed by the release layer 13 is transferred, and the concavo-convex shape can be imparted to the surface of the resulting decorative molded product.
基材層の第1領域の表面形状は特に限定されない。例えば、基材層11の第1領域R1の表面形状は、図1のように略平滑であってもよいし、図2~図4のように凹凸形状であってもよい。
図1のように、基材層11の第1領域R1の表面形状が略平滑である場合、被転写物に転写した転写層20の表面形状を略平滑にすることができ、得られる加飾成形品の光沢を高くすることができる。
また、図2~図4のように、第1領域R1内に凹凸部5を有する場合、被転写物には、該凹凸部の相補的形状を有する転写層20(凹凸部5上に離型層13を有する場合、離型層13によって緩和された凹凸形状の相補的形状を有する転写層20)が転写され、得られる加飾成形品の表面に凹凸形状を付与することができる。 (First area)
The surface shape of the first region of the base material layer is not particularly limited. For example, the surface shape of the first region R 1 of the
As in FIG. 1, when the surface shape of the first region R 1 of the
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, when the first region R 1 has the concavo-
第1領域内に凹凸部を有する場合、凹凸部と後述する突出部とが、[凹凸部の最大高さ<突出部の高さ]の関係を満たすことが好ましい。該関係を満たすことにより、着色層を突出部の頂部に優先して付着させやすくすることができ、位置合わせを正確に行うことができる。
同様の観点から、[第1領域の凹凸部の最大高さ/突出部の高さ]は、0.50以下であることが好ましく、0.40以下であることがより好ましい。また、同様の観点から、[第1領域の凹凸部の平均粗さ/突出部の高さ]は、0.20以下であることが好ましく、0.15以下であることがより好ましい。
突出部を複数有する場合、全ての突出部が上記関係を満たすことが好ましい。
なお、本明細書において、最大高さは、カットオフ値0.8mmにおけるJIS B0601:2001の最大高さ粗さRzを意味し、平均粗さは、カットオフ値0.8mmにおけるJIS B0601:2001の算術平均粗さRaを意味する。
また、本明細書において、高さ、粗さ、幅、厚さに関する数値は、特に断りのない限り、10回測定した値の平均値とする。 When it has an uneven | corrugated | grooved part in a 1st area | region, it is preferable that an uneven | corrugated | grooved part and the protrusion part mentioned later satisfy | fill the relationship of [the maximum height of an uneven | corrugated part <the height of a protrusion part]. By satisfying this relationship, the colored layer can be easily adhered to the top of the protruding portion, and alignment can be performed accurately.
From the same viewpoint, [the maximum height of the uneven portion in the first region / the height of the protruding portion] is preferably 0.50 or less, and more preferably 0.40 or less. From the same viewpoint, the [average roughness of the uneven portion in the first region / height of the protruding portion] is preferably 0.20 or less, and more preferably 0.15 or less.
When there are a plurality of protrusions, it is preferable that all the protrusions satisfy the above relationship.
In the present specification, the maximum height means the maximum height roughness Rz of JIS B0601: 2001 at a cutoff value of 0.8 mm, and the average roughness means JIS B0601: 2001 at a cutoff value of 0.8 mm. Means the arithmetic average roughness Ra.
In the present specification, numerical values related to height, roughness, width, and thickness are average values of values measured ten times unless otherwise specified.
同様の観点から、[第1領域の凹凸部の最大高さ/突出部の高さ]は、0.50以下であることが好ましく、0.40以下であることがより好ましい。また、同様の観点から、[第1領域の凹凸部の平均粗さ/突出部の高さ]は、0.20以下であることが好ましく、0.15以下であることがより好ましい。
突出部を複数有する場合、全ての突出部が上記関係を満たすことが好ましい。
なお、本明細書において、最大高さは、カットオフ値0.8mmにおけるJIS B0601:2001の最大高さ粗さRzを意味し、平均粗さは、カットオフ値0.8mmにおけるJIS B0601:2001の算術平均粗さRaを意味する。
また、本明細書において、高さ、粗さ、幅、厚さに関する数値は、特に断りのない限り、10回測定した値の平均値とする。 When it has an uneven | corrugated | grooved part in a 1st area | region, it is preferable that an uneven | corrugated | grooved part and the protrusion part mentioned later satisfy | fill the relationship of [the maximum height of an uneven | corrugated part <the height of a protrusion part]. By satisfying this relationship, the colored layer can be easily adhered to the top of the protruding portion, and alignment can be performed accurately.
From the same viewpoint, [the maximum height of the uneven portion in the first region / the height of the protruding portion] is preferably 0.50 or less, and more preferably 0.40 or less. From the same viewpoint, the [average roughness of the uneven portion in the first region / height of the protruding portion] is preferably 0.20 or less, and more preferably 0.15 or less.
When there are a plurality of protrusions, it is preferable that all the protrusions satisfy the above relationship.
In the present specification, the maximum height means the maximum height roughness Rz of JIS B0601: 2001 at a cutoff value of 0.8 mm, and the average roughness means JIS B0601: 2001 at a cutoff value of 0.8 mm. Means the arithmetic average roughness Ra.
In the present specification, numerical values related to height, roughness, width, and thickness are average values of values measured ten times unless otherwise specified.
加飾成形品に付与する表面形状は目的に応じて異なるため、第1領域内の凹凸の程度の絶対値は特に限定されないが、最大高さ粗さRzは0.2~4.0μm程度とすることが好ましい。同様に、算術平均粗さRaは0.05~2.0μm程度とすることが好ましい。
Since the surface shape imparted to the decorative molded product varies depending on the purpose, the absolute value of the degree of unevenness in the first region is not particularly limited, but the maximum height roughness Rz is about 0.2 to 4.0 μm. It is preferable to do. Similarly, the arithmetic average roughness Ra is preferably about 0.05 to 2.0 μm.
(第2領域)
図1~図4に示すように、離型シート10は、基材層11の第2領域R2内に突出部3を有し、さらに、突出部3上に着色層12を有する。
図1~図7に示すように、第2領域R2と、上述した第1領域R1とは、離型シート10の幅方向(TD:Transverse Direction)の異なる場所に形成されていることが好ましい。第2領域R2と、第1領域R1とを前述したような配置とすることにより、第1領域R1に着色層12を形成しない一方で、第2領域R2の突出部3上に着色層12を形成しやすくできる。
なお、図5~図7は、転写層を通して、離型シートの表面が見えている状態を図示している。 (Second area)
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, therelease sheet 10 has a protruding portion 3 in the second region R 2 of the base material layer 11, and further has a colored layer 12 on the protruding portion 3.
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 7, the second region R 2 and the first region R 1 described above are formed at different locations in the width direction (TD: Transverse Direction) of therelease sheet 10. preferable. By arranging the second region R 2 and the first region R 1 as described above, the colored layer 12 is not formed in the first region R 1, but on the protruding portion 3 of the second region R 2. The colored layer 12 can be easily formed.
5 to 7 show a state in which the surface of the release sheet is visible through the transfer layer.
図1~図4に示すように、離型シート10は、基材層11の第2領域R2内に突出部3を有し、さらに、突出部3上に着色層12を有する。
図1~図7に示すように、第2領域R2と、上述した第1領域R1とは、離型シート10の幅方向(TD:Transverse Direction)の異なる場所に形成されていることが好ましい。第2領域R2と、第1領域R1とを前述したような配置とすることにより、第1領域R1に着色層12を形成しない一方で、第2領域R2の突出部3上に着色層12を形成しやすくできる。
なお、図5~図7は、転写層を通して、離型シートの表面が見えている状態を図示している。 (Second area)
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 7, the second region R 2 and the first region R 1 described above are formed at different locations in the width direction (TD: Transverse Direction) of the
5 to 7 show a state in which the surface of the release sheet is visible through the transfer layer.
第2領域の突出部及び着色層を有する箇所は、光透過率ないしは光反射率が周辺の箇所と異なる。この光透過率ないしは光反射率のコントラストを利用して、任意の工程において転写シートの位置合わせが可能となる。なお、光透過率は、正透過方向の透過率、拡散透過率及び全透過率の何れを利用してもよい。同様に、光反射率は、正反射方向の透過率、拡散反射率及び全反射率の何れを利用してもよい。
位置合わせを行う任意の工程としては、例えば、転写シートを長尺にスリットする工程、転写シートを枚葉に型抜きする工程、転写シートを被転写物に転写する工程が挙げられる。位置合わせの具体的手法については後述する。 The portion having the protruding portion and the colored layer in the second region is different in light transmittance or light reflectance from the surrounding portions. Using this light transmittance or light reflectance contrast, the transfer sheet can be aligned in an arbitrary process. The light transmittance may be any of transmittance in the normal transmission direction, diffuse transmittance, and total transmittance. Similarly, the light reflectance may be any of transmittance in the regular reflection direction, diffuse reflectance, and total reflectance.
Examples of the optional step of aligning include a step of slitting the transfer sheet in a long length, a step of punching the transfer sheet into a sheet, and a step of transferring the transfer sheet to a transfer object. A specific method of alignment will be described later.
位置合わせを行う任意の工程としては、例えば、転写シートを長尺にスリットする工程、転写シートを枚葉に型抜きする工程、転写シートを被転写物に転写する工程が挙げられる。位置合わせの具体的手法については後述する。 The portion having the protruding portion and the colored layer in the second region is different in light transmittance or light reflectance from the surrounding portions. Using this light transmittance or light reflectance contrast, the transfer sheet can be aligned in an arbitrary process. The light transmittance may be any of transmittance in the normal transmission direction, diffuse transmittance, and total transmittance. Similarly, the light reflectance may be any of transmittance in the regular reflection direction, diffuse reflectance, and total reflectance.
Examples of the optional step of aligning include a step of slitting the transfer sheet in a long length, a step of punching the transfer sheet into a sheet, and a step of transferring the transfer sheet to a transfer object. A specific method of alignment will be described later.
突出部は任意の構造体から形成され、該構造体の形状等は特に限定されないが、以下に例示する形状等が好ましい。
The protruding portion is formed of an arbitrary structure, and the shape and the like of the structure are not particularly limited, but the shapes and the like exemplified below are preferable.
突出部の高さ(H)は、1~10μmであることが好ましく、2~7μmであることがより好ましく、3~6μmであることがさらに好ましい。
突出部の高さを1μm以上とすることにより、印刷の位置が僅かにずれたとしても、突出部上に着色層が形成される一方で、その周辺箇所には着色層が形成されにくくすることができる。つまり、突出部の高さを1μm以上とすることにより、位置合わせ用のパターンを正確な場所に印刷しやすくできる。このため、突出部を有する箇所と、その周辺箇所との光透過率ないしは光反射率のコントラストが明りょうとなり、位置合わせをしやすくできる。また、突出部3の高さを1μm以上とすることにより、図1~図4に示すように、転写シート100の転写層20側の表面に微細な出っ張りが形成されやすくなり、長尺の転写シートを巻き取ったり、枚葉の転写シートを重ねたりする際のブロッキングを抑制しやすくできる。
また、突出部の高さを10μm以下とすることにより、荷重により突出部が変形しにくく、位置合わせの精度を維持しやすくできる。 The height (H) of the protrusion is preferably 1 to 10 μm, more preferably 2 to 7 μm, and further preferably 3 to 6 μm.
By setting the height of the protruding portion to 1 μm or more, even if the printing position is slightly shifted, a colored layer is formed on the protruding portion, but a colored layer is hardly formed on the peripheral portion. Can do. That is, by setting the height of the protruding portion to 1 μm or more, the alignment pattern can be easily printed at an accurate location. For this reason, the contrast of the light transmittance or the light reflectance between the portion having the protruding portion and the surrounding portion becomes clear, and the alignment can be facilitated. Further, by setting the height of the protrudingportion 3 to 1 μm or more, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, it becomes easy to form a fine protrusion on the surface of the transfer sheet 100 on the transfer layer 20 side. It is possible to easily suppress blocking when winding a sheet or stacking single transfer sheets.
In addition, by setting the height of the protruding portion to 10 μm or less, the protruding portion is hardly deformed by a load, and the alignment accuracy can be easily maintained.
突出部の高さを1μm以上とすることにより、印刷の位置が僅かにずれたとしても、突出部上に着色層が形成される一方で、その周辺箇所には着色層が形成されにくくすることができる。つまり、突出部の高さを1μm以上とすることにより、位置合わせ用のパターンを正確な場所に印刷しやすくできる。このため、突出部を有する箇所と、その周辺箇所との光透過率ないしは光反射率のコントラストが明りょうとなり、位置合わせをしやすくできる。また、突出部3の高さを1μm以上とすることにより、図1~図4に示すように、転写シート100の転写層20側の表面に微細な出っ張りが形成されやすくなり、長尺の転写シートを巻き取ったり、枚葉の転写シートを重ねたりする際のブロッキングを抑制しやすくできる。
また、突出部の高さを10μm以下とすることにより、荷重により突出部が変形しにくく、位置合わせの精度を維持しやすくできる。 The height (H) of the protrusion is preferably 1 to 10 μm, more preferably 2 to 7 μm, and further preferably 3 to 6 μm.
By setting the height of the protruding portion to 1 μm or more, even if the printing position is slightly shifted, a colored layer is formed on the protruding portion, but a colored layer is hardly formed on the peripheral portion. Can do. That is, by setting the height of the protruding portion to 1 μm or more, the alignment pattern can be easily printed at an accurate location. For this reason, the contrast of the light transmittance or the light reflectance between the portion having the protruding portion and the surrounding portion becomes clear, and the alignment can be facilitated. Further, by setting the height of the protruding
In addition, by setting the height of the protruding portion to 10 μm or less, the protruding portion is hardly deformed by a load, and the alignment accuracy can be easily maintained.
光透過率の差で位置を検知する場合、突出部を有する箇所と、その周辺箇所との光透過率の差は、30%以上とすることが好ましい。また、光反射率の差で位置を検知する場合、突出部を有する箇所と、その周辺箇所との光反射率の差は、30%以上とすることが好ましい。
When detecting the position based on the difference in light transmittance, it is preferable that the difference in light transmittance between the portion having the protrusion and the surrounding portion is 30% or more. Moreover, when detecting a position by the difference in light reflectance, it is preferable that the difference in light reflectance between the portion having the protruding portion and the surrounding portion is 30% or more.
突出部の幅(W)は、0.1~10.0mmであることが好ましく、1.0~7.0mmであることがより好ましく、3.0~6.0mmであることがさらに好ましい。
突出部の幅を0.1mm以上とすることにより、周辺箇所との区別が明りょうとなり、位置合わせしやすくできる。また、突出部の幅を0.1mm以上とすることにより、上述したブロッキングを抑制する効果も向上する。
また、突出部の幅を10.0mm以下とすることにより、第2領域の面積が必要以上に広くなることを抑制できる。 The width (W) of the protrusion is preferably 0.1 to 10.0 mm, more preferably 1.0 to 7.0 mm, and still more preferably 3.0 to 6.0 mm.
By setting the width of the protruding portion to be 0.1 mm or more, the distinction from the peripheral portion becomes clear and alignment can be easily performed. Moreover, the effect which suppresses the blocking mentioned above also improves by making the width | variety of a protrusion part into 0.1 mm or more.
Moreover, it can suppress that the area of a 2nd area | region becomes large more than necessary by making the width | variety of a protrusion part into 10.0 mm or less.
突出部の幅を0.1mm以上とすることにより、周辺箇所との区別が明りょうとなり、位置合わせしやすくできる。また、突出部の幅を0.1mm以上とすることにより、上述したブロッキングを抑制する効果も向上する。
また、突出部の幅を10.0mm以下とすることにより、第2領域の面積が必要以上に広くなることを抑制できる。 The width (W) of the protrusion is preferably 0.1 to 10.0 mm, more preferably 1.0 to 7.0 mm, and still more preferably 3.0 to 6.0 mm.
By setting the width of the protruding portion to be 0.1 mm or more, the distinction from the peripheral portion becomes clear and alignment can be easily performed. Moreover, the effect which suppresses the blocking mentioned above also improves by making the width | variety of a protrusion part into 0.1 mm or more.
Moreover, it can suppress that the area of a 2nd area | region becomes large more than necessary by making the width | variety of a protrusion part into 10.0 mm or less.
突出部は、上述した高さ(H)及び幅(W)の効果のバランスの観点から、高さ(H)と幅(W)との比が1:10,000~1:10であることが好ましく、1:3,000~1:140であることがより好ましく、1:1,350~1:500であることがさらに好ましい。
なお、本明細書において、突出部の高さ(H)とは、突出部を形成する構造体を、構造体の延伸方向(例えば、図5~図7の「d」の方向)に直交する方向で切断した断面の中央部の高さのことをいう。また、本明細書において、突出部の幅(W)とは、突出部を形成する構造体を、構造体の延伸方向に直交する方向で切断した断面の底部の幅のことをいう。 The protrusion has a ratio of height (H) to width (W) of 1: 10,000 to 1:10 from the viewpoint of the balance between the effects of height (H) and width (W) described above. Is more preferably 1: 3,000 to 1: 140, and even more preferably 1: 1,350 to 1: 500.
In the present specification, the height (H) of the protrusion is orthogonal to the extending direction of the structure (eg, the direction of “d” in FIGS. 5 to 7) of the structure forming the protrusion. The height of the central part of the cross section cut in the direction. In the present specification, the width (W) of the protruding portion refers to the width of the bottom portion of a cross section obtained by cutting the structure forming the protruding portion in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the structure.
なお、本明細書において、突出部の高さ(H)とは、突出部を形成する構造体を、構造体の延伸方向(例えば、図5~図7の「d」の方向)に直交する方向で切断した断面の中央部の高さのことをいう。また、本明細書において、突出部の幅(W)とは、突出部を形成する構造体を、構造体の延伸方向に直交する方向で切断した断面の底部の幅のことをいう。 The protrusion has a ratio of height (H) to width (W) of 1: 10,000 to 1:10 from the viewpoint of the balance between the effects of height (H) and width (W) described above. Is more preferably 1: 3,000 to 1: 140, and even more preferably 1: 1,350 to 1: 500.
In the present specification, the height (H) of the protrusion is orthogonal to the extending direction of the structure (eg, the direction of “d” in FIGS. 5 to 7) of the structure forming the protrusion. The height of the central part of the cross section cut in the direction. In the present specification, the width (W) of the protruding portion refers to the width of the bottom portion of a cross section obtained by cutting the structure forming the protruding portion in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the structure.
突出部3は、図5~図7に示すように、転写シート100の任意の1辺に平行な方向に延伸した列状の構造体から形成されてなることが好ましい。突出部3を該構成とすることにより、位置合わせをしやすくできる。
図5及び図7では、列状の構造体は途切れることなく連続的に延伸しているが、図6のように列状の構造体を断続的に延伸させてもよい。列状の構造体を断続的に延伸させた場合、2方向での位置合わせが可能となり、位置合わせの精度を向上できる。列状の構造体を断続的に延伸させる場合、各構造体の端部同士の間隔(P2)は、0.1~10.0mmであることが好ましく、1.0~7.0mmであることがより好ましく、3.0~6.0mmであることがさらに好ましい。
列状の構造体を延伸する方向は、転写シート100の流れ方向(MD:Machine Direction)であることが好ましい。 As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, theprotrusion 3 is preferably formed from a row of structures extending in a direction parallel to any one side of the transfer sheet 100. By making the protrusion 3 have this configuration, alignment can be facilitated.
5 and 7, the row-like structures are continuously stretched without interruption, but the row-like structures may be intermittently stretched as shown in FIG. 6. When the columnar structure is extended intermittently, alignment in two directions is possible, and alignment accuracy can be improved. When the row-like structures are intermittently stretched, the interval (P 2 ) between the ends of each structure is preferably 0.1 to 10.0 mm, and 1.0 to 7.0 mm. More preferably, the thickness is 3.0 to 6.0 mm.
The direction in which the row-shaped structures are stretched is preferably the flow direction (MD: Machine Direction) of thetransfer sheet 100.
図5及び図7では、列状の構造体は途切れることなく連続的に延伸しているが、図6のように列状の構造体を断続的に延伸させてもよい。列状の構造体を断続的に延伸させた場合、2方向での位置合わせが可能となり、位置合わせの精度を向上できる。列状の構造体を断続的に延伸させる場合、各構造体の端部同士の間隔(P2)は、0.1~10.0mmであることが好ましく、1.0~7.0mmであることがより好ましく、3.0~6.0mmであることがさらに好ましい。
列状の構造体を延伸する方向は、転写シート100の流れ方向(MD:Machine Direction)であることが好ましい。 As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the
5 and 7, the row-like structures are continuously stretched without interruption, but the row-like structures may be intermittently stretched as shown in FIG. 6. When the columnar structure is extended intermittently, alignment in two directions is possible, and alignment accuracy can be improved. When the row-like structures are intermittently stretched, the interval (P 2 ) between the ends of each structure is preferably 0.1 to 10.0 mm, and 1.0 to 7.0 mm. More preferably, the thickness is 3.0 to 6.0 mm.
The direction in which the row-shaped structures are stretched is preferably the flow direction (MD: Machine Direction) of the
第2領域R2上には突出部3を単独で有していてもよいが、複数有していてもよい。
また、第2領域R2内に突出部3を複数有する場合、図2~図7に示すように、少なくとも一組の突出部3が互いに平行に配置されていることが好ましい。また、少なくとも一組の突出部3は、転写シート100の流れ方向において、互いに平行であることがより好ましい。
少なくとも一組の突出部3を互いに平行に配置することにより、着色層12を形成する際に、突出部3上に着色層12が形成されやすい一方で、一組の突出部3の間には着色層12が形成されにくくなる。このため、突出部3を有する箇所と、一組の突出部3の間の箇所との光透過率ないしは光反射率のコントラストが明りょうとなり、位置合わせをしやすくできる。また、少なくとも一組の突出部3を互いに平行に配置した場合、着色層を形成する版の深さが深いことなどによって、図2~図4のように、一組の突出部3の間の箇所を除いた突出部3の周辺箇所に着色層12が形成されても、一組の突出部3の間には着色層12が形成されにくいため、位置合わせが可能となる。つまり、少なくとも一組の突出部3を互いに平行に配置した場合、位置合わせ用のパターン印刷の精度を若干落としても、位置合わせが可能となる点で好適である。また、少なくとも一組の突出部3を互いに平行に配置した場合、突出部3の高さが低めでも、位置合わせのためのコントラストを明りょうにしやすい点で好適である。さらに、少なくとも一組の突出部3を互いに平行に配置することにより、光透過率ないしは光反射率のコントラストが直線的に形成されて位置合わせの精度を高めることができるとともに、上述したブロッキングを抑制する効果も向上する。 The on the second region R 2 may have a protrudingportion 3 alone, or may be plural have.
Also, if having a plurality ofprotrusions 3 in the second region R 2, as shown in FIGS. 2-7, it is preferable that at least one pair of projecting portions 3 are parallel to each other. In addition, it is more preferable that at least one pair of protrusions 3 are parallel to each other in the flow direction of the transfer sheet 100.
By arranging at least one set ofprotrusions 3 in parallel with each other, when forming the colored layer 12, the colored layer 12 is easily formed on the protrusions 3, while between the pair of protrusions 3. The colored layer 12 is hardly formed. For this reason, the contrast of the light transmittance or the light reflectance between the part having the protrusions 3 and the part between the pair of protrusions 3 becomes clear, and alignment can be facilitated. Further, when at least one set of protrusions 3 are arranged in parallel to each other, the depth of the plate forming the colored layer is increased, so that the space between the set of protrusions 3 is as shown in FIGS. Even if the colored layer 12 is formed in the peripheral portion of the protruding portion 3 excluding the portion, the colored layer 12 is difficult to be formed between the pair of protruding portions 3, so that the alignment is possible. That is, when at least one set of the protrusions 3 are arranged in parallel with each other, it is preferable in that the alignment can be performed even if the accuracy of pattern printing for alignment is slightly reduced. In addition, when at least one pair of protrusions 3 are arranged in parallel to each other, it is preferable in that the contrast for alignment can be easily clarified even if the height of the protrusions 3 is low. Furthermore, by arranging at least one pair of projecting portions 3 in parallel with each other, the contrast of light transmittance or light reflectance can be formed linearly, and the alignment accuracy can be improved, and the above-described blocking is suppressed. To improve the effect.
また、第2領域R2内に突出部3を複数有する場合、図2~図7に示すように、少なくとも一組の突出部3が互いに平行に配置されていることが好ましい。また、少なくとも一組の突出部3は、転写シート100の流れ方向において、互いに平行であることがより好ましい。
少なくとも一組の突出部3を互いに平行に配置することにより、着色層12を形成する際に、突出部3上に着色層12が形成されやすい一方で、一組の突出部3の間には着色層12が形成されにくくなる。このため、突出部3を有する箇所と、一組の突出部3の間の箇所との光透過率ないしは光反射率のコントラストが明りょうとなり、位置合わせをしやすくできる。また、少なくとも一組の突出部3を互いに平行に配置した場合、着色層を形成する版の深さが深いことなどによって、図2~図4のように、一組の突出部3の間の箇所を除いた突出部3の周辺箇所に着色層12が形成されても、一組の突出部3の間には着色層12が形成されにくいため、位置合わせが可能となる。つまり、少なくとも一組の突出部3を互いに平行に配置した場合、位置合わせ用のパターン印刷の精度を若干落としても、位置合わせが可能となる点で好適である。また、少なくとも一組の突出部3を互いに平行に配置した場合、突出部3の高さが低めでも、位置合わせのためのコントラストを明りょうにしやすい点で好適である。さらに、少なくとも一組の突出部3を互いに平行に配置することにより、光透過率ないしは光反射率のコントラストが直線的に形成されて位置合わせの精度を高めることができるとともに、上述したブロッキングを抑制する効果も向上する。 The on the second region R 2 may have a protruding
Also, if having a plurality of
By arranging at least one set of
上述した効果を得やすくする観点から、一組の突出部3の端部同士の間隔(P1)は、0.1~10.0mmであることが好ましく、1.0~7.0mmであることがより好ましく、1.5~5.0mmであることがさらに好ましい。
また、一組の突出部3は、上述した列状の構造体であることが好ましい。さらに、一組の突出部3は、上述した列状の構造体のうち、断続的に延伸するものであることがより好ましい。 From the viewpoint of easily obtaining the above-described effects, the interval (P 1 ) between the ends of the pair ofprotrusions 3 is preferably 0.1 to 10.0 mm, and 1.0 to 7.0 mm. More preferably, the thickness is 1.5 to 5.0 mm.
Moreover, it is preferable that a set ofprotrusion part 3 is the row-shaped structure mentioned above. Furthermore, it is more preferable that the set of protrusions 3 is one that extends intermittently in the above-described row of structures.
また、一組の突出部3は、上述した列状の構造体であることが好ましい。さらに、一組の突出部3は、上述した列状の構造体のうち、断続的に延伸するものであることがより好ましい。 From the viewpoint of easily obtaining the above-described effects, the interval (P 1 ) between the ends of the pair of
Moreover, it is preferable that a set of
突出部を形成する構造体を、構造体の延伸方向に直交する方向で切断した断面は、略四角形形状であることが好ましい。
It is preferable that the cross section obtained by cutting the structure forming the protruding portion in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the structure has a substantially rectangular shape.
また、突出部と、後述する転写層とは、[突出部の高さ/転写層の厚さ]が0.1~5.0の関係を満たすことが好ましく、0.2~3.5の関係を満たすことがより好ましく、0.3~1.0の関係を満たすことがさらに好ましい。
上記比を0.1以上とすることにより、長尺の転写シートを巻き取ったり、枚葉の転写シートを重ねたりする際のブロッキングを抑制しやすくでき、上記比を5.0以下とすることにより、荷重により突出部が変形しにくく、位置合わせの精度を維持しやすくできる。 Further, the protrusion and the transfer layer described later preferably satisfy the relationship of [the height of the protrusion / the thickness of the transfer layer] of 0.1 to 5.0, preferably 0.2 to 3.5. It is more preferable to satisfy the relationship, and it is further preferable to satisfy the relationship of 0.3 to 1.0.
By setting the ratio to be 0.1 or more, it is possible to easily suppress blocking when winding a long transfer sheet or stacking single transfer sheets, and the ratio is set to 5.0 or less. As a result, the protruding portion is not easily deformed by the load, and the alignment accuracy can be easily maintained.
上記比を0.1以上とすることにより、長尺の転写シートを巻き取ったり、枚葉の転写シートを重ねたりする際のブロッキングを抑制しやすくでき、上記比を5.0以下とすることにより、荷重により突出部が変形しにくく、位置合わせの精度を維持しやすくできる。 Further, the protrusion and the transfer layer described later preferably satisfy the relationship of [the height of the protrusion / the thickness of the transfer layer] of 0.1 to 5.0, preferably 0.2 to 3.5. It is more preferable to satisfy the relationship, and it is further preferable to satisfy the relationship of 0.3 to 1.0.
By setting the ratio to be 0.1 or more, it is possible to easily suppress blocking when winding a long transfer sheet or stacking single transfer sheets, and the ratio is set to 5.0 or less. As a result, the protruding portion is not easily deformed by the load, and the alignment accuracy can be easily maintained.
第2領域は、被転写物に転写し、加飾成形品を得た段階では除去することが好ましい。第2領域を除去するタイミングとしては、例えば、(1)転写シートを長尺にスリットする工程時、(2)転写シートを枚葉に型抜きする工程時、(3)転写シートを被転写物に転写した後のトリミング工程時等が挙げられる。
It is preferable to remove the second region when it is transferred to the transfer object and a decorative molded product is obtained. The timing for removing the second region is, for example, (1) when the transfer sheet is slit long, (2) when the transfer sheet is cut into sheets, and (3) the transfer sheet is transferred. And the like during the trimming process after the transfer.
(着色層)
着色層は、突出部の上に形成され、周辺部との光透過率ないしは光反射率のコントラストを生じさせる役割を有する。なお、本明細書の「着色層」には、光の拡散により白っぽく見える層(例えば、擦りガラスのように見える層)も含むものとする。 (Colored layer)
The colored layer is formed on the protruding portion and has a role of causing a light transmittance or a light reflectance contrast with the peripheral portion. Note that the “colored layer” in this specification includes a layer that looks whitish due to light diffusion (for example, a layer that looks like frosted glass).
着色層は、突出部の上に形成され、周辺部との光透過率ないしは光反射率のコントラストを生じさせる役割を有する。なお、本明細書の「着色層」には、光の拡散により白っぽく見える層(例えば、擦りガラスのように見える層)も含むものとする。 (Colored layer)
The colored layer is formed on the protruding portion and has a role of causing a light transmittance or a light reflectance contrast with the peripheral portion. Note that the “colored layer” in this specification includes a layer that looks whitish due to light diffusion (for example, a layer that looks like frosted glass).
着色層は、主として、バインダー樹脂と、顔料及び/又はマット剤とから構成することが好ましい。
着色層の顔料としては、隠蔽性の高い顔料、あるいは反射率の高い顔料を含むことが好ましい。隠蔽性の高い顔料としては、カーボンブラック等の黒色顔料が好ましい。反射率の高い顔料としては、硫酸バリウム、酸化チタン及びパール顔料等が挙げられる。
着色層のマット剤としては、着色層の表面に凹凸を付与し、外部ヘイズを生じさせるものであれば特に制限されることなく使用できる。具体的には、該マット剤としては、シリカ、アルミナ等の無機粒子、アクリル粒子、スチレン粒子等の有機粒子が挙げられる。
着色層のバインダー樹脂は特に限定されず、汎用の、熱可塑性樹脂、熱硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物を用いることができる。 The colored layer is preferably mainly composed of a binder resin and a pigment and / or a matting agent.
As the pigment of the colored layer, it is preferable to include a pigment having high concealability or a pigment having high reflectance. A black pigment such as carbon black is preferable as the pigment having high concealability. Examples of the pigment having high reflectance include barium sulfate, titanium oxide, and pearl pigment.
The matting agent for the colored layer can be used without any particular limitation as long as it provides irregularities on the surface of the colored layer and causes external haze. Specifically, examples of the matting agent include inorganic particles such as silica and alumina, and organic particles such as acrylic particles and styrene particles.
The binder resin of the colored layer is not particularly limited, and a general-purpose thermoplastic resin, a cured product of a thermosetting resin composition, or a cured product of an ionizing radiation curable resin composition can be used.
着色層の顔料としては、隠蔽性の高い顔料、あるいは反射率の高い顔料を含むことが好ましい。隠蔽性の高い顔料としては、カーボンブラック等の黒色顔料が好ましい。反射率の高い顔料としては、硫酸バリウム、酸化チタン及びパール顔料等が挙げられる。
着色層のマット剤としては、着色層の表面に凹凸を付与し、外部ヘイズを生じさせるものであれば特に制限されることなく使用できる。具体的には、該マット剤としては、シリカ、アルミナ等の無機粒子、アクリル粒子、スチレン粒子等の有機粒子が挙げられる。
着色層のバインダー樹脂は特に限定されず、汎用の、熱可塑性樹脂、熱硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物を用いることができる。 The colored layer is preferably mainly composed of a binder resin and a pigment and / or a matting agent.
As the pigment of the colored layer, it is preferable to include a pigment having high concealability or a pigment having high reflectance. A black pigment such as carbon black is preferable as the pigment having high concealability. Examples of the pigment having high reflectance include barium sulfate, titanium oxide, and pearl pigment.
The matting agent for the colored layer can be used without any particular limitation as long as it provides irregularities on the surface of the colored layer and causes external haze. Specifically, examples of the matting agent include inorganic particles such as silica and alumina, and organic particles such as acrylic particles and styrene particles.
The binder resin of the colored layer is not particularly limited, and a general-purpose thermoplastic resin, a cured product of a thermosetting resin composition, or a cured product of an ionizing radiation curable resin composition can be used.
着色層の厚さは、位置合わせのためのコントラストが得られる範囲で調整すればよく、通常、0.3~5.0μm程度である。
The thickness of the colored layer may be adjusted within a range where contrast for alignment is obtained, and is usually about 0.3 to 5.0 μm.
(その他の領域)
離型シートの転写層側の面には、第1領域及び第2領域以外のその他の領域を有していてもよい。その他の領域を有することにより、位置合わせの精度をさらに向上させたり、被転写物の意匠性をさらに向上させたりすることができる。 (Other areas)
The surface of the release sheet on the transfer layer side may have other regions other than the first region and the second region. By having other regions, the alignment accuracy can be further improved, and the design of the transfer object can be further improved.
離型シートの転写層側の面には、第1領域及び第2領域以外のその他の領域を有していてもよい。その他の領域を有することにより、位置合わせの精度をさらに向上させたり、被転写物の意匠性をさらに向上させたりすることができる。 (Other areas)
The surface of the release sheet on the transfer layer side may have other regions other than the first region and the second region. By having other regions, the alignment accuracy can be further improved, and the design of the transfer object can be further improved.
例えば、図5及び図7のように、第2領域R2の突出部3が流れ方向に連続して延伸する構成の場合、第2領域R2の構成より、流れ方向に直交する方向の位置合わせは可能であるが、流れ方向の位置合わせができない。かかる場合において、その他の領域Rnに位置検出部を形成することにより、位置合わせの精度をさらに向上することができる。
For example, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, in the case where the protruding portion 3 of the second region R 2 extends continuously in the flow direction, the position in the direction orthogonal to the flow direction is higher than the configuration of the second region R 2. Alignment is possible, but alignment in the flow direction is not possible. In such a case, by forming a position detector in the other region R n, it is possible to further improve the accuracy of the alignment.
位置検出部は、例えば、図3及び図6に示すように、基材層11のその他の領域Rn内に形成された第2の突出部6と、該第2の突出部6上に形成された第2の着色層14とからなる構成が挙げられる。
Position detection unit, for example, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, the second protrusion 6 formed in the other region R n of the base layer 11, formed on the protruding portion 6 of the second The structure which consists of the made 2nd colored layer 14 is mentioned.
第2の突出部6は、その他の領域Rnの少なくとも一部に形成されていればよい。
また、第2の突出部6は、平面方向から観察した際に、転写シートの幅方向に平行な直線を有するものが好ましく、転写シートの幅方向に平行な直線を有する略四角形形状であるものがより好ましく、転写シートの幅方向及び流れ方向に平行な直線を有する略四角形形状であるものがさらに好ましい。第2の突出部6をこのような形状とすることにより、流れ方向の位置合わせをしやすくできる。Second protrusion 6 may be formed on at least a portion of the other region R n.
Thesecond protrusion 6 preferably has a straight line parallel to the width direction of the transfer sheet when observed from the plane direction, and has a substantially rectangular shape having a straight line parallel to the width direction of the transfer sheet. Is more preferable, and a substantially rectangular shape having straight lines parallel to the width direction and the flow direction of the transfer sheet is more preferable. By making the 2nd protrusion part 6 into such a shape, it can be made easy to align with a flow direction.
また、第2の突出部6は、平面方向から観察した際に、転写シートの幅方向に平行な直線を有するものが好ましく、転写シートの幅方向に平行な直線を有する略四角形形状であるものがより好ましく、転写シートの幅方向及び流れ方向に平行な直線を有する略四角形形状であるものがさらに好ましい。第2の突出部6をこのような形状とすることにより、流れ方向の位置合わせをしやすくできる。
The
第2の突出部6が幅方向及び/又は流れ方向に平行な直線を有する場合、該直線の長さは、2~20mmであることが好ましく、3~15mmであることがより好ましく、5~10mmであることがさらに好ましい。
When the second protrusion 6 has a straight line parallel to the width direction and / or the flow direction, the length of the straight line is preferably 2 to 20 mm, more preferably 3 to 15 mm. More preferably, it is 10 mm.
第2の突出部6の高さは、1~10μmであることが好ましく、2~7μmであることがより好ましく、3~6μmであることがさらに好ましい。また、第2の突出部6の高さは、第2領域の突出部3の高さと同一とすることが好ましい。
第2の突出部6の高さを1μm以上とすることにより、印刷の位置が僅かにずれたとしても、第2の突出部6上に着色層が形成される一方で、その周辺箇所には第2の着色層14が形成されにくくすることができる。つまり、第2の突出部6の高さを1μm以上とすることにより、位置合わせ用のパターンを正確な場所に印刷しやすくできる。このため、第2の突出部6を有する箇所と、その周辺箇所との光透過率ないしは光反射率のコントラストが明りょうとなり、位置合わせをしやすくできる。また、突出部3の高さを1μm以上とすることにより、図3に示すように、転写シート100の転写層20側の表面に微細な出っ張りが形成されやすくなり、長尺の転写シートを巻き取ったり、枚葉の転写シートを重ねたりする際のブロッキングを抑制しやすくできる。
また、突出部3の高さを10μm以下とすることにより、荷重により突出部が変形しにくく、位置合わせの精度を維持しやすくできる。 The height of thesecond protrusion 6 is preferably 1 to 10 μm, more preferably 2 to 7 μm, and even more preferably 3 to 6 μm. The height of the second protrusion 6 is preferably the same as the height of the protrusion 3 in the second region.
By setting the height of thesecond protrusion 6 to 1 μm or more, a colored layer is formed on the second protrusion 6 even if the printing position is slightly shifted, The second colored layer 14 can be hardly formed. That is, by setting the height of the second protrusion 6 to 1 μm or more, the alignment pattern can be easily printed at an accurate location. For this reason, the contrast of the light transmittance or the light reflectance between the portion having the second projecting portion 6 and its peripheral portion becomes clear, and the alignment can be facilitated. In addition, by setting the height of the protruding portion 3 to 1 μm or more, as shown in FIG. It is easy to suppress blocking when taking or stacking a single transfer sheet.
Further, by setting the height of the protrudingportion 3 to 10 μm or less, the protruding portion is hardly deformed by a load, and the alignment accuracy can be easily maintained.
第2の突出部6の高さを1μm以上とすることにより、印刷の位置が僅かにずれたとしても、第2の突出部6上に着色層が形成される一方で、その周辺箇所には第2の着色層14が形成されにくくすることができる。つまり、第2の突出部6の高さを1μm以上とすることにより、位置合わせ用のパターンを正確な場所に印刷しやすくできる。このため、第2の突出部6を有する箇所と、その周辺箇所との光透過率ないしは光反射率のコントラストが明りょうとなり、位置合わせをしやすくできる。また、突出部3の高さを1μm以上とすることにより、図3に示すように、転写シート100の転写層20側の表面に微細な出っ張りが形成されやすくなり、長尺の転写シートを巻き取ったり、枚葉の転写シートを重ねたりする際のブロッキングを抑制しやすくできる。
また、突出部3の高さを10μm以下とすることにより、荷重により突出部が変形しにくく、位置合わせの精度を維持しやすくできる。 The height of the
By setting the height of the
Further, by setting the height of the protruding
光透過率の差で位置を検知する場合、第2の突出部6を有する箇所と、その周辺箇所との光透過率の差は、30%以上とすることが好ましい。また、光反射率の差で位置を検知する場合、第2の突出部6を有する箇所と、その周辺箇所との光反射率の差は、30%以上とすることが好ましい。
When the position is detected by the difference in light transmittance, the difference in light transmittance between the portion having the second protrusion 6 and the surrounding portion is preferably 30% or more. Moreover, when detecting a position by the difference in light reflectance, it is preferable that the difference in light reflectance between the location having the second protrusion 6 and the surrounding location is 30% or more.
また、位置検出部の他の実施形態としては、例えば、図4に示すように、基材層11のその他の領域Rn内に形成された第2の凹凸部7と、該第2の凹凸部上及び該第2の凹凸部の周囲に形成された第2の着色層14とからなる構成が挙げられる。
第2の凹凸部7の凹凸の程度を小さくした場合、第2の着色層14は、第2の凹凸部7上のみならず、第2の凹凸部7の周囲にも形成されやすくなる。そして、図4に示すように、第2の凹凸部7上に形成される第2の着色層14の厚さは、凹部に対応する箇所が厚い一方で、凸部に対応する箇所は薄くなる。一方、第2の凹凸部7の周囲に形成される第2の着色層14の厚さは全体的に厚い。このため、第2の凹凸部7と、第2の凹凸部7の周囲との間で、第2の着色層14の付着密度の違いに起因して光透過率ないしは光反射率のコントラストが生じ、位置検出が可能となる。 As another embodiment of the position detector, for example, as shown in FIG. 4, a second concave-convex portion 7 formed in the other region R n of the base layer 11, the second concave-convex The structure which consists of the 2nd colored layer 14 formed on the circumference | surroundings of the part and this 2nd uneven | corrugated | grooved part is mentioned.
When the degree of unevenness of the seconduneven portion 7 is reduced, the second colored layer 14 is easily formed not only on the second uneven portion 7 but also around the second uneven portion 7. And as shown in FIG. 4, the thickness of the 2nd colored layer 14 formed on the 2nd uneven | corrugated | grooved part 7 becomes thin, while the location corresponding to a recessed part is thick, the location corresponding to a convex part becomes thin. . On the other hand, the thickness of the second colored layer 14 formed around the second uneven portion 7 is thick overall. For this reason, a contrast of light transmittance or light reflectance occurs between the second uneven portion 7 and the periphery of the second uneven portion 7 due to the difference in the adhesion density of the second colored layer 14. The position can be detected.
第2の凹凸部7の凹凸の程度を小さくした場合、第2の着色層14は、第2の凹凸部7上のみならず、第2の凹凸部7の周囲にも形成されやすくなる。そして、図4に示すように、第2の凹凸部7上に形成される第2の着色層14の厚さは、凹部に対応する箇所が厚い一方で、凸部に対応する箇所は薄くなる。一方、第2の凹凸部7の周囲に形成される第2の着色層14の厚さは全体的に厚い。このため、第2の凹凸部7と、第2の凹凸部7の周囲との間で、第2の着色層14の付着密度の違いに起因して光透過率ないしは光反射率のコントラストが生じ、位置検出が可能となる。 As another embodiment of the position detector, for example, as shown in FIG. 4, a second concave-
When the degree of unevenness of the second
また、第2の凹凸部7の凹凸の程度を大きくした場合、第2の凹凸部7の凸部上に第2の着色層14が形成されやすくなる一方で、第2の凹凸部7の凹部や、第2の凹凸部7の周辺箇所に第2の着色層14が形成されにくくすることができる。このため、第2の凹凸部7を有する箇所と、その周辺箇所との間で、第2の着色層14の付着密度の違いに起因して光透過率ないしは光反射率のコントラストが生じ、位置検出を可能とすることができる。
Further, when the degree of unevenness of the second uneven portion 7 is increased, the second colored layer 14 is easily formed on the protruded portion of the second uneven portion 7, while the recessed portion of the second uneven portion 7 is formed. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the second colored layer 14 to be formed around the second uneven portion 7. For this reason, the contrast of the light transmittance or the light reflectance is caused due to the difference in the adhesion density of the second colored layer 14 between the portion having the second uneven portion 7 and the peripheral portion, Detection can be possible.
第2の凹凸部7は、その他の領域Rnの少なくとも一部に形成されていればよい。
また、第2の凹凸部7は、平面方向から観察した際に、転写シートの幅方向に平行な直線を有するものが好ましく、転写シートの幅方向に平行な直線を有する略四角形形状であることがより好ましく、転写シートの幅方向及び流れ方向に平行な直線を有する略四角形形状であることがさらに好ましい。
第2の凹凸部7が幅方向及び/又は流れ方向に平行な直線を有する場合、該直線の長さは、2~20mmであることが好ましく、3~15mmであることがより好ましく、5~10mmであることがさらに好ましい。 The second concave-convex part 7 may be formed on at least a portion of the other region R n.
Further, the second concavo-convex portion 7 preferably has a straight line parallel to the width direction of the transfer sheet when observed from the plane direction, and has a substantially rectangular shape having a straight line parallel to the width direction of the transfer sheet. Is more preferable, and it is more preferable that the transfer sheet has a substantially rectangular shape having straight lines parallel to the width direction and the flow direction of the transfer sheet.
When the seconduneven portion 7 has a straight line parallel to the width direction and / or the flow direction, the length of the straight line is preferably 2 to 20 mm, more preferably 3 to 15 mm. More preferably, it is 10 mm.
また、第2の凹凸部7は、平面方向から観察した際に、転写シートの幅方向に平行な直線を有するものが好ましく、転写シートの幅方向に平行な直線を有する略四角形形状であることがより好ましく、転写シートの幅方向及び流れ方向に平行な直線を有する略四角形形状であることがさらに好ましい。
第2の凹凸部7が幅方向及び/又は流れ方向に平行な直線を有する場合、該直線の長さは、2~20mmであることが好ましく、3~15mmであることがより好ましく、5~10mmであることがさらに好ましい。 The second concave-
Further, the second concavo-
When the second
第2の凹凸部7は、[第2の凹凸部の最大高さ<第2領域の突出部の高さ]の関係を満たすことが好ましい。
また、[第2の凹凸部の最大高さ/第2領域の突出部の高さ]は、0.50以下であることが好ましく、0.40以下であることがより好ましい。また、[第2の凹凸部の平均粗さ/第2領域の突出部の高さ]は、0.20以下であることが好ましく、0.15以下であることがより好ましい。
さらに、第2の凹凸部7の最大高さ粗さRzは、0.2~4.0μmであることが好ましい。また、第2の凹凸部7の算術平均粗さRaは、0.05~2.0μmであることが好ましい。 The seconduneven portion 7 preferably satisfies the relationship [maximum height of the second uneven portion <height of the protruding portion of the second region].
[Maximum height of the second uneven portion / height of the protruding portion of the second region] is preferably 0.50 or less, and more preferably 0.40 or less. [Average roughness of second uneven portion / height of protruding portion of second region] is preferably 0.20 or less, and more preferably 0.15 or less.
Furthermore, the maximum height roughness Rz of the seconduneven portion 7 is preferably 0.2 to 4.0 μm. The arithmetic average roughness Ra of the second uneven portion 7 is preferably 0.05 to 2.0 μm.
また、[第2の凹凸部の最大高さ/第2領域の突出部の高さ]は、0.50以下であることが好ましく、0.40以下であることがより好ましい。また、[第2の凹凸部の平均粗さ/第2領域の突出部の高さ]は、0.20以下であることが好ましく、0.15以下であることがより好ましい。
さらに、第2の凹凸部7の最大高さ粗さRzは、0.2~4.0μmであることが好ましい。また、第2の凹凸部7の算術平均粗さRaは、0.05~2.0μmであることが好ましい。 The second
[Maximum height of the second uneven portion / height of the protruding portion of the second region] is preferably 0.50 or less, and more preferably 0.40 or less. [Average roughness of second uneven portion / height of protruding portion of second region] is preferably 0.20 or less, and more preferably 0.15 or less.
Furthermore, the maximum height roughness Rz of the second
第2の着色層14は、主として、バインダー樹脂と、顔料及び/又はマット剤とから構成することが好ましい。
第2の着色層14のバインダー樹脂、顔料及びマット剤の実施の形態は、突出部上に形成する着色層12のバインダー樹脂、顔料及びマット剤の実施の形態と同様である。
第2着色層14の厚さは、位置合わせのためのコントラストが得られる範囲で調整すればよく、通常、0.3~5.0μm程度である。 The secondcolored layer 14 is preferably mainly composed of a binder resin and a pigment and / or a matting agent.
The embodiment of the binder resin, pigment, and matting agent of the secondcolored layer 14 is the same as the embodiment of the binder resin, pigment, and matting agent of the colored layer 12 formed on the protruding portion.
The thickness of the secondcolored layer 14 may be adjusted within a range in which a contrast for alignment is obtained, and is usually about 0.3 to 5.0 μm.
第2の着色層14のバインダー樹脂、顔料及びマット剤の実施の形態は、突出部上に形成する着色層12のバインダー樹脂、顔料及びマット剤の実施の形態と同様である。
第2着色層14の厚さは、位置合わせのためのコントラストが得られる範囲で調整すればよく、通常、0.3~5.0μm程度である。 The second
The embodiment of the binder resin, pigment, and matting agent of the second
The thickness of the second
その他の領域Rnに上述した位置検出手段を形成する場合、図3、図4及び図6に示すように、その他の領域Rnと、第1領域R1及び第2領域R2とは、離型シート10の幅方向の異なる場所に形成されていることが好ましい。かかる位置関係とすることにより、第2の着色層14を形成する際の流れ方向の位置決めが不要となり(第2の着色層14を流れ方向に連続的に形成できる)、作業性を向上できる。
When forming a position detecting means described above to other areas R n, as shown in FIGS. 3, 4 and 6, is with other regions R n, the first region R 1 and the second region R 2, It is preferable that the release sheet 10 is formed at different places in the width direction. With this positional relationship, positioning in the flow direction when forming the second colored layer 14 becomes unnecessary (the second colored layer 14 can be continuously formed in the flow direction), and workability can be improved.
その他の領域に上述した位置検出手段を形成する場合、その他の領域は、被転写物に転写し、加飾成形品を得た段階では除去することが好ましい。その他の領域を除去するタイミングとしては、例えば、(1)転写シートを長尺にスリットする工程時、(2)転写シートを枚葉に型抜きする工程時、(3)転写シートを被転写物に転写した後のトリミング工程時等が挙げられる。
When the position detection means described above is formed in other areas, it is preferable to remove the other areas when they are transferred to the transfer object and a decorative molded product is obtained. Examples of the timing for removing the other regions include (1) the process of slitting the transfer sheet into a long length, (2) the process of punching the transfer sheet into a sheet, and (3) the transfer sheet to be transferred. And the like during the trimming process after the transfer.
また、図示しないが、その他の領域に、第1領域の形状とは異なる形状を形成してもよい。例えば、(a)第1領域が凹凸形状を有する場合、その他の領域の形状を略平滑とすること、(b)第1領域が凹凸形状を有する場合、その他の領域の形状を第1領域の凹凸形状とは異なる凹凸形状とすること、(c)第1領域の形状が略平滑な場合、その他の領域の形状を凹凸形状とすること、などが考えられる。
その他の領域に、第1領域の形状とは異なる形状を形成することにより、被転写物に転写された転写層の表面形状を場所によって変えることができる。このため、得られた加飾成形品は、光沢感等が場所によって異なり、意匠性を向上させることができる。 Although not shown, a shape different from the shape of the first region may be formed in other regions. For example, (a) when the first region has a concavo-convex shape, make the shape of the other region substantially smooth, and (b) when the first region has a concavo-convex shape, change the shape of the other region to the first region. It is conceivable that the concavo-convex shape is different from the concavo-convex shape, and (c) when the shape of the first region is substantially smooth, the shape of the other region is the concavo-convex shape.
By forming a shape different from the shape of the first region in other regions, the surface shape of the transfer layer transferred to the transfer object can be changed depending on the location. For this reason, the obtained decorative molded product has different glossiness depending on the place, and can improve the design.
その他の領域に、第1領域の形状とは異なる形状を形成することにより、被転写物に転写された転写層の表面形状を場所によって変えることができる。このため、得られた加飾成形品は、光沢感等が場所によって異なり、意匠性を向上させることができる。 Although not shown, a shape different from the shape of the first region may be formed in other regions. For example, (a) when the first region has a concavo-convex shape, make the shape of the other region substantially smooth, and (b) when the first region has a concavo-convex shape, change the shape of the other region to the first region. It is conceivable that the concavo-convex shape is different from the concavo-convex shape, and (c) when the shape of the first region is substantially smooth, the shape of the other region is the concavo-convex shape.
By forming a shape different from the shape of the first region in other regions, the surface shape of the transfer layer transferred to the transfer object can be changed depending on the location. For this reason, the obtained decorative molded product has different glossiness depending on the place, and can improve the design.
(離型層)
転写シート100の離型シート10は、被転写物に密着した際に転写層20との界面で剥離可能に形成されている。
離型性を向上させるため、離型シート10は、転写層20と接する側の面の少なくとも一部に離型層13を有することが好ましい。また、転写シート100の面内の離型性の均一化の観点からは、図1~図4に示すように、離型シート10は、転写層20と接する側の面の全面に離型層13を有することが好ましい。 (Release layer)
Therelease sheet 10 of the transfer sheet 100 is formed so as to be peelable at the interface with the transfer layer 20 when it is in close contact with the transfer object.
In order to improve the releasability, therelease sheet 10 preferably has a release layer 13 on at least a part of the surface in contact with the transfer layer 20. Further, from the viewpoint of uniform release property within the surface of the transfer sheet 100, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the release sheet 10 has a release layer on the entire surface on the side in contact with the transfer layer 20. 13 is preferable.
転写シート100の離型シート10は、被転写物に密着した際に転写層20との界面で剥離可能に形成されている。
離型性を向上させるため、離型シート10は、転写層20と接する側の面の少なくとも一部に離型層13を有することが好ましい。また、転写シート100の面内の離型性の均一化の観点からは、図1~図4に示すように、離型シート10は、転写層20と接する側の面の全面に離型層13を有することが好ましい。 (Release layer)
The
In order to improve the releasability, the
また、第1領域内に凹凸部5を有する場合、該凹凸部5上に離型層13が形成されることで、凹凸が緩和され、加飾成形品の表面に高周波成分の少ない凹凸形状を形成することができ、加飾成形品の白化及びギラツキを抑制できる。
ここで、「ギラツキ」とは、表面の凹凸構造に起因して、映像光に微細な輝度のばらつきが見える現象のことをいう。つまり、凹凸部上に離型層を形成することで、加飾成形品を表示素子の前面に用いる場合に、ギラツキを抑制できる。 Moreover, when it has the uneven | corrugated |grooved part 5 in a 1st area | region, the unevenness | corrugation is relieve | moderated by forming the release layer 13 on this uneven | corrugated | grooved part 5, and the uneven | corrugated shape with few high frequency components is given to the surface of a decorative molded product. It can form and can suppress whitening and glare of a decorative molded product.
Here, “glare” refers to a phenomenon in which minute luminance variations are seen in image light due to the uneven structure on the surface. That is, by forming the release layer on the concavo-convex portion, glare can be suppressed when a decorative molded product is used on the front surface of the display element.
ここで、「ギラツキ」とは、表面の凹凸構造に起因して、映像光に微細な輝度のばらつきが見える現象のことをいう。つまり、凹凸部上に離型層を形成することで、加飾成形品を表示素子の前面に用いる場合に、ギラツキを抑制できる。 Moreover, when it has the uneven | corrugated |
Here, “glare” refers to a phenomenon in which minute luminance variations are seen in image light due to the uneven structure on the surface. That is, by forming the release layer on the concavo-convex portion, glare can be suppressed when a decorative molded product is used on the front surface of the display element.
離型層13は、主として樹脂で構成することが好ましい。
離型層13の樹脂は、所定の被膜強度を有し、転写層20との接着力が低い材料であれば特に限定されず、汎用の熱可塑性樹脂、熱硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物等が挙げられる。具体的には、フッ素系樹脂、シリコーン系樹脂、アクリル系樹脂、ポリエステル系樹脂、ポリオレフィン系樹脂、ポリスチレン系樹脂、ポリウレタン系樹脂、セルロース系樹脂、塩化ビニル-酢酸ビニル系共重合体樹脂、硝化綿等が挙げられる。
これらの中でも、熱硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物が好ましく、アクリルポリオール及びイソシアネートを含むポリウレタン系樹脂である熱硬化性樹脂組成物がより好ましい。 It is preferable that therelease layer 13 is mainly composed of a resin.
The resin of therelease layer 13 is not particularly limited as long as it has a predetermined film strength and has a low adhesive strength with the transfer layer 20, and is a general-purpose thermoplastic resin, a cured product of a thermosetting resin composition, Examples include a cured product of an ionizing radiation curable resin composition. Specifically, fluorine resin, silicone resin, acrylic resin, polyester resin, polyolefin resin, polystyrene resin, polyurethane resin, cellulose resin, vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate copolymer resin, nitrified cotton Etc.
Among these, the hardened | cured material of a thermosetting resin composition is preferable, and the thermosetting resin composition which is a polyurethane-type resin containing an acrylic polyol and isocyanate is more preferable.
離型層13の樹脂は、所定の被膜強度を有し、転写層20との接着力が低い材料であれば特に限定されず、汎用の熱可塑性樹脂、熱硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物等が挙げられる。具体的には、フッ素系樹脂、シリコーン系樹脂、アクリル系樹脂、ポリエステル系樹脂、ポリオレフィン系樹脂、ポリスチレン系樹脂、ポリウレタン系樹脂、セルロース系樹脂、塩化ビニル-酢酸ビニル系共重合体樹脂、硝化綿等が挙げられる。
これらの中でも、熱硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物が好ましく、アクリルポリオール及びイソシアネートを含むポリウレタン系樹脂である熱硬化性樹脂組成物がより好ましい。 It is preferable that the
The resin of the
Among these, the hardened | cured material of a thermosetting resin composition is preferable, and the thermosetting resin composition which is a polyurethane-type resin containing an acrylic polyol and isocyanate is more preferable.
離型層13は、離型性を向上させるために離型剤をさらに含んでもよい。離型剤としては、合成ワックスや天然ワッス等のワックス類が挙げられる。合成ワックスとしては、ポリエチレンワックスやポリプピレンワックス等のポリオレフィンワックスが好ましい。
The release layer 13 may further contain a release agent in order to improve the release property. Examples of the release agent include waxes such as synthetic wax and natural washes. The synthetic wax is preferably a polyolefin wax such as polyethylene wax or polypropylene wax.
離型層13の厚さは、0.1~5.0μmであることが好ましく、0.2~3.0μmであることがより好ましく、0.3~1.0μmであることがさらに好ましい。
また、第1領域が凹凸形状を有する場合、凹凸の緩和と凹凸の維持のバランスの観点から、離型層13の厚さ及び第1領域の凹凸形状の平均粗さが、0.05≦[離型層の厚さ/第1領域の凹凸形状の平均粗さ]≦100の関係を満たすことが好ましく、0.3≦[離型層の厚さ/第1領域の凹凸形状の平均粗さ]≦10の関係を満たすことがより好ましく、0.5≦[離型層の厚さ/第1領域の凹凸形状の平均粗さ]≦3.0の関係を満たすことがさらに好ましい。 The thickness of therelease layer 13 is preferably 0.1 to 5.0 μm, more preferably 0.2 to 3.0 μm, and further preferably 0.3 to 1.0 μm.
In addition, when the first region has an uneven shape, the thickness of therelease layer 13 and the average roughness of the uneven shape of the first region are 0.05 ≦ [ It is preferable that the relationship of the thickness of the release layer / the average roughness of the unevenness in the first region] ≦ 100 is satisfied, and 0.3 ≦ [the thickness of the release layer / the average roughness of the unevenness in the first region] ] ≦ 10 is more preferable, and it is more preferable that the relationship 0.5 ≦ [thickness of release layer / average roughness of the unevenness of the first region] ≦ 3.0 is satisfied.
また、第1領域が凹凸形状を有する場合、凹凸の緩和と凹凸の維持のバランスの観点から、離型層13の厚さ及び第1領域の凹凸形状の平均粗さが、0.05≦[離型層の厚さ/第1領域の凹凸形状の平均粗さ]≦100の関係を満たすことが好ましく、0.3≦[離型層の厚さ/第1領域の凹凸形状の平均粗さ]≦10の関係を満たすことがより好ましく、0.5≦[離型層の厚さ/第1領域の凹凸形状の平均粗さ]≦3.0の関係を満たすことがさらに好ましい。 The thickness of the
In addition, when the first region has an uneven shape, the thickness of the
(その他の層)
離型シート10は、その他の層を有していてもよい。
その他の層としては、帯電防止層が挙げられる。離型シート10は、帯電防止層を有することにより、離型シートを剥離する際の剥離帯電を抑制でき、転写の作業性を向上できる。 (Other layers)
Therelease sheet 10 may have other layers.
Examples of other layers include an antistatic layer. When therelease sheet 10 has an antistatic layer, it is possible to suppress the release charge when the release sheet is peeled off, and to improve the transfer workability.
離型シート10は、その他の層を有していてもよい。
その他の層としては、帯電防止層が挙げられる。離型シート10は、帯電防止層を有することにより、離型シートを剥離する際の剥離帯電を抑制でき、転写の作業性を向上できる。 (Other layers)
The
Examples of other layers include an antistatic layer. When the
帯電防止層は、電子伝導型帯電防止剤、イオン伝導型帯電防止剤等の帯電防止剤、及びバインダー樹脂を含むことが好ましい。
帯電防止層は、離型シートの転写層と接する側の面とは反対側の表面に形成されていることが好ましい。
帯電防止層は、表面抵抗率を1.0×10-9Ω/□~1.0×10-12Ω/□の範囲に調整することが好ましい。
なお、帯電防止剤を樹脂層等の他の層に含有させて帯電防止性を発揮させてもよい。 The antistatic layer preferably contains an antistatic agent such as an electron conductive antistatic agent or an ion conductive antistatic agent, and a binder resin.
The antistatic layer is preferably formed on the surface of the release sheet opposite to the surface in contact with the transfer layer.
The antistatic layer preferably has a surface resistivity adjusted to a range of 1.0 × 10 −9 Ω / □ to 1.0 × 10 −12 Ω / □.
An antistatic agent may be contained in another layer such as a resin layer to exhibit antistatic properties.
帯電防止層は、離型シートの転写層と接する側の面とは反対側の表面に形成されていることが好ましい。
帯電防止層は、表面抵抗率を1.0×10-9Ω/□~1.0×10-12Ω/□の範囲に調整することが好ましい。
なお、帯電防止剤を樹脂層等の他の層に含有させて帯電防止性を発揮させてもよい。 The antistatic layer preferably contains an antistatic agent such as an electron conductive antistatic agent or an ion conductive antistatic agent, and a binder resin.
The antistatic layer is preferably formed on the surface of the release sheet opposite to the surface in contact with the transfer layer.
The antistatic layer preferably has a surface resistivity adjusted to a range of 1.0 × 10 −9 Ω / □ to 1.0 × 10 −12 Ω / □.
An antistatic agent may be contained in another layer such as a resin layer to exhibit antistatic properties.
(離型シートの製造方法)
離型シートは、例えば、以下の(A1)~(A3)工程により製造できる。
(A1)支持体上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む樹脂層形成用インキを塗布し、未硬化の樹脂層を形成する工程。
(A2)第1領域及び第2領域と相補的な形状を有する版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層を賦形すると同時に、電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層を硬化させ、支持体上に樹脂層が形成された基材層を得る工程。
(A3)基材層の第2領域内の突出部上に着色層を形成する工程。 (Manufacturing method of release sheet)
The release sheet can be produced, for example, by the following steps (A1) to (A3).
(A1) The process of apply | coating the ink for resin layer formation containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition on a support body, and forming an uncured resin layer.
(A2) Using a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region, the uncured resin layer is shaped, and simultaneously irradiated with ionizing radiation to cure the shaped resin layer and support The process of obtaining the base material layer in which the resin layer was formed on the body.
(A3) The process of forming a colored layer on the protrusion part in the 2nd area | region of a base material layer.
離型シートは、例えば、以下の(A1)~(A3)工程により製造できる。
(A1)支持体上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む樹脂層形成用インキを塗布し、未硬化の樹脂層を形成する工程。
(A2)第1領域及び第2領域と相補的な形状を有する版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層を賦形すると同時に、電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層を硬化させ、支持体上に樹脂層が形成された基材層を得る工程。
(A3)基材層の第2領域内の突出部上に着色層を形成する工程。 (Manufacturing method of release sheet)
The release sheet can be produced, for example, by the following steps (A1) to (A3).
(A1) The process of apply | coating the ink for resin layer formation containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition on a support body, and forming an uncured resin layer.
(A2) Using a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region, the uncured resin layer is shaped, and simultaneously irradiated with ionizing radiation to cure the shaped resin layer and support The process of obtaining the base material layer in which the resin layer was formed on the body.
(A3) The process of forming a colored layer on the protrusion part in the 2nd area | region of a base material layer.
電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物が溶剤を含む場合、(A1)工程で溶剤を乾燥させることが好ましい。
離型シートが離型層を有する場合、(A3)工程の後に、(A4)樹脂層及び/又は着色層上の少なくとも一部に離型層を形成する工程、を行えばよい。 When the ionizing radiation curable resin composition contains a solvent, it is preferable to dry the solvent in the step (A1).
When the release sheet has a release layer, after the step (A3), (A4) a step of forming a release layer on at least part of the resin layer and / or the colored layer may be performed.
離型シートが離型層を有する場合、(A3)工程の後に、(A4)樹脂層及び/又は着色層上の少なくとも一部に離型層を形成する工程、を行えばよい。 When the ionizing radiation curable resin composition contains a solvent, it is preferable to dry the solvent in the step (A1).
When the release sheet has a release layer, after the step (A3), (A4) a step of forming a release layer on at least part of the resin layer and / or the colored layer may be performed.
離型シートがその他の領域を有する場合、(A2)工程の版として、第1領域、第2領域及びその他の領域と相補的な形状を有する版を用いればよい。
また、その他の領域上に位置検出手段を有する場合、(A3)工程と同時に、あるいは別途の工程において、その他の領域の第2の凹凸部上及びその周辺部に、第2の着色層を形成することが好ましい。 When the release sheet has other regions, a plate having a shape complementary to the first region, the second region, and the other regions may be used as the plate in the step (A2).
In addition, when the position detecting means is provided on the other region, the second colored layer is formed on the second concavo-convex portion of the other region and its peripheral portion simultaneously with the step (A3) or in a separate step. It is preferable to do.
また、その他の領域上に位置検出手段を有する場合、(A3)工程と同時に、あるいは別途の工程において、その他の領域の第2の凹凸部上及びその周辺部に、第2の着色層を形成することが好ましい。 When the release sheet has other regions, a plate having a shape complementary to the first region, the second region, and the other regions may be used as the plate in the step (A2).
In addition, when the position detecting means is provided on the other region, the second colored layer is formed on the second concavo-convex portion of the other region and its peripheral portion simultaneously with the step (A3) or in a separate step. It is preferable to do.
(A2)工程で使用する版は、例えば、エッチング、サンドブラスト、切削及びレーザー加工、あるいはこれらの組み合わせなどによって、シリンダーの表面を所望の形状に彫刻することにより得ることができる。あるいは、レーザー彫刻、光造形等によって長尺の雄型の版(第1領域及び第2領域と同一の形状を有する版)を作製し、これを反転したものをシリンダーの表面に巻き付けることによって得ることができる。これら版の表面は、クロム等で硬質メッキ処理することが好ましい。
The plate used in the step (A2) can be obtained by engraving the surface of the cylinder into a desired shape by, for example, etching, sandblasting, cutting and laser processing, or a combination thereof. Alternatively, a long male plate (a plate having the same shape as the first region and the second region) is prepared by laser engraving, stereolithography, and the like, and is obtained by wrapping an inverted version around the cylinder surface. be able to. The surface of these plates is preferably hard-plated with chromium or the like.
また、離型シートは、例えば、以下の(a1)~(a3)工程によっても製造できる。
(a1)第1領域及び第2領域と相補的な形状を有する版に、樹脂層形成用インキを充填する工程。
(a2)版に充填した樹脂層形成用インキを支持体上に転写し、必要に応じて乾燥及び硬化して、樹脂層を形成し、支持体上に樹脂層が形成された基材層を得る工程。
(a3)基材層の第2領域内の突出部上に着色層を形成する工程。 The release sheet can also be produced, for example, by the following steps (a1) to (a3).
(A1) A step of filling a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region with resin layer forming ink.
(A2) The resin layer forming ink filled in the plate is transferred onto a support, dried and cured as necessary to form a resin layer, and a base material layer having a resin layer formed on the support is formed. Obtaining step.
(A3) The process of forming a colored layer on the protrusion part in the 2nd area | region of a base material layer.
(a1)第1領域及び第2領域と相補的な形状を有する版に、樹脂層形成用インキを充填する工程。
(a2)版に充填した樹脂層形成用インキを支持体上に転写し、必要に応じて乾燥及び硬化して、樹脂層を形成し、支持体上に樹脂層が形成された基材層を得る工程。
(a3)基材層の第2領域内の突出部上に着色層を形成する工程。 The release sheet can also be produced, for example, by the following steps (a1) to (a3).
(A1) A step of filling a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region with resin layer forming ink.
(A2) The resin layer forming ink filled in the plate is transferred onto a support, dried and cured as necessary to form a resin layer, and a base material layer having a resin layer formed on the support is formed. Obtaining step.
(A3) The process of forming a colored layer on the protrusion part in the 2nd area | region of a base material layer.
離型シートが離型層を有する場合、(a3)工程の後に、(a4)樹脂層及び/又は着色層上の少なくとも一部に離型層を形成する工程、を行えばよい。
離型シートがその他の領域を有する場合、(a2)工程の版として、第1領域、第2領域及びその他の領域と相補的な形状を有する版を用いればよい。
また、その他の領域上に位置検出手段を有する場合、(a3)工程と同時に、あるいは別途の工程において、その他の領域の第2の凹凸部上及びその周辺部に、第2の着色層を形成することが好ましい。 When the release sheet has a release layer, after the step (a3), (a4) a step of forming a release layer on at least part of the resin layer and / or the colored layer may be performed.
When the release sheet has other regions, a plate having a shape complementary to the first region, the second region, and the other regions may be used as the plate in the step (a2).
In the case where the position detecting means is provided on the other region, the second colored layer is formed on the second concavo-convex part of the other region and its peripheral part simultaneously with the step (a3) or in a separate step. It is preferable to do.
離型シートがその他の領域を有する場合、(a2)工程の版として、第1領域、第2領域及びその他の領域と相補的な形状を有する版を用いればよい。
また、その他の領域上に位置検出手段を有する場合、(a3)工程と同時に、あるいは別途の工程において、その他の領域の第2の凹凸部上及びその周辺部に、第2の着色層を形成することが好ましい。 When the release sheet has a release layer, after the step (a3), (a4) a step of forming a release layer on at least part of the resin layer and / or the colored layer may be performed.
When the release sheet has other regions, a plate having a shape complementary to the first region, the second region, and the other regions may be used as the plate in the step (a2).
In the case where the position detecting means is provided on the other region, the second colored layer is formed on the second concavo-convex part of the other region and its peripheral part simultaneously with the step (a3) or in a separate step. It is preferable to do.
正確かつ精密な形状を形成する観点からは、上述した(A1)~(A3)工程が好適である。
From the viewpoint of forming an accurate and precise shape, the above-described steps (A1) to (A3) are preferable.
転写シートは、製造効率の観点から、図7のように多面付けで製造することが好ましい。同様に、離型シートも多面付けで製造することが好ましい。このため、上記(A2)工程や(a1)工程で使用する版は、多面付けに対応した版とすることが好ましい。
The transfer sheet is preferably manufactured with multiple impositions as shown in FIG. 7 from the viewpoint of manufacturing efficiency. Similarly, it is preferable that the release sheet is also manufactured by multiple imposition. For this reason, it is preferable that the plate used in the step (A2) or the step (a1) is a plate corresponding to the multi-page imposition.
上述した版は、第1領域及び第2領域を正確な位置に配置することが好ましい。特に、第1領域が凹凸部を有する場合、第1領域と第2領域との配置が重要となる。
第1領域が凹凸部を有する場合、例えば、以下の(y1)~(y4)の工程により、第1領域及び第2領域が正確な位置に配置された版を作製することができる。 In the above-described plate, it is preferable that the first region and the second region are arranged at accurate positions. In particular, when the first region has an uneven portion, the arrangement of the first region and the second region is important.
When the first region has an uneven portion, for example, a plate in which the first region and the second region are arranged at accurate positions can be manufactured by the following steps (y1) to (y4).
第1領域が凹凸部を有する場合、例えば、以下の(y1)~(y4)の工程により、第1領域及び第2領域が正確な位置に配置された版を作製することができる。 In the above-described plate, it is preferable that the first region and the second region are arranged at accurate positions. In particular, when the first region has an uneven portion, the arrangement of the first region and the second region is important.
When the first region has an uneven portion, for example, a plate in which the first region and the second region are arranged at accurate positions can be manufactured by the following steps (y1) to (y4).
(y1)シリンダー30の表面に、第2領域の突出部と相補的な形状を有する凹部40を形成する(図9(a))。
(y2)上記凹部を位置合わせの基準として、シリンダー30の表面を、第1領域の凹部を形成する箇所60が抜き加工されたマスク50で覆う(図9(b))。
(y3)マスク50で覆われていない箇所に、第1領域の凹凸部と相補的な形状を有する凹凸を形成する。
(y4)マスク50を外し(図9(c))、シリンダーの表面を硬質メッキ処理する。 (Y1) Aconcave portion 40 having a shape complementary to the protruding portion of the second region is formed on the surface of the cylinder 30 (FIG. 9A).
(Y2) Using the concave portion as a reference for alignment, the surface of thecylinder 30 is covered with a mask 50 in which a portion 60 for forming the concave portion in the first region is punched (FIG. 9B).
(Y3) Irregularities having a shape complementary to the irregularities in the first region are formed at locations not covered with themask 50.
(Y4) Themask 50 is removed (FIG. 9C), and the surface of the cylinder is hard-plated.
(y2)上記凹部を位置合わせの基準として、シリンダー30の表面を、第1領域の凹部を形成する箇所60が抜き加工されたマスク50で覆う(図9(b))。
(y3)マスク50で覆われていない箇所に、第1領域の凹凸部と相補的な形状を有する凹凸を形成する。
(y4)マスク50を外し(図9(c))、シリンダーの表面を硬質メッキ処理する。 (Y1) A
(Y2) Using the concave portion as a reference for alignment, the surface of the
(Y3) Irregularities having a shape complementary to the irregularities in the first region are formed at locations not covered with the
(Y4) The
(y1)工程は、例えば、エッチングにより行うことができる。このため、シリンダーは、表面が厚膜でメッキされたものが好ましい。
その他の領域を形成する場合、(y1)工程において、上記凹部40を形成するとともに、その他の領域の第2の突出部と相補的な形状を有する凹部70を形成したり(図9(a))、(y2)工程において、その他の領域の凹凸形状を形成する箇所が抜き加工されたマスクを用いたりしてもよい。
(y3)工程は、例えば、エッチングやブラスト加工により行うことができる。第2領域の突出部よりも高さを低くする観点、及びマット感の調整のしやすさの観点から、ブラスト加工が好適である。また、ブラスト加工に用いる粒子の形状(球形、不定形)、粒子の粒子径、粒子の材質(ガラスビーズ、有機粒子、無機粒子、鉄、砂等)を選定した上で、粒子を射出する距離、速度、時間、角度等を調整することにより、ブラスト加工により付与する形状を調整できる。
(y4)工程の硬質メッキは、例えば、クロムメッキが挙げられる。 The step (y1) can be performed by etching, for example. For this reason, the cylinder preferably has a surface plated with a thick film.
When forming other regions, in the step (y1), therecess 40 is formed, and a recess 70 having a shape complementary to the second protrusion of the other region is formed (FIG. 9A). ), (Y2) In the step, a mask in which a portion for forming the concavo-convex shape in other regions is punched may be used.
The step (y3) can be performed by, for example, etching or blasting. Blasting is preferred from the viewpoint of lowering the height than the protruding portion of the second region and the ease of adjusting the matte feeling. In addition, select the particle shape (spherical, indeterminate), particle diameter, particle material (glass beads, organic particles, inorganic particles, iron, sand, etc.) used for blasting, and the distance to inject the particles By adjusting the speed, time, angle, etc., the shape to be imparted by blasting can be adjusted.
Examples of the hard plating in the step (y4) include chrome plating.
その他の領域を形成する場合、(y1)工程において、上記凹部40を形成するとともに、その他の領域の第2の突出部と相補的な形状を有する凹部70を形成したり(図9(a))、(y2)工程において、その他の領域の凹凸形状を形成する箇所が抜き加工されたマスクを用いたりしてもよい。
(y3)工程は、例えば、エッチングやブラスト加工により行うことができる。第2領域の突出部よりも高さを低くする観点、及びマット感の調整のしやすさの観点から、ブラスト加工が好適である。また、ブラスト加工に用いる粒子の形状(球形、不定形)、粒子の粒子径、粒子の材質(ガラスビーズ、有機粒子、無機粒子、鉄、砂等)を選定した上で、粒子を射出する距離、速度、時間、角度等を調整することにより、ブラスト加工により付与する形状を調整できる。
(y4)工程の硬質メッキは、例えば、クロムメッキが挙げられる。 The step (y1) can be performed by etching, for example. For this reason, the cylinder preferably has a surface plated with a thick film.
When forming other regions, in the step (y1), the
The step (y3) can be performed by, for example, etching or blasting. Blasting is preferred from the viewpoint of lowering the height than the protruding portion of the second region and the ease of adjusting the matte feeling. In addition, select the particle shape (spherical, indeterminate), particle diameter, particle material (glass beads, organic particles, inorganic particles, iron, sand, etc.) used for blasting, and the distance to inject the particles By adjusting the speed, time, angle, etc., the shape to be imparted by blasting can be adjusted.
Examples of the hard plating in the step (y4) include chrome plating.
<転写層>
離型シート10上の少なくとも一部には、転写層20が形成される。
転写層20は、被転写物に転写される層であり、例えば、図1~図4に示すように、離型シート10に近い側から順に、保護層21及び接着剤層22を有する。
転写層20は、基材層11の第1領域R1に対応する箇所の全部に形成することが好ましく、図1~図4に示すように、離型シート10の全面に形成することがより好ましい。 <Transfer layer>
Atransfer layer 20 is formed on at least a part of the release sheet 10.
Thetransfer layer 20 is a layer to be transferred to the transfer object, and has, for example, a protective layer 21 and an adhesive layer 22 in order from the side close to the release sheet 10 as shown in FIGS.
Transfer layer 20 is preferably formed on the whole of the portion corresponding to the first region R 1 of the base layer 11, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, more be formed on the entire surface of the release sheet 10 preferable.
離型シート10上の少なくとも一部には、転写層20が形成される。
転写層20は、被転写物に転写される層であり、例えば、図1~図4に示すように、離型シート10に近い側から順に、保護層21及び接着剤層22を有する。
転写層20は、基材層11の第1領域R1に対応する箇所の全部に形成することが好ましく、図1~図4に示すように、離型シート10の全面に形成することがより好ましい。 <Transfer layer>
A
The
(保護層)
保護層21は、転写層20が転写シート100から被転写物へと転写された後は、摩耗、光、薬品等から加飾成形品を保護する役割を有する。
離型シート10の第1領域内に凹凸部5を有する場合、該凹凸形状と相補的な形状を有する保護層21が加飾成形品の表面に付与される。また、離型シート10の第1領域が略平滑な場合、表面が略平滑な保護層21が加飾成形品の表面に付与され、加飾成形品の光沢を高くすることができる。 (Protective layer)
Theprotective layer 21 has a role of protecting the decorative molded product from abrasion, light, chemicals, and the like after the transfer layer 20 is transferred from the transfer sheet 100 to the transfer target.
When it has the uneven | corrugated |grooved part 5 in the 1st area | region of the release sheet 10, the protective layer 21 which has a shape complementary to this uneven | corrugated shape is provided to the surface of a decorative molded product. Moreover, when the 1st area | region of the release sheet 10 is substantially smooth, the protective layer 21 with the substantially smooth surface is provided to the surface of a decorative molded product, and the glossiness of a decorative molded product can be made high.
保護層21は、転写層20が転写シート100から被転写物へと転写された後は、摩耗、光、薬品等から加飾成形品を保護する役割を有する。
離型シート10の第1領域内に凹凸部5を有する場合、該凹凸形状と相補的な形状を有する保護層21が加飾成形品の表面に付与される。また、離型シート10の第1領域が略平滑な場合、表面が略平滑な保護層21が加飾成形品の表面に付与され、加飾成形品の光沢を高くすることができる。 (Protective layer)
The
When it has the uneven | corrugated |
保護層21は、熱可塑性樹脂、熱硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物等の樹脂成分を主成分として含むことが好ましい。なお、主成分とは、保護層を構成する全固形分の50質量%以上を意味し、該割合は70質量%以上であることが好ましく、80質量%以上であることがより好ましい。
また、上記樹脂成分の中でも、強度に優れる電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物が好適である。また、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物による効果を良好にする観点から、保護層を構成する全樹脂成分のうち、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物を70質量%以上含むことが好ましく、90質量%以上含むことがより好ましく、95質量%以上含むことがさらに好ましく、100質量%含むことがよりさらに好ましい。 Theprotective layer 21 preferably contains a resin component such as a thermoplastic resin, a cured product of a thermosetting resin composition, and a cured product of an ionizing radiation curable resin composition as a main component. The main component means 50% by mass or more of the total solid content constituting the protective layer, and the ratio is preferably 70% by mass or more, and more preferably 80% by mass or more.
Among the resin components, a cured product of an ionizing radiation curable resin composition having excellent strength is preferable. In addition, from the viewpoint of improving the effect of the ionizing radiation curable resin composition, it is preferable that 70% by mass or more of a cured product of the ionizing radiation curable resin composition is included among all resin components constituting the protective layer, More preferably, it is contained more than 95 mass%, more preferably more than 95 mass%, and still more preferably 100 mass%.
また、上記樹脂成分の中でも、強度に優れる電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物が好適である。また、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物による効果を良好にする観点から、保護層を構成する全樹脂成分のうち、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物を70質量%以上含むことが好ましく、90質量%以上含むことがより好ましく、95質量%以上含むことがさらに好ましく、100質量%含むことがよりさらに好ましい。 The
Among the resin components, a cured product of an ionizing radiation curable resin composition having excellent strength is preferable. In addition, from the viewpoint of improving the effect of the ionizing radiation curable resin composition, it is preferable that 70% by mass or more of a cured product of the ionizing radiation curable resin composition is included among all resin components constituting the protective layer, More preferably, it is contained more than 95 mass%, more preferably more than 95 mass%, and still more preferably 100 mass%.
保護層21の電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物等の樹脂成分の実施の形態は、上述した樹脂層の樹脂成分の実施の形態と同様である。
なお、保護層21を形成する材料として、熱硬化性樹脂組成物及び/又は電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を用いる場合、成形性の観点から、保護層21を形成する時点では、熱硬化性樹脂組成物及び/又は電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を半硬化の状態にしておき、被転写物に転写した後に熱硬化性樹脂組成物及び/又は電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化を進行させ、完全硬化させることが好ましい。 The embodiment of the resin component such as the ionizing radiation curable resin composition of theprotective layer 21 is the same as the embodiment of the resin component of the resin layer described above.
In addition, when using a thermosetting resin composition and / or ionizing radiation curable resin composition as a material which forms theprotective layer 21, from the viewpoint of moldability, at the time of forming the protective layer 21, a thermosetting resin is used. The composition and / or the ionizing radiation curable resin composition is left in a semi-cured state, and after being transferred to the transfer object, the curing of the thermosetting resin composition and / or the ionizing radiation curable resin composition proceeds. It is preferable to completely cure.
なお、保護層21を形成する材料として、熱硬化性樹脂組成物及び/又は電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を用いる場合、成形性の観点から、保護層21を形成する時点では、熱硬化性樹脂組成物及び/又は電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を半硬化の状態にしておき、被転写物に転写した後に熱硬化性樹脂組成物及び/又は電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化を進行させ、完全硬化させることが好ましい。 The embodiment of the resin component such as the ionizing radiation curable resin composition of the
In addition, when using a thermosetting resin composition and / or ionizing radiation curable resin composition as a material which forms the
保護層21中には、有機粒子及び無機粒子等の粒子を含有してもよい。保護層21中に粒子を含有することにより、樹脂成分との屈折率差による内部ヘイズの発現により、ギラツキや欠陥を目立ちにくくすることができる。これらの粒子は、同様の目的で、後述する接着剤層、アンカー層等に含有させてもよい。
The protective layer 21 may contain particles such as organic particles and inorganic particles. By containing particles in the protective layer 21, glare and defects can be made inconspicuous due to the expression of internal haze due to the difference in refractive index from the resin component. For the same purpose, these particles may be contained in an adhesive layer, an anchor layer, etc. described later.
有機粒子としては、ポリメチルメタクリレート、ポリアクリル-スチレン共重合体、メラミン樹脂、ポリカーボネート、ポリスチレン、ポリ塩化ビニル、ベンゾグアナミン-メラミン-ホルムアルデヒド縮合物、シリコーン、フッ素系樹脂及びポリエステル系樹脂等からなる粒子が挙げられる。
無機粒子としては、シリカ、アルミナ、アンチモン、ジルコニア及びチタニア等からなる粒子が挙げられる。 Examples of the organic particles include particles made of polymethyl methacrylate, polyacryl-styrene copolymer, melamine resin, polycarbonate, polystyrene, polyvinyl chloride, benzoguanamine-melamine-formaldehyde condensate, silicone, fluorine resin, polyester resin, and the like. Can be mentioned.
Examples of the inorganic particles include particles made of silica, alumina, antimony, zirconia, titania and the like.
無機粒子としては、シリカ、アルミナ、アンチモン、ジルコニア及びチタニア等からなる粒子が挙げられる。 Examples of the organic particles include particles made of polymethyl methacrylate, polyacryl-styrene copolymer, melamine resin, polycarbonate, polystyrene, polyvinyl chloride, benzoguanamine-melamine-formaldehyde condensate, silicone, fluorine resin, polyester resin, and the like. Can be mentioned.
Examples of the inorganic particles include particles made of silica, alumina, antimony, zirconia, titania and the like.
粒子の平均粒子径は、0.05~5.0μmが好ましく、0.5~3.0μmがより好ましい。
本明細書において、平均粒子径は、溶液中の該粒子を動的光散乱方法で測定し、粒子径分布を質量累積分布で表したときの50%粒子径(d50:メジアン径)である。50%粒子径は、例えば、Microtrac粒度分析計(日機装株式会社製)を用いて測定することができる。 The average particle size of the particles is preferably 0.05 to 5.0 μm, more preferably 0.5 to 3.0 μm.
In the present specification, the average particle diameter is a 50% particle diameter (d50: median diameter) when the particles in a solution are measured by a dynamic light scattering method and the particle diameter distribution is represented by a cumulative mass distribution. The 50% particle diameter can be measured using, for example, a Microtrac particle size analyzer (manufactured by Nikkiso Co., Ltd.).
本明細書において、平均粒子径は、溶液中の該粒子を動的光散乱方法で測定し、粒子径分布を質量累積分布で表したときの50%粒子径(d50:メジアン径)である。50%粒子径は、例えば、Microtrac粒度分析計(日機装株式会社製)を用いて測定することができる。 The average particle size of the particles is preferably 0.05 to 5.0 μm, more preferably 0.5 to 3.0 μm.
In the present specification, the average particle diameter is a 50% particle diameter (d50: median diameter) when the particles in a solution are measured by a dynamic light scattering method and the particle diameter distribution is represented by a cumulative mass distribution. The 50% particle diameter can be measured using, for example, a Microtrac particle size analyzer (manufactured by Nikkiso Co., Ltd.).
粒子の含有量は、保護層21の樹脂成分100質量部に対して、0.1~20質量部であることが好ましく、1~10質量部であることがより好ましい。
The content of the particles is preferably 0.1 to 20 parts by mass, and more preferably 1 to 10 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the resin component of the protective layer 21.
保護層21の厚さは、表面硬度及び成形性のバランスの観点から、0.5~30μmであることが好ましく、1.0~20μmであることがより好ましく、2.0~10μmであることがさらに好ましい。
The thickness of the protective layer 21 is preferably 0.5 to 30 μm, more preferably 1.0 to 20 μm, and more preferably 2.0 to 10 μm from the viewpoint of the balance between surface hardness and moldability. Is more preferable.
(接着剤層)
接着剤層22は、樹脂成形体等の被転写物と、転写層20との接着性を良好にして、転写作業を良好にする役割を有する。
なお、保護層21と被転写物との接着性が良好な場合は、接着剤層を設けなくてもよい。 (Adhesive layer)
Theadhesive layer 22 has a role of improving the transfer work by improving the adhesion between the transfer object 20 such as a resin molded body and the transfer layer 20.
In addition, when the adhesiveness between theprotective layer 21 and the transfer object is good, the adhesive layer need not be provided.
接着剤層22は、樹脂成形体等の被転写物と、転写層20との接着性を良好にして、転写作業を良好にする役割を有する。
なお、保護層21と被転写物との接着性が良好な場合は、接着剤層を設けなくてもよい。 (Adhesive layer)
The
In addition, when the adhesiveness between the
接着剤層22は、被転写物の素材に適した感熱性又は感圧性の樹脂を使用することが好ましい。例えば、被転写物の材質がアクリル系樹脂の場合は、アクリル系樹脂を用いることが好ましい。また、被転写物の材質がポリフェニレンオキサイド・ポリスチレン系樹脂、ポリカーボネート系樹脂、スチレン系樹脂の場合は、これらの樹脂と親和性のあるアクリル系樹脂、ポリスチレン系樹脂、ポリアミド系樹脂などを使用することが好ましい。さらに、被転写物の材質がポリプロピレン樹脂の場合は、塩素化ポリオレフィン樹脂、塩素化エチレン-酢酸ビニル共重合体樹脂、環化ゴム、クマロンインデン樹脂を使用することが好ましい。
接着剤層22には、紫外線吸収剤、赤外線吸収剤等の添加剤を配合してもよい。紫外線吸収剤は、無機系であってもよく有機系であってもよいが、透明性に優れる点から有機系の紫外線吸収剤が好ましい。無機系の紫外線吸収剤としては、例えば、二酸化チタン、酸化セリウム、酸化亜鉛等が挙げられる。有機系の紫外線吸収剤としては、例えば、ベンゾトリアゾール系紫外線吸収剤、トリアジン系紫外線吸収剤、ベンゾフェノン系紫外線吸収剤、サリシレート系紫外線吸収剤、ベンゾエート系紫外線吸収剤、シアノアクリレート系紫外線吸収剤、ヒドロキシフェニルトリアジン系紫外線吸収剤、ニッケルキレート系紫外線吸収剤等が挙げられる。赤外線吸収剤としては、例えば、酸化チタン、酸化亜鉛、酸化インジウム、錫ドープ酸化インジウム(ITO)、酸化錫、アンチモンドープ酸化錫(ATO)及び硫化亜鉛金属酸化物系赤外線吸収剤等が挙げられる。 Theadhesive layer 22 is preferably made of a heat sensitive or pressure sensitive resin suitable for the material of the transfer object. For example, when the material of the transfer object is an acrylic resin, it is preferable to use an acrylic resin. If the material of the transferred material is polyphenylene oxide / polystyrene resin, polycarbonate resin, or styrene resin, use an acrylic resin, polystyrene resin, polyamide resin, or the like that has an affinity for these resins. Is preferred. Further, when the material of the transfer object is a polypropylene resin, it is preferable to use a chlorinated polyolefin resin, a chlorinated ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer resin, a cyclized rubber, or a coumarone indene resin.
Theadhesive layer 22 may contain additives such as an ultraviolet absorber and an infrared absorber. The ultraviolet absorber may be inorganic or organic, but an organic ultraviolet absorber is preferable from the viewpoint of excellent transparency. Examples of inorganic ultraviolet absorbers include titanium dioxide, cerium oxide, and zinc oxide. Examples of organic UV absorbers include benzotriazole UV absorbers, triazine UV absorbers, benzophenone UV absorbers, salicylate UV absorbers, benzoate UV absorbers, cyanoacrylate UV absorbers, hydroxy A phenyl triazine type ultraviolet absorber, a nickel chelate type ultraviolet absorber, etc. are mentioned. Examples of the infrared absorber include titanium oxide, zinc oxide, indium oxide, tin-doped indium oxide (ITO), tin oxide, antimony-doped tin oxide (ATO), and zinc sulfide metal oxide-based infrared absorber.
接着剤層22には、紫外線吸収剤、赤外線吸収剤等の添加剤を配合してもよい。紫外線吸収剤は、無機系であってもよく有機系であってもよいが、透明性に優れる点から有機系の紫外線吸収剤が好ましい。無機系の紫外線吸収剤としては、例えば、二酸化チタン、酸化セリウム、酸化亜鉛等が挙げられる。有機系の紫外線吸収剤としては、例えば、ベンゾトリアゾール系紫外線吸収剤、トリアジン系紫外線吸収剤、ベンゾフェノン系紫外線吸収剤、サリシレート系紫外線吸収剤、ベンゾエート系紫外線吸収剤、シアノアクリレート系紫外線吸収剤、ヒドロキシフェニルトリアジン系紫外線吸収剤、ニッケルキレート系紫外線吸収剤等が挙げられる。赤外線吸収剤としては、例えば、酸化チタン、酸化亜鉛、酸化インジウム、錫ドープ酸化インジウム(ITO)、酸化錫、アンチモンドープ酸化錫(ATO)及び硫化亜鉛金属酸化物系赤外線吸収剤等が挙げられる。 The
The
接着剤層の厚さは、0.1~20μmであることが好ましく、0.5~15μmであることがより好ましく、1.0~10μmであることがさらに好ましい。
The thickness of the adhesive layer is preferably 0.1 to 20 μm, more preferably 0.5 to 15 μm, and further preferably 1.0 to 10 μm.
(アンカー層)
アンカー層は、インモールド成形等の高温環境に置かれる場合において、耐熱性を向上させるために必要に応じて設けられる層である。アンカー層は、保護層21と接着剤層22との間に形成することが好ましい。 (Anchor layer)
The anchor layer is a layer provided as necessary to improve heat resistance when placed in a high temperature environment such as in-mold molding. The anchor layer is preferably formed between theprotective layer 21 and the adhesive layer 22.
アンカー層は、インモールド成形等の高温環境に置かれる場合において、耐熱性を向上させるために必要に応じて設けられる層である。アンカー層は、保護層21と接着剤層22との間に形成することが好ましい。 (Anchor layer)
The anchor layer is a layer provided as necessary to improve heat resistance when placed in a high temperature environment such as in-mold molding. The anchor layer is preferably formed between the
アンカー層は、硬化性樹脂組成物の硬化物を含むことが好ましい。
硬化性樹脂組成物としては、熱硬化性樹脂組成物、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物が挙げられる。
アンカー層の熱硬化性樹脂組成物、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物の実施の形態は、樹脂層の熱硬化性樹脂組成物、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物の実施の形態と同様である。
アンカー層の厚さは、0.1~6μmであることが好ましく、0.3~5μmであることがより好ましく、0.5~4μmであることがさらに好ましい。 The anchor layer preferably contains a cured product of the curable resin composition.
Examples of the curable resin composition include a thermosetting resin composition and an ionizing radiation curable resin composition.
The embodiments of the thermosetting resin composition and ionizing radiation curable resin composition of the anchor layer are the same as the embodiments of the thermosetting resin composition and ionizing radiation curable resin composition of the resin layer.
The thickness of the anchor layer is preferably 0.1 to 6 μm, more preferably 0.3 to 5 μm, and even more preferably 0.5 to 4 μm.
硬化性樹脂組成物としては、熱硬化性樹脂組成物、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物が挙げられる。
アンカー層の熱硬化性樹脂組成物、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物の実施の形態は、樹脂層の熱硬化性樹脂組成物、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物の実施の形態と同様である。
アンカー層の厚さは、0.1~6μmであることが好ましく、0.3~5μmであることがより好ましく、0.5~4μmであることがさらに好ましい。 The anchor layer preferably contains a cured product of the curable resin composition.
Examples of the curable resin composition include a thermosetting resin composition and an ionizing radiation curable resin composition.
The embodiments of the thermosetting resin composition and ionizing radiation curable resin composition of the anchor layer are the same as the embodiments of the thermosetting resin composition and ionizing radiation curable resin composition of the resin layer.
The thickness of the anchor layer is preferably 0.1 to 6 μm, more preferably 0.3 to 5 μm, and even more preferably 0.5 to 4 μm.
(印刷層)
転写層20は、図1~図4に示すように、さらに印刷層23を有していてもよい。印刷層23は、加飾成形品に所望の意匠性を付与する役割を有する。 (Print layer)
Thetransfer layer 20 may further have a print layer 23 as shown in FIGS. The printed layer 23 has a role of imparting a desired design property to the decorative molded product.
転写層20は、図1~図4に示すように、さらに印刷層23を有していてもよい。印刷層23は、加飾成形品に所望の意匠性を付与する役割を有する。 (Print layer)
The
印刷層23は、転写シート100を平面方向から観察した際に、基材層11の第1領域内の少なくとも一部に位置するように配置することが好ましい。
また、印刷層23の厚さ方向の位置は、図1~図4のように接着剤層22上に配置してもよいし、接着剤層22と保護層21との間に配置してもよいし、保護層21と離型シート10との間に配置してもよい。印刷層23の保護と、被転写物への接着性の観点からは、接着剤層22と保護層21との間に印刷層23を配置することが好ましい。また、小ロット品への対応の観点からは、接着剤層22上に印刷層23を配置することが好ましい。なお、接着剤層22上に印刷層23を配置する場合、被転写物との接着性の均一化の観点から、印刷層23の樹脂成分は、接着剤層の樹脂成分と同系統の樹脂とすることが好ましく、同一の樹脂とすることがより好ましい。 Theprint layer 23 is preferably arranged so as to be positioned at least in a part of the first region of the base material layer 11 when the transfer sheet 100 is observed from the planar direction.
Further, the position in the thickness direction of theprinting layer 23 may be arranged on the adhesive layer 22 as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4 or may be arranged between the adhesive layer 22 and the protective layer 21. Alternatively, it may be disposed between the protective layer 21 and the release sheet 10. From the viewpoint of protection of the printing layer 23 and adhesion to the transfer object, it is preferable to dispose the printing layer 23 between the adhesive layer 22 and the protection layer 21. Further, from the viewpoint of handling small lot products, it is preferable to dispose the printing layer 23 on the adhesive layer 22. When the printing layer 23 is disposed on the adhesive layer 22, the resin component of the printing layer 23 is a resin of the same type as the resin component of the adhesive layer from the viewpoint of uniform adhesion to the transfer target. It is preferable to use the same resin.
また、印刷層23の厚さ方向の位置は、図1~図4のように接着剤層22上に配置してもよいし、接着剤層22と保護層21との間に配置してもよいし、保護層21と離型シート10との間に配置してもよい。印刷層23の保護と、被転写物への接着性の観点からは、接着剤層22と保護層21との間に印刷層23を配置することが好ましい。また、小ロット品への対応の観点からは、接着剤層22上に印刷層23を配置することが好ましい。なお、接着剤層22上に印刷層23を配置する場合、被転写物との接着性の均一化の観点から、印刷層23の樹脂成分は、接着剤層の樹脂成分と同系統の樹脂とすることが好ましく、同一の樹脂とすることがより好ましい。 The
Further, the position in the thickness direction of the
印刷層23のパターンは任意であり、例えば、木目、石目、布目、砂目、円、四角形、多角形、幾何学模様、文字、ベタ印刷等が挙げられる。
The pattern of the printing layer 23 is arbitrary, and examples thereof include wood grain, stone grain, cloth grain, sand grain, circle, square, polygon, geometric pattern, character, solid printing, and the like.
印刷層23は、ポリビニル系樹脂、ポリエステル系樹脂、アクリル系樹脂、ポリビニルアセタール系樹脂、セルロース系樹脂等のバインダー樹脂と、顔料及び/又は染料とを含むことが好ましい。
印刷層23の厚さは、意匠性の観点から0.25~20μmが好ましく、0.5~15μmがより好ましく、0.7~10μmがさらに好ましい。 Theprint layer 23 preferably contains a binder resin such as a polyvinyl resin, a polyester resin, an acrylic resin, a polyvinyl acetal resin, or a cellulose resin, and a pigment and / or a dye.
The thickness of theprinting layer 23 is preferably 0.25 to 20 μm, more preferably 0.5 to 15 μm, and further preferably 0.7 to 10 μm from the viewpoint of design.
印刷層23の厚さは、意匠性の観点から0.25~20μmが好ましく、0.5~15μmがより好ましく、0.7~10μmがさらに好ましい。 The
The thickness of the
なお、印刷層23を形成する際、位置合わせが重要となるが、第2領域の突出部5と突出部上の着色層12や、その他の領域の位置検出部によって、印刷層23を正確な位置に形成することができる。
In addition, when forming the printing layer 23, alignment is important, but the printing layer 23 is accurately adjusted by the protruding portion 5 in the second region, the colored layer 12 on the protruding portion, and the position detecting portion in other regions. Can be formed in position.
転写層23を構成する保護層21、接着剤層22、アンカー層、印刷層23等の各層は、例えば、各層の構成成分を含むインキを調整し、離型シート上に、グラビアコート法、ロールコート法などのコート法、グラビア印刷法、スクリーン印刷法などの印刷法により塗布、乾燥し、必要に応じて電離放射線を照射して硬化することにより形成できる。
Each layer such as the protective layer 21, the adhesive layer 22, the anchor layer, and the printing layer 23 constituting the transfer layer 23 is prepared, for example, by adjusting ink containing the constituent components of each layer, and on the release sheet, a gravure coating method, a roll It can be formed by coating and drying by a coating method such as a coating method, a gravure printing method, a screen printing method or the like, and curing by irradiation with ionizing radiation as required.
[転写シートの製造方法]
本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る転写シートの製造方法は、下記(A1)~(A3)工程により離型シートを製造した後、離型シートの少なくとも一部に転写層を形成するものである。
(A1)支持体上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む樹脂層形成用インキを塗布し、未硬化の樹脂層を形成する工程。
(A2)第1領域及び第2領域と相補的な形状を有する版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層を賦形すると同時に、電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層を硬化させ、支持体上に樹脂層が形成された基材層を得る工程。
(A3)基材層の第2領域内の突出部上に着色層を形成する工程。 [Transfer sheet manufacturing method]
The method for manufacturing a transfer sheet according to the first embodiment of the present invention is such that after a release sheet is manufactured by the following steps (A1) to (A3), a transfer layer is formed on at least a part of the release sheet. It is.
(A1) The process of apply | coating the ink for resin layer formation containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition on a support body, and forming an uncured resin layer.
(A2) Using a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region, the uncured resin layer is shaped, and simultaneously irradiated with ionizing radiation to cure the shaped resin layer and support The process of obtaining the base material layer in which the resin layer was formed on the body.
(A3) The process of forming a colored layer on the protrusion part in the 2nd area | region of a base material layer.
本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る転写シートの製造方法は、下記(A1)~(A3)工程により離型シートを製造した後、離型シートの少なくとも一部に転写層を形成するものである。
(A1)支持体上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む樹脂層形成用インキを塗布し、未硬化の樹脂層を形成する工程。
(A2)第1領域及び第2領域と相補的な形状を有する版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層を賦形すると同時に、電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層を硬化させ、支持体上に樹脂層が形成された基材層を得る工程。
(A3)基材層の第2領域内の突出部上に着色層を形成する工程。 [Transfer sheet manufacturing method]
The method for manufacturing a transfer sheet according to the first embodiment of the present invention is such that after a release sheet is manufactured by the following steps (A1) to (A3), a transfer layer is formed on at least a part of the release sheet. It is.
(A1) The process of apply | coating the ink for resin layer formation containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition on a support body, and forming an uncured resin layer.
(A2) Using a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region, the uncured resin layer is shaped, and simultaneously irradiated with ionizing radiation to cure the shaped resin layer and support The process of obtaining the base material layer in which the resin layer was formed on the body.
(A3) The process of forming a colored layer on the protrusion part in the 2nd area | region of a base material layer.
電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物が溶剤を含む場合、(A1)工程で溶剤を乾燥させることが好ましい。
転写シートは、製造効率の観点から、図7のように多面付けで製造することが好ましい。このように多面付けで製造された転写シートは、長尺の転写シート、あるいは枚葉の転写シートとして転写工程が行われる。 When the ionizing radiation curable resin composition contains a solvent, it is preferable to dry the solvent in the step (A1).
From the viewpoint of manufacturing efficiency, the transfer sheet is preferably manufactured with multiple impositions as shown in FIG. The transfer sheet manufactured in such a multi-face manner is subjected to a transfer process as a long transfer sheet or a single sheet transfer sheet.
転写シートは、製造効率の観点から、図7のように多面付けで製造することが好ましい。このように多面付けで製造された転写シートは、長尺の転写シート、あるいは枚葉の転写シートとして転写工程が行われる。 When the ionizing radiation curable resin composition contains a solvent, it is preferable to dry the solvent in the step (A1).
From the viewpoint of manufacturing efficiency, the transfer sheet is preferably manufactured with multiple impositions as shown in FIG. The transfer sheet manufactured in such a multi-face manner is subjected to a transfer process as a long transfer sheet or a single sheet transfer sheet.
上記工程により製造された転写シートは、位置合わせ用のパターン印刷である着色層を突出部上に形成しやすくすることができ、突出部を有する箇所と、その周辺箇所との光透過率ないしは光反射率のコントラストが明りょうとなり、位置合わせをしやすくできる。
The transfer sheet manufactured by the above process can easily form a colored layer, which is a pattern printing for alignment, on the protruding portion, and the light transmittance or light between the portion having the protruding portion and its peripheral portion. The contrast of the reflectivity becomes clear and can be easily aligned.
位置合わせを行う任意の工程としては、例えば、転写シートを長尺にスリットする工程、転写シートを枚葉に型抜きする工程、転写シートを被転写物に転写する工程が挙げられる。
例えば、図7のように第2領域R2の突出部3が転写シートの流れ方向に連続して形成されている場合、第2領域R2内の流れ方向と直交する方向に生じているコントラスト(光透過率差又は光反射率差)を利用して、転写シートの流れ方向に直交する方向の位置を合わせ、転写シートを正確に長尺にスリットすることができる。
また、図7では、その他の領域Rnに位置検出手段を有している。該位置検出手段を利用して転写シートの流れ方向の位置を合わせ、さらに、上述した第2領域R2に基づく転写シートの流れ方向に直交する方向の位置合わせを併用することにより、転写シートを正確に枚葉に型抜きすることができる。
また、上述したスリット工程や型抜き工程において、第2領域R2及び/又はその他の領域Rnを残しておけば、転写シートを被転写物に転写する際に、転写シートの流れ方向に直交する方向及び/又は流れ方向の位置合わせを行うことができ、正確な位置に転写することができる。
光透過率差のコントラストは、例えば、転写シートの下方に設置した光源と、転写シートの上方の前記光源に正対する位置に設置した光検知手段とにより、検知することができる。光反射率差のコントラストは、例えば、転写シートの上方に任意の角度で設置した光源及び光検知手段により、検知することができる。 Examples of the optional step of aligning include a step of slitting the transfer sheet in a long length, a step of punching the transfer sheet into a sheet, and a step of transferring the transfer sheet to a transfer object.
For example, if a second projectingportion 3 of the region R 2 are formed continuously in the flow direction of the transfer sheet, the contrast occurring in a direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the second region R 2 as shown in FIG. 7 By utilizing the (light transmittance difference or light reflectance difference), the position in the direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the transfer sheet can be aligned, and the transfer sheet can be accurately slit in a long length.
Further, in FIG. 7, and a position detecting means to other regions R n. Utilizing said position detecting means aligned in the flow direction of the transfer sheet, further, the combined use of alignment in the direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the transfer sheet based on the second region R 2 as described above, the transfer sheet It can be accurately punched into single wafers.
Also, orthogonal in slitting step and die cutting step described above, if leaving the second region R 2 and / or other regions R n, in transferring the transfer sheet to the transfer target, in the flow direction of the transfer sheet Can be aligned in the direction and / or flow direction and transferred to the correct position.
The contrast of the light transmittance difference can be detected by, for example, a light source installed below the transfer sheet and a light detection unit installed at a position facing the light source above the transfer sheet. The contrast of the light reflectance difference can be detected by, for example, a light source and a light detection unit installed at an arbitrary angle above the transfer sheet.
例えば、図7のように第2領域R2の突出部3が転写シートの流れ方向に連続して形成されている場合、第2領域R2内の流れ方向と直交する方向に生じているコントラスト(光透過率差又は光反射率差)を利用して、転写シートの流れ方向に直交する方向の位置を合わせ、転写シートを正確に長尺にスリットすることができる。
また、図7では、その他の領域Rnに位置検出手段を有している。該位置検出手段を利用して転写シートの流れ方向の位置を合わせ、さらに、上述した第2領域R2に基づく転写シートの流れ方向に直交する方向の位置合わせを併用することにより、転写シートを正確に枚葉に型抜きすることができる。
また、上述したスリット工程や型抜き工程において、第2領域R2及び/又はその他の領域Rnを残しておけば、転写シートを被転写物に転写する際に、転写シートの流れ方向に直交する方向及び/又は流れ方向の位置合わせを行うことができ、正確な位置に転写することができる。
光透過率差のコントラストは、例えば、転写シートの下方に設置した光源と、転写シートの上方の前記光源に正対する位置に設置した光検知手段とにより、検知することができる。光反射率差のコントラストは、例えば、転写シートの上方に任意の角度で設置した光源及び光検知手段により、検知することができる。 Examples of the optional step of aligning include a step of slitting the transfer sheet in a long length, a step of punching the transfer sheet into a sheet, and a step of transferring the transfer sheet to a transfer object.
For example, if a second projecting
Further, in FIG. 7, and a position detecting means to other regions R n. Utilizing said position detecting means aligned in the flow direction of the transfer sheet, further, the combined use of alignment in the direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the transfer sheet based on the second region R 2 as described above, the transfer sheet It can be accurately punched into single wafers.
Also, orthogonal in slitting step and die cutting step described above, if leaving the second region R 2 and / or other regions R n, in transferring the transfer sheet to the transfer target, in the flow direction of the transfer sheet Can be aligned in the direction and / or flow direction and transferred to the correct position.
The contrast of the light transmittance difference can be detected by, for example, a light source installed below the transfer sheet and a light detection unit installed at a position facing the light source above the transfer sheet. The contrast of the light reflectance difference can be detected by, for example, a light source and a light detection unit installed at an arbitrary angle above the transfer sheet.
[加飾成形品の製造方法]
本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る加飾成形品の製造方法は、上述した本発明の転写シート100の転写層20を被転写物に転写する工程と、転写シート100の離型シート10を剥離する工程と、を有する。
被転写物としては、樹脂成形体等が挙げられる。 [Method of manufacturing decorative molded product]
The method for manufacturing a decorative molded product according to the first embodiment of the present invention includes the step of transferring thetransfer layer 20 of the transfer sheet 100 of the present invention described above to the transfer object, and the release sheet 10 of the transfer sheet 100. And a step of peeling.
Examples of the material to be transferred include a resin molded body.
本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る加飾成形品の製造方法は、上述した本発明の転写シート100の転写層20を被転写物に転写する工程と、転写シート100の離型シート10を剥離する工程と、を有する。
被転写物としては、樹脂成形体等が挙げられる。 [Method of manufacturing decorative molded product]
The method for manufacturing a decorative molded product according to the first embodiment of the present invention includes the step of transferring the
Examples of the material to be transferred include a resin molded body.
加飾成形品の製造方法には、公知の転写法を用いることができる。例えば、(i)予め成形された被転写物に転写シートを貼着し、該転写シートの転写層を転写した後、該転写シートの離型シートを剥離する方法、(ii)平板状の被転写物に転写シートを貼着し、該転写シートの転写層を転写した後、該転写シートの離型シートを剥離し、その後、転写層が積層された被転写物を成形する方法、(iii)被転写物を射出成形する際に転写シートと一体化させ、その後、転写シートの離型シートを剥離する方法〔インモールド成形(射出成形同時転写加飾法)〕等が挙げられる。中でも、インモールド成形(射出成形同時転写加飾法)によれば、三次元曲面などの複雑な表面形状を有する樹脂成形体に加飾成形することができる。
A known transfer method can be used for the method of manufacturing the decorative molded product. For example, (i) a method in which a transfer sheet is attached to a preliminarily molded transfer object, the transfer layer of the transfer sheet is transferred, and then the release sheet of the transfer sheet is peeled off; A method of sticking a transfer sheet to a transfer material, transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet, peeling off the release sheet of the transfer sheet, and then forming a transfer material on which the transfer layer is laminated, (iii) ) A method of integrating a transfer material with a transfer sheet at the time of injection molding and then peeling the release sheet of the transfer sheet [in-mold molding (injection molding simultaneous transfer decoration method)]. Among them, according to in-mold molding (injection molding simultaneous transfer decoration method), it is possible to perform decorative molding on a resin molded body having a complicated surface shape such as a three-dimensional curved surface.
インモールド成形による本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る転写シート100を用いる加飾成形品の製造方法の一実施態様としては、
(z1)上記の転写シートの転写層側をインモールド成形用金型の内側に向けて配置する工程と、
(z2)上記インモールド成形用金型内に樹脂を射出注入する工程と、
(z3)上記転写シートと、上記樹脂とを一体化させて、樹脂成形体(被転写物)の表面上に上記転写シートの転写層を転写する工程と、
(z4)樹脂成形体(被転写物)を金型から取り出した後、上記転写シートの離型シートを剥離する工程と、を有するものが挙げられる。 As one embodiment of the method for producing a decorative molded product using thetransfer sheet 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention by in-mold molding,
(Z1) a step of disposing the transfer layer side of the transfer sheet toward the inside of the in-mold mold,
(Z2) a step of injecting a resin into the in-mold mold,
(Z3) integrating the transfer sheet and the resin, and transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet onto the surface of a resin molded body (transfer object);
(Z4) After removing the resin molded body (transfer object) from the mold, there is a step of peeling the release sheet of the transfer sheet.
(z1)上記の転写シートの転写層側をインモールド成形用金型の内側に向けて配置する工程と、
(z2)上記インモールド成形用金型内に樹脂を射出注入する工程と、
(z3)上記転写シートと、上記樹脂とを一体化させて、樹脂成形体(被転写物)の表面上に上記転写シートの転写層を転写する工程と、
(z4)樹脂成形体(被転写物)を金型から取り出した後、上記転写シートの離型シートを剥離する工程と、を有するものが挙げられる。 As one embodiment of the method for producing a decorative molded product using the
(Z1) a step of disposing the transfer layer side of the transfer sheet toward the inside of the in-mold mold,
(Z2) a step of injecting a resin into the in-mold mold,
(Z3) integrating the transfer sheet and the resin, and transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet onto the surface of a resin molded body (transfer object);
(Z4) After removing the resin molded body (transfer object) from the mold, there is a step of peeling the release sheet of the transfer sheet.
(z1)工程の配置の際に、第2領域及び/又はその他の領域の位置検出部が残存していれば、これらのコントラストを利用して、金型の正確な位置に転写シートを配置することができる。
なお、(z4)工程の後は、必要に応じて、不要部をトリミング(除去)することが好ましい。第2領域及び/又はその他の領域の位置検出部が残存している場合、これらの領域をトリミング(除去)することが好ましい。 (Z1) If the position detectors of the second region and / or other regions remain at the time of the arrangement in the step, the transfer sheet is arranged at an accurate position of the mold using these contrasts. be able to.
Note that after the step (z4), it is preferable to trim (remove) unnecessary portions as necessary. When the position detectors of the second region and / or other regions remain, it is preferable to trim (remove) these regions.
なお、(z4)工程の後は、必要に応じて、不要部をトリミング(除去)することが好ましい。第2領域及び/又はその他の領域の位置検出部が残存している場合、これらの領域をトリミング(除去)することが好ましい。 (Z1) If the position detectors of the second region and / or other regions remain at the time of the arrangement in the step, the transfer sheet is arranged at an accurate position of the mold using these contrasts. be able to.
Note that after the step (z4), it is preferable to trim (remove) unnecessary portions as necessary. When the position detectors of the second region and / or other regions remain, it is preferable to trim (remove) these regions.
(樹脂成形体)
樹脂成形体としては、射出成形可能な熱可塑性樹脂もしくは熱硬化性樹脂を用いることが好ましく、公知の様々な樹脂を用いることができる。
本発明による加飾成形品をインモールド成形により製造する場合には、熱可塑性樹脂を用いることが好ましい。このような熱可塑性樹脂としては、ポリスチレン系樹脂、ポリオレフィン系樹脂、ABS樹脂(耐熱ABS樹脂を含む)、AS樹脂、AN樹脂、ポリフェニレンオキサイド系樹脂、ポリカーボネート系樹脂、ポリアセタール系樹脂、アクリル系樹脂、ポリエチレンテレフタレート系樹脂、ポリブチレンテフタレート系樹脂、ポリスルホン系樹脂、およびポリフェニレンサルファイド系樹脂等が挙げられる。 (Resin molding)
As the resin molding, it is preferable to use a thermoplastic resin or a thermosetting resin that can be injection-molded, and various known resins can be used.
When the decorative molded product according to the present invention is manufactured by in-mold molding, it is preferable to use a thermoplastic resin. Examples of such thermoplastic resins include polystyrene resins, polyolefin resins, ABS resins (including heat-resistant ABS resins), AS resins, AN resins, polyphenylene oxide resins, polycarbonate resins, polyacetal resins, acrylic resins, Examples thereof include polyethylene terephthalate resin, polybutylene terephthalate resin, polysulfone resin, and polyphenylene sulfide resin.
樹脂成形体としては、射出成形可能な熱可塑性樹脂もしくは熱硬化性樹脂を用いることが好ましく、公知の様々な樹脂を用いることができる。
本発明による加飾成形品をインモールド成形により製造する場合には、熱可塑性樹脂を用いることが好ましい。このような熱可塑性樹脂としては、ポリスチレン系樹脂、ポリオレフィン系樹脂、ABS樹脂(耐熱ABS樹脂を含む)、AS樹脂、AN樹脂、ポリフェニレンオキサイド系樹脂、ポリカーボネート系樹脂、ポリアセタール系樹脂、アクリル系樹脂、ポリエチレンテレフタレート系樹脂、ポリブチレンテフタレート系樹脂、ポリスルホン系樹脂、およびポリフェニレンサルファイド系樹脂等が挙げられる。 (Resin molding)
As the resin molding, it is preferable to use a thermoplastic resin or a thermosetting resin that can be injection-molded, and various known resins can be used.
When the decorative molded product according to the present invention is manufactured by in-mold molding, it is preferable to use a thermoplastic resin. Examples of such thermoplastic resins include polystyrene resins, polyolefin resins, ABS resins (including heat-resistant ABS resins), AS resins, AN resins, polyphenylene oxide resins, polycarbonate resins, polyacetal resins, acrylic resins, Examples thereof include polyethylene terephthalate resin, polybutylene terephthalate resin, polysulfone resin, and polyphenylene sulfide resin.
図8は、本発明による加飾成形品の一実施形態を示す断面図である。加飾成形品300は、樹脂成形体(被転写物)200の一方の面上に、印刷層23、接着剤層22、及び保護層21を有している。なお、図8では、転写シートのうち、第1領域に相当する箇所のみを樹脂成形体に転写している。
FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view showing an embodiment of a decorative molded product according to the present invention. The decorative molded product 300 has a printed layer 23, an adhesive layer 22, and a protective layer 21 on one surface of a resin molded body (transfer object) 200. In FIG. 8, only the portion corresponding to the first region of the transfer sheet is transferred to the resin molded body.
〔第2の実施の形態〕
本発明の第2の実施の形態は、転写シートが完成した後に位置合わせ用のパターンを印刷する場合、工程が増えて煩雑であるという問題に鑑みてなされたものであり、被転写物の正確な位置に転写層を転写できる転写シート、該転写シートの製造方法、及び該転写シートを用いた加飾成形品の製造方法を提供することを目的とする。 [Second Embodiment]
The second embodiment of the present invention has been made in view of the problem that the number of steps increases when the pattern for alignment is printed after the transfer sheet is completed. It is an object of the present invention to provide a transfer sheet capable of transferring a transfer layer to any position, a method for producing the transfer sheet, and a method for producing a decorative molded product using the transfer sheet.
本発明の第2の実施の形態は、転写シートが完成した後に位置合わせ用のパターンを印刷する場合、工程が増えて煩雑であるという問題に鑑みてなされたものであり、被転写物の正確な位置に転写層を転写できる転写シート、該転写シートの製造方法、及び該転写シートを用いた加飾成形品の製造方法を提供することを目的とする。 [Second Embodiment]
The second embodiment of the present invention has been made in view of the problem that the number of steps increases when the pattern for alignment is printed after the transfer sheet is completed. It is an object of the present invention to provide a transfer sheet capable of transferring a transfer layer to any position, a method for producing the transfer sheet, and a method for producing a decorative molded product using the transfer sheet.
[転写シート]
本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る転写シートは、離型シート上に転写層を有する転写シートであって、前記離型シートは、前記転写層側の面に第1領域及び第2領域を有する基材層を有し、前記基材層の前記第2領域は、突出部と、前記突出部の周辺に位置する周辺領域とを有し、前記周辺領域内には、部分的に配置された複数の周辺突出部を有し、前記突出部及び前記周辺突出部上に着色層を有するものである。 [Transfer sheet]
The transfer sheet according to the second embodiment of the present invention is a transfer sheet having a transfer layer on a release sheet, and the release sheet has a first region and a second region on the transfer layer side surface. The second region of the base material layer has a protruding portion and a peripheral region positioned around the protruding portion, and is partially disposed in the peripheral region. A plurality of peripheral protrusions, and a colored layer on the protrusions and the peripheral protrusions.
本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る転写シートは、離型シート上に転写層を有する転写シートであって、前記離型シートは、前記転写層側の面に第1領域及び第2領域を有する基材層を有し、前記基材層の前記第2領域は、突出部と、前記突出部の周辺に位置する周辺領域とを有し、前記周辺領域内には、部分的に配置された複数の周辺突出部を有し、前記突出部及び前記周辺突出部上に着色層を有するものである。 [Transfer sheet]
The transfer sheet according to the second embodiment of the present invention is a transfer sheet having a transfer layer on a release sheet, and the release sheet has a first region and a second region on the transfer layer side surface. The second region of the base material layer has a protruding portion and a peripheral region positioned around the protruding portion, and is partially disposed in the peripheral region. A plurality of peripheral protrusions, and a colored layer on the protrusions and the peripheral protrusions.
図10~図12は、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る転写シート100の断面図である。
図10~図12において、転写シート100は、離型シート10上に転写層20を有している。
また、図10~図12において、離型シート10は、転写層20側の面に第1領域R1及び第2領域R2、R2A、R2Bを有する基材層11を有し、基材層11の第2領域は、突出部3、3A、3Bと、突出部の周辺に位置する周辺領域X、XA、XBとを有し、周辺領域内には、部分的に配置された複数の周辺突出部4、4A、4Bを有し、突出部及び周辺突出部上に着色層12、12A、12Bを有している。
代表図である図10に関してより具体的に説明すると、離型シート10は、支持体1、樹脂層2、突出部3及び周辺突出部4を含む基材層11、着色層12及び離型層13から構成されている。また、転写層20は、保護層21、接着剤層22及び印刷層23から構成されている。
なお、図10~図12は本発明の転写シートの実施の形態であり、本発明の転写シートは図10~図12の構成に限定されない。
第2の実施の形態において、第1の実施の形態と実質的に同様であるものの記載を省略する。 10 to 12 are sectional views of thetransfer sheet 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
10 to 12, thetransfer sheet 100 has a transfer layer 20 on the release sheet 10.
10 to 12, therelease sheet 10 has a base layer 11 having a first region R 1 and second regions R 2 , R 2A , R 2B on the surface on the transfer layer 20 side. the second region of the timber layer 11 has projecting portions 3, 3A, and 3B, the peripheral area X is positioned around the projecting portion, X a, and X B, in the peripheral region is partially disposed A plurality of peripheral protrusions 4, 4A, 4B are provided, and colored layers 12, 12A, 12B are provided on the protrusions and the peripheral protrusions.
Describing more specifically with respect to FIG. 10, which is a representative view, therelease sheet 10 includes a support 1, a resin layer 2, a base layer 11 including a protrusion 3 and a peripheral protrusion 4, a colored layer 12, and a release layer. 13. The transfer layer 20 includes a protective layer 21, an adhesive layer 22, and a print layer 23.
10 to 12 show an embodiment of the transfer sheet of the present invention, and the transfer sheet of the present invention is not limited to the configuration of FIGS. 10 to 12.
In the second embodiment, description of what is substantially the same as the first embodiment is omitted.
図10~図12において、転写シート100は、離型シート10上に転写層20を有している。
また、図10~図12において、離型シート10は、転写層20側の面に第1領域R1及び第2領域R2、R2A、R2Bを有する基材層11を有し、基材層11の第2領域は、突出部3、3A、3Bと、突出部の周辺に位置する周辺領域X、XA、XBとを有し、周辺領域内には、部分的に配置された複数の周辺突出部4、4A、4Bを有し、突出部及び周辺突出部上に着色層12、12A、12Bを有している。
代表図である図10に関してより具体的に説明すると、離型シート10は、支持体1、樹脂層2、突出部3及び周辺突出部4を含む基材層11、着色層12及び離型層13から構成されている。また、転写層20は、保護層21、接着剤層22及び印刷層23から構成されている。
なお、図10~図12は本発明の転写シートの実施の形態であり、本発明の転写シートは図10~図12の構成に限定されない。
第2の実施の形態において、第1の実施の形態と実質的に同様であるものの記載を省略する。 10 to 12 are sectional views of the
10 to 12, the
10 to 12, the
Describing more specifically with respect to FIG. 10, which is a representative view, the
10 to 12 show an embodiment of the transfer sheet of the present invention, and the transfer sheet of the present invention is not limited to the configuration of FIGS. 10 to 12.
In the second embodiment, description of what is substantially the same as the first embodiment is omitted.
<離型シート>
離型シートは、転写層側の面に第1領域及び第2領域を有する基材層を有し、基材層の第2領域は、突出部と、突出部の周辺に位置する周辺領域とを有し、周辺領域内には、部分的に配置された複数の周辺突出部を有し、突出部及び周辺突出部上に着色層を有するものである。離型シートは、樹脂成形体等の被転写物に転写層を転写した後に剥離される。 <Release sheet>
The release sheet has a base material layer having a first region and a second region on the surface on the transfer layer side. The second region of the base material layer includes a protrusion and a peripheral region located around the protrusion. In the peripheral region, there are a plurality of peripheral protrusions partially arranged, and a coloring layer is provided on the protrusions and the peripheral protrusions. The release sheet is peeled off after the transfer layer is transferred to a transfer object such as a resin molded body.
離型シートは、転写層側の面に第1領域及び第2領域を有する基材層を有し、基材層の第2領域は、突出部と、突出部の周辺に位置する周辺領域とを有し、周辺領域内には、部分的に配置された複数の周辺突出部を有し、突出部及び周辺突出部上に着色層を有するものである。離型シートは、樹脂成形体等の被転写物に転写層を転写した後に剥離される。 <Release sheet>
The release sheet has a base material layer having a first region and a second region on the surface on the transfer layer side. The second region of the base material layer includes a protrusion and a peripheral region located around the protrusion. In the peripheral region, there are a plurality of peripheral protrusions partially arranged, and a coloring layer is provided on the protrusions and the peripheral protrusions. The release sheet is peeled off after the transfer layer is transferred to a transfer object such as a resin molded body.
(基材層)
基材層11は、図10~図12に示すように、転写層20側の面に第1領域R1及び第2領域R2、R2A、R2Bを有する。また、基材層は、図示しないが、転写層側の面に、さらにその他の領域を有していてもよい。 (Base material layer)
As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, thebase material layer 11 has a first region R 1 and second regions R 2 , R 2A , R 2B on the surface on the transfer layer 20 side. Further, although not shown, the base material layer may further have other regions on the surface on the transfer layer side.
基材層11は、図10~図12に示すように、転写層20側の面に第1領域R1及び第2領域R2、R2A、R2Bを有する。また、基材層は、図示しないが、転写層側の面に、さらにその他の領域を有していてもよい。 (Base material layer)
As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the
基材層11は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。
The base layer 11 can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
(樹脂層)
樹脂層2は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。 (Resin layer)
Theresin layer 2 can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
樹脂層2は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。 (Resin layer)
The
(第1領域)
基材層の第1領域の表面形状は特に限定されない。例えば、基材層11の第1領域R1の表面形状は、図10のように略平滑であってもよいし、図11~図12のように凹凸形状であってもよい。
図10のように、基材層11の第1領域R1の表面形状が略平滑である場合、被転写物に転写した転写層20の表面形状を略平滑にすることができ、得られる加飾成形品の光沢を高くすることができる。
また、図11~図12のように、第1領域R1内に凹凸部5を有する場合、被転写物には、該凹凸部の相補的形状を有する転写層20(凹凸部5上に離型層13を有する場合、離型層13によって緩和された凹凸形状の相補的形状を有する転写層20)が転写され、得られる加飾成形品の表面に凹凸形状を付与することができる。 (First area)
The surface shape of the first region of the base material layer is not particularly limited. For example, the surface shape of the first region R 1 of thebase layer 11 may be a substantially smooth as shown in FIG. 10 may be uneven shape as shown in FIGS. 11 to 12.
As shown in FIG. 10, when the surface shape of the first region R 1 of thebase layer 11 is substantially smooth, it can be made substantially smooth surface shape of the transfer layer 20 has been transferred to the transfer target, the resulting pressure The gloss of the decorative molded product can be increased.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 11 to 12, when the first region R 1 has the concavo-convex portion 5, the transferred material has a transfer layer 20 having a shape complementary to the concavo-convex portion (separated on the concavo-convex portion 5). In the case of having the mold layer 13, the transfer layer 20) having a concavo-convex complementary shape relaxed by the release layer 13 is transferred, and the concavo-convex shape can be imparted to the surface of the resulting decorative molded product.
基材層の第1領域の表面形状は特に限定されない。例えば、基材層11の第1領域R1の表面形状は、図10のように略平滑であってもよいし、図11~図12のように凹凸形状であってもよい。
図10のように、基材層11の第1領域R1の表面形状が略平滑である場合、被転写物に転写した転写層20の表面形状を略平滑にすることができ、得られる加飾成形品の光沢を高くすることができる。
また、図11~図12のように、第1領域R1内に凹凸部5を有する場合、被転写物には、該凹凸部の相補的形状を有する転写層20(凹凸部5上に離型層13を有する場合、離型層13によって緩和された凹凸形状の相補的形状を有する転写層20)が転写され、得られる加飾成形品の表面に凹凸形状を付与することができる。 (First area)
The surface shape of the first region of the base material layer is not particularly limited. For example, the surface shape of the first region R 1 of the
As shown in FIG. 10, when the surface shape of the first region R 1 of the
Further, as shown in FIGS. 11 to 12, when the first region R 1 has the concavo-
第1領域内に凹凸部を有する場合、凹凸部と、後述する突出部及び周辺突出部とが、[凹凸部の最大高さ<突出部及び周辺突出部の高さ]の関係を満たすことが好ましい。該関係を満たすことにより、着色層を突出部及び周辺突出部の頂部に優先して形成しやすくすることができ、また、第1領域に着色層が形成されることを抑制でき、位置合わせを正確に行うことができる。
同様の観点から、[凹凸部の最大高さ/突出部及び周辺突出部の高さ]は、0.50以下であることが好ましく、0.40以下であることがより好ましい。また、同様の観点から、[凹凸部の平均粗さ/突出部及び周辺突出部の高さ]は、0.20以下であることが好ましく、0.15以下であることがより好ましい。
突出部を複数有する場合、全ての突出部が上記関係を満たすことが好ましい。また、複数の周辺突出部の全てが上記関係を満たすことが好ましい。 In the case where the first region has an uneven portion, the uneven portion and the later-described protrusion and the peripheral protrusion satisfy the relationship of [maximum height of the uneven portion <the height of the protrusion and the peripheral protrusion]. preferable. By satisfying this relationship, it is possible to easily form the colored layer in preference to the top of the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion, and it is possible to suppress the formation of the colored layer in the first region, and to perform alignment. Can be done accurately.
From the same viewpoint, [the maximum height of the concavo-convex portion / the height of the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion] is preferably 0.50 or less, and more preferably 0.40 or less. Further, from the same viewpoint, the [average roughness of the uneven portion / height of the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion] is preferably 0.20 or less, and more preferably 0.15 or less.
When there are a plurality of protrusions, it is preferable that all the protrusions satisfy the above relationship. Moreover, it is preferable that all of the plurality of peripheral protrusions satisfy the above relationship.
同様の観点から、[凹凸部の最大高さ/突出部及び周辺突出部の高さ]は、0.50以下であることが好ましく、0.40以下であることがより好ましい。また、同様の観点から、[凹凸部の平均粗さ/突出部及び周辺突出部の高さ]は、0.20以下であることが好ましく、0.15以下であることがより好ましい。
突出部を複数有する場合、全ての突出部が上記関係を満たすことが好ましい。また、複数の周辺突出部の全てが上記関係を満たすことが好ましい。 In the case where the first region has an uneven portion, the uneven portion and the later-described protrusion and the peripheral protrusion satisfy the relationship of [maximum height of the uneven portion <the height of the protrusion and the peripheral protrusion]. preferable. By satisfying this relationship, it is possible to easily form the colored layer in preference to the top of the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion, and it is possible to suppress the formation of the colored layer in the first region, and to perform alignment. Can be done accurately.
From the same viewpoint, [the maximum height of the concavo-convex portion / the height of the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion] is preferably 0.50 or less, and more preferably 0.40 or less. Further, from the same viewpoint, the [average roughness of the uneven portion / height of the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion] is preferably 0.20 or less, and more preferably 0.15 or less.
When there are a plurality of protrusions, it is preferable that all the protrusions satisfy the above relationship. Moreover, it is preferable that all of the plurality of peripheral protrusions satisfy the above relationship.
加飾成形品に付与する表面形状は目的に応じて異なるため、第1領域内の凹凸の程度の絶対値は特に限定されないが、最大高さ粗さRzは0.2~4.0μm程度とすることが好ましい。同様に、算術平均粗さRaは0.05~2.0μm程度とすることが好ましい。
Since the surface shape imparted to the decorative molded product varies depending on the purpose, the absolute value of the degree of unevenness in the first region is not particularly limited, but the maximum height roughness Rz is about 0.2 to 4.0 μm. It is preferable to do. Similarly, the arithmetic average roughness Ra is preferably about 0.05 to 2.0 μm.
また、図示しないが、第1領域を2箇所以上に分割して形成してもよい。その場合、それぞれの第1領域の表面形状を異なるものとしてもよい。第1領域を2箇所以上に分割して形成し、さらに、それぞれの第1領域の表面形状を異なるものとすることにより、加飾成形品の意匠性を高めることができる。
Although not shown, the first region may be divided into two or more locations. In this case, the surface shape of each first region may be different. The design of the decorative molded product can be improved by dividing the first region into two or more locations and making the surface shape of each first region different.
(第2領域)
図10~図12に示すように、離型シート10は、基材層11の第2領域R2、R2A、R2B内に、突出部3、3A、3Bと、突出部の周辺に位置する周辺領域Xとを有し、周辺領域内には、部分的に配置された複数の周辺突出部4、4A、4Bを有し、突出部及び周辺突出部上に着色層12、12A、12Bを有している。 (Second area)
As shown in FIG. 10 to FIG. 12, therelease sheet 10 is located in the second regions R 2 , R 2A , R 2B of the base material layer 11 in the vicinity of the protrusions 3, 3 A, 3 B and the protrusions. A peripheral region X that has a plurality of peripheral protrusions 4, 4 </ b> A, 4 </ b> B partially disposed in the peripheral region, and the colored layers 12, 12 </ b> A, 12 </ b> B are formed on the protrusions and the peripheral protrusions. have.
図10~図12に示すように、離型シート10は、基材層11の第2領域R2、R2A、R2B内に、突出部3、3A、3Bと、突出部の周辺に位置する周辺領域Xとを有し、周辺領域内には、部分的に配置された複数の周辺突出部4、4A、4Bを有し、突出部及び周辺突出部上に着色層12、12A、12Bを有している。 (Second area)
As shown in FIG. 10 to FIG. 12, the
図12~図16に示すように、第2領域R2、R2A、R2Bと、上述した第1領域R1とは、幅方向の異なる場所に形成されていることが好ましい。第2領域と、第1領域とを前述したような配置とすることにより、第2領域の突出部及び周辺突出部上に着色層を形成する一方で、第1領域に着色層を形成しにくくできる。着色層を形成する際は、第1領域に相当する部分にインキを有さず、第2領域に相当する部分の全面にインキを有する印刷版を用いることが好ましい。
なお、図13~図16は、転写層を通して、離型シートの表面が見えている状態を図示している。
本明細書の第2の実施の形態において「第2領域」とは、下記(1)~(4)の4本の直線から形成される領域を意味するものとする。
(1)転写シートを平面方向から観察した際に、周辺突出部の最も左端に位置する箇所から流れ方向に平行に引いた直線。(2)転写シートを平面方向から観察した際に、周辺突出部の最も右端に位置する箇所から流れ方向に平行に引いた直線。(3)転写シートを平面方向から観察した際に、周辺突出部の最も上端に位置する箇所から幅方向に平行に引いた直線。(4)転写シートを平面方向から観察した際に、周辺突出部の最も下端に位置する箇所から幅方向に平行に引いた直線。
また、本明細書の第2の実施の形態において「第2領域中の周辺領域」とは、上記第2領域から突出部を除いた領域を意味するものとする。
また、本明細書の第2の実施の形態において、幅方向とは、転写シートのTD方向(Transverse Direction)のことを意味し、流れ方向とは、転写シートのMD方向(Machine Direction)のことを意味する。 As shown in FIGS. 12 to 16, the second regions R 2 , R 2A , R 2B and the first region R 1 described above are preferably formed at different locations in the width direction. By arranging the second region and the first region as described above, it is difficult to form the colored layer in the first region while forming the colored layer on the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion of the second region. it can. When forming the colored layer, it is preferable to use a printing plate that does not have ink in a portion corresponding to the first region and has ink in the entire surface corresponding to the second region.
13 to 16 illustrate a state where the surface of the release sheet is visible through the transfer layer.
In the second embodiment of the present specification, the “second region” means a region formed by the following four straight lines (1) to (4).
(1) A straight line drawn in parallel to the flow direction from a position located at the leftmost end of the peripheral protrusion when the transfer sheet is observed from the planar direction. (2) A straight line drawn parallel to the flow direction from the position located at the rightmost end of the peripheral protrusion when the transfer sheet is observed from the plane direction. (3) A straight line drawn in parallel to the width direction from the position located at the uppermost end of the peripheral protrusion when the transfer sheet is observed from the plane direction. (4) A straight line drawn in parallel to the width direction from the position located at the lowest end of the peripheral protrusion when the transfer sheet is observed from the plane direction.
In the second embodiment of the present specification, the “peripheral region in the second region” means a region obtained by removing the protruding portion from the second region.
In the second embodiment of the present specification, the width direction means the TD direction (Transverse Direction) of the transfer sheet, and the flow direction means the MD direction (Machine Direction) of the transfer sheet. Means.
なお、図13~図16は、転写層を通して、離型シートの表面が見えている状態を図示している。
本明細書の第2の実施の形態において「第2領域」とは、下記(1)~(4)の4本の直線から形成される領域を意味するものとする。
(1)転写シートを平面方向から観察した際に、周辺突出部の最も左端に位置する箇所から流れ方向に平行に引いた直線。(2)転写シートを平面方向から観察した際に、周辺突出部の最も右端に位置する箇所から流れ方向に平行に引いた直線。(3)転写シートを平面方向から観察した際に、周辺突出部の最も上端に位置する箇所から幅方向に平行に引いた直線。(4)転写シートを平面方向から観察した際に、周辺突出部の最も下端に位置する箇所から幅方向に平行に引いた直線。
また、本明細書の第2の実施の形態において「第2領域中の周辺領域」とは、上記第2領域から突出部を除いた領域を意味するものとする。
また、本明細書の第2の実施の形態において、幅方向とは、転写シートのTD方向(Transverse Direction)のことを意味し、流れ方向とは、転写シートのMD方向(Machine Direction)のことを意味する。 As shown in FIGS. 12 to 16, the second regions R 2 , R 2A , R 2B and the first region R 1 described above are preferably formed at different locations in the width direction. By arranging the second region and the first region as described above, it is difficult to form the colored layer in the first region while forming the colored layer on the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion of the second region. it can. When forming the colored layer, it is preferable to use a printing plate that does not have ink in a portion corresponding to the first region and has ink in the entire surface corresponding to the second region.
13 to 16 illustrate a state where the surface of the release sheet is visible through the transfer layer.
In the second embodiment of the present specification, the “second region” means a region formed by the following four straight lines (1) to (4).
(1) A straight line drawn in parallel to the flow direction from a position located at the leftmost end of the peripheral protrusion when the transfer sheet is observed from the planar direction. (2) A straight line drawn parallel to the flow direction from the position located at the rightmost end of the peripheral protrusion when the transfer sheet is observed from the plane direction. (3) A straight line drawn in parallel to the width direction from the position located at the uppermost end of the peripheral protrusion when the transfer sheet is observed from the plane direction. (4) A straight line drawn in parallel to the width direction from the position located at the lowest end of the peripheral protrusion when the transfer sheet is observed from the plane direction.
In the second embodiment of the present specification, the “peripheral region in the second region” means a region obtained by removing the protruding portion from the second region.
In the second embodiment of the present specification, the width direction means the TD direction (Transverse Direction) of the transfer sheet, and the flow direction means the MD direction (Machine Direction) of the transfer sheet. Means.
第2領域の突出部上には着色層が略全面に形成される。一方、突出部の周辺に位置する周辺領域は、突出部(周辺突出部)を有し、該周辺突出部に着色層が形成されるものの、該周辺突出部は周辺領域の部分的に配置されるにとどまっている。したがって、第2領域の突出部と、周辺領域とを比較した場合、着色層が形成されている面積割合が相違することになる。言い換えると、第2領域の突出部と、周辺領域とでは、光透過率ないしは光反射率が相違し、この光透過率ないしは光反射率のコントラストを利用して、任意の工程において転写シートの位置合わせが可能となる。なお、光透過率は、正透過方向の透過率、拡散透過率及び全透過率の何れを利用してもよい。同様に、光反射率は、正反射方向の透過率、拡散反射率及び全反射率の何れを利用してもよい。
周辺領域の全面積に占める周辺突出部の面積の割合は、15~85%であることが好ましく、20~80%であることがより好ましく、30~70%であることがさらに好ましい。周辺突出部の面積の割合を15%以上とすることにより、周辺領域の周辺突出部が形成されていない箇所に着色層が形成されることを抑制し、光透過率ないしは光反射率のコントラストを明りょうにしやすくできる。また、周辺突出部の面積の割合を85%以下とすることにより、光透過率ないしは光反射率のコントラストを明りょうにしやすくでき、位置合わせの精度を高めることができる。
位置合わせを行う任意の工程としては、例えば、転写シートを長尺にスリットする工程、転写シートを枚葉に型抜きする工程、転写シートを被転写物に転写する工程が挙げられる。位置合わせの具体的手法については後述する。 A colored layer is formed on substantially the entire surface on the protruding portion of the second region. On the other hand, the peripheral region located around the protrusion has a protrusion (peripheral protrusion), and a colored layer is formed on the peripheral protrusion, but the peripheral protrusion is partially disposed in the peripheral region. Remains. Therefore, when the protrusion part of a 2nd area | region and a peripheral area | region are compared, the area ratio in which the colored layer is formed will differ. In other words, the light transmittance or light reflectance is different between the protruding portion of the second region and the peripheral region, and the position of the transfer sheet can be determined in an arbitrary process using the contrast of the light transmittance or light reflectance. Matching is possible. The light transmittance may be any of transmittance in the normal transmission direction, diffuse transmittance, and total transmittance. Similarly, the light reflectance may be any of transmittance in the regular reflection direction, diffuse reflectance, and total reflectance.
The ratio of the area of the peripheral protrusions to the total area of the peripheral region is preferably 15 to 85%, more preferably 20 to 80%, and further preferably 30 to 70%. By setting the ratio of the area of the peripheral protrusions to 15% or more, it is possible to suppress the formation of a colored layer in the peripheral area where the peripheral protrusions are not formed, and to improve the contrast of light transmittance or light reflectance. It is easy to clarify. Further, by setting the area ratio of the peripheral protrusions to 85% or less, the light transmittance or the contrast of the light reflectance can be easily clarified, and the alignment accuracy can be improved.
Examples of the optional step of aligning include a step of slitting the transfer sheet in a long length, a step of punching the transfer sheet into a sheet, and a step of transferring the transfer sheet to a transfer object. A specific method of alignment will be described later.
周辺領域の全面積に占める周辺突出部の面積の割合は、15~85%であることが好ましく、20~80%であることがより好ましく、30~70%であることがさらに好ましい。周辺突出部の面積の割合を15%以上とすることにより、周辺領域の周辺突出部が形成されていない箇所に着色層が形成されることを抑制し、光透過率ないしは光反射率のコントラストを明りょうにしやすくできる。また、周辺突出部の面積の割合を85%以下とすることにより、光透過率ないしは光反射率のコントラストを明りょうにしやすくでき、位置合わせの精度を高めることができる。
位置合わせを行う任意の工程としては、例えば、転写シートを長尺にスリットする工程、転写シートを枚葉に型抜きする工程、転写シートを被転写物に転写する工程が挙げられる。位置合わせの具体的手法については後述する。 A colored layer is formed on substantially the entire surface on the protruding portion of the second region. On the other hand, the peripheral region located around the protrusion has a protrusion (peripheral protrusion), and a colored layer is formed on the peripheral protrusion, but the peripheral protrusion is partially disposed in the peripheral region. Remains. Therefore, when the protrusion part of a 2nd area | region and a peripheral area | region are compared, the area ratio in which the colored layer is formed will differ. In other words, the light transmittance or light reflectance is different between the protruding portion of the second region and the peripheral region, and the position of the transfer sheet can be determined in an arbitrary process using the contrast of the light transmittance or light reflectance. Matching is possible. The light transmittance may be any of transmittance in the normal transmission direction, diffuse transmittance, and total transmittance. Similarly, the light reflectance may be any of transmittance in the regular reflection direction, diffuse reflectance, and total reflectance.
The ratio of the area of the peripheral protrusions to the total area of the peripheral region is preferably 15 to 85%, more preferably 20 to 80%, and further preferably 30 to 70%. By setting the ratio of the area of the peripheral protrusions to 15% or more, it is possible to suppress the formation of a colored layer in the peripheral area where the peripheral protrusions are not formed, and to improve the contrast of light transmittance or light reflectance. It is easy to clarify. Further, by setting the area ratio of the peripheral protrusions to 85% or less, the light transmittance or the contrast of the light reflectance can be easily clarified, and the alignment accuracy can be improved.
Examples of the optional step of aligning include a step of slitting the transfer sheet in a long length, a step of punching the transfer sheet into a sheet, and a step of transferring the transfer sheet to a transfer object. A specific method of alignment will be described later.
第2領域の隣り合う周辺突出部の端部同士の間隔P1は、2.0mm以下であることが好ましく、1.0mm以下であることがより好ましく、0.7mm以下であることがさらに好ましい。
間隔P1を2.0mm以下とすることにより、周辺領域の周辺突出部が形成されていない箇所に着色層が形成されることを抑制し、位置合わせの精度を高めることができる。
なお、間隔P1が狭すぎる場合、位置合わせに悪影響を及ぼす可能性がある。例えば、位置合わせのために用いる光源が平行光でない場合や、該光源が平行光であったとしても、光源の出射面が水平になっていない場合において、光透過率のコントラストにより位置合わせを行おうとすると、周辺領域の周辺突出部が形成されていない箇所を光が透過しにくくなり、突出部と周辺領域とのコントラストが十分にできない可能性がある。
また、間隔P1が狭すぎる場合、周辺突出部の幅W2を狭くしないと突出部と周辺領域とのコントラストを確保しにくくなり、後述するW2を狭くすることによる問題が生じる可能性がある。
このため、周辺突出部の端部同士の間隔P1は、0.01mm以上であることが好ましく、0.05mm以上であることがより好ましく、0.10mm以上であることがさらに好ましい。 Distance P 1 of the ends of the peripheral projecting portion adjacent the second region is preferably 2.0mm or less, more preferably 1.0mm or less, still more preferably 0.7mm or less .
By the distance P 1 and 2.0mm or less, to prevent the colored layer at a position near the projecting portion of the peripheral region is not formed is formed, it is possible to increase the accuracy of the alignment.
Incidentally, if the interval P 1 is too narrow, it can adversely affect alignment. For example, when the light source used for alignment is not parallel light, or even if the light source is parallel light, alignment is performed based on the contrast of light transmittance when the emission surface of the light source is not horizontal. If it is going to be, light will become difficult to permeate | transmit the location where the peripheral protrusion part of a peripheral region is not formed, and there exists a possibility that the contrast of a protrusion part and a peripheral region cannot fully be performed.
Further, when the interval P 1 is too narrow, it is not to narrow the width W 2 of the peripheral projecting portion difficult to secure the contrast between the projecting portion and the peripheral region, can cause a problem due to narrowing the W 2 to be described later is there.
Therefore, the end interval P 1 between the peripheral projecting portion is preferably at 0.01mm or more, more preferably 0.05mm or more, more preferably at least 0.10 mm.
間隔P1を2.0mm以下とすることにより、周辺領域の周辺突出部が形成されていない箇所に着色層が形成されることを抑制し、位置合わせの精度を高めることができる。
なお、間隔P1が狭すぎる場合、位置合わせに悪影響を及ぼす可能性がある。例えば、位置合わせのために用いる光源が平行光でない場合や、該光源が平行光であったとしても、光源の出射面が水平になっていない場合において、光透過率のコントラストにより位置合わせを行おうとすると、周辺領域の周辺突出部が形成されていない箇所を光が透過しにくくなり、突出部と周辺領域とのコントラストが十分にできない可能性がある。
また、間隔P1が狭すぎる場合、周辺突出部の幅W2を狭くしないと突出部と周辺領域とのコントラストを確保しにくくなり、後述するW2を狭くすることによる問題が生じる可能性がある。
このため、周辺突出部の端部同士の間隔P1は、0.01mm以上であることが好ましく、0.05mm以上であることがより好ましく、0.10mm以上であることがさらに好ましい。 Distance P 1 of the ends of the peripheral projecting portion adjacent the second region is preferably 2.0mm or less, more preferably 1.0mm or less, still more preferably 0.7mm or less .
By the distance P 1 and 2.0mm or less, to prevent the colored layer at a position near the projecting portion of the peripheral region is not formed is formed, it is possible to increase the accuracy of the alignment.
Incidentally, if the interval P 1 is too narrow, it can adversely affect alignment. For example, when the light source used for alignment is not parallel light, or even if the light source is parallel light, alignment is performed based on the contrast of light transmittance when the emission surface of the light source is not horizontal. If it is going to be, light will become difficult to permeate | transmit the location where the peripheral protrusion part of a peripheral region is not formed, and there exists a possibility that the contrast of a protrusion part and a peripheral region cannot fully be performed.
Further, when the interval P 1 is too narrow, it is not to narrow the width W 2 of the peripheral projecting portion difficult to secure the contrast between the projecting portion and the peripheral region, can cause a problem due to narrowing the W 2 to be described later is there.
Therefore, the end interval P 1 between the peripheral projecting portion is preferably at 0.01mm or more, more preferably 0.05mm or more, more preferably at least 0.10 mm.
突出部と、突出部に近接する周辺突出部との間隔P2は、該間隔に着色層が形成されることを抑制する観点から、2.0mm以下であることが好ましく、1.0mm以下であることがより好ましく、0.7mm以下であることがさらに好ましい。
間隔P2の下限は特に限定されないが、図13のように、突出部3の外縁形状を構成する直線と、周辺突出部4とが平行に配列されている場合には、突出部3と周辺領域Xとの境界線を均質に形成して、突出部3と周辺領域Xとの区別を明りょうにするために、間隔P2は、0.01mm以上であることが好ましく、0.05mm以上であることがより好ましく、0.10mm以上であることがさらに好ましい。
本明細書の第2の実施の形態において、「突出部の外縁形状」とは、突出部を平面方向から観察した際に、突出部の外縁から形成される形状のことを意味する。 A protrusion interval P 2 between the peripheral projecting portion proximate the protruding portion, from the viewpoint of suppressing the colored layer on the interval is formed, preferably at 2.0mm or less, at 1.0mm or less More preferably, it is 0.7 mm or less.
But not limited interval lower limit of P 2 is particularly, as shown in FIG. 13, the straight line constituting the outer shape of the protrudingportion 3, when the peripheral projecting portion 4 are arranged in parallel, the protruding portions 3 and peripheral homogeneously forming a boundary line between the region X, for clear distinction between the projecting portion 3 and the peripheral region X, the interval P 2 is preferably 0.01mm or more, 0.05 mm or more It is more preferable that it is 0.10 mm or more.
In the second embodiment of the present specification, the “outer edge shape of the protruding portion” means a shape formed from the outer edge of the protruding portion when the protruding portion is observed from the planar direction.
間隔P2の下限は特に限定されないが、図13のように、突出部3の外縁形状を構成する直線と、周辺突出部4とが平行に配列されている場合には、突出部3と周辺領域Xとの境界線を均質に形成して、突出部3と周辺領域Xとの区別を明りょうにするために、間隔P2は、0.01mm以上であることが好ましく、0.05mm以上であることがより好ましく、0.10mm以上であることがさらに好ましい。
本明細書の第2の実施の形態において、「突出部の外縁形状」とは、突出部を平面方向から観察した際に、突出部の外縁から形成される形状のことを意味する。 A protrusion interval P 2 between the peripheral projecting portion proximate the protruding portion, from the viewpoint of suppressing the colored layer on the interval is formed, preferably at 2.0mm or less, at 1.0mm or less More preferably, it is 0.7 mm or less.
But not limited interval lower limit of P 2 is particularly, as shown in FIG. 13, the straight line constituting the outer shape of the protruding
In the second embodiment of the present specification, the “outer edge shape of the protruding portion” means a shape formed from the outer edge of the protruding portion when the protruding portion is observed from the planar direction.
光透過率の差で位置を検知する場合、第2領域の突出部と、第2領域の周辺領域との光透過率の差は30%以上とすることが好ましい。また、光反射率の差で位置を検知する場合、突出部を有する箇所と、その周辺箇所との光反射率の差は30%以上とすることが好ましい。
When the position is detected based on the difference in light transmittance, the difference in light transmittance between the protruding portion of the second region and the peripheral region of the second region is preferably 30% or more. Moreover, when detecting a position by the difference in light reflectance, it is preferable that the difference in light reflectance between the portion having the protrusion and the surrounding portion is 30% or more.
突出部及び周辺突出部は任意の構造体から形成され、該構造体の形状等は特に限定されないが、以下に例示する形状等が好ましい。
The protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion are formed from an arbitrary structure, and the shape and the like of the structure are not particularly limited, but the shapes exemplified below are preferable.
突出部及び周辺突出部の高さ(H)は、1~10μmであることが好ましく、2~7μmであることがより好ましく、3~6μmであることがさらに好ましい。
突出部及び周辺突出部の高さを1μm以上とすることにより、印刷の位置が僅かにずれたとしても、突出部及び周辺突出部上に着色層が形成される一方で、その周辺箇所には着色層が形成されにくくすることができる。つまり、突出部及び周辺突出部の高さを1μm以上とすることにより、位置合わせ用のパターンを正確な場所に印刷しやすくでき、位置合わせの精度を高めることができる。また、突出部3及び周辺突出部4の高さを1μm以上とすることにより、図10~図12に示すように、転写シート100の転写層20側の表面に微細な出っ張りが形成されやすくなり、長尺の転写シートを巻き取ったり、枚葉の転写シートを重ねたりする際に、第1領域のブロッキングを抑制しやすくできる。
また、突出部及び周辺突出部の高さを10μm以下とすることにより、荷重により突出部が変形しにくく、位置合わせの精度を維持しやすくできる。
突出部及び周辺突出部の高さは、全て同一としなくてもよい。例えば、突出部の高さと周辺突出部の高さとを変えてもよいし、個々の周辺突出部の高さを変えてもよい。しかしながら、着色層を均質に形成しやすくする観点から、突出部及び周辺突出部の高さを全て同一とすることが好ましい。
なお、本明細書の第2の実施の形態において、突出部及び周辺突出部の高さ(H)とは、突出部及び周辺突出部を形成する構造体を、構造体の延伸方向(例えば、図13~図15の周辺突出部の場合は「d」の方向)に直交する方向で切断した断面の中央部の高さのことをいう。図14及び図15の突出部3Bのように、幅方向及び流れ方向の長さが同一であることなどにより、何れかの方向に延伸しているとは判断できない場合、突出部及び周辺突出部の高さ(H)とは、幅方向で切断した断面の中央部の高さのことをいう。 The height (H) of the protrusion and the peripheral protrusion is preferably 1 to 10 μm, more preferably 2 to 7 μm, and further preferably 3 to 6 μm.
Even if the printing position is slightly shifted by setting the height of the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion to 1 μm or more, a colored layer is formed on the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion. A colored layer can be made difficult to form. That is, by setting the heights of the protrusions and the peripheral protrusions to 1 μm or more, the alignment pattern can be easily printed at an accurate location, and the alignment accuracy can be increased. Further, by setting the height of the protrudingportion 3 and the peripheral protruding portion 4 to 1 μm or more, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, a fine protrusion is easily formed on the surface of the transfer sheet 100 on the transfer layer 20 side. When the long transfer sheet is wound up or the transfer sheets are stacked, the blocking of the first region can be easily suppressed.
In addition, by setting the height of the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion to 10 μm or less, the protruding portion is hardly deformed by a load, and the alignment accuracy can be easily maintained.
The heights of the protrusions and the peripheral protrusions need not all be the same. For example, the height of the protruding portion and the height of the peripheral protruding portion may be changed, or the height of each peripheral protruding portion may be changed. However, from the viewpoint of facilitating uniform formation of the colored layer, it is preferable that the heights of the protrusions and the peripheral protrusions are all the same.
In the second embodiment of the present specification, the height (H) of the projecting portion and the peripheral projecting portion refers to the structure forming the projecting portion and the peripheral projecting portion in the extending direction of the structure (for example, In the case of the peripheral protrusions in FIGS. 13 to 15, it means the height of the central part of the cross section cut in a direction orthogonal to the direction “d”. When it cannot be determined that the film extends in any direction because the length in the width direction and the flow direction are the same, such as theprotrusion 3B in FIGS. 14 and 15, the protrusion and the peripheral protrusion The height (H) means the height of the central part of the cross section cut in the width direction.
突出部及び周辺突出部の高さを1μm以上とすることにより、印刷の位置が僅かにずれたとしても、突出部及び周辺突出部上に着色層が形成される一方で、その周辺箇所には着色層が形成されにくくすることができる。つまり、突出部及び周辺突出部の高さを1μm以上とすることにより、位置合わせ用のパターンを正確な場所に印刷しやすくでき、位置合わせの精度を高めることができる。また、突出部3及び周辺突出部4の高さを1μm以上とすることにより、図10~図12に示すように、転写シート100の転写層20側の表面に微細な出っ張りが形成されやすくなり、長尺の転写シートを巻き取ったり、枚葉の転写シートを重ねたりする際に、第1領域のブロッキングを抑制しやすくできる。
また、突出部及び周辺突出部の高さを10μm以下とすることにより、荷重により突出部が変形しにくく、位置合わせの精度を維持しやすくできる。
突出部及び周辺突出部の高さは、全て同一としなくてもよい。例えば、突出部の高さと周辺突出部の高さとを変えてもよいし、個々の周辺突出部の高さを変えてもよい。しかしながら、着色層を均質に形成しやすくする観点から、突出部及び周辺突出部の高さを全て同一とすることが好ましい。
なお、本明細書の第2の実施の形態において、突出部及び周辺突出部の高さ(H)とは、突出部及び周辺突出部を形成する構造体を、構造体の延伸方向(例えば、図13~図15の周辺突出部の場合は「d」の方向)に直交する方向で切断した断面の中央部の高さのことをいう。図14及び図15の突出部3Bのように、幅方向及び流れ方向の長さが同一であることなどにより、何れかの方向に延伸しているとは判断できない場合、突出部及び周辺突出部の高さ(H)とは、幅方向で切断した断面の中央部の高さのことをいう。 The height (H) of the protrusion and the peripheral protrusion is preferably 1 to 10 μm, more preferably 2 to 7 μm, and further preferably 3 to 6 μm.
Even if the printing position is slightly shifted by setting the height of the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion to 1 μm or more, a colored layer is formed on the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion. A colored layer can be made difficult to form. That is, by setting the heights of the protrusions and the peripheral protrusions to 1 μm or more, the alignment pattern can be easily printed at an accurate location, and the alignment accuracy can be increased. Further, by setting the height of the protruding
In addition, by setting the height of the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion to 10 μm or less, the protruding portion is hardly deformed by a load, and the alignment accuracy can be easily maintained.
The heights of the protrusions and the peripheral protrusions need not all be the same. For example, the height of the protruding portion and the height of the peripheral protruding portion may be changed, or the height of each peripheral protruding portion may be changed. However, from the viewpoint of facilitating uniform formation of the colored layer, it is preferable that the heights of the protrusions and the peripheral protrusions are all the same.
In the second embodiment of the present specification, the height (H) of the projecting portion and the peripheral projecting portion refers to the structure forming the projecting portion and the peripheral projecting portion in the extending direction of the structure (for example, In the case of the peripheral protrusions in FIGS. 13 to 15, it means the height of the central part of the cross section cut in a direction orthogonal to the direction “d”. When it cannot be determined that the film extends in any direction because the length in the width direction and the flow direction are the same, such as the
突出部の幅(W1)と、周辺突出部の幅(W2)とは、W2<W1の関係を満たすことが好ましい。W2<W1の関係を満たすことにより、突出部と周辺領域とのコントラストを生じさせる際に、周辺領域の面積が大きくなりすぎることを抑制できる。同様の観点から、W2/W1は、0.8以下であることが好ましく、0.7以下であることがより好ましく、0.5以下であることがさらに好ましい。
また、突出部の幅(W1)に対して周辺突出部の幅(W2)が小さくなり過ぎると、周辺突出部を均質に形成しにくくなったり、周辺突出部の強度が低下したりする場合がある。このため、W2/W1は、0.005以上であることが好ましく、0.010以上であることがより好ましい。
なお、本明細書の第2の実施の形態において、突出部の幅(W1)及び周辺突出部の幅(W2)とは、中心突出部突出部及び周辺突出部を形成する構造体を、構造体の延伸方向(例えば、図13~図15の周辺突出部の場合は「d」の方向)に直交する方向で切断した断面の底部の幅のことをいう。図14及び図15の突出部3Bのように、幅方向及び流れ方向の長さが同一であることなどにより、何れかの方向に延伸しているとは判断できない場合、突出部の幅(W1)及び周辺突出部の幅(W2)とは、幅方向で切断した断面の底部の幅のことをいう。 The width (W 1 ) of the protrusion and the width (W 2 ) of the peripheral protrusion preferably satisfy the relationship of W 2 <W 1 . By satisfying the relationship of W 2 <W 1 , it is possible to suppress the area of the peripheral region from becoming too large when causing the contrast between the protrusion and the peripheral region. From the same viewpoint, W 2 / W 1 is preferably 0.8 or less, more preferably 0.7 or less, and further preferably 0.5 or less.
In addition, if the width (W 2 ) of the peripheral protrusion is too small with respect to the width (W 1 ) of the protrusion, it becomes difficult to form the peripheral protrusion uniformly, or the strength of the peripheral protrusion is reduced. There is a case. Thus,W 2 / W 1 is preferably 0.005 or more, more preferably 0.010 or more.
In the second embodiment of the present specification, the width of the protrusion (W 1 ) and the width of the peripheral protrusion (W 2 ) are the structures that form the central protrusion and the peripheral protrusion. The width of the bottom of the cross section cut in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the structure (for example, the direction of “d” in the case of the peripheral protrusions in FIGS. 13 to 15). When the length in the width direction is the same as the length in the flow direction, as in the protrudingportion 3B in FIGS. 1 ) and the width of the peripheral protrusion (W 2 ) refer to the width of the bottom of the cross section cut in the width direction.
また、突出部の幅(W1)に対して周辺突出部の幅(W2)が小さくなり過ぎると、周辺突出部を均質に形成しにくくなったり、周辺突出部の強度が低下したりする場合がある。このため、W2/W1は、0.005以上であることが好ましく、0.010以上であることがより好ましい。
なお、本明細書の第2の実施の形態において、突出部の幅(W1)及び周辺突出部の幅(W2)とは、中心突出部突出部及び周辺突出部を形成する構造体を、構造体の延伸方向(例えば、図13~図15の周辺突出部の場合は「d」の方向)に直交する方向で切断した断面の底部の幅のことをいう。図14及び図15の突出部3Bのように、幅方向及び流れ方向の長さが同一であることなどにより、何れかの方向に延伸しているとは判断できない場合、突出部の幅(W1)及び周辺突出部の幅(W2)とは、幅方向で切断した断面の底部の幅のことをいう。 The width (W 1 ) of the protrusion and the width (W 2 ) of the peripheral protrusion preferably satisfy the relationship of W 2 <W 1 . By satisfying the relationship of W 2 <W 1 , it is possible to suppress the area of the peripheral region from becoming too large when causing the contrast between the protrusion and the peripheral region. From the same viewpoint, W 2 / W 1 is preferably 0.8 or less, more preferably 0.7 or less, and further preferably 0.5 or less.
In addition, if the width (W 2 ) of the peripheral protrusion is too small with respect to the width (W 1 ) of the protrusion, it becomes difficult to form the peripheral protrusion uniformly, or the strength of the peripheral protrusion is reduced. There is a case. Thus,
In the second embodiment of the present specification, the width of the protrusion (W 1 ) and the width of the peripheral protrusion (W 2 ) are the structures that form the central protrusion and the peripheral protrusion. The width of the bottom of the cross section cut in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the structure (for example, the direction of “d” in the case of the peripheral protrusions in FIGS. 13 to 15). When the length in the width direction is the same as the length in the flow direction, as in the protruding
突出部の幅(W1)は、1.0~10.0mmであることが好ましく、1.0~7.0mmであることがより好ましく、3.0~6.0mmであることがさらに好ましい。
突出部の幅を1.0mm以上とすることにより、周辺領域との区別が明りょうとなり、位置合わせしやすくできる。また、突出部の幅を1.0mm以上とすることにより、第1領域のブロッキングを抑制しやすくできる。
また、突出部の幅を10.0mm以下とすることにより、第2領域の面積が必要以上に広くなることを抑制できる。 The width (W 1 ) of the protrusion is preferably 1.0 to 10.0 mm, more preferably 1.0 to 7.0 mm, and still more preferably 3.0 to 6.0 mm. .
By setting the width of the protruding portion to 1.0 mm or more, the distinction from the peripheral region becomes clear and alignment can be facilitated. Moreover, the blocking of the first region can be easily suppressed by setting the width of the protruding portion to 1.0 mm or more.
Moreover, it can suppress that the area of a 2nd area | region becomes large more than necessary by making the width | variety of a protrusion part into 10.0 mm or less.
突出部の幅を1.0mm以上とすることにより、周辺領域との区別が明りょうとなり、位置合わせしやすくできる。また、突出部の幅を1.0mm以上とすることにより、第1領域のブロッキングを抑制しやすくできる。
また、突出部の幅を10.0mm以下とすることにより、第2領域の面積が必要以上に広くなることを抑制できる。 The width (W 1 ) of the protrusion is preferably 1.0 to 10.0 mm, more preferably 1.0 to 7.0 mm, and still more preferably 3.0 to 6.0 mm. .
By setting the width of the protruding portion to 1.0 mm or more, the distinction from the peripheral region becomes clear and alignment can be facilitated. Moreover, the blocking of the first region can be easily suppressed by setting the width of the protruding portion to 1.0 mm or more.
Moreover, it can suppress that the area of a 2nd area | region becomes large more than necessary by making the width | variety of a protrusion part into 10.0 mm or less.
突出部は、上述した高さ(H)及び幅(W1)の効果のバランスの観点から、高さ(H)と幅(W1)との比が1:10,000~1:10であることが好ましく、1:3,000~1:140であることがより好ましく、1:1,350~1:500であることがさらに好ましい。
The protrusion has a ratio of height (H) to width (W 1 ) of 1: 10,000 to 1:10 from the viewpoint of the balance between the effects of height (H) and width (W 1 ) described above. Preferably, it is 1: 3,000 to 1: 140, more preferably 1: 1,350 to 1: 500.
突出部3、3A、3Bは、図13~図16の第2領域R2Aに示すように、転写シート100の任意の1辺に平行な方向に延伸した列状の構造体から形成されてなることが好ましい。突出部3、3A、3Bを該構成とすることにより、位置合わせをしやすくできる。また、着色層を均質に形成しやすくする観点から、該任意の1辺は流れ方向であることが好ましい。
図13及び図16の第2領域R2Aでは、列状の構造体3、3Aは途切れることなく連続的に延伸しているが、図14及び図15の第2領域R2Aのように列状の構造体3Aを断続的に延伸させ、各構造体の間に周辺領域を形成してもよい。列状の構造体を断続的に延伸させた場合、2方向での位置合わせが可能となり、位置合わせの精度を向上できる。
列状の構造体を断続的に延伸させる場合、各構造体の端部同士の間隔(P3)は、1.0~10.0mmであることが好ましく、1.0~7.0mmであることがより好ましく、3.0~6.0mmであることがさらに好ましい。 The protrusions 3, 3 A, and 3 B are formed from a row of structures extending in a direction parallel to any one side of the transfer sheet 100 as shown in the second region R 2 A of FIGS. It is preferable. By making the protrusions 3, 3 </ b> A, 3 </ b> B have this configuration, alignment can be facilitated. Moreover, it is preferable that this arbitrary one side is a flow direction from a viewpoint of making it easy to form a colored layer uniformly.
In the second region R 2A of FIG. 13 and FIG. 16, the row- like structures 3 and 3A are continuously extended without interruption, but like the second region R 2A of FIG. 14 and FIG. The structure 3A may be intermittently extended to form a peripheral region between the structures. When the columnar structure is extended intermittently, alignment in two directions is possible, and alignment accuracy can be improved.
When the columnar structures are intermittently stretched, the interval (P 3 ) between the ends of each structure is preferably 1.0 to 10.0 mm, and is 1.0 to 7.0 mm. More preferably, the thickness is 3.0 to 6.0 mm.
図13及び図16の第2領域R2Aでは、列状の構造体3、3Aは途切れることなく連続的に延伸しているが、図14及び図15の第2領域R2Aのように列状の構造体3Aを断続的に延伸させ、各構造体の間に周辺領域を形成してもよい。列状の構造体を断続的に延伸させた場合、2方向での位置合わせが可能となり、位置合わせの精度を向上できる。
列状の構造体を断続的に延伸させる場合、各構造体の端部同士の間隔(P3)は、1.0~10.0mmであることが好ましく、1.0~7.0mmであることがより好ましく、3.0~6.0mmであることがさらに好ましい。 The
In the second region R 2A of FIG. 13 and FIG. 16, the row-
When the columnar structures are intermittently stretched, the interval (P 3 ) between the ends of each structure is preferably 1.0 to 10.0 mm, and is 1.0 to 7.0 mm. More preferably, the thickness is 3.0 to 6.0 mm.
また、突出部は、図14~図16の第2領域R2Bに示すように、その外縁形状が、転写シートの幅方向に平行な直線、及び/又は、転写シートの流れ方向に平行な直線を有する略四角形状であることが好ましい。突出部を該構成とすることにより、位置合わせをしやすくできる。
また、突出部は、その外縁形状が、転写シートの幅方向及び流れ方向に平行な直線を有する略四角形状であることがより好ましい。突出部を該構成とすることにより、幅方向及び流れ方向の両方向において位置合わせをしやすくできる。
突出部が略四角形状である場合、1辺の長さは、2~20mmであることが好ましく、3~15mmであることがより好ましく、5~10mmであることがさらに好ましい。 Further, as shown in the second region R 2B in FIGS. 14 to 16, the protruding portion has a straight line whose outer edge shape is parallel to the width direction of the transfer sheet and / or straight line parallel to the flow direction of the transfer sheet. It is preferable that it is the substantially square shape which has. By setting the protruding portion to this configuration, alignment can be facilitated.
Further, it is more preferable that the protruding portion has a substantially quadrangular shape whose outer edge shape has a straight line parallel to the width direction and the flow direction of the transfer sheet. By setting the protruding portion as such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate alignment in both the width direction and the flow direction.
When the protruding portion has a substantially square shape, the length of one side is preferably 2 to 20 mm, more preferably 3 to 15 mm, and further preferably 5 to 10 mm.
また、突出部は、その外縁形状が、転写シートの幅方向及び流れ方向に平行な直線を有する略四角形状であることがより好ましい。突出部を該構成とすることにより、幅方向及び流れ方向の両方向において位置合わせをしやすくできる。
突出部が略四角形状である場合、1辺の長さは、2~20mmであることが好ましく、3~15mmであることがより好ましく、5~10mmであることがさらに好ましい。 Further, as shown in the second region R 2B in FIGS. 14 to 16, the protruding portion has a straight line whose outer edge shape is parallel to the width direction of the transfer sheet and / or straight line parallel to the flow direction of the transfer sheet. It is preferable that it is the substantially square shape which has. By setting the protruding portion to this configuration, alignment can be facilitated.
Further, it is more preferable that the protruding portion has a substantially quadrangular shape whose outer edge shape has a straight line parallel to the width direction and the flow direction of the transfer sheet. By setting the protruding portion as such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate alignment in both the width direction and the flow direction.
When the protruding portion has a substantially square shape, the length of one side is preferably 2 to 20 mm, more preferably 3 to 15 mm, and further preferably 5 to 10 mm.
また、図示しないが、突出部は、その外縁形状として、三角形状、四角形状、五角形状等の多角形状、円形状及び楕円形状から選ばれる何れか1以上の形状を有していてもよい。
また、突出部の外縁形状を、多角形状、円形状及び楕円形状から選ばれる何れかの形状とした場合、周辺突出部の外縁形状をこれらと異なる形状(例えば、直線形状)とすることが好ましい。突出部と周辺突出部との形状を前述したような組み合わせとすることにより、画像処理による形状マッチングによる位置合わせも可能となる。 Moreover, although not shown in figure, the protrusion part may have any one or more shapes chosen from polygonal shapes, such as a triangular shape, square shape, and pentagon shape, circular shape, and elliptical shape as the outer edge shape.
Further, when the outer edge shape of the protruding portion is any shape selected from a polygonal shape, a circular shape, and an elliptical shape, the outer edge shape of the peripheral protruding portion is preferably a shape different from these (for example, a linear shape). . By combining the shapes of the protrusions and the peripheral protrusions as described above, alignment by shape matching by image processing is also possible.
また、突出部の外縁形状を、多角形状、円形状及び楕円形状から選ばれる何れかの形状とした場合、周辺突出部の外縁形状をこれらと異なる形状(例えば、直線形状)とすることが好ましい。突出部と周辺突出部との形状を前述したような組み合わせとすることにより、画像処理による形状マッチングによる位置合わせも可能となる。 Moreover, although not shown in figure, the protrusion part may have any one or more shapes chosen from polygonal shapes, such as a triangular shape, square shape, and pentagon shape, circular shape, and elliptical shape as the outer edge shape.
Further, when the outer edge shape of the protruding portion is any shape selected from a polygonal shape, a circular shape, and an elliptical shape, the outer edge shape of the peripheral protruding portion is preferably a shape different from these (for example, a linear shape). . By combining the shapes of the protrusions and the peripheral protrusions as described above, alignment by shape matching by image processing is also possible.
周辺突出部は、任意の方向に延伸した列状の構造体から形成されてなることが好ましい。該任意の方向は特に限定されず、斜め方向(例えば転写シートの幅方向に対して45度)であってもよいが、図13~図16に示すように、転写シート100の任意の1辺に平行な方向であることが好ましく、転写シート100の流れ方向であることがより好ましい。周辺突出部4を該構成とすることにより、位置合わせをしやすくできる。
また、複数の周辺突出部は、それぞれの向きが平行であることが好ましい。
また、周辺突出部4、4A、4Bは、図13の第2領域R2、図16の第2領域R2Aのように、第2領域内で任意の方向に途切れることなく連続して形成されていてもよいが、図14及び図15の第2領域R2A、R2B、図16の第2領域R2Bのように、突出部3A、3Bと重なる箇所で分断されていてもよい。
また、図15の第2領域R2Bのように、周辺突出部4Bは、突出部3A、3Bと重ならない箇所においても、任意の方向への延伸が部分的に途切れるものであってもよい。 It is preferable that the peripheral protrusion is formed from a columnar structure extending in an arbitrary direction. The arbitrary direction is not particularly limited, and may be an oblique direction (for example, 45 degrees with respect to the width direction of the transfer sheet). However, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, any one side of thetransfer sheet 100 Is preferably parallel to the flow direction, and more preferably in the flow direction of the transfer sheet 100. By making the peripheral protrusions 4 have this configuration, alignment can be facilitated.
Moreover, it is preferable that the directions of the plurality of peripheral protrusions are parallel to each other.
Further, the peripheral protrusions 4, 4 </ b> A, 4 </ b> B are formed continuously without interruption in any direction in the second region, like the second region R 2 in FIG. 13 and the second region R 2A in FIG. 16. it may be, but the second region R 2A of FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, R 2B, as in the second region R 2B in FIG. 16, the projecting portions 3A, may be divided at a position overlapping with 3B.
Further, as in the second region R2B of FIG. 15, the extension in the arbitrary direction of theperipheral protrusion 4B may be partially interrupted even in a portion that does not overlap with the protrusions 3A and 3B.
また、複数の周辺突出部は、それぞれの向きが平行であることが好ましい。
また、周辺突出部4、4A、4Bは、図13の第2領域R2、図16の第2領域R2Aのように、第2領域内で任意の方向に途切れることなく連続して形成されていてもよいが、図14及び図15の第2領域R2A、R2B、図16の第2領域R2Bのように、突出部3A、3Bと重なる箇所で分断されていてもよい。
また、図15の第2領域R2Bのように、周辺突出部4Bは、突出部3A、3Bと重ならない箇所においても、任意の方向への延伸が部分的に途切れるものであってもよい。 It is preferable that the peripheral protrusion is formed from a columnar structure extending in an arbitrary direction. The arbitrary direction is not particularly limited, and may be an oblique direction (for example, 45 degrees with respect to the width direction of the transfer sheet). However, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, any one side of the
Moreover, it is preferable that the directions of the plurality of peripheral protrusions are parallel to each other.
Further, the
Further, as in the second region R2B of FIG. 15, the extension in the arbitrary direction of the
周辺突出部の幅(W2)は、0.05~3.0mmであることが好ましく、0.1~2.0mmであることがより好ましく、0.2~1.0mmであることがさらに好ましい。
周辺突出部の幅を0.05mm以上とすることにより、周辺突出部の強度を維持することができるとともに、周辺突出部を均質に形成しやすくできる。
また、周辺突出部の幅を3.0mm以下とすることにより、第2領域の面積が必要以上に広くなることを抑制できるとともに、突出部と周辺領域とのコントラストを良好にしやすくできる。 The width (W 2 ) of the peripheral protrusion is preferably 0.05 to 3.0 mm, more preferably 0.1 to 2.0 mm, and further preferably 0.2 to 1.0 mm. preferable.
By setting the width of the peripheral protrusion to 0.05 mm or more, the strength of the peripheral protrusion can be maintained, and the peripheral protrusion can be easily formed uniformly.
Further, by setting the width of the peripheral protrusion to 3.0 mm or less, it is possible to suppress the area of the second region from becoming larger than necessary, and to easily improve the contrast between the protrusion and the peripheral region.
周辺突出部の幅を0.05mm以上とすることにより、周辺突出部の強度を維持することができるとともに、周辺突出部を均質に形成しやすくできる。
また、周辺突出部の幅を3.0mm以下とすることにより、第2領域の面積が必要以上に広くなることを抑制できるとともに、突出部と周辺領域とのコントラストを良好にしやすくできる。 The width (W 2 ) of the peripheral protrusion is preferably 0.05 to 3.0 mm, more preferably 0.1 to 2.0 mm, and further preferably 0.2 to 1.0 mm. preferable.
By setting the width of the peripheral protrusion to 0.05 mm or more, the strength of the peripheral protrusion can be maintained, and the peripheral protrusion can be easily formed uniformly.
Further, by setting the width of the peripheral protrusion to 3.0 mm or less, it is possible to suppress the area of the second region from becoming larger than necessary, and to easily improve the contrast between the protrusion and the peripheral region.
周辺突出部は、上述した高さ(H)及び幅(W2)の効果のバランスの観点から、高さ(H)と幅(W2)との比が1:1,000~1:5であることが好ましく、1:500~1:10であることがより好ましく、1:300~1:15であることがさらに好ましい。
Peripheral protrusion, the ratio in terms of the balance of the effect of height above (H) and width (W 2), the height (H) and width (W 2) is 1: 1,000 to 1: 5 Preferably, the ratio is 1: 500 to 1:10, more preferably 1: 300 to 1:15.
第2領域の隣り合う周辺突出部の端部同士の間隔P1と、周辺突出部の高さとの比[P1/周辺突出部の高さ]は、400以下であることが好ましく、200以下であることがより好ましく、140以下であることがさらに好ましい。該比を400以下とすることにより、印圧等を原因とする地汚れによって、周辺突出部以外の周辺領域に着色層が付着することを抑制しやすくできる。また、該比が小さすぎると、周辺突出部を均質に形成しにくくなる。このため、該比は、2以上であることが好ましく、10以上であることがより好ましく、20以上であることがさらに好ましい。
突出部と突出部に近接する周辺突出部との間隔P2と、突出部及び周辺突出部の高さとの比[P2/突出部及び周辺突出部の高さ]の好適な実施態様は、上述した[P1/周辺突出部の高さ]の好適な実施態様と同様である。 The ratio [P 1 / height of the peripheral protrusion] of the interval P 1 between the ends of the adjacent peripheral protrusions in the second region and the height of the peripheral protrusion is preferably 400 or less, and 200 or less. More preferably, it is 140 or less. By setting the ratio to 400 or less, it is possible to easily prevent the colored layer from adhering to the peripheral region other than the peripheral protrusion due to the soiling caused by the printing pressure or the like. On the other hand, if the ratio is too small, it is difficult to form the peripheral protrusions uniformly. For this reason, the ratio is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 10 or more, and further preferably 20 or more.
A preferred embodiment of the ratio [P 2 / height of the protrusion and the peripheral protrusion] of the distance P 2 between the protrusion and the peripheral protrusion adjacent to the protrusion and the height of the protrusion and the peripheral protrusion is: This is the same as the above-described preferred embodiment of [P 1 / height of the peripheral protrusion].
突出部と突出部に近接する周辺突出部との間隔P2と、突出部及び周辺突出部の高さとの比[P2/突出部及び周辺突出部の高さ]の好適な実施態様は、上述した[P1/周辺突出部の高さ]の好適な実施態様と同様である。 The ratio [P 1 / height of the peripheral protrusion] of the interval P 1 between the ends of the adjacent peripheral protrusions in the second region and the height of the peripheral protrusion is preferably 400 or less, and 200 or less. More preferably, it is 140 or less. By setting the ratio to 400 or less, it is possible to easily prevent the colored layer from adhering to the peripheral region other than the peripheral protrusion due to the soiling caused by the printing pressure or the like. On the other hand, if the ratio is too small, it is difficult to form the peripheral protrusions uniformly. For this reason, the ratio is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 10 or more, and further preferably 20 or more.
A preferred embodiment of the ratio [P 2 / height of the protrusion and the peripheral protrusion] of the distance P 2 between the protrusion and the peripheral protrusion adjacent to the protrusion and the height of the protrusion and the peripheral protrusion is: This is the same as the above-described preferred embodiment of [P 1 / height of the peripheral protrusion].
突出部及び周辺突出部を形成する構造体を、構造体の延伸方向に直交する方向で切断した断面は、略四角形状であることが好ましい。
The cross section obtained by cutting the structure forming the protrusion and the peripheral protrusion in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the structure is preferably substantially rectangular.
また、本実施形態の転写シートは、突出部が、その外縁形状として、転写シートの流れ方向に平行な2本の直線及び/又は転写シートの幅方向に平行な2本の直線を有し、周辺領域及び周辺突出部は、突出部との関係で、下記条件1~3の何れかを満たすことが好ましい。
<条件1>
突出部の外縁形状として、転写シートの流れ方向に平行な2本の直線を有する場合、突出部の幅方向の両側に周辺領域を配置する。
<条件2>
突出部の外縁形状として、転写シートの幅方向に平行な2本の直線を有する場合、突出部の流れ方向の両側に周辺領域を配置する。
<条件3>
突出部の外縁形状として、転写シートの流れ方向に平行な2本の直線及び幅方向に平行な2本の直線を有する場合、突出部の流れ方向の両側及び/又は突出部の幅方向の両側に周辺領域を配置する。 Further, in the transfer sheet of the present embodiment, the protruding portion has two straight lines parallel to the flow direction of the transfer sheet and / or two straight lines parallel to the width direction of the transfer sheet as the outer edge shape thereof. It is preferable that the peripheral region and the peripheral protrusion satisfy any one of the followingconditions 1 to 3 in relation to the protrusion.
<Condition 1>
When there are two straight lines parallel to the flow direction of the transfer sheet as the outer edge shape of the protrusion, peripheral areas are arranged on both sides in the width direction of the protrusion.
<Condition 2>
When there are two straight lines parallel to the width direction of the transfer sheet as the outer edge shape of the protrusion, peripheral areas are arranged on both sides of the protrusion in the flow direction.
<Condition 3>
When there are two straight lines parallel to the flow direction of the transfer sheet and two straight lines parallel to the width direction as the outer edge shape of the protrusion, both sides in the flow direction of the protrusion and / or both sides in the width direction of the protrusion Place the peripheral area in
<条件1>
突出部の外縁形状として、転写シートの流れ方向に平行な2本の直線を有する場合、突出部の幅方向の両側に周辺領域を配置する。
<条件2>
突出部の外縁形状として、転写シートの幅方向に平行な2本の直線を有する場合、突出部の流れ方向の両側に周辺領域を配置する。
<条件3>
突出部の外縁形状として、転写シートの流れ方向に平行な2本の直線及び幅方向に平行な2本の直線を有する場合、突出部の流れ方向の両側及び/又は突出部の幅方向の両側に周辺領域を配置する。 Further, in the transfer sheet of the present embodiment, the protruding portion has two straight lines parallel to the flow direction of the transfer sheet and / or two straight lines parallel to the width direction of the transfer sheet as the outer edge shape thereof. It is preferable that the peripheral region and the peripheral protrusion satisfy any one of the following
<
When there are two straight lines parallel to the flow direction of the transfer sheet as the outer edge shape of the protrusion, peripheral areas are arranged on both sides in the width direction of the protrusion.
<
When there are two straight lines parallel to the width direction of the transfer sheet as the outer edge shape of the protrusion, peripheral areas are arranged on both sides of the protrusion in the flow direction.
<
When there are two straight lines parallel to the flow direction of the transfer sheet and two straight lines parallel to the width direction as the outer edge shape of the protrusion, both sides in the flow direction of the protrusion and / or both sides in the width direction of the protrusion Place the peripheral area in
上記条件1を満たすことにより、幅方向の位置合わせをより正確に行うことができる。
上記条件2を満たすことにより、流れ方向の位置合わせをより正確に行うことができる。
上記条件3を満たすことにより、幅方向及び/又は流れ方向の位置合わせをより正確に行うことができる。 By satisfying theabove condition 1, the alignment in the width direction can be performed more accurately.
By satisfying theabove condition 2, the alignment in the flow direction can be performed more accurately.
By satisfying thecondition 3, the alignment in the width direction and / or the flow direction can be performed more accurately.
上記条件2を満たすことにより、流れ方向の位置合わせをより正確に行うことができる。
上記条件3を満たすことにより、幅方向及び/又は流れ方向の位置合わせをより正確に行うことができる。 By satisfying the
By satisfying the
By satisfying the
また、本実施形態の転写シートは、上記条件1~3が、さらに、下記の追加条件を含むことが好ましい。
<条件1の追加条件>
前記突出部の幅方向の両側に配置された周辺領域の幅L2と、前記突出部の外縁形状である前記流れ方向に平行な2本の直線の間隔L1との比[L2/L1]が1.0以上となるように構成する。
<条件2の追加条件>
前記突出部の流れ方向の両側に配置された周辺領域の長さL4と、前記突出部の外縁形状である前記幅方向に平行な2本の直線の間隔L3との比[L4/L3]が1.0以上となるように構成する。
<条件3の追加条件>
前記[L2/L1]が1.0以上となるような構成、及び/又は、前記[L4/L3]が1.0以上となるような構成、とする。 In the transfer sheet of the present embodiment, it is preferable that theabove conditions 1 to 3 further include the following additional conditions.
<Additional conditions forcondition 1>
The ratio [L 2 / L] between the width L 2 of the peripheral region arranged on both sides in the width direction of the protrusion and the distance L 1 between two straight lines parallel to the flow direction, which is the outer edge shape of the protrusion 1 ] is 1.0 or more.
<Additional conditions forcondition 2>
The ratio of the length L 4 of the peripheral region arranged on both sides in the flow direction of the protrusion and the distance L 3 between two straight lines parallel to the width direction, which is the outer edge shape of the protrusion [L 4 / L 3 ] is configured to be 1.0 or more.
<Additional conditions forcondition 3>
The [L 2 / L 1 ] is configured to be 1.0 or more and / or the [L 4 / L 3 ] is configured to be 1.0 or more.
<条件1の追加条件>
前記突出部の幅方向の両側に配置された周辺領域の幅L2と、前記突出部の外縁形状である前記流れ方向に平行な2本の直線の間隔L1との比[L2/L1]が1.0以上となるように構成する。
<条件2の追加条件>
前記突出部の流れ方向の両側に配置された周辺領域の長さL4と、前記突出部の外縁形状である前記幅方向に平行な2本の直線の間隔L3との比[L4/L3]が1.0以上となるように構成する。
<条件3の追加条件>
前記[L2/L1]が1.0以上となるような構成、及び/又は、前記[L4/L3]が1.0以上となるような構成、とする。 In the transfer sheet of the present embodiment, it is preferable that the
<Additional conditions for
The ratio [L 2 / L] between the width L 2 of the peripheral region arranged on both sides in the width direction of the protrusion and the distance L 1 between two straight lines parallel to the flow direction, which is the outer edge shape of the protrusion 1 ] is 1.0 or more.
<Additional conditions for
The ratio of the length L 4 of the peripheral region arranged on both sides in the flow direction of the protrusion and the distance L 3 between two straight lines parallel to the width direction, which is the outer edge shape of the protrusion [L 4 / L 3 ] is configured to be 1.0 or more.
<Additional conditions for
The [L 2 / L 1 ] is configured to be 1.0 or more and / or the [L 4 / L 3 ] is configured to be 1.0 or more.
条件1~3が上記の追加条件を含むことにより、突出部と周辺領域とのコントラストを判定するための十分な領域が確保され、位置合わせの精度を高めることができる。
また、着色層を形成する際に、印圧等を原因とする地汚れによって、第2領域外に着色層が形成されたとしても、条件1~3が上記の追加条件を含むことにより、突出部と周辺領域とのコントラストを判定するための十分な領域が確保されているため、位置合わせへの悪影響を抑制することができる。 When theconditions 1 to 3 include the above-described additional conditions, a sufficient area for determining the contrast between the protrusion and the peripheral area is secured, and the alignment accuracy can be improved.
Further, when forming the colored layer, even if the colored layer is formed outside the second region due to soiling caused by printing pressure or the like, theconditions 1 to 3 include the above-described additional conditions. Since a sufficient area for determining the contrast between the portion and the peripheral area is secured, adverse effects on the alignment can be suppressed.
また、着色層を形成する際に、印圧等を原因とする地汚れによって、第2領域外に着色層が形成されたとしても、条件1~3が上記の追加条件を含むことにより、突出部と周辺領域とのコントラストを判定するための十分な領域が確保されているため、位置合わせへの悪影響を抑制することができる。 When the
Further, when forming the colored layer, even if the colored layer is formed outside the second region due to soiling caused by printing pressure or the like, the
なお、上記の追加条件の比は1.0であれば上述した効果を有する。したがって、上記の追加条件の比の上限は、第1領域と第2領域との配置の関係、歩留まり、製造効率等を考慮して、適宜決定すればよい。
In addition, if the ratio of said additional conditions is 1.0, it has the effect mentioned above. Therefore, the upper limit of the ratio of the additional conditions may be appropriately determined in consideration of the arrangement relationship between the first region and the second region, the yield, manufacturing efficiency, and the like.
突出部及び周辺突出部と、後述する転写層とは、[突出部の高さ/転写層の厚さ]が0.1~5.0の関係を満たすことが好ましく、0.2~3.5の関係を満たすことがより好ましく、0.3~1.0の関係を満たすことがさらに好ましい。
上記比を0.1以上とすることにより、長尺の転写シートを巻き取ったり、枚葉の転写シートを重ねたりする際の第1領域のブロッキングを抑制しやすくできる。また、上記比を5.0以下とすることにより、荷重により突出部及び周辺突出部が変形しにくく、位置合わせの精度を維持しやすくできる。 The protrusion and the peripheral protrusion and the transfer layer described later preferably satisfy the relationship of [height of the protrusion / thickness of the transfer layer] of 0.1 to 5.0, and 0.2 to 3. More preferably, the relationship of 5 is satisfied, and it is more preferable that the relationship of 0.3 to 1.0 is satisfied.
By setting the ratio to 0.1 or more, blocking of the first region when winding a long transfer sheet or stacking single transfer sheets can be easily suppressed. In addition, by setting the ratio to 5.0 or less, the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion are not easily deformed by the load, and the alignment accuracy can be easily maintained.
上記比を0.1以上とすることにより、長尺の転写シートを巻き取ったり、枚葉の転写シートを重ねたりする際の第1領域のブロッキングを抑制しやすくできる。また、上記比を5.0以下とすることにより、荷重により突出部及び周辺突出部が変形しにくく、位置合わせの精度を維持しやすくできる。 The protrusion and the peripheral protrusion and the transfer layer described later preferably satisfy the relationship of [height of the protrusion / thickness of the transfer layer] of 0.1 to 5.0, and 0.2 to 3. More preferably, the relationship of 5 is satisfied, and it is more preferable that the relationship of 0.3 to 1.0 is satisfied.
By setting the ratio to 0.1 or more, blocking of the first region when winding a long transfer sheet or stacking single transfer sheets can be easily suppressed. In addition, by setting the ratio to 5.0 or less, the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion are not easily deformed by the load, and the alignment accuracy can be easily maintained.
本実施形態の転写シートは、第2領域を2以上有していてもよい。例えば、本実施形態の転写シートは、第2領域として、第2領域A及び第2領域Bを有していてもよい。
また、第2領域を2以上有する場合、各領域の役割を変えることが好ましい。例えば、第2領域A及び第2領域B第2領域を有する場合、何れか一方で幅方向の位置合わせを行い、他方で流れ方向の位置合わせを行うように構成することが好ましい。具体的には、第2領域Aが上記条件1を満たすように構成し、第2領域Bが上記条件2を満たすように構成することが好ましい。その際、条件1及び条件2が、さらに、上記の追加条件を含むことがより好ましい。
第2領域を上述のように構成することにより、幅方向及び流れ方向の両方向の位置合わせが可能となり、位置合わせの精度を高めることができる。 The transfer sheet of this embodiment may have two or more second regions. For example, the transfer sheet of the present embodiment may have a second area A and a second area B as the second area.
Further, when two or more second regions are provided, it is preferable to change the role of each region. For example, when it has 2nd area | region A and 2nd area | region B 2nd area | region, it is preferable to perform the position alignment of the width direction in any one, and to perform the position alignment of a flow direction in the other. Specifically, it is preferable that the second region A is configured to satisfy thecondition 1 and the second region B is configured to satisfy the condition 2. At that time, it is more preferable that the conditions 1 and 2 further include the additional conditions described above.
By configuring the second region as described above, alignment in both the width direction and the flow direction is possible, and alignment accuracy can be increased.
また、第2領域を2以上有する場合、各領域の役割を変えることが好ましい。例えば、第2領域A及び第2領域B第2領域を有する場合、何れか一方で幅方向の位置合わせを行い、他方で流れ方向の位置合わせを行うように構成することが好ましい。具体的には、第2領域Aが上記条件1を満たすように構成し、第2領域Bが上記条件2を満たすように構成することが好ましい。その際、条件1及び条件2が、さらに、上記の追加条件を含むことがより好ましい。
第2領域を上述のように構成することにより、幅方向及び流れ方向の両方向の位置合わせが可能となり、位置合わせの精度を高めることができる。 The transfer sheet of this embodiment may have two or more second regions. For example, the transfer sheet of the present embodiment may have a second area A and a second area B as the second area.
Further, when two or more second regions are provided, it is preferable to change the role of each region. For example, when it has 2nd area | region A and 2nd area | region B 2nd area | region, it is preferable to perform the position alignment of the width direction in any one, and to perform the position alignment of a flow direction in the other. Specifically, it is preferable that the second region A is configured to satisfy the
By configuring the second region as described above, alignment in both the width direction and the flow direction is possible, and alignment accuracy can be increased.
上記のように、第2領域として、第2領域A及び第2領域Bを有する場合、第2領域A及び第2領域Bを一方の側に集めてもよいが、図12、図14~図16に示すように、第2領域A及び第2領域Bを分割して配置すること、言い換えると、第2領域A(R2A)と第2領域B(R2B)との間に第1領域R1を配置することが好ましい。
第2領域A及び第2領域Bを上記のように分割して配置することにより、突出部及び周辺突出部の影響によって転写シートの表面に形成される微細な出っ張りのバランスが取れ、長尺の転写シートを巻き取ったり、枚葉の転写シートを重ねたりする際に、転写シートの品質を維持しやすくできる。
また、第2領域A(R2A)及び第2領域B(R2B)は、図12、図14~図16に示すように、幅方向に分割して配置されていることが好ましい。第2領域A(R2A)及び第2領域B(R2B)が幅方向に分割して配置されていることにより、突出部3、3A、3Bが第1領域R1の両側に設けられていることになり、転写シートの巻き返し回数に関わらず、第1領域R1に対する位置合わせ用のパターン(アライメントマーク)の幅方向の位置が変更することがなく、位置合わせの精度を高めることができ、生産性を向上することができる。 As described above, when the second region has the second region A and the second region B, the second region A and the second region B may be gathered on one side, but FIG. 12, FIG. 14 to FIG. 16, the second region A and the second region B are divided and arranged, in other words, the first region between the second region A (R 2A ) and the second region B (R 2B ). R 1 is preferably arranged.
By dividing and arranging the second area A and the second area B as described above, the balance of the fine protrusions formed on the surface of the transfer sheet due to the influence of the protrusions and the peripheral protrusions can be achieved, and the long area The quality of the transfer sheet can be easily maintained when the transfer sheet is wound up or the transfer sheets are stacked.
In addition, the second region A (R 2A ) and the second region B (R 2B ) are preferably arranged separately in the width direction as shown in FIGS. 12 and 14 to 16. Since the second region A (R 2A ) and the second region B (R 2B ) are divided in the width direction, the protrusions 3, 3 A, and 3 B are provided on both sides of the first region R 1. will be there, regardless of the rewinding number of the transfer sheet, without the width direction of the position of the pattern for alignment with respect to the first region R 1 (alignment mark) is changed, it is possible to improve the accuracy of positioning , Productivity can be improved.
第2領域A及び第2領域Bを上記のように分割して配置することにより、突出部及び周辺突出部の影響によって転写シートの表面に形成される微細な出っ張りのバランスが取れ、長尺の転写シートを巻き取ったり、枚葉の転写シートを重ねたりする際に、転写シートの品質を維持しやすくできる。
また、第2領域A(R2A)及び第2領域B(R2B)は、図12、図14~図16に示すように、幅方向に分割して配置されていることが好ましい。第2領域A(R2A)及び第2領域B(R2B)が幅方向に分割して配置されていることにより、突出部3、3A、3Bが第1領域R1の両側に設けられていることになり、転写シートの巻き返し回数に関わらず、第1領域R1に対する位置合わせ用のパターン(アライメントマーク)の幅方向の位置が変更することがなく、位置合わせの精度を高めることができ、生産性を向上することができる。 As described above, when the second region has the second region A and the second region B, the second region A and the second region B may be gathered on one side, but FIG. 12, FIG. 14 to FIG. 16, the second region A and the second region B are divided and arranged, in other words, the first region between the second region A (R 2A ) and the second region B (R 2B ). R 1 is preferably arranged.
By dividing and arranging the second area A and the second area B as described above, the balance of the fine protrusions formed on the surface of the transfer sheet due to the influence of the protrusions and the peripheral protrusions can be achieved, and the long area The quality of the transfer sheet can be easily maintained when the transfer sheet is wound up or the transfer sheets are stacked.
In addition, the second region A (R 2A ) and the second region B (R 2B ) are preferably arranged separately in the width direction as shown in FIGS. 12 and 14 to 16. Since the second region A (R 2A ) and the second region B (R 2B ) are divided in the width direction, the
本実施形態の転写シートは、第1領域に着色層が形成されることを抑制しやすくするために、第1領域と、第2領域との間に、若干の間隔P4を設けることが好ましい。一方、間隔P4が広すぎると歩留まりが低下する。このため、間隔P4は、20~200mmであることが好ましく、30~180mmであることがより好ましい。
Transfer sheet of the present embodiment, in order to easily suppressed that the colored layer is formed on the first region, a first region, between the second region, it is preferable to provide a slight spacing P 4 . On the other hand, the yield decreases when the interval P 4 is too wide. Therefore, the interval P 4 is preferably 20 ~ 200 mm, and more preferably 30 ~ 180 mm.
第2領域は、被転写物に転写し、加飾成形品を得た段階では除去することが好ましい。第2領域を除去するタイミングとしては、例えば、(1)転写シートを長尺にスリットする工程時、(2)転写シートを枚葉に型抜きする工程時、(3)転写シートを被転写物に転写した後のトリミング工程時等が挙げられる。転写層を被転写物の正確な位置に転写する観点からは、(3)のタイミングで第2領域を除去することが好ましい。
It is preferable to remove the second region when it is transferred to the transfer object and a decorative molded product is obtained. The timing for removing the second region is, for example, (1) when the transfer sheet is slit long, (2) when the transfer sheet is cut into sheets, and (3) the transfer sheet is transferred. And the like during the trimming process after the transfer. From the viewpoint of transferring the transfer layer to an accurate position of the transfer object, it is preferable to remove the second region at the timing of (3).
(着色層)
着色層は、突出部及び周辺突出部の上に形成され、第2領域内において、突出部と周辺領域との光透過率ないしは光反射率のコントラストを生じさせる役割を有する。なお、本明細書の「着色層」には、光の拡散により白っぽく見える層(例えば、擦りガラスのように見える層)も含むものとする。 (Colored layer)
The colored layer is formed on the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion, and has a role of causing a light transmittance or a light reflectance contrast between the protruding portion and the peripheral region in the second region. Note that the “colored layer” in this specification includes a layer that looks whitish due to light diffusion (for example, a layer that looks like frosted glass).
着色層は、突出部及び周辺突出部の上に形成され、第2領域内において、突出部と周辺領域との光透過率ないしは光反射率のコントラストを生じさせる役割を有する。なお、本明細書の「着色層」には、光の拡散により白っぽく見える層(例えば、擦りガラスのように見える層)も含むものとする。 (Colored layer)
The colored layer is formed on the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion, and has a role of causing a light transmittance or a light reflectance contrast between the protruding portion and the peripheral region in the second region. Note that the “colored layer” in this specification includes a layer that looks whitish due to light diffusion (for example, a layer that looks like frosted glass).
着色層は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。
The same color layer as described in the first embodiment can be used for the colored layer.
(離型層)
転写シート100の離型シート10は、被転写物に密着した際に転写層20との界面で剥離可能に形成されている。
離型性を向上させるため、離型シート10は、転写層20と接する側の面の少なくとも一部に離型層13を有することが好ましい。また、転写シート100の面内の離型性の均一化の観点からは、図10~図12に示すように、離型シート10は、転写層20と接する側の面の全面に離型層13を有することが好ましい。 (Release layer)
Therelease sheet 10 of the transfer sheet 100 is formed so as to be peelable at the interface with the transfer layer 20 when it is in close contact with the transfer object.
In order to improve the releasability, therelease sheet 10 preferably has a release layer 13 on at least a part of the surface in contact with the transfer layer 20. Further, from the viewpoint of uniform release property within the surface of the transfer sheet 100, the release sheet 10 is formed on the entire surface on the side in contact with the transfer layer 20, as shown in FIGS. 13 is preferable.
転写シート100の離型シート10は、被転写物に密着した際に転写層20との界面で剥離可能に形成されている。
離型性を向上させるため、離型シート10は、転写層20と接する側の面の少なくとも一部に離型層13を有することが好ましい。また、転写シート100の面内の離型性の均一化の観点からは、図10~図12に示すように、離型シート10は、転写層20と接する側の面の全面に離型層13を有することが好ましい。 (Release layer)
The
In order to improve the releasability, the
また、第1領域内に凹凸部5を有する場合、該凹凸部5上に離型層13が形成されることで、凹凸が緩和され、加飾成形品の表面に高周波成分の少ない凹凸形状を形成することができ、加飾成形品の白化及びギラツキを抑制できる。
Moreover, when it has the uneven | corrugated | grooved part 5 in a 1st area | region, the unevenness | corrugation is relieve | moderated by forming the release layer 13 on this uneven | corrugated | grooved part 5, and the uneven | corrugated shape with few high frequency components is provided on the surface of a decorative molded product. It can form and can suppress whitening and glare of a decorative molded product.
離型層13は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。
The release layer 13 may be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
(その他の層)
離型シート10は、その他の層を有していてもよい。
その他の層としては、帯電防止層が挙げられる。離型シート10は、帯電防止層を有することにより、離型シートを剥離する際の剥離帯電を抑制でき、転写の作業性を向上できる。 (Other layers)
Therelease sheet 10 may have other layers.
Examples of other layers include an antistatic layer. When therelease sheet 10 has an antistatic layer, it is possible to suppress the release charge when the release sheet is peeled off, and to improve the transfer workability.
離型シート10は、その他の層を有していてもよい。
その他の層としては、帯電防止層が挙げられる。離型シート10は、帯電防止層を有することにより、離型シートを剥離する際の剥離帯電を抑制でき、転写の作業性を向上できる。 (Other layers)
The
Examples of other layers include an antistatic layer. When the
帯電防止層は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。
The same antistatic layer as that described in the first embodiment can be used.
〔第2の実施の形態の変形例〕
図17は、本発明の転写シート100の第2の実施の形態の変形例を示す断面図である。
本実施形態における基材層11は、突出部3及び周辺突出部4が設けられた樹脂層2と、樹脂層2上に設けられた離型層13とを有している。また、本実施形態における転写層20は、保護層21を有している。そして、本実施形態における着色層12は、突出部3及び周辺突出部4上に設けられた離型層13上に接して設けられ、かつ、保護層21と接して設けられている。
本実施形態における離型層13の樹脂は、アクリルポリオール及びイソシアネートを含有する樹脂組成物の硬化物を含んでいることが好ましい。本実施形態における保護層21の樹脂は、水酸基を有するウレタンアクリレートを含有する樹脂組成物の硬化物を含んでいることが好ましい。本実施形態における着色層12の樹脂は、アクリルポリオール及びイソシアネートを含有する樹脂組成物の硬化物を含んでいることが好ましい。 [Modification of Second Embodiment]
FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view showing a modification of the second embodiment of thetransfer sheet 100 of the present invention.
Thebase material layer 11 in the present embodiment includes a resin layer 2 provided with the protrusions 3 and the peripheral protrusions 4, and a release layer 13 provided on the resin layer 2. Further, the transfer layer 20 in the present embodiment has a protective layer 21. The colored layer 12 in this embodiment is provided in contact with the release layer 13 provided on the protruding portion 3 and the peripheral protruding portion 4, and is provided in contact with the protective layer 21.
The resin of therelease layer 13 in the present embodiment preferably contains a cured product of a resin composition containing acrylic polyol and isocyanate. The resin of the protective layer 21 in the present embodiment preferably includes a cured product of a resin composition containing urethane acrylate having a hydroxyl group. It is preferable that resin of the colored layer 12 in this embodiment contains the hardened | cured material of the resin composition containing an acrylic polyol and isocyanate.
図17は、本発明の転写シート100の第2の実施の形態の変形例を示す断面図である。
本実施形態における基材層11は、突出部3及び周辺突出部4が設けられた樹脂層2と、樹脂層2上に設けられた離型層13とを有している。また、本実施形態における転写層20は、保護層21を有している。そして、本実施形態における着色層12は、突出部3及び周辺突出部4上に設けられた離型層13上に接して設けられ、かつ、保護層21と接して設けられている。
本実施形態における離型層13の樹脂は、アクリルポリオール及びイソシアネートを含有する樹脂組成物の硬化物を含んでいることが好ましい。本実施形態における保護層21の樹脂は、水酸基を有するウレタンアクリレートを含有する樹脂組成物の硬化物を含んでいることが好ましい。本実施形態における着色層12の樹脂は、アクリルポリオール及びイソシアネートを含有する樹脂組成物の硬化物を含んでいることが好ましい。 [Modification of Second Embodiment]
FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view showing a modification of the second embodiment of the
The
The resin of the
着色層12は、離型層13の樹脂と同じ材料であることで、一体化して離型層13と接着する。また、着色層12は、保護層21の水酸基とイソシアネート基が反応してウレタン結合をすることで、保護層21と接着する。つまり、着色層12は、上記構成及び上記材料であることにより、離型層13及び保護層21の両方共に接着することになる。例えば、転写シート100を長尺にスリットする工程、転写シート100を枚葉に型抜きする工程、転写シート100を被転写物に転写した後に型抜きする工程で転写シート100を切断した際に、着色層12が離型層13及び保護層21の両方と接着しているので、着色層12が設けられた箇所では剥離することがないために箔チリを発生することがなく、最終製品の外観良好な物品を作製することができる。
The colored layer 12 is made of the same material as the resin of the release layer 13, so that it is integrated and bonded to the release layer 13. Further, the colored layer 12 is bonded to the protective layer 21 by the urethane group and the isocyanate group of the protective layer 21 reacting to form a urethane bond. That is, the colored layer 12 is bonded to both the release layer 13 and the protective layer 21 because of the configuration and the material. For example, when the transfer sheet 100 is cut in a process of slitting the transfer sheet 100 in a long length, a process of punching the transfer sheet 100 into a sheet, and a process of punching after transferring the transfer sheet 100 to a transfer object, Since the colored layer 12 is bonded to both the release layer 13 and the protective layer 21, it does not peel off at the place where the colored layer 12 is provided, so that no foil dust is generated, and the appearance of the final product Good articles can be produced.
(離型シートの製造方法)
離型シートは、例えば、以下の(A1)~(A3)工程により製造できる。
(A1)支持体上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む樹脂層形成用インキを塗布し、未硬化の樹脂層を形成する工程。
(A2)第1領域及び第2領域と相補的な形状を有する版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層を賦形すると同時に、電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層を硬化させ、支持体上に樹脂層が形成された基材層を得る工程。
(A3)基材層の第2領域内の突出部及び周辺突出部上に着色層を形成する工程。 (Manufacturing method of release sheet)
The release sheet can be produced, for example, by the following steps (A1) to (A3).
(A1) The process of apply | coating the ink for resin layer formation containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition on a support body, and forming an uncured resin layer.
(A2) Using a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region, the uncured resin layer is shaped, and simultaneously irradiated with ionizing radiation to cure the shaped resin layer and support The process of obtaining the base material layer in which the resin layer was formed on the body.
(A3) The process of forming a colored layer on the protrusion part in a 2nd area | region of a base material layer, and a peripheral protrusion part.
離型シートは、例えば、以下の(A1)~(A3)工程により製造できる。
(A1)支持体上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む樹脂層形成用インキを塗布し、未硬化の樹脂層を形成する工程。
(A2)第1領域及び第2領域と相補的な形状を有する版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層を賦形すると同時に、電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層を硬化させ、支持体上に樹脂層が形成された基材層を得る工程。
(A3)基材層の第2領域内の突出部及び周辺突出部上に着色層を形成する工程。 (Manufacturing method of release sheet)
The release sheet can be produced, for example, by the following steps (A1) to (A3).
(A1) The process of apply | coating the ink for resin layer formation containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition on a support body, and forming an uncured resin layer.
(A2) Using a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region, the uncured resin layer is shaped, and simultaneously irradiated with ionizing radiation to cure the shaped resin layer and support The process of obtaining the base material layer in which the resin layer was formed on the body.
(A3) The process of forming a colored layer on the protrusion part in a 2nd area | region of a base material layer, and a peripheral protrusion part.
電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物が溶剤を含む場合、(A1)工程で溶剤を乾燥させることが好ましい。
離型シートが離型層を有する場合、(A3)工程の後に、(A4)樹脂層及び/又は着色層上の少なくとも一部に離型層を形成する工程、を行えばよい。
また、離型シートが離型層を有する場合であって、離型層上に接して着色層を有する場合、(A3)工程の前に、(A5)樹脂層上に離型層を形成する工程、を行えばよい。 When the ionizing radiation curable resin composition contains a solvent, it is preferable to dry the solvent in the step (A1).
When the release sheet has a release layer, after the step (A3), (A4) a step of forming a release layer on at least part of the resin layer and / or the colored layer may be performed.
When the release sheet has a release layer and has a colored layer in contact with the release layer, the release layer is formed on the resin layer (A5) before the step (A3). Steps may be performed.
離型シートが離型層を有する場合、(A3)工程の後に、(A4)樹脂層及び/又は着色層上の少なくとも一部に離型層を形成する工程、を行えばよい。
また、離型シートが離型層を有する場合であって、離型層上に接して着色層を有する場合、(A3)工程の前に、(A5)樹脂層上に離型層を形成する工程、を行えばよい。 When the ionizing radiation curable resin composition contains a solvent, it is preferable to dry the solvent in the step (A1).
When the release sheet has a release layer, after the step (A3), (A4) a step of forming a release layer on at least part of the resin layer and / or the colored layer may be performed.
When the release sheet has a release layer and has a colored layer in contact with the release layer, the release layer is formed on the resin layer (A5) before the step (A3). Steps may be performed.
離型シートがその他の領域を有する場合、(A2)工程の版として、第1領域、第2領域及びその他の領域と相補的な形状を有する版を用いればよい。
When the release sheet has other regions, a plate having a shape complementary to the first region, the second region, and the other regions may be used as the plate in the step (A2).
(A2)工程で使用する版は、例えば、エッチング、サンドブラスト、切削及びレーザー加工、あるいはこれらの組み合わせなどによって、シリンダーの表面を所望の形状に彫刻することにより得ることができる。あるいは、レーザー彫刻、光造形等によって長尺の雄型の版(第1領域及び第2領域と同一の形状を有する版)を作製し、これを反転したものをシリンダーの表面に巻き付けることによって得ることができる。これら版の表面は、クロム等で硬質メッキ処理することが好ましい。
The plate used in the step (A2) can be obtained by engraving the surface of the cylinder into a desired shape by, for example, etching, sandblasting, cutting and laser processing, or a combination thereof. Alternatively, a long male plate (a plate having the same shape as the first region and the second region) is prepared by laser engraving, stereolithography, and the like, and is obtained by wrapping an inverted version around the cylinder surface. be able to. The surface of these plates is preferably hard-plated with chromium or the like.
また、離型シートは、例えば、以下の(a1)~(a3)工程によっても製造できる。
(a1)第1領域及び第2領域と相補的な形状を有する版に、樹脂層形成用インキを充填する工程。
(a2)版に充填した樹脂層形成用インキを支持体上に転写し、必要に応じて乾燥及び硬化して、樹脂層を形成し、支持体上に樹脂層が形成された基材層を得る工程。
(a3)基材層の第2領域内の突出部及び周辺突出部上に着色層を形成する工程。 The release sheet can also be produced, for example, by the following steps (a1) to (a3).
(A1) A step of filling a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region with resin layer forming ink.
(A2) The resin layer forming ink filled in the plate is transferred onto a support, dried and cured as necessary to form a resin layer, and a base material layer having a resin layer formed on the support is formed. Obtaining step.
(A3) The process of forming a colored layer on the protrusion part in a 2nd area | region of a base material layer, and a peripheral protrusion part.
(a1)第1領域及び第2領域と相補的な形状を有する版に、樹脂層形成用インキを充填する工程。
(a2)版に充填した樹脂層形成用インキを支持体上に転写し、必要に応じて乾燥及び硬化して、樹脂層を形成し、支持体上に樹脂層が形成された基材層を得る工程。
(a3)基材層の第2領域内の突出部及び周辺突出部上に着色層を形成する工程。 The release sheet can also be produced, for example, by the following steps (a1) to (a3).
(A1) A step of filling a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region with resin layer forming ink.
(A2) The resin layer forming ink filled in the plate is transferred onto a support, dried and cured as necessary to form a resin layer, and a base material layer having a resin layer formed on the support is formed. Obtaining step.
(A3) The process of forming a colored layer on the protrusion part in a 2nd area | region of a base material layer, and a peripheral protrusion part.
離型シートが離型層を有する場合、(a3)工程の後に、(a4)樹脂層及び/又は着色層上の少なくとも一部に離型層を形成する工程、を行えばよい。
また、離型シートが離型層を有する場合であって、離型層上に接して着色層を有する場合、(a3)工程の前に、(a5)樹脂層上に離型層を形成する工程、を行えばよい。
離型シートがその他の領域を有する場合、(a2)工程の版として、第1領域、第2領域及びその他の領域と相補的な形状を有する版を用いればよい。 When the release sheet has a release layer, after the step (a3), (a4) a step of forming a release layer on at least part of the resin layer and / or the colored layer may be performed.
Further, when the release sheet has a release layer and has a colored layer in contact with the release layer, the release layer is formed on the resin layer (a5) before the step (a3). Steps may be performed.
When the release sheet has other regions, a plate having a shape complementary to the first region, the second region, and the other regions may be used as the plate in the step (a2).
また、離型シートが離型層を有する場合であって、離型層上に接して着色層を有する場合、(a3)工程の前に、(a5)樹脂層上に離型層を形成する工程、を行えばよい。
離型シートがその他の領域を有する場合、(a2)工程の版として、第1領域、第2領域及びその他の領域と相補的な形状を有する版を用いればよい。 When the release sheet has a release layer, after the step (a3), (a4) a step of forming a release layer on at least part of the resin layer and / or the colored layer may be performed.
Further, when the release sheet has a release layer and has a colored layer in contact with the release layer, the release layer is formed on the resin layer (a5) before the step (a3). Steps may be performed.
When the release sheet has other regions, a plate having a shape complementary to the first region, the second region, and the other regions may be used as the plate in the step (a2).
正確かつ精密な形状を形成する観点からは、上述した(A1)~(A3)工程が好適である。
From the viewpoint of forming an accurate and precise shape, the above-described steps (A1) to (A3) are preferable.
転写シートは、製造効率の観点から、図16のように多面付けで製造することが好ましい。同様に、離型シートも多面付けで製造することが好ましい。このため、上記(A2)工程や(a1)工程で使用する版は、多面付けに対応した版とすることが好ましい。
The transfer sheet is preferably manufactured with multiple impositions as shown in FIG. 16 from the viewpoint of manufacturing efficiency. Similarly, it is preferable that the release sheet is also manufactured by multiple imposition. For this reason, it is preferable that the plate used in the step (A2) or the step (a1) is a plate corresponding to the multi-page imposition.
上述した版は、第1領域及び第2領域を正確な位置に配置することが好ましい。特に、第1領域が凹凸部を有する場合、第1領域と第2領域との配置が重要となる。
第1領域が凹凸部を有する場合、例えば、以下の(y1)~(y4)の工程により、第1領域及び第2領域が正確な位置に配置された版を作製することができる。 In the above-described plate, it is preferable that the first region and the second region are arranged at accurate positions. In particular, when the first region has an uneven portion, the arrangement of the first region and the second region is important.
When the first region has an uneven portion, for example, a plate in which the first region and the second region are arranged at accurate positions can be manufactured by the following steps (y1) to (y4).
第1領域が凹凸部を有する場合、例えば、以下の(y1)~(y4)の工程により、第1領域及び第2領域が正確な位置に配置された版を作製することができる。 In the above-described plate, it is preferable that the first region and the second region are arranged at accurate positions. In particular, when the first region has an uneven portion, the arrangement of the first region and the second region is important.
When the first region has an uneven portion, for example, a plate in which the first region and the second region are arranged at accurate positions can be manufactured by the following steps (y1) to (y4).
(y1)シリンダー30の表面に、第2領域の突出部及び周辺突出部と相補的な形状を有する溝部40を形成する(図19(a))。
(y2)上記溝部を位置合わせの基準として、シリンダー30の表面を、第1領域の溝部を形成する箇所60が抜き加工されたマスク50で覆う(図19(b))。
(y3)マスク50で覆われていない箇所に、第1領域の凹凸部と相補的な形状を有する凹凸を形成する。
(y4)マスク50を外し(図19(c))、シリンダーの表面を硬質メッキ処理する。 (Y1)Grooves 40 having shapes complementary to the protrusions of the second region and the peripheral protrusions are formed on the surface of the cylinder 30 (FIG. 19A).
(Y2) Using the groove as a reference for alignment, the surface of thecylinder 30 is covered with a mask 50 in which a portion 60 for forming the groove in the first region is punched (FIG. 19B).
(Y3) Irregularities having a shape complementary to the irregularities in the first region are formed at locations not covered with themask 50.
(Y4) Themask 50 is removed (FIG. 19C), and the surface of the cylinder is hard-plated.
(y2)上記溝部を位置合わせの基準として、シリンダー30の表面を、第1領域の溝部を形成する箇所60が抜き加工されたマスク50で覆う(図19(b))。
(y3)マスク50で覆われていない箇所に、第1領域の凹凸部と相補的な形状を有する凹凸を形成する。
(y4)マスク50を外し(図19(c))、シリンダーの表面を硬質メッキ処理する。 (Y1)
(Y2) Using the groove as a reference for alignment, the surface of the
(Y3) Irregularities having a shape complementary to the irregularities in the first region are formed at locations not covered with the
(Y4) The
(y1)工程は、例えば、エッチングにより行うことができる。このため、シリンダーは、表面が厚膜でメッキされたものが好ましい。
その他の領域を形成する場合、(y1)工程において、上記溝部40を形成するとともに、その他の領域の表面形状と相補的な形状を有する溝部を形成したり、(y2)工程において、その他の領域に対応する箇所が抜き加工されたマスクを用いたりしてもよい。
(y3)工程は、例えば、エッチングやブラスト加工により行うことができる。第2領域の突出部及び周辺突出部よりも高さを低くする観点、及びマット感の調整のしやすさの観点から、ブラスト加工が好適である。また、ブラスト加工に用いる粒子の形状(球形、不定形)、粒子の粒子径、粒子の材質(ガラスビーズ、有機粒子、無機粒子、鉄、砂等)を選定した上で、粒子を射出する距離、速度、時間、角度等を調整することにより、ブラスト加工により付与する形状を調整できる。
(y4)工程の硬質メッキは、例えば、クロムメッキが挙げられる。 The step (y1) can be performed by etching, for example. For this reason, the cylinder preferably has a surface plated with a thick film.
When forming other regions, thegroove 40 is formed in the step (y1) and a groove having a shape complementary to the surface shape of the other region is formed. In the step (y2), other regions are formed. It is also possible to use a mask in which a portion corresponding to is cut out.
The step (y3) can be performed by, for example, etching or blasting. Blasting is preferable from the viewpoint of lowering the height than the protrusions in the second region and the peripheral protrusions and from the viewpoint of ease of adjusting the matte feeling. In addition, select the particle shape (spherical, indeterminate), particle diameter, particle material (glass beads, organic particles, inorganic particles, iron, sand, etc.) used for blasting, and the distance to inject the particles By adjusting the speed, time, angle, etc., the shape to be imparted by blasting can be adjusted.
Examples of the hard plating in the step (y4) include chrome plating.
その他の領域を形成する場合、(y1)工程において、上記溝部40を形成するとともに、その他の領域の表面形状と相補的な形状を有する溝部を形成したり、(y2)工程において、その他の領域に対応する箇所が抜き加工されたマスクを用いたりしてもよい。
(y3)工程は、例えば、エッチングやブラスト加工により行うことができる。第2領域の突出部及び周辺突出部よりも高さを低くする観点、及びマット感の調整のしやすさの観点から、ブラスト加工が好適である。また、ブラスト加工に用いる粒子の形状(球形、不定形)、粒子の粒子径、粒子の材質(ガラスビーズ、有機粒子、無機粒子、鉄、砂等)を選定した上で、粒子を射出する距離、速度、時間、角度等を調整することにより、ブラスト加工により付与する形状を調整できる。
(y4)工程の硬質メッキは、例えば、クロムメッキが挙げられる。 The step (y1) can be performed by etching, for example. For this reason, the cylinder preferably has a surface plated with a thick film.
When forming other regions, the
The step (y3) can be performed by, for example, etching or blasting. Blasting is preferable from the viewpoint of lowering the height than the protrusions in the second region and the peripheral protrusions and from the viewpoint of ease of adjusting the matte feeling. In addition, select the particle shape (spherical, indeterminate), particle diameter, particle material (glass beads, organic particles, inorganic particles, iron, sand, etc.) used for blasting, and the distance to inject the particles By adjusting the speed, time, angle, etc., the shape to be imparted by blasting can be adjusted.
Examples of the hard plating in the step (y4) include chrome plating.
<転写層>
離型シート10上の少なくとも一部には、転写層20が形成される。
転写層20は、被転写物に転写される層であり、例えば、図10~図12に示すように、離型シートに近い側から順に、保護層21及び接着剤層22を有する。
転写層20は、基材層11の第1領域R1に対応する箇所の全部に形成することが好ましく、図10~図12に示すように、離型シート10の全面に形成することがより好ましい。 <Transfer layer>
Atransfer layer 20 is formed on at least a part of the release sheet 10.
Thetransfer layer 20 is a layer to be transferred to the transfer object, and for example, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, has a protective layer 21 and an adhesive layer 22 in order from the side closer to the release sheet.
Transfer layer 20 is preferably formed on the whole of the portion corresponding to the first region R 1 of the base layer 11, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, more be formed on the entire surface of the release sheet 10 preferable.
離型シート10上の少なくとも一部には、転写層20が形成される。
転写層20は、被転写物に転写される層であり、例えば、図10~図12に示すように、離型シートに近い側から順に、保護層21及び接着剤層22を有する。
転写層20は、基材層11の第1領域R1に対応する箇所の全部に形成することが好ましく、図10~図12に示すように、離型シート10の全面に形成することがより好ましい。 <Transfer layer>
A
The
(保護層)
保護層21は、転写層が転写シートから被転写物へと転写された後は、摩耗や光、薬品等から加飾成形品を保護する役割を有する。
離型シート10の第1領域内に凹凸部5を有する場合、該凹凸形状と相補的な形状を有する保護層21が加飾成形品の表面に付与される。また、離型シート10の第1領域が略平滑な場合、表面が略平滑な保護層21が加飾成形品の表面に付与され、加飾成形品の光沢を高くすることができる。 (Protective layer)
Theprotective layer 21 has a role of protecting the decorative molded product from abrasion, light, chemicals and the like after the transfer layer is transferred from the transfer sheet to the transfer object.
When it has the uneven | corrugated |grooved part 5 in the 1st area | region of the release sheet 10, the protective layer 21 which has a shape complementary to this uneven | corrugated shape is provided to the surface of a decorative molded product. Moreover, when the 1st area | region of the release sheet 10 is substantially smooth, the protective layer 21 with the substantially smooth surface is provided to the surface of a decorative molded product, and the glossiness of a decorative molded product can be made high.
保護層21は、転写層が転写シートから被転写物へと転写された後は、摩耗や光、薬品等から加飾成形品を保護する役割を有する。
離型シート10の第1領域内に凹凸部5を有する場合、該凹凸形状と相補的な形状を有する保護層21が加飾成形品の表面に付与される。また、離型シート10の第1領域が略平滑な場合、表面が略平滑な保護層21が加飾成形品の表面に付与され、加飾成形品の光沢を高くすることができる。 (Protective layer)
The
When it has the uneven | corrugated |
保護層21は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。
The protective layer 21 can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
(接着剤層)
接着剤層22は、樹脂成形体等の被転写物と、転写層との接着性を良好にして、転写作業を良好にする役割を有する。
なお、保護層21と被転写物との接着性が良好な場合は、接着剤層22を設けなくてもよい。 (Adhesive layer)
Theadhesive layer 22 has a role of improving the transfer work by improving the adhesion between the transfer object such as a resin molded body and the transfer layer.
In addition, when the adhesiveness between theprotective layer 21 and the transfer target is good, the adhesive layer 22 may not be provided.
接着剤層22は、樹脂成形体等の被転写物と、転写層との接着性を良好にして、転写作業を良好にする役割を有する。
なお、保護層21と被転写物との接着性が良好な場合は、接着剤層22を設けなくてもよい。 (Adhesive layer)
The
In addition, when the adhesiveness between the
接着剤層22は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。
The same adhesive layer 22 as that described in the first embodiment can be used.
(アンカー層)
アンカー層は、インモールド成形等の高温環境に置かれる場合において、耐熱性を向上させるために必要に応じて設けられる層である。アンカー層は、保護層21と接着剤層22との間に形成することが好ましい。 (Anchor layer)
The anchor layer is a layer provided as necessary to improve heat resistance when placed in a high temperature environment such as in-mold molding. The anchor layer is preferably formed between theprotective layer 21 and the adhesive layer 22.
アンカー層は、インモールド成形等の高温環境に置かれる場合において、耐熱性を向上させるために必要に応じて設けられる層である。アンカー層は、保護層21と接着剤層22との間に形成することが好ましい。 (Anchor layer)
The anchor layer is a layer provided as necessary to improve heat resistance when placed in a high temperature environment such as in-mold molding. The anchor layer is preferably formed between the
アンカー層は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。
The anchor layer can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
(印刷層)
転写層20は、図10~図12に示すように、さらに印刷層23を有していてもよい。印刷層23は、加飾成形品に所望の意匠性を付与する役割を有する。 (Print layer)
Thetransfer layer 20 may further include a print layer 23 as shown in FIGS. The printed layer 23 has a role of imparting a desired design property to the decorative molded product.
転写層20は、図10~図12に示すように、さらに印刷層23を有していてもよい。印刷層23は、加飾成形品に所望の意匠性を付与する役割を有する。 (Print layer)
The
印刷層23は、転写シート100を平面方向から観察した際に、基材層11の第1領域内の少なくとも一部に位置するように配置することが好ましい。
また、印刷層23の厚さ方向の位置は、図10~図12のように接着剤層22上に配置してもよいし、接着剤層22と保護層21との間に配置してもよいし、保護層21と離型シート10との間に配置してもよい。印刷層23の保護と、被転写物への接着性の観点からは、接着剤層22と保護層21との間に印刷層23を配置することが好ましい。また、小ロット品への対応の観点からは、接着剤層22上に印刷層23を配置することが好ましい。なお、接着剤層22上に印刷層23を配置する場合、被転写物との接着性の均一化の観点から、印刷層23の樹脂成分は、接着剤層の樹脂成分と同系統の樹脂とすることが好ましく、同一の樹脂とすることがより好ましい。 Theprint layer 23 is preferably arranged so as to be positioned at least in a part of the first region of the base material layer 11 when the transfer sheet 100 is observed from the planar direction.
Further, the position in the thickness direction of theprinting layer 23 may be arranged on the adhesive layer 22 as shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, or may be arranged between the adhesive layer 22 and the protective layer 21. It may be arranged between the protective layer 21 and the release sheet 10. From the viewpoint of protection of the printing layer 23 and adhesion to the transfer object, it is preferable to dispose the printing layer 23 between the adhesive layer 22 and the protection layer 21. Further, from the viewpoint of handling small lot products, it is preferable to dispose the printing layer 23 on the adhesive layer 22. When the printing layer 23 is disposed on the adhesive layer 22, the resin component of the printing layer 23 is a resin of the same type as the resin component of the adhesive layer from the viewpoint of uniform adhesion to the transfer target. It is preferable to use the same resin.
また、印刷層23の厚さ方向の位置は、図10~図12のように接着剤層22上に配置してもよいし、接着剤層22と保護層21との間に配置してもよいし、保護層21と離型シート10との間に配置してもよい。印刷層23の保護と、被転写物への接着性の観点からは、接着剤層22と保護層21との間に印刷層23を配置することが好ましい。また、小ロット品への対応の観点からは、接着剤層22上に印刷層23を配置することが好ましい。なお、接着剤層22上に印刷層23を配置する場合、被転写物との接着性の均一化の観点から、印刷層23の樹脂成分は、接着剤層の樹脂成分と同系統の樹脂とすることが好ましく、同一の樹脂とすることがより好ましい。 The
Further, the position in the thickness direction of the
印刷層23は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。
The printing layer 23 can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
[転写シートの製造方法]
本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る転写シートの製造方法は、下記(A1)~(A3)工程により離型シートを製造した後、離型シートの少なくとも一部に転写層を形成するものである。
(A1)支持体上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む樹脂層形成用インキを塗布し、未硬化の樹脂層を形成する工程。
(A2)第1領域及び第2領域と相補的な形状を有する版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層を賦形すると同時に、電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層を硬化させ、支持体上に樹脂層が形成された基材層を得る工程。
(A3)基材層の第2領域内の突出部及び周辺突出部上に着色層を形成する工程。 [Transfer sheet manufacturing method]
The method for manufacturing a transfer sheet according to the second embodiment of the present invention is such that after a release sheet is manufactured by the following steps (A1) to (A3), a transfer layer is formed on at least a part of the release sheet. It is.
(A1) The process of apply | coating the ink for resin layer formation containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition on a support body, and forming an uncured resin layer.
(A2) Using a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region, the uncured resin layer is shaped, and simultaneously irradiated with ionizing radiation to cure the shaped resin layer and support The process of obtaining the base material layer in which the resin layer was formed on the body.
(A3) The process of forming a colored layer on the protrusion part in a 2nd area | region of a base material layer, and a peripheral protrusion part.
本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る転写シートの製造方法は、下記(A1)~(A3)工程により離型シートを製造した後、離型シートの少なくとも一部に転写層を形成するものである。
(A1)支持体上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む樹脂層形成用インキを塗布し、未硬化の樹脂層を形成する工程。
(A2)第1領域及び第2領域と相補的な形状を有する版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層を賦形すると同時に、電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層を硬化させ、支持体上に樹脂層が形成された基材層を得る工程。
(A3)基材層の第2領域内の突出部及び周辺突出部上に着色層を形成する工程。 [Transfer sheet manufacturing method]
The method for manufacturing a transfer sheet according to the second embodiment of the present invention is such that after a release sheet is manufactured by the following steps (A1) to (A3), a transfer layer is formed on at least a part of the release sheet. It is.
(A1) The process of apply | coating the ink for resin layer formation containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition on a support body, and forming an uncured resin layer.
(A2) Using a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region, the uncured resin layer is shaped, and simultaneously irradiated with ionizing radiation to cure the shaped resin layer and support The process of obtaining the base material layer in which the resin layer was formed on the body.
(A3) The process of forming a colored layer on the protrusion part in a 2nd area | region of a base material layer, and a peripheral protrusion part.
電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物が溶剤を含む場合、(A1)工程で溶剤を乾燥させることが好ましい。
転写シートは、製造効率の観点から、図16のように多面付けで製造することが好ましい。このように多面付けで製造された転写シートは、長尺の転写シート、あるいは枚葉の転写シートとして転写工程が行われる。 When the ionizing radiation curable resin composition contains a solvent, it is preferable to dry the solvent in the step (A1).
From the viewpoint of manufacturing efficiency, the transfer sheet is preferably manufactured with multiple impositions as shown in FIG. The transfer sheet manufactured in such a multi-face manner is subjected to a transfer process as a long transfer sheet or a single sheet transfer sheet.
転写シートは、製造効率の観点から、図16のように多面付けで製造することが好ましい。このように多面付けで製造された転写シートは、長尺の転写シート、あるいは枚葉の転写シートとして転写工程が行われる。 When the ionizing radiation curable resin composition contains a solvent, it is preferable to dry the solvent in the step (A1).
From the viewpoint of manufacturing efficiency, the transfer sheet is preferably manufactured with multiple impositions as shown in FIG. The transfer sheet manufactured in such a multi-face manner is subjected to a transfer process as a long transfer sheet or a single sheet transfer sheet.
上記工程により製造された転写シートは、位置合わせ用のパターン印刷である着色層を突出部及び周辺突出部上に形成しやすくすることができ、突出部と周辺領域との光透過率ないしは光反射率のコントラストが明りょうとなり、位置合わせをしやすくできる。
The transfer sheet manufactured by the above process can easily form a colored layer, which is a pattern printing for alignment, on the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion, and the light transmittance or light reflection between the protruding portion and the peripheral region. The rate contrast is clear and can be easily aligned.
位置合わせを行う任意の工程としては、例えば、転写シートを長尺にスリットする工程、転写シートを枚葉に型抜きする工程、転写シートを被転写物に転写する工程が挙げられる。
例えば、図13~図16のように、第2領域R2、R2Aの突出部3、3Aが、突出部の外縁形状として転写シートの流れ方向に平行な2本の直線を有する場合(上記条件1を満たす場合)、第2領域R2、R2A内の突出部3、3Aと、周辺領域X、XAとの間に生じているコントラスト(光透過率差又は光反射率差)を利用して、転写シートの流れ方向に直交する方向(幅方向)の位置を合わせ、転写シートを正確に長尺にスリットすることができる。
また、図14~図16のように、第2領域R2Bの突出部3Bが、突出部の外縁形状として、転写シートの幅方向に平行な2本の直線を有する場合(上記条件2を満たす場合)、第2領域R2B内の突出部3Bと、周辺領域XBとの間に生じているコントラスト(光透過率差又は光反射率差)を利用して、転写シートの幅方向に直交する方向(流れ方向)の位置を合わせ、転写シートを枚葉に型抜きする際に、流れ方向の位置を正確に合わせることができる。また、図14~図16では、上述したように、第2領域R2、R2Aによって、幅方向の位置合わせが可能であるため、図14~図16の転写シートでは、転写シートを枚葉に型抜きする際に、幅方向及び流れ方向の位置を正確に合わせることができる。
また、上述したスリット工程や型抜き工程において、第2領域R2、R2A、R2Bを残しておけば、転写シートを被転写物に転写する際に、転写シートの幅方向及び/又は流れ方向の位置合わせを行うことができ、正確な位置に転写することができる。
光透過率差のコントラストは、例えば、転写シートの下方に設置した光源と、転写シートの上方の前記光源に正対する位置に設置した光検知手段とにより、検知することができる。光反射率差のコントラストは、例えば、転写シートの上方に任意の角度で設置した光源及び光検知手段により、検知することができる。 Examples of the optional step of aligning include a step of slitting the transfer sheet in a long length, a step of punching the transfer sheet into a sheet, and a step of transferring the transfer sheet to a transfer object.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, when the protrusions 3 and 3A of the second regions R 2 and R 2A have two straight lines parallel to the flow direction of the transfer sheet as the outer edge shape of the protrusions (see above) when satisfying the condition 1), a protrusion 3,3A in the second region R 2, R 2A, the peripheral area X, the occur are contrast (light transmittance difference or the light reflectance difference) between the X a By utilizing this, the position in the direction (width direction) orthogonal to the flow direction of the transfer sheet can be aligned, and the transfer sheet can be accurately slit to be long.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the projectingportions 3B of the second region R 2B is, as the outer edge shape of the protruding portion, satisfies the case (the condition 2 with two straight lines parallel to the width direction of the transfer sheet If), the projecting portion 3B in the second region R 2B, utilizing occur are contrast (light transmittance difference or the light reflectance difference) between the peripheral region X B, perpendicular to the width direction of the transfer sheet The position in the direction of flow (flow direction) is aligned, and the position in the direction of flow can be accurately aligned when the transfer sheet is die-cut into sheets. Further, in FIGS. 14 to 16, as described above, the second regions R 2 and R 2A can be aligned in the width direction. Therefore, in the transfer sheets of FIGS. When die-cutting, the positions in the width direction and the flow direction can be accurately matched.
In addition, if the second regions R 2 , R 2A , and R 2B are left in the slit process and the die cutting process described above, the width direction and / or flow of the transfer sheet is transferred when the transfer sheet is transferred to the transfer object. Directional alignment can be performed and transfer can be performed at an accurate position.
The contrast of the light transmittance difference can be detected by, for example, a light source installed below the transfer sheet and a light detection unit installed at a position facing the light source above the transfer sheet. The contrast of the light reflectance difference can be detected by, for example, a light source and a light detection unit installed at an arbitrary angle above the transfer sheet.
例えば、図13~図16のように、第2領域R2、R2Aの突出部3、3Aが、突出部の外縁形状として転写シートの流れ方向に平行な2本の直線を有する場合(上記条件1を満たす場合)、第2領域R2、R2A内の突出部3、3Aと、周辺領域X、XAとの間に生じているコントラスト(光透過率差又は光反射率差)を利用して、転写シートの流れ方向に直交する方向(幅方向)の位置を合わせ、転写シートを正確に長尺にスリットすることができる。
また、図14~図16のように、第2領域R2Bの突出部3Bが、突出部の外縁形状として、転写シートの幅方向に平行な2本の直線を有する場合(上記条件2を満たす場合)、第2領域R2B内の突出部3Bと、周辺領域XBとの間に生じているコントラスト(光透過率差又は光反射率差)を利用して、転写シートの幅方向に直交する方向(流れ方向)の位置を合わせ、転写シートを枚葉に型抜きする際に、流れ方向の位置を正確に合わせることができる。また、図14~図16では、上述したように、第2領域R2、R2Aによって、幅方向の位置合わせが可能であるため、図14~図16の転写シートでは、転写シートを枚葉に型抜きする際に、幅方向及び流れ方向の位置を正確に合わせることができる。
また、上述したスリット工程や型抜き工程において、第2領域R2、R2A、R2Bを残しておけば、転写シートを被転写物に転写する際に、転写シートの幅方向及び/又は流れ方向の位置合わせを行うことができ、正確な位置に転写することができる。
光透過率差のコントラストは、例えば、転写シートの下方に設置した光源と、転写シートの上方の前記光源に正対する位置に設置した光検知手段とにより、検知することができる。光反射率差のコントラストは、例えば、転写シートの上方に任意の角度で設置した光源及び光検知手段により、検知することができる。 Examples of the optional step of aligning include a step of slitting the transfer sheet in a long length, a step of punching the transfer sheet into a sheet, and a step of transferring the transfer sheet to a transfer object.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, when the
Further, as shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the projecting
In addition, if the second regions R 2 , R 2A , and R 2B are left in the slit process and the die cutting process described above, the width direction and / or flow of the transfer sheet is transferred when the transfer sheet is transferred to the transfer object. Directional alignment can be performed and transfer can be performed at an accurate position.
The contrast of the light transmittance difference can be detected by, for example, a light source installed below the transfer sheet and a light detection unit installed at a position facing the light source above the transfer sheet. The contrast of the light reflectance difference can be detected by, for example, a light source and a light detection unit installed at an arbitrary angle above the transfer sheet.
[加飾成形品の製造方法]
本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る加飾成形品の製造方法は、上述した本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る転写シート100の転写層20を被転写物に転写する工程と、転写シート100の離型シート10を剥離する工程と、を有する。
被転写物としては、樹脂成形体等が挙げられる。 [Method of manufacturing decorative molded product]
The method for producing a decorative molded product according to the second embodiment of the present invention includes a step of transferring thetransfer layer 20 of the transfer sheet 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention described above to a transfer object, Separating the release sheet 10 of the transfer sheet 100.
Examples of the material to be transferred include a resin molded body.
本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る加飾成形品の製造方法は、上述した本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る転写シート100の転写層20を被転写物に転写する工程と、転写シート100の離型シート10を剥離する工程と、を有する。
被転写物としては、樹脂成形体等が挙げられる。 [Method of manufacturing decorative molded product]
The method for producing a decorative molded product according to the second embodiment of the present invention includes a step of transferring the
Examples of the material to be transferred include a resin molded body.
加飾成形品の製造方法には、公知の転写法を用いることができる。例えば、(i)予め成形された被転写物に転写シートを貼着し、該転写シートの転写層を転写した後、該転写シートの離型シートを剥離する方法、(ii)平板状の被転写物に転写シートを貼着し、該転写シートの転写層を転写した後、該転写シートの離型シートを剥離し、その後、転写層が積層された被転写物を成形する方法、(iii)被転写物を射出成形する際に転写シートと一体化させ、その後、転写シートの離型シートを剥離する方法〔インモールド成形(射出成形同時転写加飾法)〕等が挙げられる。中でも、インモールド成形(射出成形同時転写加飾法)によれば、三次元曲面などの複雑な表面形状を有する樹脂成形体に加飾成形することができる。
A known transfer method can be used for the method of manufacturing the decorative molded product. For example, (i) a method in which a transfer sheet is attached to a preliminarily molded transfer object, the transfer layer of the transfer sheet is transferred, and then the release sheet of the transfer sheet is peeled off; A method of sticking a transfer sheet to a transfer material, transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet, peeling off the release sheet of the transfer sheet, and then forming a transfer material on which the transfer layer is laminated, (iii) ) A method of integrating a transfer material with a transfer sheet at the time of injection molding and then peeling the release sheet of the transfer sheet [in-mold molding (injection molding simultaneous transfer decoration method)]. Among them, according to in-mold molding (injection molding simultaneous transfer decoration method), it is possible to perform decorative molding on a resin molded body having a complicated surface shape such as a three-dimensional curved surface.
インモールド成形による本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る転写シート100を用いる加飾成形品の製造方法の一実施態様としては、
(z1)上記の転写シートの転写層側をインモールド成形用金型の内側に向けて配置する工程と、
(z2)上記インモールド成形用金型内に樹脂を射出注入する工程と、
(z3)上記転写シートと、上記樹脂とを一体化させて、樹脂成形体(被転写物)の表面上に上記転写シートの転写層を転写する工程と、
(z4)樹脂成形体(被転写物)を金型から取り出した後、上記転写シートの離型シートを剥離する工程と、を有するものが挙げられる。 As one embodiment of the method for producing a decorative molded product using thetransfer sheet 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention by in-mold molding,
(Z1) a step of disposing the transfer layer side of the transfer sheet toward the inside of the in-mold mold,
(Z2) a step of injecting a resin into the in-mold mold,
(Z3) integrating the transfer sheet and the resin, and transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet onto the surface of a resin molded body (transfer object);
(Z4) After removing the resin molded body (transfer object) from the mold, there is a step of peeling the release sheet of the transfer sheet.
(z1)上記の転写シートの転写層側をインモールド成形用金型の内側に向けて配置する工程と、
(z2)上記インモールド成形用金型内に樹脂を射出注入する工程と、
(z3)上記転写シートと、上記樹脂とを一体化させて、樹脂成形体(被転写物)の表面上に上記転写シートの転写層を転写する工程と、
(z4)樹脂成形体(被転写物)を金型から取り出した後、上記転写シートの離型シートを剥離する工程と、を有するものが挙げられる。 As one embodiment of the method for producing a decorative molded product using the
(Z1) a step of disposing the transfer layer side of the transfer sheet toward the inside of the in-mold mold,
(Z2) a step of injecting a resin into the in-mold mold,
(Z3) integrating the transfer sheet and the resin, and transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet onto the surface of a resin molded body (transfer object);
(Z4) After removing the resin molded body (transfer object) from the mold, there is a step of peeling the release sheet of the transfer sheet.
(z1)工程の配置の際に、第2領域が残存していれば、第2領域の突出部と周辺突出部とのコントラストを利用して、金型の正確な位置に転写シートを配置することができる。
なお、(z4)工程の後は、必要に応じて、不要部をトリミング(除去)することが好ましい。(z4)工程の後に第2領域が残存している場合、該領域をトリミング(除去)することが好ましい。 (Z1) If the second region remains in the placement of the process, the transfer sheet is placed at an accurate position of the mold using the contrast between the protruding portion of the second region and the peripheral protruding portion. be able to.
Note that after the step (z4), it is preferable to trim (remove) unnecessary portions as necessary. When the second region remains after the step (z4), it is preferable to trim (remove) the region.
なお、(z4)工程の後は、必要に応じて、不要部をトリミング(除去)することが好ましい。(z4)工程の後に第2領域が残存している場合、該領域をトリミング(除去)することが好ましい。 (Z1) If the second region remains in the placement of the process, the transfer sheet is placed at an accurate position of the mold using the contrast between the protruding portion of the second region and the peripheral protruding portion. be able to.
Note that after the step (z4), it is preferable to trim (remove) unnecessary portions as necessary. When the second region remains after the step (z4), it is preferable to trim (remove) the region.
(樹脂成形体)
樹脂成形体としては、射出成形可能な熱可塑性樹脂もしくは熱硬化性樹脂を用いることが好ましく、公知の様々な樹脂を用いることができる。
本発明による加飾成形品をインモールド成形により製造する場合には、熱可塑性樹脂を用いることが好ましい。このような熱可塑性樹脂としては、ポリスチレン系樹脂、ポリオレフィン系樹脂、ABS樹脂(耐熱ABS樹脂を含む)、AS樹脂、AN樹脂、ポリフェニレンオキサイド系樹脂、ポリカーボネート系樹脂、ポリアセタール系樹脂、アクリル系樹脂、ポリエチレンテレフタレート系樹脂、ポリブチレンテフタレート系樹脂、ポリスルホン系樹脂、およびポリフェニレンサルファイド系樹脂等が挙げられる。 (Resin molding)
As the resin molding, it is preferable to use a thermoplastic resin or a thermosetting resin that can be injection-molded, and various known resins can be used.
When the decorative molded product according to the present invention is manufactured by in-mold molding, it is preferable to use a thermoplastic resin. Examples of such thermoplastic resins include polystyrene resins, polyolefin resins, ABS resins (including heat-resistant ABS resins), AS resins, AN resins, polyphenylene oxide resins, polycarbonate resins, polyacetal resins, acrylic resins, Examples thereof include polyethylene terephthalate resin, polybutylene terephthalate resin, polysulfone resin, and polyphenylene sulfide resin.
樹脂成形体としては、射出成形可能な熱可塑性樹脂もしくは熱硬化性樹脂を用いることが好ましく、公知の様々な樹脂を用いることができる。
本発明による加飾成形品をインモールド成形により製造する場合には、熱可塑性樹脂を用いることが好ましい。このような熱可塑性樹脂としては、ポリスチレン系樹脂、ポリオレフィン系樹脂、ABS樹脂(耐熱ABS樹脂を含む)、AS樹脂、AN樹脂、ポリフェニレンオキサイド系樹脂、ポリカーボネート系樹脂、ポリアセタール系樹脂、アクリル系樹脂、ポリエチレンテレフタレート系樹脂、ポリブチレンテフタレート系樹脂、ポリスルホン系樹脂、およびポリフェニレンサルファイド系樹脂等が挙げられる。 (Resin molding)
As the resin molding, it is preferable to use a thermoplastic resin or a thermosetting resin that can be injection-molded, and various known resins can be used.
When the decorative molded product according to the present invention is manufactured by in-mold molding, it is preferable to use a thermoplastic resin. Examples of such thermoplastic resins include polystyrene resins, polyolefin resins, ABS resins (including heat-resistant ABS resins), AS resins, AN resins, polyphenylene oxide resins, polycarbonate resins, polyacetal resins, acrylic resins, Examples thereof include polyethylene terephthalate resin, polybutylene terephthalate resin, polysulfone resin, and polyphenylene sulfide resin.
図18は、本発明による加飾成形品の一実施形態を示す断面図である。加飾成形品300は、樹脂成形体(被転写物)200の一方の面上に、印刷層23、接着剤層22、及び保護層21を有している。なお、図18では、転写シートのうち、第1領域に相当する箇所のみを樹脂成形体に転写している。
FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view showing an embodiment of a decorative molded product according to the present invention. The decorative molded product 300 has a printed layer 23, an adhesive layer 22, and a protective layer 21 on one surface of a resin molded body (transfer object) 200. In FIG. 18, only the portion corresponding to the first region of the transfer sheet is transferred to the resin molded body.
本発明の第2の実施の形態によれば、被転写物の正確な位置に転写層を転写できる転写シート、該転写シートの製造方法、及び該転写シートを用いた加飾成形品の製造方法を提供することができる。
According to the second embodiment of the present invention, a transfer sheet capable of transferring a transfer layer to an exact position of a transfer object, a method for producing the transfer sheet, and a method for producing a decorative molded product using the transfer sheet Can be provided.
〔第3の実施の形態〕
位置合わせ用のパターンを印刷する際に、地汚れが生じるという問題を解決するために、本発明者らは、位置合わせ用のパターンを離型シート上に配置する構成とすることを、特願2016-168148号で提案した。そして、本発明者らが更に検討したところ、当該構成では、位置合わせ用のパターンを印刷した転写シートの裁断時及び転写時に、位置合わせ用のパターンの一部が箔チリとして発生してしまい、箔チリが転写シートに付着してしまうことがあり、被転写物である物品の表面に当該転写シートで転写した場合に、加飾成形品の外観を損なってしまうことがあり、改善する余地があることがわかった。
本発明の第3の実施の形態は、このような実情に鑑みてなされたものであり、箔チリの発生を抑制し、加飾成形品の外観を良好にする転写層を転写できる転写シート、該転写シートの製造方法、及び該転写シートを用いた加飾成形品の製造方法を提供することを目的とする。 [Third Embodiment]
In order to solve the problem of background stains when printing a pattern for alignment, the present inventors have applied for a configuration in which a pattern for alignment is arranged on a release sheet. Proposed in 2016-168148. And when the present inventors further examined, in the configuration, at the time of cutting and transferring the transfer sheet on which the pattern for alignment is printed, a part of the pattern for alignment occurs as foil dust, The foil dust may adhere to the transfer sheet, and when the transfer sheet is transferred to the surface of the article to be transferred, the appearance of the decorative molded product may be impaired, and there is room for improvement. I found out.
The third embodiment of the present invention is made in view of such circumstances, a transfer sheet capable of transferring a transfer layer that suppresses the generation of foil dust and improves the appearance of a decorative molded product, It aims at providing the manufacturing method of this transfer sheet, and the manufacturing method of a decorative molded product using this transfer sheet.
位置合わせ用のパターンを印刷する際に、地汚れが生じるという問題を解決するために、本発明者らは、位置合わせ用のパターンを離型シート上に配置する構成とすることを、特願2016-168148号で提案した。そして、本発明者らが更に検討したところ、当該構成では、位置合わせ用のパターンを印刷した転写シートの裁断時及び転写時に、位置合わせ用のパターンの一部が箔チリとして発生してしまい、箔チリが転写シートに付着してしまうことがあり、被転写物である物品の表面に当該転写シートで転写した場合に、加飾成形品の外観を損なってしまうことがあり、改善する余地があることがわかった。
本発明の第3の実施の形態は、このような実情に鑑みてなされたものであり、箔チリの発生を抑制し、加飾成形品の外観を良好にする転写層を転写できる転写シート、該転写シートの製造方法、及び該転写シートを用いた加飾成形品の製造方法を提供することを目的とする。 [Third Embodiment]
In order to solve the problem of background stains when printing a pattern for alignment, the present inventors have applied for a configuration in which a pattern for alignment is arranged on a release sheet. Proposed in 2016-168148. And when the present inventors further examined, in the configuration, at the time of cutting and transferring the transfer sheet on which the pattern for alignment is printed, a part of the pattern for alignment occurs as foil dust, The foil dust may adhere to the transfer sheet, and when the transfer sheet is transferred to the surface of the article to be transferred, the appearance of the decorative molded product may be impaired, and there is room for improvement. I found out.
The third embodiment of the present invention is made in view of such circumstances, a transfer sheet capable of transferring a transfer layer that suppresses the generation of foil dust and improves the appearance of a decorative molded product, It aims at providing the manufacturing method of this transfer sheet, and the manufacturing method of a decorative molded product using this transfer sheet.
[転写シート]
本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る転写シート100は、図20に示すように、離型シート10上に転写層20を有する転写シートであって、離型シート10は、被転写物に転写するための第1領域R1及び位置合わせ用パターンを設けるための第2領域R2を有し、第2領域R2は、転写層20側の面側に凸部24を有し、転写層20は、離型シート10が設けられた面の反対側の表面に凸部24を基礎とする追従突出部25を有する位置合わせ用パターン部ALを備え、追従突出部25上に着色層30を有するものである。
第3の実施の形態において、第1の実施の形態と実質的に同様であるものの記載を省略する。 [Transfer sheet]
As shown in FIG. 20, thetransfer sheet 100 according to the third embodiment of the present invention is a transfer sheet having a transfer layer 20 on the release sheet 10, and the release sheet 10 is a transfer object. a second region R 2 for providing the first region R 1 and the alignment pattern for transferring, the second region R 2 have the convex portion 24 on the side of the transfer layer 20 side, the transfer The layer 20 includes an alignment pattern portion AL having a tracking protrusion 25 based on the convex portion 24 on the surface opposite to the surface on which the release sheet 10 is provided, and the colored layer 30 is provided on the tracking protrusion 25. It is what has.
In the third embodiment, description of what is substantially the same as the first embodiment is omitted.
本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る転写シート100は、図20に示すように、離型シート10上に転写層20を有する転写シートであって、離型シート10は、被転写物に転写するための第1領域R1及び位置合わせ用パターンを設けるための第2領域R2を有し、第2領域R2は、転写層20側の面側に凸部24を有し、転写層20は、離型シート10が設けられた面の反対側の表面に凸部24を基礎とする追従突出部25を有する位置合わせ用パターン部ALを備え、追従突出部25上に着色層30を有するものである。
第3の実施の形態において、第1の実施の形態と実質的に同様であるものの記載を省略する。 [Transfer sheet]
As shown in FIG. 20, the
In the third embodiment, description of what is substantially the same as the first embodiment is omitted.
<離型シート>
離型シート10は、支持体1と、樹脂層2と、離型層13とを備える。離型シート10は、樹脂成形体等の被転写物に転写層20を転写した後に剥離される。 <Release sheet>
Therelease sheet 10 includes a support 1, a resin layer 2, and a release layer 13. The release sheet 10 is peeled off after the transfer layer 20 is transferred to a transfer object such as a resin molded body.
離型シート10は、支持体1と、樹脂層2と、離型層13とを備える。離型シート10は、樹脂成形体等の被転写物に転写層20を転写した後に剥離される。 <Release sheet>
The
(支持体)
支持体1としては、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。
支持体1の表面には、樹脂層2等との接着性を高めるために、コロナ放電処理、酸化処理等の物理的な処理や、アンカー剤又はプライマーと呼ばれる塗料の塗布を予め行ってもよい。 (Support)
As thesupport 1, the same one as described in the first embodiment can be used.
The surface of thesupport 1 may be preliminarily subjected to physical treatment such as corona discharge treatment or oxidation treatment, or application of a coating material called an anchor agent or a primer in order to enhance the adhesion with the resin layer 2 or the like. .
支持体1としては、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。
支持体1の表面には、樹脂層2等との接着性を高めるために、コロナ放電処理、酸化処理等の物理的な処理や、アンカー剤又はプライマーと呼ばれる塗料の塗布を予め行ってもよい。 (Support)
As the
The surface of the
(樹脂層)
樹脂層2は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。 (Resin layer)
Theresin layer 2 can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
樹脂層2は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。 (Resin layer)
The
樹脂層2は、コーティングにより形成してもよいが、正確にかつ精密な形状を形成する観点から、第1領域R1及び第2領域R2と相補的な形状を有する版を用いた印刷により形成することが好ましい。樹脂層2がその他の領域を有する場合、版は、さらに、その他の領域と相補的な形状を有することが好ましい。版を用いた樹脂層2の形成方法の詳細は後述する。
Resin layer 2 may be formed by coating, accurately and in terms of forming a precise shape, by printing using a plate having a first region R 1 and the second region R 2 and the complementary shape It is preferable to form. When the resin layer 2 has other regions, the plate preferably further has a shape complementary to the other regions. Details of the method of forming the resin layer 2 using a plate will be described later.
(離型層)
転写シート100の離型シート10は、被転写物に密着した際に転写層20との界面で剥離可能に形成されている。離型性を向上させるため、離型シート10は、転写層20と接する側の面の少なくとも一部に離型層13を有することが好ましい。また、転写シート100の面内の離型性の均一化の観点からは、図20に示すように、離型シート10は、転写層20と接する側の面の全面に離型層13を有することが好ましい。 (Release layer)
Therelease sheet 10 of the transfer sheet 100 is formed so as to be peelable at the interface with the transfer layer 20 when it is in close contact with the transfer object. In order to improve the releasability, the release sheet 10 preferably has a release layer 13 on at least a part of the surface in contact with the transfer layer 20. Further, from the viewpoint of uniform release property within the surface of the transfer sheet 100, the release sheet 10 has a release layer 13 on the entire surface on the side in contact with the transfer layer 20, as shown in FIG. It is preferable.
転写シート100の離型シート10は、被転写物に密着した際に転写層20との界面で剥離可能に形成されている。離型性を向上させるため、離型シート10は、転写層20と接する側の面の少なくとも一部に離型層13を有することが好ましい。また、転写シート100の面内の離型性の均一化の観点からは、図20に示すように、離型シート10は、転写層20と接する側の面の全面に離型層13を有することが好ましい。 (Release layer)
The
第1領域R1に凹凸部5を有する場合、該凹凸部5上に離型層13が形成されることで、凹凸が緩和され、加飾成形品の表面に高周波成分の少ない凹凸形状を形成することができ、加飾成形品の白化及びギラツキを抑制できる。
When the first region R 1 has the concavo-convex portion 5, the release layer 13 is formed on the concavo-convex portion 5 to relieve the concavo-convex shape and form a concavo-convex shape with less high-frequency components on the surface of the decorative molded product. It is possible to suppress whitening and glare of the decorative molded product.
離型層13は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。
The release layer 13 may be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
(その他の層)
離型シート10は、その他の層を有していてもよい。
その他の層としては、帯電防止層が挙げられる。離型シート10は、帯電防止層を有することにより、離型シートを剥離する際の剥離帯電を抑制でき、転写の作業性を向上できる。 (Other layers)
Therelease sheet 10 may have other layers.
Examples of other layers include an antistatic layer. When therelease sheet 10 has an antistatic layer, it is possible to suppress the release charge when the release sheet is peeled off, and to improve the transfer workability.
離型シート10は、その他の層を有していてもよい。
その他の層としては、帯電防止層が挙げられる。離型シート10は、帯電防止層を有することにより、離型シートを剥離する際の剥離帯電を抑制でき、転写の作業性を向上できる。 (Other layers)
The
Examples of other layers include an antistatic layer. When the
(帯電防止層)
帯電防止層は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。 (Antistatic layer)
As the antistatic layer, the same materials as those described in the first embodiment can be used.
帯電防止層は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。 (Antistatic layer)
As the antistatic layer, the same materials as those described in the first embodiment can be used.
(第1領域)
離型シート10の第1領域R1は、被転写物に転写するための転写層20を設けるための領域である。
第1領域R1の表面形状は、特に限定されない。第1領域R1の表面形状は、例えば、図20に示すように、凹凸形状を有していてもよいし、略平滑であってもよい。
図20に示すように、第1領域R1内に凹凸部5を有する場合、被転写物には、該凹凸部5の相補的形状を有する転写層20(凹凸部5上に離型層13を有する場合、離型層13によって緩和された凹凸形状の相補的形状を有する転写層20)が転写され、得られる加飾成形品の表面に凹凸形状を付与することができる。
また、第1領域R1の表面形状が略平滑である場合、被転写物に転写した転写層20の表面形状を略平滑にすることができ、得られる加飾成形品の光沢を高くすることができる。 (First area)
The first region R 1 of therelease sheet 10 is a region for providing the transfer layer 20 to be transferred to the transfer target.
Surface shape of the first region R 1 is not particularly limited. Surface shape of the first region R 1 is, for example, as shown in FIG. 20, may have an irregular shape, may be substantially smooth.
As shown in FIG. 20, when theuneven portion 5 is provided in the first region R 1 , a transfer layer 20 having a shape complementary to the uneven portion 5 (the release layer 13 on the uneven portion 5 is included in the transfer object. , The transfer layer 20) having a concavo-convex complementary shape alleviated by the release layer 13 is transferred, and the concavo-convex shape can be imparted to the surface of the resulting decorative molded product.
Further, when the surface shape of the first region R 1 is substantially smooth, increasing the substantially can be made smooth, gloss resulting decorative molded article surface shape of thetransfer layer 20 has been transferred to the transfer target Can do.
離型シート10の第1領域R1は、被転写物に転写するための転写層20を設けるための領域である。
第1領域R1の表面形状は、特に限定されない。第1領域R1の表面形状は、例えば、図20に示すように、凹凸形状を有していてもよいし、略平滑であってもよい。
図20に示すように、第1領域R1内に凹凸部5を有する場合、被転写物には、該凹凸部5の相補的形状を有する転写層20(凹凸部5上に離型層13を有する場合、離型層13によって緩和された凹凸形状の相補的形状を有する転写層20)が転写され、得られる加飾成形品の表面に凹凸形状を付与することができる。
また、第1領域R1の表面形状が略平滑である場合、被転写物に転写した転写層20の表面形状を略平滑にすることができ、得られる加飾成形品の光沢を高くすることができる。 (First area)
The first region R 1 of the
Surface shape of the first region R 1 is not particularly limited. Surface shape of the first region R 1 is, for example, as shown in FIG. 20, may have an irregular shape, may be substantially smooth.
As shown in FIG. 20, when the
Further, when the surface shape of the first region R 1 is substantially smooth, increasing the substantially can be made smooth, gloss resulting decorative molded article surface shape of the
加飾成形品に付与する表面形状は目的に応じて異なるため、第1領域R1内の凹凸の程度の絶対値は特に限定されないが、最大高さ粗さRzは0.2~4.0μm程度とすることが好ましい。同様に、算術平均粗さRaは0.05~2.0μm程度とすることが好ましい。
Since the surface shape imparted to the decorative molded product varies depending on the purpose, the absolute value of the degree of unevenness in the first region R 1 is not particularly limited, but the maximum height roughness Rz is 0.2 to 4.0 μm. It is preferable to set the degree. Similarly, the arithmetic average roughness Ra is preferably about 0.05 to 2.0 μm.
また、図示しないが、第1領域R1を2箇所以上に分割して形成してもよい。その場合、それぞれの第1領域R1の表面形状を異なるものとしてもよい。第1領域R1を2箇所以上に分割して形成し、さらに、それぞれの第1領域R1の表面形状を異なるものとすることにより、加飾成形品の意匠性を高めることができる。
Although not shown, it may be formed by dividing the first region R 1 to two or more locations. In that case, it may be each of the first region R 1 of the surface shape as different. The first region R 1 and formed by dividing into two or more portions, further, by making the respective first region R 1 of the surface shape different, it is possible to enhance the design property of the decorative molded article.
(第2領域)
離型シート10の第2領域R2は、被転写物に転写するために用いる位置合わせ用パターン(アライメントマーク)を設けるための領域である。
第2領域R2は、位置合わせ用パターンの基礎とする部分的に配置された凸部24を有している。凸部24は、正確にかつ精密な形状を形成する観点から、第2領域R2と相補的な形状を有する版を用いた印刷により樹脂層2に形成することが好ましい。 (Second area)
The second region R 2 of therelease sheet 10 is a region for providing the alignment pattern used for transferring the transfer target (alignment marks).
The second region R 2 has a partially deployedconvex portion 24 to the basis of the alignment pattern. The convex part 24 is preferably formed on the resin layer 2 by printing using a plate having a shape complementary to the second region R 2 from the viewpoint of forming an accurate and precise shape.
離型シート10の第2領域R2は、被転写物に転写するために用いる位置合わせ用パターン(アライメントマーク)を設けるための領域である。
第2領域R2は、位置合わせ用パターンの基礎とする部分的に配置された凸部24を有している。凸部24は、正確にかつ精密な形状を形成する観点から、第2領域R2と相補的な形状を有する版を用いた印刷により樹脂層2に形成することが好ましい。 (Second area)
The second region R 2 of the
The second region R 2 has a partially deployed
凸部24は、任意の方向に延伸したライン状の構造体から形成されてなることが好ましい。該任意の方向は特に限定されず、斜め方向(例えば、転写シートの幅方向に対して45度)であってもよいが、転写シート100の任意の1辺に平行な方向であることが好ましく、転写シート100の流れ方向であることがより好ましい。凸部24を該構成とすることにより、位置合わせをしやすくできる。
また、複数の凸部24は、それぞれの向きが平行であることが好ましい。
また、凸部24は、第2領域R2内で任意の方向に途切れることなく連続して形成されていてもよいが、任意の方向への延伸が部分的に途切れるものであってもよい。 It is preferable that theconvex part 24 is formed from the linear structure extended | stretched in arbitrary directions. The arbitrary direction is not particularly limited and may be an oblique direction (for example, 45 degrees with respect to the width direction of the transfer sheet), but is preferably a direction parallel to any one side of the transfer sheet 100. The flow direction of the transfer sheet 100 is more preferable. By making the convex portion 24 have this configuration, alignment can be facilitated.
Moreover, it is preferable that each direction of the someconvex part 24 is parallel.
Further, theconvex portion 24 may be formed continuously without interruption in any direction in the second inner region R 2, but may be one that extends in any direction partially interrupted.
また、複数の凸部24は、それぞれの向きが平行であることが好ましい。
また、凸部24は、第2領域R2内で任意の方向に途切れることなく連続して形成されていてもよいが、任意の方向への延伸が部分的に途切れるものであってもよい。 It is preferable that the
Moreover, it is preferable that each direction of the some
Further, the
凸部24の高さhは、1.0~10.0μmであることが好ましく、1.5~9.0μmであることがより好ましく、2.0~8.0μmであることがさらに好ましい。
凸部24の高さhを3.0μm以上とすることにより、転写層20の表面に凸部24を基礎とする追従突出部25を形成しやすくすることができる。また、凸部24の高さhを10μm以下とすることにより、荷重により凸部24が変形しにくく、位置合わせの精度を維持しやすくできる。
凸部24の高さhは、全て同一としなくてもよい。しかしながら、追従突出部25の高さHを均一に形成し、着色層30を均質に形成しやすくする観点から、凸部24の高さh
を全て同一とすることが好ましい。
なお、本明細書において、凸部24の高さhとは、凸部24を形成する構造体を、構造体の延伸方向に直交する方向で切断した断面の中央部の高さのことをいう。 The height h of theconvex portion 24 is preferably 1.0 to 10.0 μm, more preferably 1.5 to 9.0 μm, and still more preferably 2.0 to 8.0 μm.
By setting the height h of theconvex portion 24 to 3.0 μm or more, it is possible to easily form the follow-up protruding portion 25 based on the convex portion 24 on the surface of the transfer layer 20. In addition, by setting the height h of the convex portion 24 to 10 μm or less, the convex portion 24 is not easily deformed by a load, and the alignment accuracy can be easily maintained.
The heights h of theconvex portions 24 may not be the same. However, from the viewpoint of uniformly forming the height H of the follow-up protrusion 25 and facilitating the uniform formation of the colored layer 30, the height h of the protrusion 24
Are preferably the same.
In addition, in this specification, the height h of theconvex part 24 means the height of the center part of the cross section which cut | disconnected the structure which forms the convex part 24 in the direction orthogonal to the extending | stretching direction of a structure. .
凸部24の高さhを3.0μm以上とすることにより、転写層20の表面に凸部24を基礎とする追従突出部25を形成しやすくすることができる。また、凸部24の高さhを10μm以下とすることにより、荷重により凸部24が変形しにくく、位置合わせの精度を維持しやすくできる。
凸部24の高さhは、全て同一としなくてもよい。しかしながら、追従突出部25の高さHを均一に形成し、着色層30を均質に形成しやすくする観点から、凸部24の高さh
を全て同一とすることが好ましい。
なお、本明細書において、凸部24の高さhとは、凸部24を形成する構造体を、構造体の延伸方向に直交する方向で切断した断面の中央部の高さのことをいう。 The height h of the
By setting the height h of the
The heights h of the
Are preferably the same.
In addition, in this specification, the height h of the
凸部24の端部同士の間隔は、0.05~2.0mmであることが好ましく、0.075~1.0mmであることがより好ましく、0.10~0.7mmであることがさらに好ましい。
凸部24の端部同士の間隔を0.01mm以上とすることにより、アライメントマークの認識率を向上することができる。
また、凸部24の端部同士の間隔を2.0mm以下とすることにより、第2領域R2の面積が必要以上に広くなることを抑制できる。 The interval between the end portions of theconvex portion 24 is preferably 0.05 to 2.0 mm, more preferably 0.075 to 1.0 mm, and further preferably 0.10 to 0.7 mm. preferable.
The recognition rate of the alignment mark can be improved by setting the interval between the ends of theconvex portions 24 to 0.01 mm or more.
Further, by making the interval of ends of theprotrusions 24 and 2.0mm or less, it is possible to suppress the area of the second region R 2 is wider than necessary.
凸部24の端部同士の間隔を0.01mm以上とすることにより、アライメントマークの認識率を向上することができる。
また、凸部24の端部同士の間隔を2.0mm以下とすることにより、第2領域R2の面積が必要以上に広くなることを抑制できる。 The interval between the end portions of the
The recognition rate of the alignment mark can be improved by setting the interval between the ends of the
Further, by making the interval of ends of the
凸部24の幅は、0.01~2.0mmであることが好ましく、0.025~1.0mmであることがより好ましく、0.05~0.5mmであることがさらに好ましい。凸部24の幅を0.05mm以上とすることにより、凸部24の強度を維持することができるとともに、凸部24を均質に形成しやすくできる。また、凸部24の幅を3.0mm以下とすることにより、第2領域R2の面積が必要以上に広くなることを抑制できる。
The width of the convex portion 24 is preferably 0.01 to 2.0 mm, more preferably 0.025 to 1.0 mm, and still more preferably 0.05 to 0.5 mm. By setting the width of the convex portion 24 to 0.05 mm or more, the strength of the convex portion 24 can be maintained, and the convex portion 24 can be easily formed uniformly. Further, by making the width of the convex portion 24 and 3.0mm or less, it is possible to suppress the area of the second region R 2 is wider than necessary.
凸部24を形成する構造体を、構造体の延伸方向に直交する方向で切断した断面は、略四角形状であることが好ましい。
The cross section obtained by cutting the structure forming the convex portion 24 in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the structure is preferably substantially rectangular.
凸部24と、後述する転写層20とは、[凸部の高さ/転写層の厚さ]が0.1~5.0の関係を満たすことが好ましく、0.1~3.5の関係を満たすことがより好ましく、0.1~1.0の関係を満たすことがさらに好ましい。
上記比を0.1以上とすることにより、転写層20の表面に凸部24を基礎とする追従突出部25を形成しやすくできる。また、上記比を5.0以下とすることにより、荷重により凸部24が変形しにくく、位置合わせの精度を維持しやすくできる。 It is preferable that theconvex portion 24 and the transfer layer 20 described later satisfy the relationship of [the height of the convex portion / the thickness of the transfer layer] of 0.1 to 5.0, preferably 0.1 to 3.5. It is more preferable to satisfy the relationship, and it is further preferable to satisfy the relationship of 0.1 to 1.0.
By setting the ratio to 0.1 or more, it is possible to easily form the trackingprotrusion 25 based on the protrusion 24 on the surface of the transfer layer 20. Further, by setting the ratio to 5.0 or less, the convex portion 24 is not easily deformed by a load, and the alignment accuracy can be easily maintained.
上記比を0.1以上とすることにより、転写層20の表面に凸部24を基礎とする追従突出部25を形成しやすくできる。また、上記比を5.0以下とすることにより、荷重により凸部24が変形しにくく、位置合わせの精度を維持しやすくできる。 It is preferable that the
By setting the ratio to 0.1 or more, it is possible to easily form the tracking
本実施形態の転写シート100は、第2領域R2を2以上有していてもよい。第2領域R2を2以上有する場合、各領域の役割を変えることが好ましい。例えば、複数の第2領域R2を有する場合、いずれか一方で幅方向の位置合わせを行い、他方で流れ方向の位置合わせを行うように構成することが好ましい。第2領域R2を上述のように構成することにより、幅方向及び流れ方向の両方向の位置合わせが可能となり、位置合わせの精度を高めることができる。
本実施形態の転写シート100は、図21に示すように、第2領域R2が第1領域R1の両側に設けられており、位置合わせ用パターン部(アライメントマーク)ALが凹凸部5の両側に設けられていることが好ましい。位置合わせ用パターン部ALが凹凸部5の両側に設けられていることにより、転写シート100の巻き返し回数に関わらず、凹凸部5に対する位置合わせ用パターン部ALの幅方向の位置が変更することがなく、位置合わせの精度を高めることができ、生産性を向上することができる。Transfer sheet 100 of the present embodiment may have a second region R 2 of two or more. If a second region R 2 of two or more, it is preferable to change the role of each area. For example, when having a plurality of second regions R 2, either one aligns the width direction, it is preferably configured to perform the alignment of the flow direction in the other. By configuring the second region R 2 as described above, it is possible to align in both directions in the width direction and the flow direction, thereby improving the accuracy of alignment.
In thetransfer sheet 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, the second region R 2 is provided on both sides of the first region R 1 , and the alignment pattern portion (alignment mark) AL is the uneven portion 5. It is preferable to be provided on both sides. Since the alignment pattern portion AL is provided on both sides of the uneven portion 5, the position in the width direction of the alignment pattern portion AL with respect to the uneven portion 5 can be changed regardless of the number of times the transfer sheet 100 is rewound. Therefore, the alignment accuracy can be increased, and the productivity can be improved.
本実施形態の転写シート100は、図21に示すように、第2領域R2が第1領域R1の両側に設けられており、位置合わせ用パターン部(アライメントマーク)ALが凹凸部5の両側に設けられていることが好ましい。位置合わせ用パターン部ALが凹凸部5の両側に設けられていることにより、転写シート100の巻き返し回数に関わらず、凹凸部5に対する位置合わせ用パターン部ALの幅方向の位置が変更することがなく、位置合わせの精度を高めることができ、生産性を向上することができる。
In the
第2領域R2は、被転写物に転写し、加飾成形品を得た段階では除去することが好ましい。第2領域R2を除去するタイミングとしては、例えば、(1)転写シート100を長尺にスリットする工程時、(2)転写シート100を枚葉に型抜きする工程時、(3)転写シート100を被転写物に転写した後のトリミング工程時等が挙げられる。転写層20を被転写物の正確な位置に転写する観点からは、(3)のタイミングで第2領域R2を除去することが好ましい。
The second region R 2 are transferred to the transfer target, preferably be removed at the stage to obtain a decorated molded article. The timing of removing the second region R 2, for example, (1) during the step of slitting the transfer sheet 100 to the long, (2) during the step of stamping the transfer sheet 100 to the sheet, (3) transfer sheet For example, a trimming process after 100 is transferred to a transfer object. The transfer layer 20 from the viewpoint of transferring the exact position of the object to be transferred, it is preferable to remove the second region R 2 at the timing of (3).
<転写層>
離型シート10上の少なくとも一部には、転写層20が形成される。
転写層20は、被転写物に転写される層であり、例えば、図20に示すように、離型シート10に近い側から順に、保護層21及び接着剤層22を有する。転写層20は、表面に凸部24を基礎とする追従突出部25を有する。
転写層20は、図20に示すように、離型シート10の全面に形成することが好ましい。 <Transfer layer>
Atransfer layer 20 is formed on at least a part of the release sheet 10.
Thetransfer layer 20 is a layer to be transferred to the transfer object, and includes, for example, a protective layer 21 and an adhesive layer 22 in order from the side closer to the release sheet 10 as shown in FIG. The transfer layer 20 has a tracking protrusion 25 based on the protrusion 24 on the surface.
Thetransfer layer 20 is preferably formed on the entire surface of the release sheet 10 as shown in FIG.
離型シート10上の少なくとも一部には、転写層20が形成される。
転写層20は、被転写物に転写される層であり、例えば、図20に示すように、離型シート10に近い側から順に、保護層21及び接着剤層22を有する。転写層20は、表面に凸部24を基礎とする追従突出部25を有する。
転写層20は、図20に示すように、離型シート10の全面に形成することが好ましい。 <Transfer layer>
A
The
The
転写層20を構成する保護層21及び接着剤層22等の各層は、例えば、各層の構成成分を含むインキを調整し、離型シート10上に、グラビアコート法、ロールコート法等のコート法、グラビア印刷法、スクリーン印刷法等の印刷法により塗布、乾燥し、必要に応じて電離放射線を照射して硬化することにより形成できる。
転写層20を形成するための転写層を形成するためのインキは、凸部24を基礎として追従する追従突出部25を形成しやすくする観点から、いずれも溶剤割合が90質量%以下であることが好ましい。 Each layer such as theprotective layer 21 and the adhesive layer 22 constituting the transfer layer 20 is prepared by, for example, adjusting ink containing the constituent components of each layer and applying a coating method such as a gravure coating method or a roll coating method on the release sheet 10. It can be formed by coating and drying by a printing method such as gravure printing or screen printing, and curing by irradiation with ionizing radiation as required.
The ink for forming the transfer layer for forming thetransfer layer 20 has a solvent ratio of 90% by mass or less from the viewpoint of facilitating formation of the follow-up protrusion 25 that follows the protrusion 24. Is preferred.
転写層20を形成するための転写層を形成するためのインキは、凸部24を基礎として追従する追従突出部25を形成しやすくする観点から、いずれも溶剤割合が90質量%以下であることが好ましい。 Each layer such as the
The ink for forming the transfer layer for forming the
追従突出部25の高さHは、1.0~10.0μmであることが好ましく、1.5~9.0μmであることがより好ましく、2.0~8.0μmであることがさらに好ましい。
追従突出部25の高さHを1.0μm以上とすることにより、追従突出部25の頂部近傍を選択して着色層30を設けやすくすることができる。また、追従突出部25の高さHを10.0μm以下とすることにより、荷重により追従突出部25が変形しにくく、位置合わせの精度を維持しやすくできる。
追従突出部25の高さHは、全て同一としなくてもよい。しかしながら、着色層30を均質に形成しやすくする観点から、追従突出部25の高さHを全て同一とすることが好ましい。
なお、本明細書において、追従突出部25の高さHとは、追従突出部25を形成する構造体を、構造体の延伸方向に直交する方向で切断した断面の中央部の高さのことをいう。 The height H of the follow-upprotrusion 25 is preferably 1.0 to 10.0 μm, more preferably 1.5 to 9.0 μm, and even more preferably 2.0 to 8.0 μm. .
By setting the height H of the trackingprotrusion 25 to 1.0 μm or more, it is possible to easily provide the colored layer 30 by selecting the vicinity of the top of the tracking protrusion 25. Further, by setting the height H of the tracking protrusion 25 to 10.0 μm or less, the tracking protrusion 25 is not easily deformed by a load, and the alignment accuracy can be easily maintained.
The heights H of the followingprotrusions 25 need not be the same. However, from the viewpoint of facilitating uniform formation of the colored layer 30, it is preferable that all the heights H of the following protrusions 25 be the same.
In the present specification, the height H of the follow-upprotrusion 25 refers to the height of the central portion of a cross section obtained by cutting the structure forming the follow-up protrusion 25 in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the structure. Say.
追従突出部25の高さHを1.0μm以上とすることにより、追従突出部25の頂部近傍を選択して着色層30を設けやすくすることができる。また、追従突出部25の高さHを10.0μm以下とすることにより、荷重により追従突出部25が変形しにくく、位置合わせの精度を維持しやすくできる。
追従突出部25の高さHは、全て同一としなくてもよい。しかしながら、着色層30を均質に形成しやすくする観点から、追従突出部25の高さHを全て同一とすることが好ましい。
なお、本明細書において、追従突出部25の高さHとは、追従突出部25を形成する構造体を、構造体の延伸方向に直交する方向で切断した断面の中央部の高さのことをいう。 The height H of the follow-up
By setting the height H of the tracking
The heights H of the following
In the present specification, the height H of the follow-up
追従突出部25の端部同士の間隔Wは、0.05~3.0mmであることが好ましく、0.07~2.0mmであることがより好ましく、0.1~1.0mmであることがさらに好ましい。追従突出部25の端部同士の間隔Wが狭すぎる場合、着色層30同士がくっついてしまい、位置合わせに悪影響を及ぼす可能性がある。
追従突出部25の端部同士の間隔Wを0.05mm以上とすることにより、着色層30を形成する際に、隣接する着色層30同士がくっついてしまうことを避けることができる。また、追従突出部25の端部同士の間隔Wを3.0mm以下とすることにより、位置合わせ用パターン部ALの面積が必要以上に広くなることを抑制できる。
なお、本明細書において、追従突出部25の端部同士の間隔Wとは、追従突出部25の裾の末端間距離をいい、本実施形態では、隣接する追従突出部25同士の裾の末端となる平坦な接着剤層22における距離をいう。 The interval W between the end portions of the follow-upprotrusion 25 is preferably 0.05 to 3.0 mm, more preferably 0.07 to 2.0 mm, and 0.1 to 1.0 mm. Is more preferable. When the interval W between the end portions of the follow-up protrusion 25 is too narrow, the colored layers 30 stick to each other, which may adversely affect the alignment.
By setting the interval W between the end portions of the trackingprotrusion 25 to be 0.05 mm or more, it is possible to avoid the adjacent colored layers 30 from adhering to each other when the colored layer 30 is formed. Moreover, it can suppress that the area of the pattern part AL for alignment becomes large more than necessary by making the space | interval W of the edge parts of the tracking protrusion part 25 into 3.0 mm or less.
In the present specification, the interval W between the end portions of the follow-upprotrusions 25 refers to the distance between the ends of the tails of the follow-up protrusions 25. Is the distance in the flat adhesive layer 22.
追従突出部25の端部同士の間隔Wを0.05mm以上とすることにより、着色層30を形成する際に、隣接する着色層30同士がくっついてしまうことを避けることができる。また、追従突出部25の端部同士の間隔Wを3.0mm以下とすることにより、位置合わせ用パターン部ALの面積が必要以上に広くなることを抑制できる。
なお、本明細書において、追従突出部25の端部同士の間隔Wとは、追従突出部25の裾の末端間距離をいい、本実施形態では、隣接する追従突出部25同士の裾の末端となる平坦な接着剤層22における距離をいう。 The interval W between the end portions of the follow-up
By setting the interval W between the end portions of the tracking
In the present specification, the interval W between the end portions of the follow-up
(保護層)
保護層21は、転写層20が転写シート100から被転写物へと転写された後は、摩耗、光、薬品等から加飾成形品を保護する役割を有する。
離型シート10の第1領域R1内に凹凸部5を有する場合、該凹凸形状と相補的な形状を有する保護層21が加飾成形品の表面に付与される。また、離型シート10の第1領域R1が略平滑な場合、表面が略平滑な保護層21が加飾成形品の表面に付与され、加飾成形品の光沢を高くすることができる。 (Protective layer)
Theprotective layer 21 has a role of protecting the decorative molded product from abrasion, light, chemicals, and the like after the transfer layer 20 is transferred from the transfer sheet 100 to the transfer target.
If having a concave-convex portion 5 release sheets first region R 1 of 10, protective layer 21 having a complementary shape to the irregular shape is imparted to the surface of the decorative molded article. Further, when the first region R 1 of the release sheet 10 is substantially smooth, it can be surface substantially smooth protective layer 21 is applied to the surface of the decorative molded article, increasing the gloss of the decorative molded article.
保護層21は、転写層20が転写シート100から被転写物へと転写された後は、摩耗、光、薬品等から加飾成形品を保護する役割を有する。
離型シート10の第1領域R1内に凹凸部5を有する場合、該凹凸形状と相補的な形状を有する保護層21が加飾成形品の表面に付与される。また、離型シート10の第1領域R1が略平滑な場合、表面が略平滑な保護層21が加飾成形品の表面に付与され、加飾成形品の光沢を高くすることができる。 (Protective layer)
The
If having a concave-
保護層21は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。
保護層21を形成するための転写層形成用インキは、凸部24を基礎として追従する追従突出部25を形成しやすくする観点から、溶剤割合が60~90質量%以下であることが好ましく、65~90質量%であることがより好ましく、70~90質量%であることがさらに好ましい。 Theprotective layer 21 can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
The transfer layer forming ink for forming theprotective layer 21 preferably has a solvent ratio of 60 to 90% by mass or less from the viewpoint of facilitating the formation of the follow-up protrusion 25 that follows the protrusion 24. It is more preferably 65 to 90% by mass, and further preferably 70 to 90% by mass.
保護層21を形成するための転写層形成用インキは、凸部24を基礎として追従する追従突出部25を形成しやすくする観点から、溶剤割合が60~90質量%以下であることが好ましく、65~90質量%であることがより好ましく、70~90質量%であることがさらに好ましい。 The
The transfer layer forming ink for forming the
(接着剤層)
接着剤層22は、樹脂成形体等の被転写物と、転写層20との接着性を良好にして、転写作業を良好にする役割を有する。 (Adhesive layer)
Theadhesive layer 22 has a role of improving the transfer work by improving the adhesion between the transfer object 20 such as a resin molded body and the transfer layer 20.
接着剤層22は、樹脂成形体等の被転写物と、転写層20との接着性を良好にして、転写作業を良好にする役割を有する。 (Adhesive layer)
The
転写層20の表面には、凸部24を基礎とする追従突出部25を有する位置合わせ用パターン部ALを備える。転写層20の表面を構成するのが接着剤層22である場合は、接着剤層22の表面に、凸部24を基礎とする追従突出部25を有する位置合わせ用パターン部ALを備える。追従突出部25は、離型シート10に設けられた凸部24上に、保護層21及び接着剤層22等からなる転写層20を設けることで、凸部24に追従して形成される突出する部位である。
The surface of the transfer layer 20 is provided with an alignment pattern portion AL having a follow-up protruding portion 25 based on the convex portion 24. When the adhesive layer 22 constitutes the surface of the transfer layer 20, an alignment pattern portion AL having a tracking protrusion 25 based on the protrusion 24 is provided on the surface of the adhesive layer 22. The following protrusion 25 is formed by following the protrusion 24 by providing the transfer layer 20 including the protective layer 21 and the adhesive layer 22 on the protrusion 24 provided on the release sheet 10. It is a part to do.
接着剤層22は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。
接着剤層22を形成するための接着剤層形成用インキは、凸部24を基礎として追従する追従突出部25を形成しやすくする観点から、溶剤割合が80~90%以下であることが好ましく、85~90質量%であることがより好ましい。 Theadhesive layer 22 can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
The ink for forming the adhesive layer for forming theadhesive layer 22 preferably has a solvent ratio of 80 to 90% or less from the viewpoint of facilitating the formation of the follow-up protrusion 25 that follows the protrusion 24. More preferably, it is 85 to 90% by mass.
接着剤層22を形成するための接着剤層形成用インキは、凸部24を基礎として追従する追従突出部25を形成しやすくする観点から、溶剤割合が80~90%以下であることが好ましく、85~90質量%であることがより好ましい。 The
The ink for forming the adhesive layer for forming the
接着剤層22は、アンカーコート層及び接着層の2種類の層を含む構成であってもよい。アンカーコート層及び接着層を含む場合において、アンカーコート層の厚さは、0.5~10μmであることが好ましく、1.0~8.0μmであることがより好ましく、2.0~6.0μmであることがさらに好ましい。そして、接着層の厚さは、0.1~10μmであることが好ましく、0.5~8.0μmであることがより好ましく、1.0~5.0μmであることがさらに好ましい。
The adhesive layer 22 may be configured to include two types of layers, an anchor coat layer and an adhesive layer. When the anchor coat layer and the adhesive layer are included, the thickness of the anchor coat layer is preferably 0.5 to 10 μm, more preferably 1.0 to 8.0 μm, and 2.0 to 6. More preferably, it is 0 μm. The thickness of the adhesive layer is preferably from 0.1 to 10 μm, more preferably from 0.5 to 8.0 μm, and even more preferably from 1.0 to 5.0 μm.
(着色層)
着色層30は、転写層20の表面に備える位置合わせ用パターン部ALの追従突出部25上に設けられる。着色層30は、位置合わせ用パターン部AL内において、着色層30がある箇所とない箇所との光透過率又は光反射率のコントラストを生じさせる役割を有する。
着色層30は、転写シート100を平面方向から観察した際に、図22に示すように、転写層20(接着剤層22)の位置合わせ用パターン部ALの少なくとも一部に位置するように配置することが好ましい。 (Colored layer)
Thecolored layer 30 is provided on the following protrusion 25 of the alignment pattern portion AL provided on the surface of the transfer layer 20. The colored layer 30 has a role of causing a contrast of light transmittance or light reflectance between a portion where the colored layer 30 is present and a portion where the colored layer 30 is not present in the alignment pattern portion AL.
When thetransfer sheet 100 is observed from the plane direction, the colored layer 30 is disposed so as to be positioned at least at a part of the alignment pattern portion AL of the transfer layer 20 (adhesive layer 22) as shown in FIG. It is preferable to do.
着色層30は、転写層20の表面に備える位置合わせ用パターン部ALの追従突出部25上に設けられる。着色層30は、位置合わせ用パターン部AL内において、着色層30がある箇所とない箇所との光透過率又は光反射率のコントラストを生じさせる役割を有する。
着色層30は、転写シート100を平面方向から観察した際に、図22に示すように、転写層20(接着剤層22)の位置合わせ用パターン部ALの少なくとも一部に位置するように配置することが好ましい。 (Colored layer)
The
When the
着色層30は、図23に示すように、ライン部分30a、ベタ塗り中心部分30b、ベタ塗り部分31の3部位から構成されていることが好ましい。
ライン部分30aと、ベタ塗り中心部分30bとでは、光透過率又は光反射率が相違し、光透過率又は光反射率のコントラストを利用して、任意の工程において転写シート100の位置合わせが可能となる。なお、光透過率は、正透過方向の透過率、拡散透過率及び全透過率のいずれを利用してもよい。同様に、光反射率は、正反射方向の透過率、拡散反射率及び全反射率の何れを利用してもよい。
第2領域R2の着色層30におけるライン部分30aの面積の割合は、15~85%であることが好ましく、20~80%であることがより好ましく、30~70%であることがさらに好ましい。ライン部分30aの面積の割合を上記範囲にすることにより、ベタ塗り中心部分30b及びベタ塗り部分31との光透過率又は光反射率のコントラストを明りょうにしやすくでき、位置合わせの精度を高めることができる。
第2領域R2のライン部分30a及びベタ塗り中心部分30b以外は、ベタ塗り部分31であることが好ましい。ベタ塗り部分31は、第2領域R2のライン部分30aより幅が広いことが好ましく、幅が異なることで位置合わせ用パターン部ALをより確認しやすくすることができる。 As shown in FIG. 23, thecolored layer 30 is preferably composed of three parts: a line portion 30a, a solid coating center portion 30b, and a solid coating portion 31.
Theline portion 30a and the solid coating center portion 30b have different light transmittance or light reflectance, and the transfer sheet 100 can be aligned in an arbitrary process using the contrast of the light transmittance or light reflectance. It becomes. The light transmittance may be any of transmittance in the normal transmission direction, diffuse transmittance, and total transmittance. Similarly, the light reflectance may be any of transmittance in the regular reflection direction, diffuse reflectance, and total reflectance.
The ratio of the area of theline portion 30a in the colored layer 30 in the second region R 2 is preferably 15 to 85%, more preferably 20 to 80%, more preferably 30 to 70% . By setting the ratio of the area of the line portion 30a within the above range, the contrast of the light transmittance or the light reflectance between the solid coating center portion 30b and the solid coating portion 31 can be easily clarified, and the alignment accuracy can be improved. Can do.
Except the second region R 2 of theline portion 30a and the solid fill central portion 30b, it is preferable that the solid color portion 31. Areafill portion 31 may be wider than the second region R 2 of the line portion 30a is wide is preferably easier to see more alignment pattern portion AL in different width.
ライン部分30aと、ベタ塗り中心部分30bとでは、光透過率又は光反射率が相違し、光透過率又は光反射率のコントラストを利用して、任意の工程において転写シート100の位置合わせが可能となる。なお、光透過率は、正透過方向の透過率、拡散透過率及び全透過率のいずれを利用してもよい。同様に、光反射率は、正反射方向の透過率、拡散反射率及び全反射率の何れを利用してもよい。
第2領域R2の着色層30におけるライン部分30aの面積の割合は、15~85%であることが好ましく、20~80%であることがより好ましく、30~70%であることがさらに好ましい。ライン部分30aの面積の割合を上記範囲にすることにより、ベタ塗り中心部分30b及びベタ塗り部分31との光透過率又は光反射率のコントラストを明りょうにしやすくでき、位置合わせの精度を高めることができる。
第2領域R2のライン部分30a及びベタ塗り中心部分30b以外は、ベタ塗り部分31であることが好ましい。ベタ塗り部分31は、第2領域R2のライン部分30aより幅が広いことが好ましく、幅が異なることで位置合わせ用パターン部ALをより確認しやすくすることができる。 As shown in FIG. 23, the
The
The ratio of the area of the
Except the second region R 2 of the
着色層30は、転写シート100を平面方向から観察した際に、位置合わせの容易性の観点から、線幅Lの平均値が0.01~4.0mmのライン状パターンであることが好ましい。着色層30の線幅Lの平均値は、上記観点から、0.01~2.0mmであることがより好ましく、0.025~1.0mmであることがさらに好ましく、0.05~0.5mmであることがよりさらに好ましい。なお、本明細書において、線幅Lの平均値は、着色層30の線幅を10箇所以上測定した値を平均したものをいう。
着色層30は、上記観点から、線幅Lの変動が10%以内であることが好ましく、7%以内であることがより好ましく、5%以内であることがさらに好ましい。ここで、線幅Lの変動が10%以内とは、線幅Lの平均値に対して、全ての線幅が±10%以内であることをいう。なお、線幅Lの変動が生じる原因としては、保護層及び接着剤層等を形成することにより生じる追従突出部25の形状変化に起因しているものと考えられる。 Thecolored layer 30 is preferably a linear pattern having an average line width L of 0.01 to 4.0 mm from the viewpoint of easy alignment when the transfer sheet 100 is observed from the planar direction. From the above viewpoint, the average value of the line width L of the colored layer 30 is more preferably 0.01 to 2.0 mm, further preferably 0.025 to 1.0 mm, and 0.05 to 0.00. More preferably, it is 5 mm. In addition, in this specification, the average value of the line width L means what averaged the value which measured the line width of the colored layer 30 ten or more places.
From the above viewpoint, thecolored layer 30 preferably has a variation in the line width L of 10% or less, more preferably 7% or less, and still more preferably 5% or less. Here, the fluctuation of the line width L within 10% means that all the line widths are within ± 10% with respect to the average value of the line width L. In addition, it is thought that the fluctuation | variation of the line | wire width L arises from the shape change of the tracking protrusion part 25 which arises by forming a protective layer, an adhesive bond layer, etc.
着色層30は、上記観点から、線幅Lの変動が10%以内であることが好ましく、7%以内であることがより好ましく、5%以内であることがさらに好ましい。ここで、線幅Lの変動が10%以内とは、線幅Lの平均値に対して、全ての線幅が±10%以内であることをいう。なお、線幅Lの変動が生じる原因としては、保護層及び接着剤層等を形成することにより生じる追従突出部25の形状変化に起因しているものと考えられる。 The
From the above viewpoint, the
着色層30の厚さは、位置合わせのためのコントラストが得られやすい観点から、0.3~5.0μmであることが好ましく、0.4~4.0μmであることがより好ましく、0.5~3.0μmであることがさらに好ましい。
The thickness of the colored layer 30 is preferably 0.3 to 5.0 μm, more preferably 0.4 to 4.0 μm, from the viewpoint of easily obtaining contrast for alignment. More preferably, it is 5 to 3.0 μm.
着色層30は、例えば、バインダー樹脂及び顔料から構成される。
着色層30の顔料としては、隠蔽性の高い顔料を含むことが好ましい。隠蔽性の高い顔料としては、カーボンブラック等の黒色顔料が好ましい。
着色層30のバインダー樹脂としては、特に制限されないが、例えば、(メタ)アクリル樹脂、ポリウレタン樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、(メタ)アクリル酸エステル-オレフィン共重合体樹脂、塩化酢酸ビニル樹脂、エチレン-酢酸ビニル共重合体樹脂(EVA樹脂)、アイオノマー樹脂、オレフィン-αオレフィン共重合体樹脂脂等の熱可塑性樹脂;ポリウレタン樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、アクリル樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、フェノール樹脂、ユリア樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、メラミン樹脂、アルキド樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、シリコーン樹脂、アミド官能性共重合体等の硬化性樹脂等が挙げられる。なお、ここで、硬化性樹脂には、熱硬化性樹脂、電離放射線硬化性樹脂、2液型硬化性樹脂等が含まれる。着色層30のバインダー樹脂は、箔チリ抑制の観点から、熱可塑性樹脂であることが好ましい。
なお、着色層30は、ブロッキング抑制の観点から硬化剤を含有しないことが好ましい。 Thecolored layer 30 is composed of, for example, a binder resin and a pigment.
As a pigment of thecolored layer 30, it is preferable to include a pigment with high concealability. A black pigment such as carbon black is preferable as the pigment having high concealability.
The binder resin of thecolored layer 30 is not particularly limited. For example, (meth) acrylic resin, polyurethane resin, polyester resin, polyamide resin, (meth) acrylic ester-olefin copolymer resin, vinyl chloride resin, ethylene -Thermoplastic resins such as vinyl acetate copolymer resin (EVA resin), ionomer resin, olefin-α olefin copolymer resin fat; polyurethane resin, polyester resin, acrylic resin, epoxy resin, phenol resin, urea resin, polyester resin Curable resins such as melamine resin, alkyd resin, polyimide resin, silicone resin, amide functional copolymer, and the like. Here, the curable resin includes a thermosetting resin, an ionizing radiation curable resin, a two-component curable resin, and the like. The binder resin of the colored layer 30 is preferably a thermoplastic resin from the viewpoint of suppressing foil dust.
In addition, it is preferable that thecolored layer 30 does not contain a hardening | curing agent from a viewpoint of blocking suppression.
着色層30の顔料としては、隠蔽性の高い顔料を含むことが好ましい。隠蔽性の高い顔料としては、カーボンブラック等の黒色顔料が好ましい。
着色層30のバインダー樹脂としては、特に制限されないが、例えば、(メタ)アクリル樹脂、ポリウレタン樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、(メタ)アクリル酸エステル-オレフィン共重合体樹脂、塩化酢酸ビニル樹脂、エチレン-酢酸ビニル共重合体樹脂(EVA樹脂)、アイオノマー樹脂、オレフィン-αオレフィン共重合体樹脂脂等の熱可塑性樹脂;ポリウレタン樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、アクリル樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、フェノール樹脂、ユリア樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、メラミン樹脂、アルキド樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、シリコーン樹脂、アミド官能性共重合体等の硬化性樹脂等が挙げられる。なお、ここで、硬化性樹脂には、熱硬化性樹脂、電離放射線硬化性樹脂、2液型硬化性樹脂等が含まれる。着色層30のバインダー樹脂は、箔チリ抑制の観点から、熱可塑性樹脂であることが好ましい。
なお、着色層30は、ブロッキング抑制の観点から硬化剤を含有しないことが好ましい。 The
As a pigment of the
The binder resin of the
In addition, it is preferable that the
着色層30は、例えば、溶融熱転写及び昇華熱転写等の転写法で、位置合わせ用パターン部ALの追従突出部25上に着色層形成用インキを転写することで形成することができる。着色層30を形成する転写法としては、箔チリ抑制の観点から溶融熱転写が特に好ましい。
また、着色層30は、グラビアリバース印刷、グラビア印刷等の印刷法で、位置合わせ用パターン部ALの追従突出部25上に着色層形成用インキを塗布した後、乾燥させることによっても形成することができる。着色層30を形成する印刷法としては、グラビアリバース印刷が特に好ましい。
溶融熱転写で形成した着色層30を顕微鏡で平面方向から観察した写真を図23に示す。グラビアリバース印刷で形成した着色層30を顕微鏡で平面方向から観察した写真を図24に示す。図23と図24の写真を対比すると、図23の溶融熱転写で形成した着色層30の方が鮮明であり好適である。図24のグラビアリバース印刷で形成した着色層30は、一部に地汚れが散見されたが、位置合わせを行うための鮮明性は維持されている。 Thecolored layer 30 can be formed, for example, by transferring the colored layer forming ink onto the following protrusion 25 of the alignment pattern portion AL by a transfer method such as fusion thermal transfer or sublimation thermal transfer. As a transfer method for forming the colored layer 30, fusion heat transfer is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing foil dust.
Thecolored layer 30 may also be formed by applying a colored layer forming ink on the follow-up protruding portion 25 of the alignment pattern portion AL and then drying by a printing method such as gravure reverse printing or gravure printing. Can do. As a printing method for forming the colored layer 30, gravure reverse printing is particularly preferable.
The photograph which observed thecolored layer 30 formed by the fusion | melting heat transfer from the plane direction with the microscope is shown in FIG. The photograph which observed the colored layer 30 formed by gravure reverse printing from the plane direction with the microscope is shown in FIG. Comparing the photographs of FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, the colored layer 30 formed by the fusion thermal transfer of FIG. 23 is clearer and more suitable. The colored layer 30 formed by the gravure reverse printing in FIG. 24 has some background stains, but the sharpness for alignment is maintained.
また、着色層30は、グラビアリバース印刷、グラビア印刷等の印刷法で、位置合わせ用パターン部ALの追従突出部25上に着色層形成用インキを塗布した後、乾燥させることによっても形成することができる。着色層30を形成する印刷法としては、グラビアリバース印刷が特に好ましい。
溶融熱転写で形成した着色層30を顕微鏡で平面方向から観察した写真を図23に示す。グラビアリバース印刷で形成した着色層30を顕微鏡で平面方向から観察した写真を図24に示す。図23と図24の写真を対比すると、図23の溶融熱転写で形成した着色層30の方が鮮明であり好適である。図24のグラビアリバース印刷で形成した着色層30は、一部に地汚れが散見されたが、位置合わせを行うための鮮明性は維持されている。 The
The
The photograph which observed the
着色層30の厚さは、位置合わせのためのコントラストが得られる範囲で調整すればよいという観点から、0.3~5.0μmであることが好ましく、0.4~4.0μmであることがより好ましく、0.5~3.0μmであることがさらに好ましい。
The thickness of the colored layer 30 is preferably 0.3 to 5.0 μm, and preferably 0.4 to 4.0 μm, from the viewpoint that the contrast for alignment may be adjusted. Is more preferably 0.5 to 3.0 μm.
(その他の層)
転写層20は、その他の層を有していてもよい。
その他の層としては、アンカー層及び印刷層が挙げられる。 (Other layers)
Thetransfer layer 20 may have other layers.
Examples of other layers include an anchor layer and a printing layer.
転写層20は、その他の層を有していてもよい。
その他の層としては、アンカー層及び印刷層が挙げられる。 (Other layers)
The
Examples of other layers include an anchor layer and a printing layer.
(アンカー層)
アンカー層は、インモールド成形等の高温環境に置かれる場合において、耐熱性を向上させるために必要に応じて設けられる層である。アンカー層は、保護層21と接着剤層22との間に形成することが好ましい。 (Anchor layer)
The anchor layer is a layer provided as necessary to improve heat resistance when placed in a high temperature environment such as in-mold molding. The anchor layer is preferably formed between theprotective layer 21 and the adhesive layer 22.
アンカー層は、インモールド成形等の高温環境に置かれる場合において、耐熱性を向上させるために必要に応じて設けられる層である。アンカー層は、保護層21と接着剤層22との間に形成することが好ましい。 (Anchor layer)
The anchor layer is a layer provided as necessary to improve heat resistance when placed in a high temperature environment such as in-mold molding. The anchor layer is preferably formed between the
アンカー層は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。
The anchor layer can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
(印刷層)
転写層20は、さらに印刷層を有していてもよい。印刷層は、加飾成形品に所望の意匠性を付与する役割を有する。 (Print layer)
Thetransfer layer 20 may further have a printing layer. The printed layer has a role of imparting a desired design property to the decorative molded product.
転写層20は、さらに印刷層を有していてもよい。印刷層は、加飾成形品に所望の意匠性を付与する役割を有する。 (Print layer)
The
印刷層は、転写シート100を平面方向から観察した際に、第1領域R1内の少なくとも一部に位置するように配置することが好ましい。
また、印刷層の厚さ方向の位置は、接着剤層22上に配置してもよいし、接着剤層22と保護層21との間に配置してもよいし、保護層21と離型シート10との間に配置してもよい。印刷層の保護と、被転写物への接着性の観点からは、接着剤層22と保護層21との間に印刷層を配置することが好ましい。また、小ロット品への対応の観点からは、接着剤層22上に印刷層を配置することが好ましい。なお、接着剤層22上に印刷層を配置する場合、被転写物との接着性の均一化の観点から、印刷層の樹脂成分は、接着剤層22の樹脂成分と同系統の樹脂とすることが好ましく、同一の樹脂とすることがより好ましい。 Printed layer, when observed thetransfer sheet 100 from the planar direction, is preferably disposed so as to be positioned on at least a portion of the first region R 1.
Further, the position in the thickness direction of the printing layer may be disposed on theadhesive layer 22, may be disposed between the adhesive layer 22 and the protective layer 21, or may be disposed between the protective layer 21 and the release layer. You may arrange | position between the sheets. From the viewpoint of protection of the print layer and adhesion to the transfer object, it is preferable to dispose the print layer between the adhesive layer 22 and the protective layer 21. Moreover, it is preferable to arrange a printing layer on the adhesive layer 22 from the viewpoint of handling a small lot product. In addition, when arrange | positioning a printing layer on the adhesive bond layer 22, the resin component of a printing layer is made into resin of the same system as the resin component of the adhesive bond layer 22 from a viewpoint of equalization of adhesiveness with a to-be-transferred material. It is preferable to use the same resin.
また、印刷層の厚さ方向の位置は、接着剤層22上に配置してもよいし、接着剤層22と保護層21との間に配置してもよいし、保護層21と離型シート10との間に配置してもよい。印刷層の保護と、被転写物への接着性の観点からは、接着剤層22と保護層21との間に印刷層を配置することが好ましい。また、小ロット品への対応の観点からは、接着剤層22上に印刷層を配置することが好ましい。なお、接着剤層22上に印刷層を配置する場合、被転写物との接着性の均一化の観点から、印刷層の樹脂成分は、接着剤層22の樹脂成分と同系統の樹脂とすることが好ましく、同一の樹脂とすることがより好ましい。 Printed layer, when observed the
Further, the position in the thickness direction of the printing layer may be disposed on the
印刷層のパターンは任意であり、例えば、木目、石目、布目、砂目、円、四角形、多角形、幾何学模様、文字、ベタ印刷等が挙げられる。
The pattern of the printing layer is arbitrary, and examples thereof include wood grain, stone grain, cloth grain, sand grain, circle, square, polygon, geometric pattern, character, solid printing, and the like.
印刷層は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。
The printing layer can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
なお、印刷層を形成する際、位置合わせが重要となるが、位置合わせ用パターン部ALを利用して位置合わせを行うことによって、印刷層を正確な位置に形成することができる。
Note that alignment is important when forming the print layer, but the print layer can be formed at an accurate position by performing alignment using the alignment pattern portion AL.
[転写シートの製造方法]
本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る転写シート100の製造方法は、支持体1上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む樹脂層形成用インキを塗布し、未硬化の樹脂層2を形成する工程と、第1領域R1及び第2領域R2と相補的な形状を有する版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層2を賦形すると同時に、電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層2を硬化させる工程と、硬化させた樹脂層2上に、離型層形成用インキを塗布し、離型層13を形成する工程と、離型層13上に、保護層形成用インキを塗布し、保護層21を形成する工程と、保護層21上に、接着剤層形成用インキを塗布し、接着剤層22を形成する工程と、接着剤層22における第2領域R2に相当する位置に形成された追従突出部25上に、着色層形成用インキを塗布し、着色層30を形成する工程と、を含む。 [Transfer sheet manufacturing method]
In the method for producing atransfer sheet 100 according to the third embodiment of the present invention, a resin layer forming ink containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition is applied onto a support 1 to form an uncured resin layer 2. Using the plate having a shape complementary to the forming step and the first region R 1 and the second region R 2 , the uncured resin layer 2 was shaped and simultaneously irradiated with ionizing radiation. A step of curing the resin layer 2, a step of applying a release layer forming ink on the cured resin layer 2 to form a release layer 13, and a protective layer forming ink on the release layer 13 In the step of forming the protective layer 21, the step of applying the adhesive layer forming ink on the protective layer 21 to form the adhesive layer 22, and the second region R 2 in the adhesive layer 22. A colored layer forming ink is applied onto the follow-up protrusion 25 formed at the corresponding position, and the colored layer And forming a 0.
本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る転写シート100の製造方法は、支持体1上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む樹脂層形成用インキを塗布し、未硬化の樹脂層2を形成する工程と、第1領域R1及び第2領域R2と相補的な形状を有する版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層2を賦形すると同時に、電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層2を硬化させる工程と、硬化させた樹脂層2上に、離型層形成用インキを塗布し、離型層13を形成する工程と、離型層13上に、保護層形成用インキを塗布し、保護層21を形成する工程と、保護層21上に、接着剤層形成用インキを塗布し、接着剤層22を形成する工程と、接着剤層22における第2領域R2に相当する位置に形成された追従突出部25上に、着色層形成用インキを塗布し、着色層30を形成する工程と、を含む。 [Transfer sheet manufacturing method]
In the method for producing a
第1領域R1及び第2領域R2と相補的な形状を有する版は、例えば、エッチング、サンドブラスト、切削及びレーザー加工、あるいはこれらの組み合わせなどによって、シリンダーの表面を所望の形状に彫刻することにより得ることができる。あるいは、レーザー彫刻、光造形等によって長尺の雄型の版(第1領域R1及び第2領域R2と同一の形状を有する版)を作製し、これを反転したものをシリンダーの表面に巻き付けることによって得ることができる。これら版の表面は、クロム等で硬質メッキ処理することが好ましい。
A plate having a shape complementary to the first region R 1 and the second region R 2 is formed by engraving the surface of the cylinder into a desired shape by, for example, etching, sand blasting, cutting and laser processing, or a combination thereof. Can be obtained. Alternatively, laser engraving, by stereolithography or the like to prepare a plate of male long (plate having a first region R 1 and the second region R 2 and the same shape), a material obtained by inverting it to the surface of the cylinder It can be obtained by wrapping. The surface of these plates is preferably hard-plated with chromium or the like.
転写シート100は、製造効率の観点から、多面付けで製造することが好ましい。このように多面付けで製造された転写シート100は、長尺の転写シート、あるいは枚葉の転写シートとして転写工程が行われる。
The transfer sheet 100 is preferably manufactured with multiple impositions from the viewpoint of manufacturing efficiency. The transfer sheet 100 manufactured in such a multi-face manner is subjected to a transfer process as a long transfer sheet or a single sheet transfer sheet.
上記工程により製造された転写シート100は、位置合わせ用のパターン印刷である着色層30を追従突出部25上に形成しやすくすることができ、着色層30により形成された位置合わせ用パターンにおける光透過率又は光反射率のコントラストが明りょうとなり、位置合わせをしやすくできる。
The transfer sheet 100 manufactured by the above-described process can easily form the colored layer 30 that is a pattern printing for alignment on the follow-up protrusion 25, and the light in the alignment pattern formed by the colored layer 30 can be obtained. The contrast of transmittance or light reflectance becomes clear, and alignment can be facilitated.
位置合わせを行う任意の工程としては、例えば、転写シート100を長尺にスリットする工程、転写シート100を枚葉に型抜きする工程、転写シート100を被転写物に転写する工程が挙げられる。
位置合わせ用のパターン印刷である着色層30による光透過率によって位置合わせを行う場合では、例えば、転写シート100の下方に設置した光源と、転写シート100の上方の光源に正対する位置に設置した光検知手段とにより、検知することで位置合わせを行うことができる。
位置合わせ用のパターン印刷である着色層30による光反射率によって位置合わせを行う場合では、例えば、転写シート100の上方に任意の角度で設置した光源及び光検知手段により、検知することができる。 Examples of the optional step of aligning include a step of slitting thetransfer sheet 100 in a long length, a step of punching the transfer sheet 100 into a sheet, and a step of transferring the transfer sheet 100 to a transfer object.
In the case where the alignment is performed by the light transmittance by thecolored layer 30 that is the pattern printing for alignment, for example, the light source installed below the transfer sheet 100 and the light source above the transfer sheet 100 are installed at positions facing the light source. Position alignment can be performed by detection by the light detection means.
In the case where the alignment is performed by the light reflectance by thecolored layer 30 that is a pattern printing for alignment, for example, the detection can be performed by a light source and a light detection unit installed at an arbitrary angle above the transfer sheet 100.
位置合わせ用のパターン印刷である着色層30による光透過率によって位置合わせを行う場合では、例えば、転写シート100の下方に設置した光源と、転写シート100の上方の光源に正対する位置に設置した光検知手段とにより、検知することで位置合わせを行うことができる。
位置合わせ用のパターン印刷である着色層30による光反射率によって位置合わせを行う場合では、例えば、転写シート100の上方に任意の角度で設置した光源及び光検知手段により、検知することができる。 Examples of the optional step of aligning include a step of slitting the
In the case where the alignment is performed by the light transmittance by the
In the case where the alignment is performed by the light reflectance by the
[加飾成形品の製造方法]
本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る加飾成形品の製造方法は、上述した本発明の転写シート100の転写層20を被転写物に転写する工程と、転写シート100の離型シート10を剥離する工程と、を有する。
被転写物としては、樹脂成形体等が挙げられる。 [Method of manufacturing decorative molded product]
The method for manufacturing a decorative molded product according to the third embodiment of the present invention includes the step of transferring thetransfer layer 20 of the transfer sheet 100 of the present invention described above to the transfer object, and the release sheet 10 of the transfer sheet 100. And a step of peeling.
Examples of the material to be transferred include a resin molded body.
本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る加飾成形品の製造方法は、上述した本発明の転写シート100の転写層20を被転写物に転写する工程と、転写シート100の離型シート10を剥離する工程と、を有する。
被転写物としては、樹脂成形体等が挙げられる。 [Method of manufacturing decorative molded product]
The method for manufacturing a decorative molded product according to the third embodiment of the present invention includes the step of transferring the
Examples of the material to be transferred include a resin molded body.
上記工程により製造された加飾成形品は、使用する転写シート100に箔チリの発生がなく、転写した後の外観を良好にすることができる。
The decorative molded product produced by the above process does not generate foil dust on the transfer sheet 100 to be used, and can improve the appearance after being transferred.
加飾成形品の製造方法には、公知の転写法を用いることができる。例えば、(i)予め成形された被転写物に転写シートを貼着し、該転写シートの転写層を転写した後、該転写シートの離型シートを剥離する方法、(ii)平板状の被転写物に転写シートを貼着し、該転写シートの転写層を転写した後、該転写シートの離型シートを剥離し、その後、転写層が積層された被転写物を成形する方法、(iii)被転写物を射出成形する際に転写シートと一体化させ、その後、転写シートの離型シートを剥離する方法〔インモールド成形(射出成形同時転写加飾法)〕等が挙げられる。中でも、インモールド成形(射出成形同時転写加飾法)によれば、三次元曲面などの複雑な表面形状を有する樹脂成形体に加飾成形することができる。
A known transfer method can be used for the method of manufacturing the decorative molded product. For example, (i) a method in which a transfer sheet is attached to a preliminarily molded transfer object, the transfer layer of the transfer sheet is transferred, and then the release sheet of the transfer sheet is peeled off; A method of sticking a transfer sheet to a transfer material, transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet, peeling off the release sheet of the transfer sheet, and then forming a transfer material on which the transfer layer is laminated, (iii) ) A method of integrating a transfer material with a transfer sheet at the time of injection molding and then peeling the release sheet of the transfer sheet [in-mold molding (injection molding simultaneous transfer decoration method)]. Among them, according to in-mold molding (injection molding simultaneous transfer decoration method), it is possible to perform decorative molding on a resin molded body having a complicated surface shape such as a three-dimensional curved surface.
インモールド成形による本発明の転写シートを用いる加飾成形品の製造方法の一実施態様としては、(1)上記の転写シートの転写層側をインモールド成形用金型の内側に向けて配置する工程と、(2)上記インモールド成形用金型内に樹脂を射出注入する工程と、
(3)上記転写シートと、上記樹脂とを一体化させて、樹脂成形体(被転写物)の表面上に上記転写シートの転写層を転写する工程と、(4)樹脂成形体(被転写物)を金型から取り出した後、上記転写シートの離型シートを剥離する工程と、を有するものが挙げられる。
(1)工程の配置の際に、第2領域R2が残存していれば、第2領域R2の位置合わせ用パターン部を利用して、金型の正確な位置に転写シートを配置することができる。
なお、(4)工程の後は、必要に応じて、不要部をトリミング(除去)することが好ましい。(4)工程の後に第2領域R2が残存している場合、該領域をトリミング(除去)することが好ましい。 As one embodiment of the method for producing a decorative molded product using the transfer sheet of the present invention by in-mold molding, (1) the transfer layer side of the above-mentioned transfer sheet is arranged facing the inside of the mold for in-mold molding. And (2) a step of injecting and injecting a resin into the in-mold mold.
(3) a step of integrating the transfer sheet and the resin and transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet onto the surface of the resin molded body (transfer object); and (4) a resin molded body (transfer target). And the step of removing the release sheet of the transfer sheet after the product is taken out of the mold.
(1) If the second region R 2 remains in the process arrangement, the transfer sheet is arranged at an accurate position of the mold using the alignment pattern portion of the second region R 2. be able to.
After the step (4), it is preferable to trim (remove) unnecessary portions as necessary. (4) When the second region R 2 after step are still present, it is preferred to trim (remove) the region.
(3)上記転写シートと、上記樹脂とを一体化させて、樹脂成形体(被転写物)の表面上に上記転写シートの転写層を転写する工程と、(4)樹脂成形体(被転写物)を金型から取り出した後、上記転写シートの離型シートを剥離する工程と、を有するものが挙げられる。
(1)工程の配置の際に、第2領域R2が残存していれば、第2領域R2の位置合わせ用パターン部を利用して、金型の正確な位置に転写シートを配置することができる。
なお、(4)工程の後は、必要に応じて、不要部をトリミング(除去)することが好ましい。(4)工程の後に第2領域R2が残存している場合、該領域をトリミング(除去)することが好ましい。 As one embodiment of the method for producing a decorative molded product using the transfer sheet of the present invention by in-mold molding, (1) the transfer layer side of the above-mentioned transfer sheet is arranged facing the inside of the mold for in-mold molding. And (2) a step of injecting and injecting a resin into the in-mold mold.
(3) a step of integrating the transfer sheet and the resin and transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet onto the surface of the resin molded body (transfer object); and (4) a resin molded body (transfer target). And the step of removing the release sheet of the transfer sheet after the product is taken out of the mold.
(1) If the second region R 2 remains in the process arrangement, the transfer sheet is arranged at an accurate position of the mold using the alignment pattern portion of the second region R 2. be able to.
After the step (4), it is preferable to trim (remove) unnecessary portions as necessary. (4) When the second region R 2 after step are still present, it is preferred to trim (remove) the region.
(樹脂成形体)
樹脂成形体としては、射出成形可能な熱可塑性樹脂もしくは熱硬化性樹脂を用いることが好ましく、公知の様々な樹脂を用いることができる。
本発明による加飾成形品をインモールド成形により製造する場合には、熱可塑性樹脂を用いることが好ましい。このような熱可塑性樹脂としては、ポリスチレン系樹脂、ポリオレフィン系樹脂、ABS樹脂(耐熱ABS樹脂を含む)、AS樹脂、AN樹脂、ポリフェニレンオキサイド系樹脂、ポリカーボネート系樹脂、ポリアセタール系樹脂、アクリル系樹脂、ポリエチレンテレフタレート系樹脂、ポリブチレンテフタレート系樹脂、ポリスルホン系樹脂、およびポリフェニレンサルファイド系樹脂等が挙げられる。 (Resin molding)
As the resin molding, it is preferable to use a thermoplastic resin or a thermosetting resin that can be injection-molded, and various known resins can be used.
When the decorative molded product according to the present invention is manufactured by in-mold molding, it is preferable to use a thermoplastic resin. Examples of such thermoplastic resins include polystyrene resins, polyolefin resins, ABS resins (including heat-resistant ABS resins), AS resins, AN resins, polyphenylene oxide resins, polycarbonate resins, polyacetal resins, acrylic resins, Examples thereof include polyethylene terephthalate resin, polybutylene terephthalate resin, polysulfone resin, and polyphenylene sulfide resin.
樹脂成形体としては、射出成形可能な熱可塑性樹脂もしくは熱硬化性樹脂を用いることが好ましく、公知の様々な樹脂を用いることができる。
本発明による加飾成形品をインモールド成形により製造する場合には、熱可塑性樹脂を用いることが好ましい。このような熱可塑性樹脂としては、ポリスチレン系樹脂、ポリオレフィン系樹脂、ABS樹脂(耐熱ABS樹脂を含む)、AS樹脂、AN樹脂、ポリフェニレンオキサイド系樹脂、ポリカーボネート系樹脂、ポリアセタール系樹脂、アクリル系樹脂、ポリエチレンテレフタレート系樹脂、ポリブチレンテフタレート系樹脂、ポリスルホン系樹脂、およびポリフェニレンサルファイド系樹脂等が挙げられる。 (Resin molding)
As the resin molding, it is preferable to use a thermoplastic resin or a thermosetting resin that can be injection-molded, and various known resins can be used.
When the decorative molded product according to the present invention is manufactured by in-mold molding, it is preferable to use a thermoplastic resin. Examples of such thermoplastic resins include polystyrene resins, polyolefin resins, ABS resins (including heat-resistant ABS resins), AS resins, AN resins, polyphenylene oxide resins, polycarbonate resins, polyacetal resins, acrylic resins, Examples thereof include polyethylene terephthalate resin, polybutylene terephthalate resin, polysulfone resin, and polyphenylene sulfide resin.
本発明の第3の実施の形態によれば、箔チリの発生を抑制し、加飾成形品の外観を良好にする転写層を転写できる転写シート、該転写シートの製造方法、及び該転写シートを用いた加飾成形品の製造方法を提供することができる。
According to the third embodiment of the present invention, a transfer sheet capable of transferring a transfer layer that suppresses generation of foil dust and improves the appearance of a decorative molded product, a method for producing the transfer sheet, and the transfer sheet The manufacturing method of the decorative molded product using this can be provided.
〔第4の実施の形態〕
転写シートが完成した後に位置合わせ用のパターンを印刷する場合、工程が増えて煩雑であるという問題を解決するために、本発明者らは、位置合わせ用のパターンを離型シート上に配置する構成とすることを、特願2016-168148号で提案した。そして、本発明者らが更に検討したところ、当該構成では、位置合わせ用のパターンを読み取る際に、位置合わせ用のパターン上に積層する層によって、パターンを認識することが困難となってしまうことがあり、改善する余地があることがわかった。
本発明の第4の実施の形態は、このような実情に鑑みてなされたものであり、位置合わせ用のパターンの読み取り性を向上し、被転写物の正確な位置に転写層を転写できる転写シート、該転写シートの製造方法、及び該転写シートを用いた加飾成形品の製造方法を提供することを目的とする。 [Fourth Embodiment]
When printing a pattern for alignment after the transfer sheet is completed, the present inventors arrange the pattern for alignment on the release sheet in order to solve the problem that the number of steps is complicated. This was proposed in Japanese Patent Application No. 2016-168148. Further, as a result of further investigation by the present inventors, in this configuration, when the alignment pattern is read, it is difficult to recognize the pattern due to the layer stacked on the alignment pattern. There was a room for improvement.
The fourth embodiment of the present invention has been made in view of such a situation, and improves transferability of a pattern for alignment and can transfer a transfer layer to an accurate position of an object to be transferred. It is an object to provide a sheet, a method for producing the transfer sheet, and a method for producing a decorative molded product using the transfer sheet.
転写シートが完成した後に位置合わせ用のパターンを印刷する場合、工程が増えて煩雑であるという問題を解決するために、本発明者らは、位置合わせ用のパターンを離型シート上に配置する構成とすることを、特願2016-168148号で提案した。そして、本発明者らが更に検討したところ、当該構成では、位置合わせ用のパターンを読み取る際に、位置合わせ用のパターン上に積層する層によって、パターンを認識することが困難となってしまうことがあり、改善する余地があることがわかった。
本発明の第4の実施の形態は、このような実情に鑑みてなされたものであり、位置合わせ用のパターンの読み取り性を向上し、被転写物の正確な位置に転写層を転写できる転写シート、該転写シートの製造方法、及び該転写シートを用いた加飾成形品の製造方法を提供することを目的とする。 [Fourth Embodiment]
When printing a pattern for alignment after the transfer sheet is completed, the present inventors arrange the pattern for alignment on the release sheet in order to solve the problem that the number of steps is complicated. This was proposed in Japanese Patent Application No. 2016-168148. Further, as a result of further investigation by the present inventors, in this configuration, when the alignment pattern is read, it is difficult to recognize the pattern due to the layer stacked on the alignment pattern. There was a room for improvement.
The fourth embodiment of the present invention has been made in view of such a situation, and improves transferability of a pattern for alignment and can transfer a transfer layer to an accurate position of an object to be transferred. It is an object to provide a sheet, a method for producing the transfer sheet, and a method for producing a decorative molded product using the transfer sheet.
[転写シート]
本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る転写シート100は、図26に示すように、離型シート10上に転写層20を有する転写シートであって、離型シート10は、被転写物に転写するための第1領域R1及び位置合わせ用パターンを設けるための第2領域R2を有する基材層11を有し、基材層11の第2領域R2には、転写層20側の面側に凸部24を有し、転写層20は、離型シート10とは反対側の表面に凸部24を基礎とする追従突出部25を有する位置合わせ用パターン部ALを備えるものである。
第4の実施の形態において、第1の実施の形態と実質的に同様であるものの記載を省略する。 [Transfer sheet]
As shown in FIG. 26, thetransfer sheet 100 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention is a transfer sheet having a transfer layer 20 on the release sheet 10, and the release sheet 10 is a transfer object. a second region R 2 base layer 11 having a for providing the first region R 1 and the alignment pattern for transferring, to the second region R 2 of the base layer 11, transfer layer 20 side The transfer layer 20 includes an alignment pattern portion AL having a follow-up protruding portion 25 based on the convex portion 24 on the surface opposite to the release sheet 10. is there.
In the fourth embodiment, description of what is substantially the same as the first embodiment is omitted.
本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る転写シート100は、図26に示すように、離型シート10上に転写層20を有する転写シートであって、離型シート10は、被転写物に転写するための第1領域R1及び位置合わせ用パターンを設けるための第2領域R2を有する基材層11を有し、基材層11の第2領域R2には、転写層20側の面側に凸部24を有し、転写層20は、離型シート10とは反対側の表面に凸部24を基礎とする追従突出部25を有する位置合わせ用パターン部ALを備えるものである。
第4の実施の形態において、第1の実施の形態と実質的に同様であるものの記載を省略する。 [Transfer sheet]
As shown in FIG. 26, the
In the fourth embodiment, description of what is substantially the same as the first embodiment is omitted.
<離型シート>
離型シート10は、基材層11と、離型層13とを備える。離型シート10は、樹脂成形体等の被転写物に転写層20を転写した後に剥離される。 <Release sheet>
Therelease sheet 10 includes a base material layer 11 and a release layer 13. The release sheet 10 is peeled off after the transfer layer 20 is transferred to a transfer object such as a resin molded body.
離型シート10は、基材層11と、離型層13とを備える。離型シート10は、樹脂成形体等の被転写物に転写層20を転写した後に剥離される。 <Release sheet>
The
(基材層)
基材層11は、例えば、図26に示すように、支持体1及び樹脂層2から形成される。基材層11は、支持体1又は樹脂層2の単層でもよいし、支持体1及び樹脂層2以外の層を有する3層以上の構成であってもよい。
また、基材層11は、図示しないが、転写層20側の面に、さらにその他の領域を有していてもよい。 (Base material layer)
Thebase material layer 11 is formed from the support body 1 and the resin layer 2, for example, as shown in FIG. The base material layer 11 may be a single layer of the support 1 or the resin layer 2, or may have a configuration of three or more layers having layers other than the support 1 and the resin layer 2.
Further, although not shown, thebase material layer 11 may further have other regions on the surface on the transfer layer 20 side.
基材層11は、例えば、図26に示すように、支持体1及び樹脂層2から形成される。基材層11は、支持体1又は樹脂層2の単層でもよいし、支持体1及び樹脂層2以外の層を有する3層以上の構成であってもよい。
また、基材層11は、図示しないが、転写層20側の面に、さらにその他の領域を有していてもよい。 (Base material layer)
The
Further, although not shown, the
《支持体》
支持体1としては、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。 <Support>
As thesupport 1, the same one as described in the first embodiment can be used.
支持体1としては、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。 <Support>
As the
《樹脂層》
樹脂層2は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。 <Resin layer>
Theresin layer 2 can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
樹脂層2は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。 <Resin layer>
The
樹脂層2は、コーティングにより形成してもよいが、正確にかつ精密な形状を形成する観点から、第1領域R1及び第2領域R2と相補的な形状を有する版を用いた印刷により形成することが好ましい。樹脂層2がその他の領域を有する場合、版は、さらに、その他の領域と相補的な形状を有することが好ましい。版を用いた樹脂層2の形成方法の詳細は後述する。
Resin layer 2 may be formed by coating, accurately and in terms of forming a precise shape, by printing using a plate having a first region R 1 and the second region R 2 and the complementary shape It is preferable to form. When the resin layer 2 has other regions, the plate preferably further has a shape complementary to the other regions. Details of the method of forming the resin layer 2 using a plate will be described later.
(第1領域)
基材層11の第1領域R1は、被転写物に転写するための転写層20を設けるための領域である。
第1領域R1の表面形状は、特に限定されない。第1領域R1の表面形状は、例えば、図26に示すように、凹凸形状を有していてもよいし、略平滑であってもよい。
図26に示すように、第1領域R1内に凹凸部5を有する場合、被転写物には、該凹凸部5の相補的形状を有する転写層20(凹凸部5上に離型層13を有する場合、離型層13によって緩和された凹凸形状の相補的形状を有する転写層20)が転写され、得られる加飾成形品の表面に凹凸形状を付与することができる。
また、第1領域R1の表面形状が略平滑である場合、被転写物に転写した転写層20の表面形状を略平滑にすることができ、得られる加飾成形品の光沢を高くすることができる。 (First area)
The first region R 1 of thebase layer 11 is a region for providing the transfer layer 20 to be transferred to the transfer target.
Surface shape of the first region R 1 is not particularly limited. Surface shape of the first region R 1 is, for example, as shown in FIG. 26, may have an irregular shape, may be substantially smooth.
As shown in FIG. 26, when the concavo-convex portion 5 is provided in the first region R 1 , the transfer layer 20 having a shape complementary to the concavo-convex portion 5 (the release layer 13 on the concavo-convex portion 5 is included). , The transfer layer 20) having a concavo-convex complementary shape alleviated by the release layer 13 is transferred, and the concavo-convex shape can be imparted to the surface of the resulting decorative molded product.
Further, when the surface shape of the first region R 1 is substantially smooth, increasing the substantially can be made smooth, gloss resulting decorative molded article surface shape of thetransfer layer 20 has been transferred to the transfer target Can do.
基材層11の第1領域R1は、被転写物に転写するための転写層20を設けるための領域である。
第1領域R1の表面形状は、特に限定されない。第1領域R1の表面形状は、例えば、図26に示すように、凹凸形状を有していてもよいし、略平滑であってもよい。
図26に示すように、第1領域R1内に凹凸部5を有する場合、被転写物には、該凹凸部5の相補的形状を有する転写層20(凹凸部5上に離型層13を有する場合、離型層13によって緩和された凹凸形状の相補的形状を有する転写層20)が転写され、得られる加飾成形品の表面に凹凸形状を付与することができる。
また、第1領域R1の表面形状が略平滑である場合、被転写物に転写した転写層20の表面形状を略平滑にすることができ、得られる加飾成形品の光沢を高くすることができる。 (First area)
The first region R 1 of the
Surface shape of the first region R 1 is not particularly limited. Surface shape of the first region R 1 is, for example, as shown in FIG. 26, may have an irregular shape, may be substantially smooth.
As shown in FIG. 26, when the concavo-
Further, when the surface shape of the first region R 1 is substantially smooth, increasing the substantially can be made smooth, gloss resulting decorative molded article surface shape of the
加飾成形品に付与する表面形状は目的に応じて異なるため、第1領域R1内の凹凸の程度の絶対値は特に限定されないが、最大高さ粗さRzは0.2~4.0μm程度とすることが好ましい。同様に、算術平均粗さRaは0.05~2.0μm程度とすることが好ましい。
Since the surface shape imparted to the decorative molded product varies depending on the purpose, the absolute value of the degree of unevenness in the first region R 1 is not particularly limited, but the maximum height roughness Rz is 0.2 to 4.0 μm. It is preferable to set the degree. Similarly, the arithmetic average roughness Ra is preferably about 0.05 to 2.0 μm.
また、図示しないが、第1領域R1を2箇所以上に分割して形成してもよい。その場合、それぞれの第1領域R1の表面形状を異なるものとしてもよい。第1領域R1を2箇所以上に分割して形成し、さらに、それぞれの第1領域R1の表面形状を異なるものとすることにより、加飾成形品の意匠性を高めることができる。
Although not shown, it may be formed by dividing the first region R 1 to two or more locations. In that case, it may be each of the first region R 1 of the surface shape as different. The first region R 1 and formed by dividing into two or more portions, further, by making the respective first region R 1 of the surface shape different, it is possible to enhance the design property of the decorative molded article.
(第2領域)
基材層11の第2領域R2は、被転写物に転写するために用いる位置合わせ用パターン(アライメントマーク)を設けるための領域である。
第2領域R2は、位置合わせ用パターンの基礎とする部分的に配置された凸部24を有している。凸部24は、正確にかつ精密な形状を形成する観点から、第2領域R2と相補的な形状を有する版を用いた賦形により樹脂層2に形成することが好ましい。 (Second area)
The second region R 2 of thebase material layer 11 is a region for providing the for alignment used to transfer the transfer target pattern (alignment marks).
The second region R 2 has a partially deployedconvex portion 24 to the basis of the alignment pattern. The convex part 24 is preferably formed in the resin layer 2 by shaping using a plate having a shape complementary to the second region R 2 from the viewpoint of forming an accurate and precise shape.
基材層11の第2領域R2は、被転写物に転写するために用いる位置合わせ用パターン(アライメントマーク)を設けるための領域である。
第2領域R2は、位置合わせ用パターンの基礎とする部分的に配置された凸部24を有している。凸部24は、正確にかつ精密な形状を形成する観点から、第2領域R2と相補的な形状を有する版を用いた賦形により樹脂層2に形成することが好ましい。 (Second area)
The second region R 2 of the
The second region R 2 has a partially deployed
凸部24の高さhは、1.0~6.0μmである。凸部24の高さhが1.0μm未満であることにより、凸部24上に積層する毎に、凸部24の形状を維持することが困難となり、転写層20の表面に凸部24を基礎とする追従突出部25を形成することが困難となる。転写層20の表面に凸部24を基礎とする追従突出部25を形成することができないと、光電センサーによって、凸部と凹部の光量差の検出することできなくなり、位置合わせ用のパターン位置を検知することができない。また、凸部24の高さhが6.0μm超であることにより、凸部24上に積層する際に、凸部24の接圧が高くなって凸部24の上にインキが多く乗り、凸部24上に積層する層の裾が広がりやすくなり、裾で光拡散して位置合わせに悪影響を及ぼす。そして、凸部24の高さhが6.0μm超であることにより、凸部24上に積層する際の荷重により凸部24が変形してしまうことがあり、変形してしまった場合には位置合わせの精度を維持することが困難となる。
凸部24の高さhは、所望の形状の追従突出部25を形成する観点から、1.5~5.5μmであることが好ましく、2.0~5.0μmであることがより好ましく、2.5~4.5μmであることがさらに好ましい。
凸部24の高さhは、全て同一としなくてもよい。しかしながら、追従突出部25の高さHを均一に形成しやすくする観点から、凸部24の高さhを全て同一又は近似値とすることが好ましい。
なお、本明細書において、凸部24の高さhとは、凸部24を形成する構造体を、構造体の延伸方向に直交する方向で切断した断面の基材層11の基準面からの中央部の高さのことをいう。 The height h of theconvex portion 24 is 1.0 to 6.0 μm. When the height h of the convex portion 24 is less than 1.0 μm, it is difficult to maintain the shape of the convex portion 24 every time the convex portion 24 is laminated, and the convex portion 24 is formed on the surface of the transfer layer 20. It becomes difficult to form the follow-up protrusion 25 as a base. If the follow-up protrusion 25 based on the convex portion 24 cannot be formed on the surface of the transfer layer 20, the photoelectric sensor cannot detect the light amount difference between the convex portion and the concave portion, and the pattern position for alignment is determined. It cannot be detected. In addition, since the height h of the convex portion 24 is more than 6.0 μm, when laminating on the convex portion 24, the contact pressure of the convex portion 24 becomes high and a lot of ink rides on the convex portion 24, The bottom of the layer laminated on the convex portion 24 is likely to spread, and light is diffused at the bottom to adversely affect the alignment. And since the height h of the convex part 24 is more than 6.0 μm, the convex part 24 may be deformed by a load at the time of stacking on the convex part 24. It becomes difficult to maintain the accuracy of alignment.
The height h of theconvex portion 24 is preferably 1.5 to 5.5 μm, more preferably 2.0 to 5.0 μm from the viewpoint of forming the follow-up protrusion 25 having a desired shape. More preferably, it is 2.5 to 4.5 μm.
The heights h of theconvex portions 24 may not be the same. However, from the viewpoint of facilitating uniform formation of the height H of the tracking protrusion 25, it is preferable that all the heights h of the protrusions 24 be the same or approximate values.
In addition, in this specification, the height h of theconvex part 24 means the structure forming the convex part 24 from the reference plane of the base material layer 11 having a cross section cut in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the structural body. The height of the center.
凸部24の高さhは、所望の形状の追従突出部25を形成する観点から、1.5~5.5μmであることが好ましく、2.0~5.0μmであることがより好ましく、2.5~4.5μmであることがさらに好ましい。
凸部24の高さhは、全て同一としなくてもよい。しかしながら、追従突出部25の高さHを均一に形成しやすくする観点から、凸部24の高さhを全て同一又は近似値とすることが好ましい。
なお、本明細書において、凸部24の高さhとは、凸部24を形成する構造体を、構造体の延伸方向に直交する方向で切断した断面の基材層11の基準面からの中央部の高さのことをいう。 The height h of the
The height h of the
The heights h of the
In addition, in this specification, the height h of the
凸部24の端部同士の間隔dは、10~500μmである。凸部24の端部同士の間隔dが10μm未満であることにより、凸部24上に積層する際に、凸部24の端部同士の間に垂れたインキの影響によって裾を形成してしまい、位置合わせの精度を維持することが困難となる。そして、転写層20の表面に隣接する凸部24を基礎とする追従突出部25同士が連結してしまうことがあり、個々の追従突出部25を認識することができないと位置合わせの精度を維持することが困難となる。また、凸部24の端部同士の間隔dが500μm超であることにより、凸部24上に積層する際に、凸部24の接圧が高くなって凸部24の上にインキが多く乗り、凸部24上に積層する層の裾が広がりやすくなり、裾で光拡散して位置合わせに悪影響を及ぼす。そして、凸部24の端部同士の間隔dが500μm超であることにより、アライメントマークが大きくなり、第2領域R2の面積が必要以上に広く確保しなければならず、設計上の問題がある。
凸部24の端部同士の間隔dは、アライメントマークの認識率を向上させ、第2領域R2の面積が必要以上に広くなることを抑制できる観点から、15~450μmであることが好ましく、20~400μmであることがより好ましく、25~350μmであることがさらに好ましい。
なお、本明細書において、凸部24の端部同士の間隔dとは、凸部24の裾の末端間距離をいう。 The distance d between the end portions of theconvex portion 24 is 10 to 500 μm. When the distance d between the end portions of the convex portion 24 is less than 10 μm, a skirt is formed due to the influence of ink dripping between the end portions of the convex portion 24 when laminating on the convex portion 24. It becomes difficult to maintain the accuracy of alignment. Further, the tracking protrusions 25 based on the protrusions 24 adjacent to the surface of the transfer layer 20 may be connected to each other, and if the individual tracking protrusions 25 cannot be recognized, the alignment accuracy is maintained. Difficult to do. Further, since the distance d between the end portions of the convex portions 24 is more than 500 μm, when the layers are stacked on the convex portions 24, the contact pressure of the convex portions 24 is increased and a large amount of ink is loaded on the convex portions 24. In addition, the skirt of the layer laminated on the convex portion 24 is likely to spread, and light is diffused at the skirt to adversely affect the alignment. By spacing d of ends of the convex portion 24 is 500μm greater than the alignment mark is increased, it is necessary widely reserved unnecessarily second region area of R 2, is a design problem is there.
Interval d of ends of theconvex portion 24 improves the recognition rate of the alignment mark, from the viewpoint of suppressing the area of the second region R 2 is wider than necessary, preferably from 15 ~ 450 [mu] m, It is more preferably 20 to 400 μm, and further preferably 25 to 350 μm.
In the present specification, the distance d between the ends of theconvex portion 24 refers to the distance between the ends of the bottom of the convex portion 24.
凸部24の端部同士の間隔dは、アライメントマークの認識率を向上させ、第2領域R2の面積が必要以上に広くなることを抑制できる観点から、15~450μmであることが好ましく、20~400μmであることがより好ましく、25~350μmであることがさらに好ましい。
なお、本明細書において、凸部24の端部同士の間隔dとは、凸部24の裾の末端間距離をいう。 The distance d between the end portions of the
Interval d of ends of the
In the present specification, the distance d between the ends of the
凸部24の高さhと凸部24の端部同士の間隔dとの比率h/dは、0.003~0.100であることが好ましく、0.005~0.080であることがより好ましく、0.007~0.060であることがさらに好ましい。
比率h/dを上記範囲とすることにより、凸部24の高さhと凸部24の端部同士の間隔dとのバランスが良好となり、凸部24の端部同士の間に裾が形成されにくくなり、位置合わせ精度を良好にできる。 The ratio h / d between the height h of theconvex portion 24 and the distance d between the end portions of the convex portion 24 is preferably 0.003 to 0.100, and preferably 0.005 to 0.080. More preferably, it is 0.007 to 0.060.
By setting the ratio h / d within the above range, the balance between the height h of theconvex portion 24 and the distance d between the end portions of the convex portion 24 becomes good, and a skirt is formed between the end portions of the convex portion 24. This makes it difficult to perform positioning and improves the alignment accuracy.
比率h/dを上記範囲とすることにより、凸部24の高さhと凸部24の端部同士の間隔dとのバランスが良好となり、凸部24の端部同士の間に裾が形成されにくくなり、位置合わせ精度を良好にできる。 The ratio h / d between the height h of the
By setting the ratio h / d within the above range, the balance between the height h of the
凸部24の幅bは、5~200μmであることが好ましく、10~150μmであることがより好ましく、15~100μmであることがさらに好ましい。凸部24の幅bを5μm以上とすることにより、凸部24の強度を維持することができるとともに、凸部24を均質に形成しやすくできる。また、凸部24の幅bを200μm以下とすることにより、第2領域R2の面積が必要以上に広くなることを抑制できる。
なお、本明細書において、凸部4の幅bとは、図28に示すように、凸部4を形成する構造体がライン状構造体である場合、構造体の延伸方向に直交する方向で切断した断面の幅のことをいう。そして、凸部4の幅bとは、図29に示すように、凸部4を形成する構造体がドット状構造体の場合、構造体の長軸方向で切断した断面の幅のことをいう。 The width b of theconvex portion 24 is preferably 5 to 200 μm, more preferably 10 to 150 μm, and even more preferably 15 to 100 μm. By setting the width b of the convex portion 24 to 5 μm or more, the strength of the convex portion 24 can be maintained and the convex portion 24 can be easily formed uniformly. Further, by setting the width b of the protrusion 24 and 200μm or less, that the area of the second region R 2 is wider than necessary it can be suppressed.
In addition, in this specification, as shown in FIG. 28, the width b of theconvex part 4 is a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the structural body when the structural body forming the convex part 4 is a linear structure. The width of the cut section. And the width b of the convex part 4 means the width | variety of the cross section cut | disconnected in the major axis direction of the structure, when the structure which forms the convex part 4 is a dot-like structure, as shown in FIG. .
なお、本明細書において、凸部4の幅bとは、図28に示すように、凸部4を形成する構造体がライン状構造体である場合、構造体の延伸方向に直交する方向で切断した断面の幅のことをいう。そして、凸部4の幅bとは、図29に示すように、凸部4を形成する構造体がドット状構造体の場合、構造体の長軸方向で切断した断面の幅のことをいう。 The width b of the
In addition, in this specification, as shown in FIG. 28, the width b of the
凸部の高さhと凸部の幅bとの比率h/bは、0.010~0.050であることが好ましく、0.015~0.045であることがより好ましく、0.020~0.040であることがさらに好ましい。
比率h/bを0.010以上とすることにより、第2領域R2の面積が必要以上に広くなることを抑制できる。また、比率h/bを0.050以下とすることにより、凸部24の形状を維持した追従突出部25を形成しやすくできる。 The ratio h / b between the height h of the convex portion and the width b of the convex portion is preferably 0.010 to 0.050, more preferably 0.015 to 0.045, and more preferably 0.020. More preferably, it is ˜0.040.
By the ratio h / b 0.010 or more, it can suppress the area of the second region R 2 is wider than necessary. Further, by setting the ratio h / b to 0.050 or less, it is possible to easily form the follow-upprotrusion 25 that maintains the shape of the protrusion 24.
比率h/bを0.010以上とすることにより、第2領域R2の面積が必要以上に広くなることを抑制できる。また、比率h/bを0.050以下とすることにより、凸部24の形状を維持した追従突出部25を形成しやすくできる。 The ratio h / b between the height h of the convex portion and the width b of the convex portion is preferably 0.010 to 0.050, more preferably 0.015 to 0.045, and more preferably 0.020. More preferably, it is ˜0.040.
By the ratio h / b 0.010 or more, it can suppress the area of the second region R 2 is wider than necessary. Further, by setting the ratio h / b to 0.050 or less, it is possible to easily form the follow-up
凸部24は、任意の方向に延伸したライン状の構造体及びドット状の構造体等から形成されてなることができ、中でもライン状の構造体から形成されてなることが好ましい。該任意の方向は特に限定されず、斜め方向(例えば、転写シートの幅方向に対して45度)であってもよいが、転写シート100の任意の1辺に平行な方向であることが好ましく、転写シート100の流れ方向であることがより好ましい。凸部24を該構成とすることにより、位置合わせをしやすくできる。
また、複数の凸部24は、それぞれの向きが平行であることが好ましい。
また、凸部24は、第2領域R2内で任意の方向に途切れることなく連続して形成されていてもよいが、任意の方向への延伸が部分的に途切れるものであってもよい。 Theconvex part 24 can be formed from a line-shaped structure, a dot-shaped structure or the like extending in an arbitrary direction, and is preferably formed from a line-shaped structure. The arbitrary direction is not particularly limited and may be an oblique direction (for example, 45 degrees with respect to the width direction of the transfer sheet), but is preferably a direction parallel to any one side of the transfer sheet 100. The flow direction of the transfer sheet 100 is more preferable. By making the convex portion 24 have this configuration, alignment can be facilitated.
Moreover, it is preferable that each direction of the someconvex part 24 is parallel.
Further, theconvex portion 24 may be formed continuously without interruption in any direction in the second inner region R 2, but may be one that extends in any direction partially interrupted.
また、複数の凸部24は、それぞれの向きが平行であることが好ましい。
また、凸部24は、第2領域R2内で任意の方向に途切れることなく連続して形成されていてもよいが、任意の方向への延伸が部分的に途切れるものであってもよい。 The
Moreover, it is preferable that each direction of the some
Further, the
凸部24を形成する構造体を、構造体の延伸方向に直交する方向で切断した断面は、略四角形状であることが好ましい。
The cross section obtained by cutting the structure forming the convex portion 24 in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the structure is preferably substantially rectangular.
凸部24と、後述する転写層20とは、[凸部の高さ/転写層の厚さ]が0.1~5.0の関係を満たすことが好ましく、0.1~3.5の関係を満たすことがより好ましく、0.1~1.0の関係を満たすことがさらに好ましい。
上記比を0.1以上とすることにより、転写層20の表面に凸部24を基礎とする追従突出部25を形成しやすくできる。また、上記比を5.0以下とすることにより、荷重により凸部24が変形しにくく、位置合わせの精度を維持しやすくできる。 It is preferable that theconvex portion 24 and the transfer layer 20 described later satisfy the relationship of [the height of the convex portion / the thickness of the transfer layer] of 0.1 to 5.0, preferably 0.1 to 3.5. It is more preferable to satisfy the relationship, and it is further preferable to satisfy the relationship of 0.1 to 1.0.
By setting the ratio to 0.1 or more, it is possible to easily form the trackingprotrusion 25 based on the protrusion 24 on the surface of the transfer layer 20. Further, by setting the ratio to 5.0 or less, the convex portion 24 is not easily deformed by a load, and the alignment accuracy can be easily maintained.
上記比を0.1以上とすることにより、転写層20の表面に凸部24を基礎とする追従突出部25を形成しやすくできる。また、上記比を5.0以下とすることにより、荷重により凸部24が変形しにくく、位置合わせの精度を維持しやすくできる。 It is preferable that the
By setting the ratio to 0.1 or more, it is possible to easily form the tracking
本実施形態の転写シート100は、第2領域R2を2以上有していてもよい。第2領域R2を2以上有する場合、各領域の役割を変えることが好ましい。例えば、複数の第2領域R2を有する場合、いずれか一方で幅方向の位置合わせを行い、他方で流れ方向の位置合わせを行うように構成することが好ましい。第2領域R2を上述のように構成することにより、幅方向及び流れ方向の両方向の位置合わせが可能となり、位置合わせの精度を高めることができる。
本実施形態の転写シート100は、図27に示すように、第2領域R2が第1領域R1の両側に設けられており、位置合わせ用パターン部(アライメントマーク)ALが凹凸部5の両側に設けられていることが好ましい。位置合わせ用パターン部ALが凹凸部5の両側に設けられていることにより、転写シート100の巻き返し回数に関わらず、凹凸部5に対する位置合わせ用パターン部ALの幅方向の位置が変更することがなく、位置合わせの精度を高めることができ、生産性を向上することができる。Transfer sheet 100 of the present embodiment may have a second region R 2 of two or more. If a second region R 2 of two or more, it is preferable to change the role of each area. For example, when having a plurality of second regions R 2, either one aligns the width direction, it is preferably configured to perform the alignment of the flow direction in the other. By configuring the second region R 2 as described above, it is possible to align in both directions in the width direction and the flow direction, thereby improving the accuracy of alignment.
In thetransfer sheet 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, the second region R 2 is provided on both sides of the first region R 1 , and the alignment pattern portion (alignment mark) AL is the uneven portion 5. It is preferable to be provided on both sides. Since the alignment pattern portion AL is provided on both sides of the uneven portion 5, the position in the width direction of the alignment pattern portion AL with respect to the uneven portion 5 can be changed regardless of the number of times the transfer sheet 100 is rewound. Therefore, the alignment accuracy can be increased, and the productivity can be improved.
本実施形態の転写シート100は、図27に示すように、第2領域R2が第1領域R1の両側に設けられており、位置合わせ用パターン部(アライメントマーク)ALが凹凸部5の両側に設けられていることが好ましい。位置合わせ用パターン部ALが凹凸部5の両側に設けられていることにより、転写シート100の巻き返し回数に関わらず、凹凸部5に対する位置合わせ用パターン部ALの幅方向の位置が変更することがなく、位置合わせの精度を高めることができ、生産性を向上することができる。
In the
第2領域R2は、被転写物に転写し、加飾成形品を得た段階では除去することが好ましい。第2領域R2を除去するタイミングとしては、例えば、(1)転写シート100を長尺にスリットする工程時、(2)転写シート100を枚葉に型抜きする工程時、(3)転写シート100を被転写物に転写した後のトリミング工程時等が挙げられる。転写層20を被転写物の正確な位置に転写する観点からは、(3)のタイミングで第2領域R2を除去することが好ましい。
The second region R 2 are transferred to the transfer target, preferably be removed at the stage to obtain a decorated molded article. The timing of removing the second region R 2, for example, (1) during the step of slitting the transfer sheet 100 to the long, (2) during the step of stamping the transfer sheet 100 to the sheet, (3) transfer sheet For example, a trimming process after 100 is transferred to a transfer object. The transfer layer 20 from the viewpoint of transferring the exact position of the object to be transferred, it is preferable to remove the second region R 2 at the timing of (3).
(離型層)
転写シート100の離型シート10は、被転写物に密着した際に転写層20との界面で剥離可能に形成されている。離型性を向上させるため、離型シート10は、転写層20と接する側の面の少なくとも一部に離型層13を有することが好ましい。また、転写シート100の面内の離型性の均一化の観点からは、図26に示すように、離型シート10は、転写層20と接する側の面の全面に離型層13を有することが好ましい。 (Release layer)
Therelease sheet 10 of the transfer sheet 100 is formed so as to be peelable at the interface with the transfer layer 20 when it is in close contact with the transfer object. In order to improve the releasability, the release sheet 10 preferably has a release layer 13 on at least a part of the surface in contact with the transfer layer 20. Further, from the viewpoint of uniform release property within the surface of the transfer sheet 100, the release sheet 10 has a release layer 13 on the entire surface in contact with the transfer layer 20, as shown in FIG. It is preferable.
転写シート100の離型シート10は、被転写物に密着した際に転写層20との界面で剥離可能に形成されている。離型性を向上させるため、離型シート10は、転写層20と接する側の面の少なくとも一部に離型層13を有することが好ましい。また、転写シート100の面内の離型性の均一化の観点からは、図26に示すように、離型シート10は、転写層20と接する側の面の全面に離型層13を有することが好ましい。 (Release layer)
The
第1領域R1に凹凸部5を有する場合、該凹凸部5上に離型層13が形成されることで、凹凸が緩和され、加飾成形品の表面に高周波成分の少ない凹凸形状を形成することができ、加飾成形品の白化及びギラツキを抑制できる。
When the first region R 1 has the concavo-convex portion 5, the release layer 13 is formed on the concavo-convex portion 5 to relieve the concavo-convex shape and form a concavo-convex shape with less high-frequency components on the surface of the decorative molded product. It is possible to suppress whitening and glare of the decorative molded product.
離型層13は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。
The release layer 13 may be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
(その他の層)
離型シート10は、その他の層を有していてもよい。
その他の層としては、帯電防止層が挙げられる。離型シート10は、帯電防止層を有することにより、離型シートを剥離する際の剥離帯電を抑制でき、転写の作業性を向上できる。 (Other layers)
Therelease sheet 10 may have other layers.
Examples of other layers include an antistatic layer. When therelease sheet 10 has an antistatic layer, it is possible to suppress the release charge when the release sheet is peeled off, and to improve the transfer workability.
離型シート10は、その他の層を有していてもよい。
その他の層としては、帯電防止層が挙げられる。離型シート10は、帯電防止層を有することにより、離型シートを剥離する際の剥離帯電を抑制でき、転写の作業性を向上できる。 (Other layers)
The
Examples of other layers include an antistatic layer. When the
(帯電防止層)
帯電防止層は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。 (Antistatic layer)
As the antistatic layer, the same materials as those described in the first embodiment can be used.
帯電防止層は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。 (Antistatic layer)
As the antistatic layer, the same materials as those described in the first embodiment can be used.
<転写層>
離型シート10上の少なくとも一部には、転写層20が形成される。
転写層20は、被転写物に転写される層であり、例えば、図26に示すように、離型シート10に近い側から順に、保護層21及び接着剤層22を有する。転写層20は、表面に凸部24を基礎とする追従突出部25を有する。
転写層20は、図26に示すように、離型シート10の全面に形成することが好ましい。 <Transfer layer>
Atransfer layer 20 is formed on at least a part of the release sheet 10.
Thetransfer layer 20 is a layer to be transferred to the transfer object, and includes, for example, a protective layer 21 and an adhesive layer 22 in order from the side close to the release sheet 10 as shown in FIG. The transfer layer 20 has a tracking protrusion 25 based on the protrusion 24 on the surface.
Thetransfer layer 20 is preferably formed on the entire surface of the release sheet 10 as shown in FIG.
離型シート10上の少なくとも一部には、転写層20が形成される。
転写層20は、被転写物に転写される層であり、例えば、図26に示すように、離型シート10に近い側から順に、保護層21及び接着剤層22を有する。転写層20は、表面に凸部24を基礎とする追従突出部25を有する。
転写層20は、図26に示すように、離型シート10の全面に形成することが好ましい。 <Transfer layer>
A
The
The
転写層20を構成する保護層21及び接着剤層22等の各層は、例えば、各層の構成成分を含むインキを調整し、離型シート10上に、グラビアコート法、ロールコート法等のコート法、グラビア印刷法、スクリーン印刷法等の印刷法により塗布、乾燥し、必要に応じて電離放射線を照射して硬化することにより形成できる。
転写層20を形成するための転写層を形成するためのインキは、凸部24を基礎として追従する追従突出部25を形成しやすくする観点から、いずれも溶剤割合が90質量%以下であることが好ましい。 Each layer such as theprotective layer 21 and the adhesive layer 22 constituting the transfer layer 20 is prepared by, for example, adjusting ink containing the constituent components of each layer and applying a coating method such as a gravure coating method or a roll coating method on the release sheet 10. It can be formed by coating and drying by a printing method such as gravure printing or screen printing, and curing by irradiation with ionizing radiation as required.
The ink for forming the transfer layer for forming thetransfer layer 20 has a solvent ratio of 90% by mass or less from the viewpoint of facilitating formation of the follow-up protrusion 25 that follows the protrusion 24. Is preferred.
転写層20を形成するための転写層を形成するためのインキは、凸部24を基礎として追従する追従突出部25を形成しやすくする観点から、いずれも溶剤割合が90質量%以下であることが好ましい。 Each layer such as the
The ink for forming the transfer layer for forming the
追従突出部25の高さHは、1.0~10.0μmであることが好ましく、1.5~9.0μmであることがより好ましく、2.0~8.0μmであることがさらに好ましい。
追従突出部25の高さHを1.0μm以上とすることにより、光電センサーで行うアライメントにおいて、凸部と凹部の光量差の検出が容易となる。また、追従突出部25の高さHを10.0μm以下とすることにより、荷重により追従突出部25が変形しにくく、位置合わせの精度を維持しやすくできる。
追従突出部25の高さHは、全て同一としなくてもよい。しかしながら、光電センサーで行うアライメントにおいて、凸部と凹部の光量差の検出が一様で容易となる観点から、追従突出部25の高さHを全て同一又は近似値とすることが好ましい。
なお、本明細書において、追従突出部25の高さHとは、追従突出部25を形成する構造体を、構造体の延伸方向に直交する方向で切断した断面の中央部の高さのことをいう。 The height H of the follow-upprotrusion 25 is preferably 1.0 to 10.0 μm, more preferably 1.5 to 9.0 μm, and even more preferably 2.0 to 8.0 μm. .
By setting the height H of the follow-upprojection 25 to 1.0 μm or more, it becomes easy to detect the light amount difference between the convex portion and the concave portion in the alignment performed by the photoelectric sensor. Further, by setting the height H of the tracking protrusion 25 to 10.0 μm or less, the tracking protrusion 25 is not easily deformed by a load, and the alignment accuracy can be easily maintained.
The heights H of the followingprotrusions 25 need not be the same. However, in the alignment performed by the photoelectric sensor, it is preferable that the heights H of the follow-up protrusions 25 are all the same or approximate values from the viewpoint that the detection of the light amount difference between the protrusions and the recesses is uniform and easy.
In the present specification, the height H of the follow-upprotrusion 25 refers to the height of the central portion of a cross section obtained by cutting the structure forming the follow-up protrusion 25 in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the structure. Say.
追従突出部25の高さHを1.0μm以上とすることにより、光電センサーで行うアライメントにおいて、凸部と凹部の光量差の検出が容易となる。また、追従突出部25の高さHを10.0μm以下とすることにより、荷重により追従突出部25が変形しにくく、位置合わせの精度を維持しやすくできる。
追従突出部25の高さHは、全て同一としなくてもよい。しかしながら、光電センサーで行うアライメントにおいて、凸部と凹部の光量差の検出が一様で容易となる観点から、追従突出部25の高さHを全て同一又は近似値とすることが好ましい。
なお、本明細書において、追従突出部25の高さHとは、追従突出部25を形成する構造体を、構造体の延伸方向に直交する方向で切断した断面の中央部の高さのことをいう。 The height H of the follow-up
By setting the height H of the follow-up
The heights H of the following
In the present specification, the height H of the follow-up
(保護層)
保護層21は、転写層20が転写シート100から被転写物へと転写された後は、摩耗、光、薬品等から加飾成形品を保護する役割を有する。
離型シート10の第1領域R1内に凹凸部5を有する場合、該凹凸形状と相補的な形状を有する保護層21が加飾成形品の表面に付与される。また、離型シート10の第1領域R1が略平滑な場合、表面が略平滑な保護層21が加飾成形品の表面に付与され、加飾成形品の光沢を高くすることができる。 (Protective layer)
Theprotective layer 21 has a role of protecting the decorative molded product from abrasion, light, chemicals, and the like after the transfer layer 20 is transferred from the transfer sheet 100 to the transfer target.
If having a concave-convex portion 5 release sheets first region R 1 of 10, protective layer 21 having a complementary shape to the irregular shape is imparted to the surface of the decorative molded article. Further, when the first region R 1 of the release sheet 10 is substantially smooth, it can be surface substantially smooth protective layer 21 is applied to the surface of the decorative molded article, increasing the gloss of the decorative molded article.
保護層21は、転写層20が転写シート100から被転写物へと転写された後は、摩耗、光、薬品等から加飾成形品を保護する役割を有する。
離型シート10の第1領域R1内に凹凸部5を有する場合、該凹凸形状と相補的な形状を有する保護層21が加飾成形品の表面に付与される。また、離型シート10の第1領域R1が略平滑な場合、表面が略平滑な保護層21が加飾成形品の表面に付与され、加飾成形品の光沢を高くすることができる。 (Protective layer)
The
If having a concave-
保護層21は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。
保護層21を形成するための転写層形成用インキは、凸部24を基礎として追従する追従突出部25を形成しやすくする観点から、溶剤割合が60~90質量%以下であることが好ましく、65~90質量%であることがより好ましく、70~90質量%であることがさらに好ましい。 Theprotective layer 21 can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
The transfer layer forming ink for forming theprotective layer 21 preferably has a solvent ratio of 60 to 90% by mass or less from the viewpoint of facilitating the formation of the follow-up protrusion 25 that follows the protrusion 24. It is more preferably 65 to 90% by mass, and further preferably 70 to 90% by mass.
保護層21を形成するための転写層形成用インキは、凸部24を基礎として追従する追従突出部25を形成しやすくする観点から、溶剤割合が60~90質量%以下であることが好ましく、65~90質量%であることがより好ましく、70~90質量%であることがさらに好ましい。 The
The transfer layer forming ink for forming the
(接着剤層)
接着剤層22は、樹脂成形体等の被転写物と、転写層20との接着性を良好にして、転写作業を良好にする役割を有する。 (Adhesive layer)
Theadhesive layer 22 has a role of improving the transfer work by improving the adhesion between the transfer object 20 such as a resin molded body and the transfer layer 20.
接着剤層22は、樹脂成形体等の被転写物と、転写層20との接着性を良好にして、転写作業を良好にする役割を有する。 (Adhesive layer)
The
転写層20の表面には、凸部24を基礎とする追従突出部25を有する位置合わせ用パターン部ALを備える。転写層20の表面を構成するのが接着剤層22である場合は、接着剤層22の表面に、凸部24を基礎とする追従突出部25を有する位置合わせ用パターン部ALを備える。追従突出部25は、離型シート10に設けられた凸部24上に、保護層21及び接着剤層22等からなる転写層20を設けることで、凸部24に追従して形成される突出する部位である。
The surface of the transfer layer 20 is provided with an alignment pattern portion AL having a follow-up protruding portion 25 based on the convex portion 24. When the adhesive layer 22 constitutes the surface of the transfer layer 20, an alignment pattern portion AL having a tracking protrusion 25 based on the protrusion 24 is provided on the surface of the adhesive layer 22. The following protrusion 25 is formed by following the protrusion 24 by providing the transfer layer 20 including the protective layer 21 and the adhesive layer 22 on the protrusion 24 provided on the release sheet 10. It is a part to do.
接着剤層22は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。
接着剤層22を形成するための接着剤層形成用インキは、凸部24を基礎として追従する追従突出部25を形成しやすくする観点から、溶剤割合が80~90%以下であることが好ましく、85~90質量%であることがより好ましい。 Theadhesive layer 22 can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
The ink for forming the adhesive layer for forming theadhesive layer 22 preferably has a solvent ratio of 80 to 90% or less from the viewpoint of facilitating the formation of the follow-up protrusion 25 that follows the protrusion 24. More preferably, it is 85 to 90% by mass.
接着剤層22を形成するための接着剤層形成用インキは、凸部24を基礎として追従する追従突出部25を形成しやすくする観点から、溶剤割合が80~90%以下であることが好ましく、85~90質量%であることがより好ましい。 The
The ink for forming the adhesive layer for forming the
接着剤層22は、アンカーコート層及び接着層の2種類の層を含む構成であってもよい。アンカーコート層及び接着層を含む場合において、アンカーコート層の厚さは、0.5~10μmであることが好ましく、1.0~8.0μmであることがより好ましく、2.0~6.0μmであることがさらに好ましい。そして、接着層の厚さは、0.1~10μmであることが好ましく、0.5~8.0μmであることがより好ましく、1.0~5.0μmであることがさらに好ましい。
The adhesive layer 22 may be configured to include two types of layers, an anchor coat layer and an adhesive layer. When the anchor coat layer and the adhesive layer are included, the thickness of the anchor coat layer is preferably 0.5 to 10 μm, more preferably 1.0 to 8.0 μm, and 2.0 to 6. More preferably, it is 0 μm. The thickness of the adhesive layer is preferably from 0.1 to 10 μm, more preferably from 0.5 to 8.0 μm, and even more preferably from 1.0 to 5.0 μm.
(着色層)
本発明は、着色層なしでも位置合わせ可能だが、図30に示すように、追従突出部25上に着色層30を設けてもよい。
着色層30は、転写層20の表面に備える位置合わせ用パターン部ALの追従突出部25上に設けられる。着色層30は、位置合わせ用パターン部AL内において、着色層30がある箇所とない箇所との光透過率又は光反射率のコントラストを生じさせる役割を有する。
着色層30は、転写シート100を平面方向から観察した際に、図31に示すように、転写層20(接着剤層22)の位置合わせ用パターン部ALの少なくとも一部に位置するように配置することが好ましい。 (Colored layer)
Although the present invention can be aligned without a colored layer, thecolored layer 30 may be provided on the tracking protrusion 25 as shown in FIG.
Thecolored layer 30 is provided on the following protrusion 25 of the alignment pattern portion AL provided on the surface of the transfer layer 20. The colored layer 30 has a role of causing a contrast of light transmittance or light reflectance between a portion where the colored layer 30 is present and a portion where the colored layer 30 is not present in the alignment pattern portion AL.
When thetransfer sheet 100 is observed from the plane direction, the colored layer 30 is disposed so as to be positioned at least at a part of the alignment pattern portion AL of the transfer layer 20 (adhesive layer 22) as shown in FIG. It is preferable to do.
本発明は、着色層なしでも位置合わせ可能だが、図30に示すように、追従突出部25上に着色層30を設けてもよい。
着色層30は、転写層20の表面に備える位置合わせ用パターン部ALの追従突出部25上に設けられる。着色層30は、位置合わせ用パターン部AL内において、着色層30がある箇所とない箇所との光透過率又は光反射率のコントラストを生じさせる役割を有する。
着色層30は、転写シート100を平面方向から観察した際に、図31に示すように、転写層20(接着剤層22)の位置合わせ用パターン部ALの少なくとも一部に位置するように配置することが好ましい。 (Colored layer)
Although the present invention can be aligned without a colored layer, the
The
When the
着色層30は、図32に示すように、ライン部分30a、ベタ塗り中心部分30b、ベタ塗り部分31の3部位から構成されていることが好ましい。
ライン部分30aと、ベタ塗り中心部分30bとでは、光透過率又は光反射率が相違し、光透過率又は光反射率のコントラストを利用して、任意の工程において転写シート100の位置合わせが可能となる。なお、光透過率は、正透過方向の透過率、拡散透過率及び全透過率のいずれを利用してもよい。同様に、光反射率は、正反射方向の透過率、拡散反射率及び全反射率の何れを利用してもよい。
第2領域R2の着色層30におけるライン部分30aの面積の割合は、15~85%であることが好ましく、20~80%であることがより好ましく、30~70%であることがさらに好ましい。ライン部分30aの面積の割合を上記範囲にすることにより、ベタ塗り中心部分30b及びベタ塗り部分31との光透過率又は光反射率のコントラストを明りょうにしやすくでき、位置合わせの精度を高めることができる。
第2領域R2のライン部分30a及びベタ塗り中心部分30b以外は、ベタ塗り部分31であることが好ましい。ベタ塗り部分31は、第2領域R2のライン部分30aより幅が広いことが好ましく、幅が異なることで位置合わせ用パターン部ALをより確認しやすくすることができる。 As shown in FIG. 32, thecolored layer 30 is preferably composed of three portions: a line portion 30 a, a solid coating center portion 30 b, and a solid coating portion 31.
Theline portion 30a and the solid coating center portion 30b have different light transmittance or light reflectance, and the transfer sheet 100 can be aligned in an arbitrary process using the contrast of the light transmittance or light reflectance. It becomes. The light transmittance may be any of transmittance in the normal transmission direction, diffuse transmittance, and total transmittance. Similarly, the light reflectance may be any of transmittance in the regular reflection direction, diffuse reflectance, and total reflectance.
The ratio of the area of theline portion 30a in the colored layer 30 in the second region R 2 is preferably 15 to 85%, more preferably 20 to 80%, more preferably 30 to 70% . By setting the ratio of the area of the line portion 30a within the above range, the contrast of the light transmittance or the light reflectance between the solid coating center portion 30b and the solid coating portion 31 can be easily clarified, and the alignment accuracy can be improved. Can do.
Except the second region R 2 of theline portion 30a and the solid fill central portion 30b, it is preferable that the solid color portion 31. Areafill portion 31 may be wider than the second region R 2 of the line portion 30a is wide is preferably easier to see more alignment pattern portion AL in different width.
ライン部分30aと、ベタ塗り中心部分30bとでは、光透過率又は光反射率が相違し、光透過率又は光反射率のコントラストを利用して、任意の工程において転写シート100の位置合わせが可能となる。なお、光透過率は、正透過方向の透過率、拡散透過率及び全透過率のいずれを利用してもよい。同様に、光反射率は、正反射方向の透過率、拡散反射率及び全反射率の何れを利用してもよい。
第2領域R2の着色層30におけるライン部分30aの面積の割合は、15~85%であることが好ましく、20~80%であることがより好ましく、30~70%であることがさらに好ましい。ライン部分30aの面積の割合を上記範囲にすることにより、ベタ塗り中心部分30b及びベタ塗り部分31との光透過率又は光反射率のコントラストを明りょうにしやすくでき、位置合わせの精度を高めることができる。
第2領域R2のライン部分30a及びベタ塗り中心部分30b以外は、ベタ塗り部分31であることが好ましい。ベタ塗り部分31は、第2領域R2のライン部分30aより幅が広いことが好ましく、幅が異なることで位置合わせ用パターン部ALをより確認しやすくすることができる。 As shown in FIG. 32, the
The
The ratio of the area of the
Except the second region R 2 of the
着色層30は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。
The colored layer 30 can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
着色層30は、例えば、溶融熱転写及び昇華熱転写等の転写法で、位置合わせ用パターン部ALの追従突出部25上に着色層形成用インキを転写することで形成することができる。着色層30を形成する転写法としては、箔チリ抑制の観点から溶融熱転写が特に好ましい。
また、着色層30は、グラビアリバース印刷、グラビア印刷等の印刷法で、位置合わせ用パターン部ALの追従突出部25上に着色層形成用インキを塗布した後、乾燥させることによっても形成することができる。着色層30を形成する印刷法としては、グラビアリバース印刷が特に好ましい。 Thecolored layer 30 can be formed, for example, by transferring the colored layer forming ink onto the following protrusion 25 of the alignment pattern portion AL by a transfer method such as fusion thermal transfer or sublimation thermal transfer. As a transfer method for forming the colored layer 30, fusion heat transfer is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing foil dust.
Thecolored layer 30 may also be formed by applying a colored layer forming ink on the follow-up protruding portion 25 of the alignment pattern portion AL and then drying by a printing method such as gravure reverse printing or gravure printing. Can do. As a printing method for forming the colored layer 30, gravure reverse printing is particularly preferable.
また、着色層30は、グラビアリバース印刷、グラビア印刷等の印刷法で、位置合わせ用パターン部ALの追従突出部25上に着色層形成用インキを塗布した後、乾燥させることによっても形成することができる。着色層30を形成する印刷法としては、グラビアリバース印刷が特に好ましい。 The
The
着色層30の厚さは、位置合わせのためのコントラストが得られる範囲で調整すればよいという観点から、0.3~5.0μmであることが好ましく、0.4~4.0μmであることがより好ましく、0.5~3.0μmであることがさらに好ましい。
The thickness of the colored layer 30 is preferably 0.3 to 5.0 μm, and preferably 0.4 to 4.0 μm, from the viewpoint that the contrast for alignment may be adjusted. Is more preferably 0.5 to 3.0 μm.
(その他の層)
転写層20は、その他の層を有していてもよい。
その他の層としては、例えば、アンカー層及び印刷層が挙げられる。 (Other layers)
Thetransfer layer 20 may have other layers.
Examples of other layers include an anchor layer and a printing layer.
転写層20は、その他の層を有していてもよい。
その他の層としては、例えば、アンカー層及び印刷層が挙げられる。 (Other layers)
The
Examples of other layers include an anchor layer and a printing layer.
(アンカー層)
アンカー層は、インモールド成形等の高温環境に置かれる場合において、耐熱性を向上させるために必要に応じて設けられる層である。アンカー層は、保護層21と接着剤層22との間に形成することが好ましい。 (Anchor layer)
The anchor layer is a layer provided as necessary to improve heat resistance when placed in a high temperature environment such as in-mold molding. The anchor layer is preferably formed between theprotective layer 21 and the adhesive layer 22.
アンカー層は、インモールド成形等の高温環境に置かれる場合において、耐熱性を向上させるために必要に応じて設けられる層である。アンカー層は、保護層21と接着剤層22との間に形成することが好ましい。 (Anchor layer)
The anchor layer is a layer provided as necessary to improve heat resistance when placed in a high temperature environment such as in-mold molding. The anchor layer is preferably formed between the
アンカー層は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。
The anchor layer can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
(印刷層)
転写層20は、さらに印刷層を有していてもよい。印刷層は、加飾成形品に所望の意匠性を付与する役割を有する。 (Print layer)
Thetransfer layer 20 may further have a printing layer. The printed layer has a role of imparting a desired design property to the decorative molded product.
転写層20は、さらに印刷層を有していてもよい。印刷層は、加飾成形品に所望の意匠性を付与する役割を有する。 (Print layer)
The
印刷層は、転写シート100を平面方向から観察した際に、第1領域R1内の少なくとも一部に位置するように配置することが好ましい。
また、印刷層の厚さ方向の位置は、接着剤層22上に配置してもよいし、接着剤層22と保護層21との間に配置してもよいし、保護層21と離型シート10との間に配置してもよい。印刷層の保護と、被転写物への接着性の観点からは、接着剤層22と保護層21との間に印刷層を配置することが好ましい。また、小ロット品への対応の観点からは、接着剤層22上に印刷層を配置することが好ましい。なお、接着剤層22上に印刷層を配置する場合、被転写物との接着性の均一化の観点から、印刷層の樹脂成分は、接着剤層22の樹脂成分と同系統の樹脂とすることが好ましく、同一の樹脂とすることがより好ましい。 Printed layer, when observed thetransfer sheet 100 from the planar direction, is preferably disposed so as to be positioned on at least a portion of the first region R 1.
Further, the position in the thickness direction of the printing layer may be disposed on theadhesive layer 22, may be disposed between the adhesive layer 22 and the protective layer 21, or may be disposed between the protective layer 21 and the release layer. You may arrange | position between the sheets. From the viewpoint of protection of the print layer and adhesion to the transfer object, it is preferable to dispose the print layer between the adhesive layer 22 and the protective layer 21. Moreover, it is preferable to arrange a printing layer on the adhesive layer 22 from the viewpoint of handling a small lot product. In addition, when arrange | positioning a printing layer on the adhesive bond layer 22, the resin component of a printing layer is made into resin of the same system as the resin component of the adhesive bond layer 22 from a viewpoint of equalization of adhesiveness with a to-be-transferred material. It is preferable to use the same resin.
また、印刷層の厚さ方向の位置は、接着剤層22上に配置してもよいし、接着剤層22と保護層21との間に配置してもよいし、保護層21と離型シート10との間に配置してもよい。印刷層の保護と、被転写物への接着性の観点からは、接着剤層22と保護層21との間に印刷層を配置することが好ましい。また、小ロット品への対応の観点からは、接着剤層22上に印刷層を配置することが好ましい。なお、接着剤層22上に印刷層を配置する場合、被転写物との接着性の均一化の観点から、印刷層の樹脂成分は、接着剤層22の樹脂成分と同系統の樹脂とすることが好ましく、同一の樹脂とすることがより好ましい。 Printed layer, when observed the
Further, the position in the thickness direction of the printing layer may be disposed on the
印刷層のパターンは任意であり、例えば、木目、石目、布目、砂目、円、四角形、多角形、幾何学模様、文字、ベタ印刷等が挙げられる。
The pattern of the printing layer is arbitrary, and examples thereof include wood grain, stone grain, cloth grain, sand grain, circle, square, polygon, geometric pattern, character, solid printing, and the like.
印刷層は、第1の実施の形態に記載したものと同様のものを用いることができる。
The printing layer can be the same as that described in the first embodiment.
なお、印刷層を形成する際、位置合わせが重要となるが、位置合わせ用パターン部ALを利用して位置合わせを行うことによって、印刷層を正確な位置に形成することができる。
Note that alignment is important when forming the print layer, but the print layer can be formed at an accurate position by performing alignment using the alignment pattern portion AL.
[転写シートの製造方法]
本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る転写シート100の製造方法は、支持体1上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む樹脂層形成用インキを塗布し、未硬化の樹脂層2を形成する工程と、第1領域R1及び第2領域R2と相補的な形状を有する版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層2を賦形すると同時に、電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層2を硬化させる工程と、硬化させた樹脂層2上に、離型層形成用インキを塗布し、離型層13を形成する工程と、離型層13上に、保護層形成用インキを塗布し、保護層21を形成する工程と、保護層21上に、接着剤層形成用インキを塗布し、接着剤層22を形成する工程と、を含む。 [Transfer sheet manufacturing method]
In the method for producing atransfer sheet 100 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, a resin layer forming ink containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition is applied onto a support 1, and an uncured resin layer 2 is applied. Using the plate having a shape complementary to the forming step and the first region R 1 and the second region R 2 , the uncured resin layer 2 was shaped and simultaneously irradiated with ionizing radiation. A step of curing the resin layer 2, a step of applying a release layer forming ink on the cured resin layer 2 to form a release layer 13, and a protective layer forming ink on the release layer 13 And forming the protective layer 21 and applying the adhesive layer forming ink on the protective layer 21 to form the adhesive layer 22.
本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る転写シート100の製造方法は、支持体1上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む樹脂層形成用インキを塗布し、未硬化の樹脂層2を形成する工程と、第1領域R1及び第2領域R2と相補的な形状を有する版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層2を賦形すると同時に、電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層2を硬化させる工程と、硬化させた樹脂層2上に、離型層形成用インキを塗布し、離型層13を形成する工程と、離型層13上に、保護層形成用インキを塗布し、保護層21を形成する工程と、保護層21上に、接着剤層形成用インキを塗布し、接着剤層22を形成する工程と、を含む。 [Transfer sheet manufacturing method]
In the method for producing a
本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る転写シート100の製造方法は、接着剤層22における第2領域R2に相当する位置に形成された追従突出部25上に、着色層形成用インキを塗布し、着色層30を形成する工程をさらに含むことが好ましい。着色層30を形成する工程をさらに含むことで、追従突出部25上に着色層30を有する転写層20とすることができる。
In the method for manufacturing the transfer sheet 100 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the colored layer forming ink is applied on the following protrusion 25 formed at a position corresponding to the second region R 2 in the adhesive layer 22. It is preferable to further include a step of applying and forming the colored layer 30. By further including the process of forming the colored layer 30, it can be set as the transfer layer 20 which has the colored layer 30 on the tracking protrusion part 25. FIG.
第1領域R1及び第2領域R2と相補的な形状を有する版は、例えば、エッチング、サンドブラスト、切削及びレーザー加工、あるいはこれらの組み合わせなどによって、シリンダーの表面を所望の形状に彫刻することにより得ることができる。あるいは、レーザー彫刻、光造形等によって長尺の雄型の版(第1領域R1及び第2領域R2と同一の形状を有する版)を作製し、これを反転したものをシリンダーの表面に巻き付けることによって得ることができる。これら版の表面は、クロム等で硬質メッキ処理することが好ましい。
A plate having a shape complementary to the first region R 1 and the second region R 2 is formed by engraving the surface of the cylinder into a desired shape by, for example, etching, sand blasting, cutting and laser processing, or a combination thereof. Can be obtained. Alternatively, laser engraving, by stereolithography or the like to prepare a plate of male long (plate having a first region R 1 and the second region R 2 and the same shape), a material obtained by inverting it to the surface of the cylinder It can be obtained by wrapping. The surface of these plates is preferably hard-plated with chromium or the like.
転写シート100は、製造効率の観点から、多面付けで製造することが好ましい。このように多面付けで製造された転写シート100は、長尺の転写シート、あるいは枚葉の転写シートとして転写工程が行われる。
The transfer sheet 100 is preferably manufactured with multiple impositions from the viewpoint of manufacturing efficiency. The transfer sheet 100 manufactured in such a multi-face manner is subjected to a transfer process as a long transfer sheet or a single sheet transfer sheet.
上記工程により製造された転写シート100は、位置合わせ用のパターンとしての追従突出部25を凸部として、追従突出部25の端部同士の間を凹部として、凸部と凹部の光量差の検出が容易となり、位置合わせをしやすくできる。
The transfer sheet 100 manufactured by the above process detects the difference in light quantity between the convex portion and the concave portion, with the following protrusion 25 as a pattern for alignment being a convex portion, and between the end portions of the following protruding portion 25 as a concave portion. This makes it easier to align.
位置合わせを行う任意の工程としては、例えば、転写シート100を長尺にスリットする工程、転写シート100を枚葉に型抜きする工程、及び転写シート100を被転写物に転写する工程等が挙げられる。
Examples of the optional step of aligning include a step of slitting the transfer sheet 100 in a long length, a step of punching the transfer sheet 100 into a sheet, and a step of transferring the transfer sheet 100 to a transfer object. It is done.
位置合わせ用のパターンを読み取る工程としては、光電センサーを用いて位置合わせ用のパターンとしての追従突出部25を凸部として、追従突出部25の端部同士の間を凹部として、凸部と凹部の光量差の検出する第1アライメント工程と、画像センサーを用いて位置合わせ用パターンを検知する第2アライメント工程とを含むことが好ましい。
第1アライメント工程では、回帰反射型のレーザセンサー(光電センサー)によって、凸部と凹部の光量差の検出することで、位置合わせ用のパターン位置を検知することができる。凸部では光が散乱することで検出する光量が減少する。第1アライメント工程は、転写シート100が流れているときでも行うことが可能であり、位置合わせ用のパターン位置を読み取るための簡易的な位置合わせ工程である。
第2アライメント工程では、第1アライメント工程で検出した位置合わせ用のパターン位置に対して、光源から光を照射し、位置合わせ用のパターンでの正反射した光をカメラ等の画像センサーによって測定することで、凸部と凹部の境界を検知することができる。検知した凸部と凹部の境界に基づいて、転写シート100の位置合わせを行うことができる。第2アライメント工程は、基本的に、転写シート100を枚葉に型抜きする工程及び転写シート100を被転写物に転写する工程等の転写シート100が止まっているときに実施する工程であり、位置合わせ用のパターンを正確に読み取る位置合わせ工程である。 As a process of reading the pattern for alignment, the trackingprotrusion 25 as the pattern for alignment using the photoelectric sensor as a convex part, and between the end parts of the tracking protrusion 25 as a concave part, the convex part and the concave part It is preferable to include a first alignment step for detecting a difference in the amount of light and a second alignment step for detecting an alignment pattern using an image sensor.
In the first alignment step, the pattern position for alignment can be detected by detecting a light amount difference between the convex portion and the concave portion by a retroreflective laser sensor (photoelectric sensor). The amount of light detected by scattering of light at the convex portion decreases. The first alignment step can be performed even when thetransfer sheet 100 is flowing, and is a simple alignment step for reading the pattern position for alignment.
In the second alignment step, light is emitted from the light source to the alignment pattern position detected in the first alignment step, and the specularly reflected light in the alignment pattern is measured by an image sensor such as a camera. Thus, the boundary between the convex portion and the concave portion can be detected. Based on the detected boundary between the convex and concave portions, thetransfer sheet 100 can be aligned. The second alignment step is basically a step that is performed when the transfer sheet 100 is stopped, such as a step of punching the transfer sheet 100 into a sheet and a step of transferring the transfer sheet 100 to a transfer object. This is an alignment process for accurately reading a pattern for alignment.
第1アライメント工程では、回帰反射型のレーザセンサー(光電センサー)によって、凸部と凹部の光量差の検出することで、位置合わせ用のパターン位置を検知することができる。凸部では光が散乱することで検出する光量が減少する。第1アライメント工程は、転写シート100が流れているときでも行うことが可能であり、位置合わせ用のパターン位置を読み取るための簡易的な位置合わせ工程である。
第2アライメント工程では、第1アライメント工程で検出した位置合わせ用のパターン位置に対して、光源から光を照射し、位置合わせ用のパターンでの正反射した光をカメラ等の画像センサーによって測定することで、凸部と凹部の境界を検知することができる。検知した凸部と凹部の境界に基づいて、転写シート100の位置合わせを行うことができる。第2アライメント工程は、基本的に、転写シート100を枚葉に型抜きする工程及び転写シート100を被転写物に転写する工程等の転写シート100が止まっているときに実施する工程であり、位置合わせ用のパターンを正確に読み取る位置合わせ工程である。 As a process of reading the pattern for alignment, the tracking
In the first alignment step, the pattern position for alignment can be detected by detecting a light amount difference between the convex portion and the concave portion by a retroreflective laser sensor (photoelectric sensor). The amount of light detected by scattering of light at the convex portion decreases. The first alignment step can be performed even when the
In the second alignment step, light is emitted from the light source to the alignment pattern position detected in the first alignment step, and the specularly reflected light in the alignment pattern is measured by an image sensor such as a camera. Thus, the boundary between the convex portion and the concave portion can be detected. Based on the detected boundary between the convex and concave portions, the
位置合わせ用のパターン印刷である着色層30による光透過率によって位置合わせを行う場合では、例えば、転写シート100の下方に設置した光源と、転写シート100の上方の光源に正対する位置に設置した画像センサーとにより、検知することで位置合わせを行うことができる。
位置合わせ用のパターン印刷である着色層30による光反射率によって位置合わせを行う場合では、例えば、転写シート100の上方に任意の角度で設置した光源及び画像センサーにより、検知することができる。 In the case where the alignment is performed by the light transmittance by thecolored layer 30 that is the pattern printing for alignment, for example, the light source installed below the transfer sheet 100 and the light source above the transfer sheet 100 are installed at positions facing the light source. Position detection can be performed by detection using an image sensor.
In the case where the alignment is performed by the light reflectance by thecolored layer 30 that is the pattern printing for alignment, for example, the detection can be performed by a light source and an image sensor installed above the transfer sheet 100 at an arbitrary angle.
位置合わせ用のパターン印刷である着色層30による光反射率によって位置合わせを行う場合では、例えば、転写シート100の上方に任意の角度で設置した光源及び画像センサーにより、検知することができる。 In the case where the alignment is performed by the light transmittance by the
In the case where the alignment is performed by the light reflectance by the
[加飾成形品の製造方法]
本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る加飾成形品の製造方法は、上述した本発明の転写シート100の転写層20を被転写物に転写する工程と、転写シート100の離型シート10を剥離する工程と、を有する。
被転写物としては、樹脂成形体等が挙げられる。 [Method of manufacturing decorative molded product]
The method for manufacturing a decorative molded product according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention includes a step of transferring thetransfer layer 20 of the transfer sheet 100 of the present invention described above to a transfer object, and a release sheet 10 of the transfer sheet 100. And a step of peeling.
Examples of the material to be transferred include a resin molded body.
本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る加飾成形品の製造方法は、上述した本発明の転写シート100の転写層20を被転写物に転写する工程と、転写シート100の離型シート10を剥離する工程と、を有する。
被転写物としては、樹脂成形体等が挙げられる。 [Method of manufacturing decorative molded product]
The method for manufacturing a decorative molded product according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention includes a step of transferring the
Examples of the material to be transferred include a resin molded body.
上記工程により製造された加飾成形品は、位置合わせ用のパターンの読み取り性を向上し、被転写物の正確な位置に転写層を転写できるので、転写した後の外観を良好にすることができる。
The decorative molded product manufactured by the above process improves the readability of the pattern for alignment and can transfer the transfer layer to the exact position of the transfer object, so that the appearance after transfer can be improved. it can.
加飾成形品の製造方法には、公知の転写法を用いることができる。例えば、(i)予め成形された被転写物に転写シートを貼着し、該転写シートの転写層を転写した後、該転写シートの離型シートを剥離する方法、(ii)平板状の被転写物に転写シートを貼着し、該転写シートの転写層を転写した後、該転写シートの離型シートを剥離し、その後、転写層が積層された被転写物を成形する方法、(iii)被転写物を射出成形する際に転写シートと一体化させ、その後、転写シートの離型シートを剥離する方法〔インモールド成形(射出成形同時転写加飾法)〕等が挙げられる。中でも、インモールド成形(射出成形同時転写加飾法)によれば、三次元曲面などの複雑な表面形状を有する樹脂成形体に加飾成形することができる。
A known transfer method can be used for the method of manufacturing the decorative molded product. For example, (i) a method in which a transfer sheet is attached to a preliminarily molded transfer object, the transfer layer of the transfer sheet is transferred, and then the release sheet of the transfer sheet is peeled off; A method of sticking a transfer sheet to a transfer material, transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet, peeling off the release sheet of the transfer sheet, and then forming a transfer material on which the transfer layer is laminated, (iii) ) A method of integrating a transfer material with a transfer sheet at the time of injection molding and then peeling the release sheet of the transfer sheet [in-mold molding (injection molding simultaneous transfer decoration method)]. Among them, according to in-mold molding (injection molding simultaneous transfer decoration method), it is possible to perform decorative molding on a resin molded body having a complicated surface shape such as a three-dimensional curved surface.
インモールド成形による本発明の転写シートを用いる加飾成形品の製造方法の一実施態様としては、(1)上記の転写シートの転写層側をインモールド成形用金型の内側に向けて配置する工程と、(2)上記インモールド成形用金型内に樹脂を射出注入する工程と、
(3)上記転写シートと、上記樹脂とを一体化させて、樹脂成形体(被転写物)の表面上に上記転写シートの転写層を転写する工程と、(4)樹脂成形体(被転写物)を金型から取り出した後、上記転写シートの離型シートを剥離する工程と、を有するものが挙げられる。
(1)工程の配置の際に、第2領域R2が残存していれば、第2領域R2の位置合わせ用パターン部を利用して、金型の正確な位置に転写シートを配置することができる。
なお、(4)工程の後は、必要に応じて、不要部をトリミング(除去)することが好ましい。(4)工程の後に第2領域R2が残存している場合、該領域をトリミング(除去)することが好ましい。 As one embodiment of the method for producing a decorative molded product using the transfer sheet of the present invention by in-mold molding, (1) the transfer layer side of the above-mentioned transfer sheet is arranged facing the inside of the mold for in-mold molding. And (2) a step of injecting and injecting a resin into the in-mold mold.
(3) a step of integrating the transfer sheet and the resin and transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet onto the surface of the resin molded body (transfer object); and (4) a resin molded body (transfer target). And the step of removing the release sheet of the transfer sheet after the product is taken out of the mold.
(1) If the second region R 2 remains in the process arrangement, the transfer sheet is arranged at an accurate position of the mold using the alignment pattern portion of the second region R 2. be able to.
After the step (4), it is preferable to trim (remove) unnecessary portions as necessary. (4) When the second region R 2 after step are still present, it is preferred to trim (remove) the region.
(3)上記転写シートと、上記樹脂とを一体化させて、樹脂成形体(被転写物)の表面上に上記転写シートの転写層を転写する工程と、(4)樹脂成形体(被転写物)を金型から取り出した後、上記転写シートの離型シートを剥離する工程と、を有するものが挙げられる。
(1)工程の配置の際に、第2領域R2が残存していれば、第2領域R2の位置合わせ用パターン部を利用して、金型の正確な位置に転写シートを配置することができる。
なお、(4)工程の後は、必要に応じて、不要部をトリミング(除去)することが好ましい。(4)工程の後に第2領域R2が残存している場合、該領域をトリミング(除去)することが好ましい。 As one embodiment of the method for producing a decorative molded product using the transfer sheet of the present invention by in-mold molding, (1) the transfer layer side of the above-mentioned transfer sheet is arranged facing the inside of the mold for in-mold molding. And (2) a step of injecting and injecting a resin into the in-mold mold.
(3) a step of integrating the transfer sheet and the resin and transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet onto the surface of the resin molded body (transfer object); and (4) a resin molded body (transfer target). And the step of removing the release sheet of the transfer sheet after the product is taken out of the mold.
(1) If the second region R 2 remains in the process arrangement, the transfer sheet is arranged at an accurate position of the mold using the alignment pattern portion of the second region R 2. be able to.
After the step (4), it is preferable to trim (remove) unnecessary portions as necessary. (4) When the second region R 2 after step are still present, it is preferred to trim (remove) the region.
(樹脂成形体)
樹脂成形体としては、射出成形可能な熱可塑性樹脂もしくは熱硬化性樹脂を用いることが好ましく、公知の様々な樹脂を用いることができる。
本発明による加飾成形品をインモールド成形により製造する場合には、熱可塑性樹脂を用いることが好ましい。このような熱可塑性樹脂としては、ポリスチレン系樹脂、ポリオレフィン系樹脂、ABS樹脂(耐熱ABS樹脂を含む)、AS樹脂、AN樹脂、ポリフェニレンオキサイド系樹脂、ポリカーボネート系樹脂、ポリアセタール系樹脂、アクリル系樹脂、ポリエチレンテレフタレート系樹脂、ポリブチレンテフタレート系樹脂、ポリスルホン系樹脂、およびポリフェニレンサルファイド系樹脂等が挙げられる。 (Resin molding)
As the resin molding, it is preferable to use a thermoplastic resin or a thermosetting resin that can be injection-molded, and various known resins can be used.
When the decorative molded product according to the present invention is manufactured by in-mold molding, it is preferable to use a thermoplastic resin. Examples of such thermoplastic resins include polystyrene resins, polyolefin resins, ABS resins (including heat-resistant ABS resins), AS resins, AN resins, polyphenylene oxide resins, polycarbonate resins, polyacetal resins, acrylic resins, Examples thereof include polyethylene terephthalate resin, polybutylene terephthalate resin, polysulfone resin, and polyphenylene sulfide resin.
樹脂成形体としては、射出成形可能な熱可塑性樹脂もしくは熱硬化性樹脂を用いることが好ましく、公知の様々な樹脂を用いることができる。
本発明による加飾成形品をインモールド成形により製造する場合には、熱可塑性樹脂を用いることが好ましい。このような熱可塑性樹脂としては、ポリスチレン系樹脂、ポリオレフィン系樹脂、ABS樹脂(耐熱ABS樹脂を含む)、AS樹脂、AN樹脂、ポリフェニレンオキサイド系樹脂、ポリカーボネート系樹脂、ポリアセタール系樹脂、アクリル系樹脂、ポリエチレンテレフタレート系樹脂、ポリブチレンテフタレート系樹脂、ポリスルホン系樹脂、およびポリフェニレンサルファイド系樹脂等が挙げられる。 (Resin molding)
As the resin molding, it is preferable to use a thermoplastic resin or a thermosetting resin that can be injection-molded, and various known resins can be used.
When the decorative molded product according to the present invention is manufactured by in-mold molding, it is preferable to use a thermoplastic resin. Examples of such thermoplastic resins include polystyrene resins, polyolefin resins, ABS resins (including heat-resistant ABS resins), AS resins, AN resins, polyphenylene oxide resins, polycarbonate resins, polyacetal resins, acrylic resins, Examples thereof include polyethylene terephthalate resin, polybutylene terephthalate resin, polysulfone resin, and polyphenylene sulfide resin.
(第1の実施の形態に係る転写シートの実施例)
1.版の作製
厚さ200μmの銅メッキ層を有するシリンダーを準備した。該シリンダーの表面をエッチング処理して、2本の溝40を一組として、流れ方向に2組の溝40を形成した(図9(a))。各溝の深さは5.0μm、幅は5.0mmとした。また、一組の溝の端部同士の間隔(P1)は3.0mmとした。さらに、該エッチング処理により、平面方向から観察した際の形状が略四角形形状(流れ方向及び幅方向の双方に平行な直線を有する略正方形。1辺の長さ6mm。)であり、深さ5.0μmの凹部70を同時に形成した(図9(a))。
上記溝部40を位置合わせの基準として、シリンダーの全面を、第1領域の凹凸部を形成する箇所(60)が抜き加工されたマスク50で覆った(図9(b))。第1領域の凹凸部は、図9(b)のように略長方形の形状60とした。
次いで、ガラスビーズを用いたブラスト加工により、マスク50で覆われていない箇所に凹凸を形成した。該凹凸を反転して得られた凹凸の最大高さ粗さRzは1.5μm、算術平均粗さRaは0.5μmであった。
次いで、マスク50を外し(図9(c))、シリンダーの表面を硬質メッキ処理(クロムメッキ)して、2面付けの版を得た。 (Example of transfer sheet according to the first embodiment)
1. Production of Plate A cylinder having a copper plating layer having a thickness of 200 μm was prepared. The surface of the cylinder was etched to form twogrooves 40 as a set, and two sets of grooves 40 were formed in the flow direction (FIG. 9A). The depth of each groove was 5.0 μm and the width was 5.0 mm. The distance between ends of a pair of grooves (P 1) was 3.0 mm. Furthermore, the shape when observed from the plane direction by the etching process is a substantially square shape (a substantially square having a straight line parallel to both the flow direction and the width direction. The length of one side is 6 mm), and the depth is 5. A 0.0 μm recess 70 was formed at the same time (FIG. 9A).
Using thegroove 40 as a reference for alignment, the entire surface of the cylinder was covered with a mask 50 in which a portion (60) for forming the uneven portion of the first region was cut (FIG. 9B). The uneven portion of the first region has a substantially rectangular shape 60 as shown in FIG.
Next, irregularities were formed at locations not covered with themask 50 by blasting using glass beads. The maximum height roughness Rz of the irregularities obtained by reversing the irregularities was 1.5 μm, and the arithmetic average roughness Ra was 0.5 μm.
Next, themask 50 was removed (FIG. 9C), and the surface of the cylinder was hard-plated (chrome plating) to obtain a two-sided plate.
1.版の作製
厚さ200μmの銅メッキ層を有するシリンダーを準備した。該シリンダーの表面をエッチング処理して、2本の溝40を一組として、流れ方向に2組の溝40を形成した(図9(a))。各溝の深さは5.0μm、幅は5.0mmとした。また、一組の溝の端部同士の間隔(P1)は3.0mmとした。さらに、該エッチング処理により、平面方向から観察した際の形状が略四角形形状(流れ方向及び幅方向の双方に平行な直線を有する略正方形。1辺の長さ6mm。)であり、深さ5.0μmの凹部70を同時に形成した(図9(a))。
上記溝部40を位置合わせの基準として、シリンダーの全面を、第1領域の凹凸部を形成する箇所(60)が抜き加工されたマスク50で覆った(図9(b))。第1領域の凹凸部は、図9(b)のように略長方形の形状60とした。
次いで、ガラスビーズを用いたブラスト加工により、マスク50で覆われていない箇所に凹凸を形成した。該凹凸を反転して得られた凹凸の最大高さ粗さRzは1.5μm、算術平均粗さRaは0.5μmであった。
次いで、マスク50を外し(図9(c))、シリンダーの表面を硬質メッキ処理(クロムメッキ)して、2面付けの版を得た。 (Example of transfer sheet according to the first embodiment)
1. Production of Plate A cylinder having a copper plating layer having a thickness of 200 μm was prepared. The surface of the cylinder was etched to form two
Using the
Next, irregularities were formed at locations not covered with the
Next, the
2.離型シートの作製
厚さ50μmのポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム上に、下記処方の樹脂層形成用インキを塗布、乾燥し、厚さ8.0μmの未硬化の樹脂層を形成した。
<樹脂層形成用インキ>
・電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物 60質量部
(共栄化学社製、ES105M)
・メチルエチルケトン 40質量部
・シリコーン系レベリング剤 0.5質量部 2. Production of Release Sheet On a polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 50 μm, a resin layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied and dried to form an uncured resin layer having a thickness of 8.0 μm.
<Resin layer forming ink>
-60 parts by mass of ionizing radiation curable resin composition (manufactured by Kyoei Chemical Co., ES105M)
・Methyl ethyl ketone 40 mass parts ・ Silicone leveling agent 0.5 mass parts
厚さ50μmのポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム上に、下記処方の樹脂層形成用インキを塗布、乾燥し、厚さ8.0μmの未硬化の樹脂層を形成した。
<樹脂層形成用インキ>
・電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物 60質量部
(共栄化学社製、ES105M)
・メチルエチルケトン 40質量部
・シリコーン系レベリング剤 0.5質量部 2. Production of Release Sheet On a polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 50 μm, a resin layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied and dried to form an uncured resin layer having a thickness of 8.0 μm.
<Resin layer forming ink>
-60 parts by mass of ionizing radiation curable resin composition (manufactured by Kyoei Chemical Co., ES105M)
・
次いで、上記「1」で作製した版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層を賦形すると同時に、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム側から電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層を硬化させ、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム上に樹脂層が形成された基材層を得た。
次いで、基材層の第2領域内の突出部上、及び、その他の領域の第2の突出部上に、乾燥後の付着量が1g/m2(約1μm)となるように、黒色インキ(昭和インク社製、商品名:EIS(NT)黒)を溶剤で希釈した着色層形成用インキを塗布、乾燥して、着色層を形成した。第2領域内の一組の突出部の間には、実質的に着色層のインキは進入していなかった。 Next, using the plate produced in the above “1”, an uncured resin layer is shaped, and at the same time, ionizing radiation is irradiated from the polyethylene terephthalate film side to cure the shaped resin layer. A base material layer having a resin layer formed thereon was obtained.
Next, the black ink is applied so that the amount of adhesion after drying is 1 g / m 2 (about 1 μm) on the protrusions in the second region of the base material layer and on the second protrusions in the other regions. A colored layer forming ink obtained by diluting (made by Showa Ink Co., Ltd., trade name: EIS (NT) black) with a solvent was applied and dried to form a colored layer. There was substantially no ink in the colored layer between the set of protrusions in the second region.
次いで、基材層の第2領域内の突出部上、及び、その他の領域の第2の突出部上に、乾燥後の付着量が1g/m2(約1μm)となるように、黒色インキ(昭和インク社製、商品名:EIS(NT)黒)を溶剤で希釈した着色層形成用インキを塗布、乾燥して、着色層を形成した。第2領域内の一組の突出部の間には、実質的に着色層のインキは進入していなかった。 Next, using the plate produced in the above “1”, an uncured resin layer is shaped, and at the same time, ionizing radiation is irradiated from the polyethylene terephthalate film side to cure the shaped resin layer. A base material layer having a resin layer formed thereon was obtained.
Next, the black ink is applied so that the amount of adhesion after drying is 1 g / m 2 (about 1 μm) on the protrusions in the second region of the base material layer and on the second protrusions in the other regions. A colored layer forming ink obtained by diluting (made by Showa Ink Co., Ltd., trade name: EIS (NT) black) with a solvent was applied and dried to form a colored layer. There was substantially no ink in the colored layer between the set of protrusions in the second region.
次いで、下記処方の離型層形成用インキを全面に塗布、乾燥し、厚さ0.5μmの離型層を形成し、離型シートを得た。
<離型層形成用インキ>
・アクリルポリオール 70質量部
(綜研化学社製、商品名:サーモラックSU100A)
・イソシアネート 25質量部
(三井化学社製、商品名:タケネートD-110N)
・酢酸エチル 161質量部
・メチルイソブチルケトン 56質量部 Next, a release layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied to the entire surface and dried to form a release layer having a thickness of 0.5 μm, thereby obtaining a release sheet.
<Ink for forming release layer>
Acrylic polyol 70 parts by mass (manufactured by Soken Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name: Thermolac SU100A)
・Isocyanate 25 parts by mass (Mitsui Chemicals, trade name: Takenate D-110N)
・ Ethyl acetate 161 parts by mass ・Methyl isobutyl ketone 56 parts by mass
<離型層形成用インキ>
・アクリルポリオール 70質量部
(綜研化学社製、商品名:サーモラックSU100A)
・イソシアネート 25質量部
(三井化学社製、商品名:タケネートD-110N)
・酢酸エチル 161質量部
・メチルイソブチルケトン 56質量部 Next, a release layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied to the entire surface and dried to form a release layer having a thickness of 0.5 μm, thereby obtaining a release sheet.
<Ink for forming release layer>
・
・ Ethyl acetate 161 parts by mass ・
3.転写層の形成(転写シートの作製)
上記「2」で得られた離型シート上に、下記処方の保護層形成用インキを乾燥後の付着量が6.5g/m2(6.0μm)となるように塗布し、塗膜を形成した後、フュージョンUVランプシステムを用いて光源をHバルブ、搬送速度20m/min、出力40%の条件で照射し、保護層を半硬化させた。このときの積算光量を、アイグラフィックス社製の照度計(商品名:UVPF-A1)により測定したところ、15mJ/m2であった。
<保護層形成用インキ>
・ウレタンアクリレート系紫外線硬化樹脂組成物 70質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:セイカビームHT-X)
(固形分35%、トルエン/酢酸エチル混合溶剤)
・ウレタンアクリレート系紫外線硬化樹脂組成物 30質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:セイカビームEXF-HT-1)
(固形分40%、トルエン/メチルエチルケトン混合溶剤) 3. Formation of transfer layer (production of transfer sheet)
On the release sheet obtained in the above “2”, a protective layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied so that the adhesion amount after drying was 6.5 g / m 2 (6.0 μm). After the formation, the protective layer was semi-cured by irradiating the light source with a fusion UV lamp system under conditions of an H bulb, a conveyance speed of 20 m / min, and an output of 40%. The integrated light quantity at this time was 15 mJ / m 2 as measured by an illuminance meter (trade name: UVPF-A1) manufactured by Eye Graphics.
<Protective layer forming ink>
・ 70 parts by mass of urethane acrylate UV curable resin composition (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: Seika Beam HT-X)
(Solid content 35%, toluene / ethyl acetate mixed solvent)
-30 parts by mass of urethane acrylate UV curable resin composition (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: Seika Beam EXF-HT-1)
(Solid content 40%, toluene / methyl ethyl ketone mixed solvent)
上記「2」で得られた離型シート上に、下記処方の保護層形成用インキを乾燥後の付着量が6.5g/m2(6.0μm)となるように塗布し、塗膜を形成した後、フュージョンUVランプシステムを用いて光源をHバルブ、搬送速度20m/min、出力40%の条件で照射し、保護層を半硬化させた。このときの積算光量を、アイグラフィックス社製の照度計(商品名:UVPF-A1)により測定したところ、15mJ/m2であった。
<保護層形成用インキ>
・ウレタンアクリレート系紫外線硬化樹脂組成物 70質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:セイカビームHT-X)
(固形分35%、トルエン/酢酸エチル混合溶剤)
・ウレタンアクリレート系紫外線硬化樹脂組成物 30質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:セイカビームEXF-HT-1)
(固形分40%、トルエン/メチルエチルケトン混合溶剤) 3. Formation of transfer layer (production of transfer sheet)
On the release sheet obtained in the above “2”, a protective layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied so that the adhesion amount after drying was 6.5 g / m 2 (6.0 μm). After the formation, the protective layer was semi-cured by irradiating the light source with a fusion UV lamp system under conditions of an H bulb, a conveyance speed of 20 m / min, and an output of 40%. The integrated light quantity at this time was 15 mJ / m 2 as measured by an illuminance meter (trade name: UVPF-A1) manufactured by Eye Graphics.
<Protective layer forming ink>
・ 70 parts by mass of urethane acrylate UV curable resin composition (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: Seika Beam HT-X)
(Solid content 35%, toluene / ethyl acetate mixed solvent)
-30 parts by mass of urethane acrylate UV curable resin composition (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: Seika Beam EXF-HT-1)
(
次いで、保護層上に下記処方のアンカー層形成用インキを乾燥後の付着量が3.0g/m2となるように塗布し、塗膜を形成した後、40℃で72時間乾燥し、硬化させ、厚さ2μmのアンカー層を形成した。
<アンカー層用インキ>
・アクリルポリオール 100質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:TM-VMAC、固形分25%)
(トルエン/酢酸エチル/メチルエチルケトン混合溶剤)
・キサンメチレンジイソシアネート 10質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:PTC-RC3)
(固形分75%、溶剤:酢酸エチル) Next, the anchor layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied onto the protective layer so that the amount of adhesion after drying was 3.0 g / m 2, and after forming a coating film, the film was dried at 40 ° C. for 72 hours and cured. An anchor layer having a thickness of 2 μm was formed.
<Ink for anchor layer>
・ Acrylic polyol 100 parts by mass (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: TM-VMAC,solid content 25%)
(Toluene / ethyl acetate / methyl ethyl ketone mixed solvent)
・ 10 parts by mass of xanthethylene diisocyanate (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: PTC-RC3)
(Solid content 75%, solvent: ethyl acetate)
<アンカー層用インキ>
・アクリルポリオール 100質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:TM-VMAC、固形分25%)
(トルエン/酢酸エチル/メチルエチルケトン混合溶剤)
・キサンメチレンジイソシアネート 10質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:PTC-RC3)
(固形分75%、溶剤:酢酸エチル) Next, the anchor layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied onto the protective layer so that the amount of adhesion after drying was 3.0 g / m 2, and after forming a coating film, the film was dried at 40 ° C. for 72 hours and cured. An anchor layer having a thickness of 2 μm was formed.
<Ink for anchor layer>
・ Acrylic polyol 100 parts by mass (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: TM-VMAC,
(Toluene / ethyl acetate / methyl ethyl ketone mixed solvent)
・ 10 parts by mass of xanthethylene diisocyanate (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: PTC-RC3)
(Solid content 75%, solvent: ethyl acetate)
次いで、アンカー層上に下記処方の接着剤層形成用インキを乾燥後の付着量が2.5g/m2となるように塗布し、塗膜を形成した。該塗膜を乾燥し、厚さ2μmの接着剤層を形成し、2面付けの転写シートを得た。
<接着剤層用塗工液>
・アクリル系樹脂 100質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:TM-R600、固形分20%)
(酢酸エチル/酢酸-n-プロピル/メチルエチルケトン混合溶剤)
・メチルエチルケトン 40質量部 Next, an adhesive layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied onto the anchor layer so that the adhesion amount after drying was 2.5 g / m 2 to form a coating film. The coating film was dried to form an adhesive layer having a thickness of 2 μm to obtain a two-sided transfer sheet.
<Coating solution for adhesive layer>
-100 parts by mass of acrylic resin (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: TM-R600,solid content 20%)
(Ethyl acetate / n-propyl / methyl ethyl ketone mixed solvent)
・Methyl ethyl ketone 40 parts by mass
<接着剤層用塗工液>
・アクリル系樹脂 100質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:TM-R600、固形分20%)
(酢酸エチル/酢酸-n-プロピル/メチルエチルケトン混合溶剤)
・メチルエチルケトン 40質量部 Next, an adhesive layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied onto the anchor layer so that the adhesion amount after drying was 2.5 g / m 2 to form a coating film. The coating film was dried to form an adhesive layer having a thickness of 2 μm to obtain a two-sided transfer sheet.
<Coating solution for adhesive layer>
-100 parts by mass of acrylic resin (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: TM-R600,
(Ethyl acetate / n-propyl / methyl ethyl ketone mixed solvent)
・
4.転写シートのスリット加工、枚葉への抜き加工
上記「3」で得られた2面付けの転写シートを第2領域の光透過率差のコントラストを利用してスリット加工した。その結果、正確な位置でスリット加工することができた。
また、上記「3」で得られた2面付けの転写シートを第2領域及びその他の領域の光透過率差のコントラストを利用して枚葉に抜き加工した。その結果、正確な位置で抜き加工することができた。 4). Slit processing of transfer sheet and punching out of single sheet The two-sided transfer sheet obtained in the above “3” was slit using the contrast of the light transmittance difference in the second region. As a result, it was possible to slit at an accurate position.
Further, the two-sided transfer sheet obtained in the above “3” was punched into sheets using the contrast of the light transmittance difference between the second region and other regions. As a result, it was possible to perform punching at an accurate position.
上記「3」で得られた2面付けの転写シートを第2領域の光透過率差のコントラストを利用してスリット加工した。その結果、正確な位置でスリット加工することができた。
また、上記「3」で得られた2面付けの転写シートを第2領域及びその他の領域の光透過率差のコントラストを利用して枚葉に抜き加工した。その結果、正確な位置で抜き加工することができた。 4). Slit processing of transfer sheet and punching out of single sheet The two-sided transfer sheet obtained in the above “3” was slit using the contrast of the light transmittance difference in the second region. As a result, it was possible to slit at an accurate position.
Further, the two-sided transfer sheet obtained in the above “3” was punched into sheets using the contrast of the light transmittance difference between the second region and other regions. As a result, it was possible to perform punching at an accurate position.
5.加飾成形品の作製
上記「4」のスリット加工及び枚葉に抜き加工において、第1領域及びその他の領域を残存させるように加工した。スリット加工及び枚葉に抜き加工した転写シートを用いて、以下の(z1)~(z5)の工程により加飾成形品を作製した。 5). Production of Decorative Molded Product In the slit processing of “4” and the punching out of a sheet, the first region and other regions were processed to remain. A decorative molded product was produced by the following steps (z1) to (z5) using a slit sheet and a transfer sheet punched into sheets.
上記「4」のスリット加工及び枚葉に抜き加工において、第1領域及びその他の領域を残存させるように加工した。スリット加工及び枚葉に抜き加工した転写シートを用いて、以下の(z1)~(z5)の工程により加飾成形品を作製した。 5). Production of Decorative Molded Product In the slit processing of “4” and the punching out of a sheet, the first region and other regions were processed to remain. A decorative molded product was produced by the following steps (z1) to (z5) using a slit sheet and a transfer sheet punched into sheets.
(z1)転写シートの転写層側をインモールド成形用金型の内側に向けて配置する工程
(z2)インモールド成形用金型内に樹脂を射出注入する工程、
(z3)転写シートと、樹脂とを一体化させて、樹脂成形体(被転写物)の表面上に上記転写シートの転写層を転写する工程、
(z4)樹脂成形体(被転写物)を金型から取り出した後、転写シートの離型シートを剥離する工程
(z5)第2領域及び/又はその他の領域をトリミング(除去)する工程 (Z1) a step of disposing the transfer layer side of the transfer sheet toward the inside of the in-mold mold (z2) a step of injecting and injecting resin into the in-mold mold,
(Z3) a step of integrating the transfer sheet and the resin, and transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet onto the surface of the resin molded body (transfer object);
(Z4) Step of peeling the release sheet of the transfer sheet after taking out the resin molded body (transfer object) from the mold (z5) Step of trimming (removing) the second region and / or other regions
(z2)インモールド成形用金型内に樹脂を射出注入する工程、
(z3)転写シートと、樹脂とを一体化させて、樹脂成形体(被転写物)の表面上に上記転写シートの転写層を転写する工程、
(z4)樹脂成形体(被転写物)を金型から取り出した後、転写シートの離型シートを剥離する工程
(z5)第2領域及び/又はその他の領域をトリミング(除去)する工程 (Z1) a step of disposing the transfer layer side of the transfer sheet toward the inside of the in-mold mold (z2) a step of injecting and injecting resin into the in-mold mold,
(Z3) a step of integrating the transfer sheet and the resin, and transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet onto the surface of the resin molded body (transfer object);
(Z4) Step of peeling the release sheet of the transfer sheet after taking out the resin molded body (transfer object) from the mold (z5) Step of trimming (removing) the second region and / or other regions
上記工程では、(z1)工程で転写シートを配置する際に、第2領域及び/又はその他の領域の光透過率差のコントラストを利用して、金型の正確な位置に転写シートを配置することができた。このため、被転写物(樹脂成形品)の正確な位置に転写層を転写することができた。
なお、第2領域が残存した転写シートは、転写シートの転写層側の表面に微細な出っ張りが形成されていた。このため、第2領域が残存したスリット加工した転写シートを巻き取ったり、第2領域が残存した枚葉の転写シートを多数重ねたりしても、ブロッキングを抑制できるものであった。 In the above step, when the transfer sheet is arranged in the step (z1), the transfer sheet is arranged at an accurate position of the mold using the contrast of the light transmittance difference between the second region and / or other regions. I was able to. For this reason, the transfer layer was able to be transferred to the exact position of the material to be transferred (resin molded product).
The transfer sheet in which the second region remained had a fine protrusion formed on the transfer layer side surface of the transfer sheet. For this reason, blocking can be suppressed even if the slit-processed transfer sheet in which the second region remains is wound or a large number of single-sheet transfer sheets in which the second region remains are stacked.
なお、第2領域が残存した転写シートは、転写シートの転写層側の表面に微細な出っ張りが形成されていた。このため、第2領域が残存したスリット加工した転写シートを巻き取ったり、第2領域が残存した枚葉の転写シートを多数重ねたりしても、ブロッキングを抑制できるものであった。 In the above step, when the transfer sheet is arranged in the step (z1), the transfer sheet is arranged at an accurate position of the mold using the contrast of the light transmittance difference between the second region and / or other regions. I was able to. For this reason, the transfer layer was able to be transferred to the exact position of the material to be transferred (resin molded product).
The transfer sheet in which the second region remained had a fine protrusion formed on the transfer layer side surface of the transfer sheet. For this reason, blocking can be suppressed even if the slit-processed transfer sheet in which the second region remains is wound or a large number of single-sheet transfer sheets in which the second region remains are stacked.
(第2の実施の形態に係る転写シートの実施例)
1.版の作製
1-1.版A(実施例用の版)の作製
厚さ200μmの銅メッキ層を有するシリンダーを準備した。該シリンダーの表面をエッチング処理して、以下の第2領域R2Aと相補的な形状、及び第2領域R2Bと相補的な形状を形成した(図19(a))。
<第2領域R2Aと相補的な形状>
・突出部3Aと相補的形状を有する溝部41(幅3.0mm。深さ5.0μm。シリンダーの流れ方向に連続して延伸。)
・周辺突出部4Aと相補的形状を有する溝部42(幅0.25mm。深さ5.0μm。溝部41の幅方向の左右に配置。シリンダーの流れ方向に連続して延伸。)
・溝部41の端部と溝部42の端部との間隔P2:0.5mm
・溝部42の数:溝部41の左右にそれぞれ4本
・溝部42の端部同士の間隔P1:0.5mm
・周辺領域XA中に占める周辺突出部の面積割合:33%
・条件1のL2/L1:1.0
<第2領域R2Bと相補的な形状>
・突出部3Bと相補的形状を有する溝部43(1辺6.0mmの正方形。深さ5.0μm。)
・周辺突出部4Bと相補的形状を有する溝部44(幅0.25mm。深さ5.0μm。溝部43の幅方向の左右、及び溝部43の流れ方向の上下に配置。シリンダーの流れ方向に連続して延伸。)
・溝部43の端部と、溝部43に対して幅方向側に位置する溝部44の端部との間隔P2:0.5mm
・溝部43の端部と、溝部43に対して流れ方向側に位置する溝部44の端部との間隔P2:0mm
・溝部44の数:溝部43の左右にそれぞれ4本、溝部43の上下にそれぞれ8本
・溝部44の端部同士の間隔P1:0.5mm
・周辺領域XB中に占める周辺突出部の面積割合:33%
・条件2のL4/L3:1.0以上 (Example of transfer sheet according to the second embodiment)
1. Preparation of plate 1-1. Production of Plate A (Plate for Example) A cylinder having a copper plating layer having a thickness of 200 μm was prepared. The surface of the cylinder was etched to form a shape complementary to the following second region R 2A and a shape complementary to the second region R 2B (FIG. 19A).
<Complementary shape with the second region R2A >
Agroove 41 having a shape complementary to the protruding portion 3A (width 3.0 mm, depth 5.0 μm, continuously extending in the flow direction of the cylinder)
Agroove 42 having a shape complementary to the peripheral protrusion 4A (width 0.25 mm, depth 5.0 μm, arranged on the left and right in the width direction of the groove 41. Continuously extending in the flow direction of the cylinder)
-Distance P 2 between the end of thegroove 41 and the end of the groove 42: 0.5 mm
-Number of groove portions 42: 4 on each side of groove portion 41-Spacing P 1 between ends of groove portion 42: 0.5 mm
And area ratio of the peripheral projecting portion occupying in the peripheral area X A: 33%
OfCondition 1 L 2 / L 1: 1.0
<Complementary shape with the second region R 2B >
Agroove portion 43 having a shape complementary to the protruding portion 3B (a square with a side of 6.0 mm, a depth of 5.0 μm)
Agroove 44 having a shape complementary to the peripheral protrusion 4B (width 0.25 mm, depth 5.0 μm, arranged on the left and right in the width direction of the groove 43 and above and below the flow direction of the groove 43. Continuous in the flow direction of the cylinder. And stretched.)
-Distance P 2 between the end of thegroove 43 and the end of the groove 44 positioned on the width direction side with respect to the groove 43: 0.5 mm
The distance P 2 between the end of thegroove 43 and the end of the groove 44 located on the flow direction side with respect to the groove 43 is 0 mm.
Number of groove portions 44: 4 on the left and right sides of thegroove portion 43 and 8 on the top and bottom of the groove portion 43, respectively. Space P 1 between the end portions of the groove portion 44: 0.5 mm
And area ratio of the peripheral projecting portion occupying in the peripheral region X B: 33%
-Condition 4 L 4 / L 3 : 1.0 or more
1.版の作製
1-1.版A(実施例用の版)の作製
厚さ200μmの銅メッキ層を有するシリンダーを準備した。該シリンダーの表面をエッチング処理して、以下の第2領域R2Aと相補的な形状、及び第2領域R2Bと相補的な形状を形成した(図19(a))。
<第2領域R2Aと相補的な形状>
・突出部3Aと相補的形状を有する溝部41(幅3.0mm。深さ5.0μm。シリンダーの流れ方向に連続して延伸。)
・周辺突出部4Aと相補的形状を有する溝部42(幅0.25mm。深さ5.0μm。溝部41の幅方向の左右に配置。シリンダーの流れ方向に連続して延伸。)
・溝部41の端部と溝部42の端部との間隔P2:0.5mm
・溝部42の数:溝部41の左右にそれぞれ4本
・溝部42の端部同士の間隔P1:0.5mm
・周辺領域XA中に占める周辺突出部の面積割合:33%
・条件1のL2/L1:1.0
<第2領域R2Bと相補的な形状>
・突出部3Bと相補的形状を有する溝部43(1辺6.0mmの正方形。深さ5.0μm。)
・周辺突出部4Bと相補的形状を有する溝部44(幅0.25mm。深さ5.0μm。溝部43の幅方向の左右、及び溝部43の流れ方向の上下に配置。シリンダーの流れ方向に連続して延伸。)
・溝部43の端部と、溝部43に対して幅方向側に位置する溝部44の端部との間隔P2:0.5mm
・溝部43の端部と、溝部43に対して流れ方向側に位置する溝部44の端部との間隔P2:0mm
・溝部44の数:溝部43の左右にそれぞれ4本、溝部43の上下にそれぞれ8本
・溝部44の端部同士の間隔P1:0.5mm
・周辺領域XB中に占める周辺突出部の面積割合:33%
・条件2のL4/L3:1.0以上 (Example of transfer sheet according to the second embodiment)
1. Preparation of plate 1-1. Production of Plate A (Plate for Example) A cylinder having a copper plating layer having a thickness of 200 μm was prepared. The surface of the cylinder was etched to form a shape complementary to the following second region R 2A and a shape complementary to the second region R 2B (FIG. 19A).
<Complementary shape with the second region R2A >
A
A
-Distance P 2 between the end of the
-Number of groove portions 42: 4 on each side of groove portion 41-Spacing P 1 between ends of groove portion 42: 0.5 mm
And area ratio of the peripheral projecting portion occupying in the peripheral area X A: 33%
Of
<Complementary shape with the second region R 2B >
A
A
-Distance P 2 between the end of the
The distance P 2 between the end of the
Number of groove portions 44: 4 on the left and right sides of the
And area ratio of the peripheral projecting portion occupying in the peripheral region X B: 33%
-Condition 4 L 4 / L 3 : 1.0 or more
上記溝部41を位置合わせの基準として、シリンダーの全面を、第1領域の凹凸部を形成する箇所(60)が抜き加工されたマスク50で覆った(図19(b))。第1領域の凹凸部は、図19(b)のように略長方形の形状60とした。
次いで、ガラスビーズを用いたブラスト加工により、マスク50で覆われていない箇所に凹凸を形成した。該凹凸を反転して得られた凹凸の最大高さ粗さRzは1.5μm、算術平均粗さRaは0.5μmであった。
次いで、マスク50を外し(図19(c))、シリンダーの表面を硬質メッキ処理(クロムメッキ)して、2面付けの版Aを得た。 Using thegroove 41 as a reference for alignment, the entire surface of the cylinder was covered with a mask 50 in which a portion (60) for forming the concavo-convex portion of the first region was cut (FIG. 19B). The uneven portion in the first region has a substantially rectangular shape 60 as shown in FIG.
Next, irregularities were formed at locations not covered with themask 50 by blasting using glass beads. The maximum height roughness Rz of the irregularities obtained by reversing the irregularities was 1.5 μm, and the arithmetic average roughness Ra was 0.5 μm.
Next, themask 50 was removed (FIG. 19C), and the surface of the cylinder was hard-plated (chrome plating) to obtain a two-sided plate A.
次いで、ガラスビーズを用いたブラスト加工により、マスク50で覆われていない箇所に凹凸を形成した。該凹凸を反転して得られた凹凸の最大高さ粗さRzは1.5μm、算術平均粗さRaは0.5μmであった。
次いで、マスク50を外し(図19(c))、シリンダーの表面を硬質メッキ処理(クロムメッキ)して、2面付けの版Aを得た。 Using the
Next, irregularities were formed at locations not covered with the
Next, the
1-2.版B(比較例用の版)の作製
厚さ200μmの銅メッキ層を有するシリンダーを準備した。該シリンダーの表面をエッチング処理して、1本の溝部(幅3.0mm。深さ5.0μm。シリンダーの流れ方向に連続して延伸。)を形成した。次いで、該溝部を位置合わせの基準として、シリンダーの全面を、第1領域の凹凸部を形成する箇所が抜き加工されたマスクで覆い、版Aと同様の条件でブラスト加工した。次いで、マスクを外し、シリンダーの表面を硬質メッキ処理(クロムメッキ)して、2面付けの版Bを得た。 1-2. Production of Plate B (Comparative Plate) A cylinder having a copper plating layer having a thickness of 200 μm was prepared. The surface of the cylinder was etched to form one groove (width 3.0 mm, depth 5.0 μm, continuously stretched in the flow direction of the cylinder). Next, using the groove as a reference for alignment, the entire surface of the cylinder was covered with a mask in which a portion where the uneven portion of the first region was formed was punched, and blasted under the same conditions as in the plate A. Next, the mask was removed, and the surface of the cylinder was hard-plated (chromium plating) to obtain a two-sided plate B.
厚さ200μmの銅メッキ層を有するシリンダーを準備した。該シリンダーの表面をエッチング処理して、1本の溝部(幅3.0mm。深さ5.0μm。シリンダーの流れ方向に連続して延伸。)を形成した。次いで、該溝部を位置合わせの基準として、シリンダーの全面を、第1領域の凹凸部を形成する箇所が抜き加工されたマスクで覆い、版Aと同様の条件でブラスト加工した。次いで、マスクを外し、シリンダーの表面を硬質メッキ処理(クロムメッキ)して、2面付けの版Bを得た。 1-2. Production of Plate B (Comparative Plate) A cylinder having a copper plating layer having a thickness of 200 μm was prepared. The surface of the cylinder was etched to form one groove (width 3.0 mm, depth 5.0 μm, continuously stretched in the flow direction of the cylinder). Next, using the groove as a reference for alignment, the entire surface of the cylinder was covered with a mask in which a portion where the uneven portion of the first region was formed was punched, and blasted under the same conditions as in the plate A. Next, the mask was removed, and the surface of the cylinder was hard-plated (chromium plating) to obtain a two-sided plate B.
2.離型シートの作製
2-1.離型シートA(実施例1用の離型シート)の作製
厚さ50μmのポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム上に、下記処方の樹脂層形成用インキを塗布、乾燥し、厚さ8.0μmの未硬化の樹脂層を形成した。
<樹脂層形成用インキ>
・電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物 60質量部
(共栄化学社製、ES105M)
・メチルエチルケトン 40質量部
・シリコーン系レベリング剤 0.5質量部 2. 2. Production of release sheet 2-1. Production of Release Sheet A (Release Sheet for Example 1) On a polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 50 μm, an ink for forming a resin layer having the following formulation was applied and dried, and an uncured resin having a thickness of 8.0 μm. A layer was formed.
<Resin layer forming ink>
-60 parts by mass of ionizing radiation curable resin composition (manufactured by Kyoei Chemical Co., ES105M)
・Methyl ethyl ketone 40 mass parts ・ Silicone leveling agent 0.5 mass parts
2-1.離型シートA(実施例1用の離型シート)の作製
厚さ50μmのポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム上に、下記処方の樹脂層形成用インキを塗布、乾燥し、厚さ8.0μmの未硬化の樹脂層を形成した。
<樹脂層形成用インキ>
・電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物 60質量部
(共栄化学社製、ES105M)
・メチルエチルケトン 40質量部
・シリコーン系レベリング剤 0.5質量部 2. 2. Production of release sheet 2-1. Production of Release Sheet A (Release Sheet for Example 1) On a polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 50 μm, an ink for forming a resin layer having the following formulation was applied and dried, and an uncured resin having a thickness of 8.0 μm. A layer was formed.
<Resin layer forming ink>
-60 parts by mass of ionizing radiation curable resin composition (manufactured by Kyoei Chemical Co., ES105M)
・
次いで、上記「1-1」で作製した版Aを用いて、未硬化の樹脂層を賦形すると同時に、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム側から電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層を硬化させ、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム上に樹脂層が形成された基材層を得た。
次いで、基材層の第2領域内の突出部及び周辺突出部上に、乾燥後の付着量が1g/m2(約1μm)となるように、黒色インキ(昭和インク社製、商品名:EIS(NT)黒)を溶剤で希釈した着色層形成用インキを塗布、乾燥して、着色層を形成した。 Next, using the plate A prepared in the above “1-1”, an uncured resin layer is shaped, and at the same time, the shaped resin layer is cured by irradiating ionizing radiation from the polyethylene terephthalate film side. A base material layer having a resin layer formed on a terephthalate film was obtained.
Next, black ink (manufactured by Showa Ink Co., Ltd., trade name: so that the adhesion amount after drying is 1 g / m 2 (about 1 μm) on the protrusions in the second region of the base material layer and the peripheral protrusions. A colored layer forming ink obtained by diluting EIS (NT) black with a solvent was applied and dried to form a colored layer.
次いで、基材層の第2領域内の突出部及び周辺突出部上に、乾燥後の付着量が1g/m2(約1μm)となるように、黒色インキ(昭和インク社製、商品名:EIS(NT)黒)を溶剤で希釈した着色層形成用インキを塗布、乾燥して、着色層を形成した。 Next, using the plate A prepared in the above “1-1”, an uncured resin layer is shaped, and at the same time, the shaped resin layer is cured by irradiating ionizing radiation from the polyethylene terephthalate film side. A base material layer having a resin layer formed on a terephthalate film was obtained.
Next, black ink (manufactured by Showa Ink Co., Ltd., trade name: so that the adhesion amount after drying is 1 g / m 2 (about 1 μm) on the protrusions in the second region of the base material layer and the peripheral protrusions. A colored layer forming ink obtained by diluting EIS (NT) black with a solvent was applied and dried to form a colored layer.
次いで、下記処方の離型層形成用インキを全面に塗布、乾燥し、厚さ0.5μmの離型層を形成し、離型シートAを得た。第1領域R1と、第2領域R2A、R2Bとの間隔P4は120mmであった。
<離型層形成用インキ>
・アクリルポリオール 70質量部
(綜研化学社製、商品名:サーモラックSU100A)
・イソシアネート 25質量部
(三井化学社製、商品名:タケネートD-110N)
・酢酸エチル 161質量部
・メチルイソブチルケトン 56質量部 Next, a release layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied to the entire surface and dried to form a release layer having a thickness of 0.5 μm, whereby a release sheet A was obtained. A distance P 4 between the first region R 1 and the second regions R 2A and R 2B was 120 mm.
<Ink for forming release layer>
Acrylic polyol 70 parts by mass (manufactured by Soken Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name: Thermolac SU100A)
・Isocyanate 25 parts by mass (Mitsui Chemicals, trade name: Takenate D-110N)
・ Ethyl acetate 161 parts by mass ・Methyl isobutyl ketone 56 parts by mass
<離型層形成用インキ>
・アクリルポリオール 70質量部
(綜研化学社製、商品名:サーモラックSU100A)
・イソシアネート 25質量部
(三井化学社製、商品名:タケネートD-110N)
・酢酸エチル 161質量部
・メチルイソブチルケトン 56質量部 Next, a release layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied to the entire surface and dried to form a release layer having a thickness of 0.5 μm, whereby a release sheet A was obtained. A distance P 4 between the first region R 1 and the second regions R 2A and R 2B was 120 mm.
<Ink for forming release layer>
・
・ Ethyl acetate 161 parts by mass ・
2-2.離型シートB(比較例1用の離型シート)の作製
上記2-1において、版Aを上記「1-2」で作製した版Bに変更し、1本の突出部上に着色層を形成した以外は、上記2-1と同様にして、離型シートBを得た。なお、離型シートBにおいて、1本の突出部の周辺には、部分的に着色層の地汚れが生じていた。 2-2. Production of Release Sheet B (Release Sheet for Comparative Example 1) In the above 2-1, the plate A is changed to the plate B produced in the above “1-2”, and a colored layer is formed on one protrusion. Except for the formation, release sheet B was obtained in the same manner as in 2-1. In the release sheet B, the colored layer was partially soiled around one protrusion.
上記2-1において、版Aを上記「1-2」で作製した版Bに変更し、1本の突出部上に着色層を形成した以外は、上記2-1と同様にして、離型シートBを得た。なお、離型シートBにおいて、1本の突出部の周辺には、部分的に着色層の地汚れが生じていた。 2-2. Production of Release Sheet B (Release Sheet for Comparative Example 1) In the above 2-1, the plate A is changed to the plate B produced in the above “1-2”, and a colored layer is formed on one protrusion. Except for the formation, release sheet B was obtained in the same manner as in 2-1. In the release sheet B, the colored layer was partially soiled around one protrusion.
2-3.離型シートC(実施例2用の離型シート)の作製
上記2-1において、厚さ50μmのポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム上に、下記処方の樹脂層形成用インキを塗布、乾燥し、厚さ8.0μmの未硬化の樹脂層を形成した。
<樹脂層形成用インキ>
・電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物 40質量部
(共栄化学社製、アクリル系樹脂)
・光重合開始剤 3質量部
・メチルエチルケトン 60質量部
・シリコーン系レベリング剤 0.5質量部 2-3. Production of Release Sheet C (Release Sheet for Example 2) In the above 2-1, a resin layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied on a polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 50 μm and dried to obtain a thickness of 8. An uncured resin layer of 0 μm was formed.
<Resin layer forming ink>
・ Ionizing radiationcurable resin composition 40 parts by mass (made by Kyoei Chemical Co., Ltd., acrylic resin)
・Photopolymerization initiator 3 parts by mass ・ Methyl ethyl ketone 60 parts by mass ・ Silicone leveling agent 0.5 parts by mass
上記2-1において、厚さ50μmのポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム上に、下記処方の樹脂層形成用インキを塗布、乾燥し、厚さ8.0μmの未硬化の樹脂層を形成した。
<樹脂層形成用インキ>
・電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物 40質量部
(共栄化学社製、アクリル系樹脂)
・光重合開始剤 3質量部
・メチルエチルケトン 60質量部
・シリコーン系レベリング剤 0.5質量部 2-3. Production of Release Sheet C (Release Sheet for Example 2) In the above 2-1, a resin layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied on a polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 50 μm and dried to obtain a thickness of 8. An uncured resin layer of 0 μm was formed.
<Resin layer forming ink>
・ Ionizing radiation
・
次いで、上記「1-1」で作製した版Aを用いて、未硬化の樹脂層を賦形すると同時に、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム側から電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層を硬化させ、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム上に樹脂層が形成された基材層を得た。
Next, using the plate A prepared in the above “1-1”, an uncured resin layer is shaped, and at the same time, the shaped resin layer is cured by irradiating ionizing radiation from the polyethylene terephthalate film side. A base material layer having a resin layer formed on a terephthalate film was obtained.
次いで、下記処方の離型層形成用インキを樹脂層全面に塗布、乾燥し、厚さ0.5μmの離型層を形成した。
<離型層形成用インキ>
・アクリルポリオール 70質量部
(綜研化学社製、商品名:サーモラックSU100A)
・イソシアネート 25質量部
(三井化学社製、商品名:タケネートD-110N)
・酢酸エチル 161質量部
・メチルイソブチルケトン 56質量部 Next, a release layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied to the entire surface of the resin layer and dried to form a release layer having a thickness of 0.5 μm.
<Ink for forming release layer>
Acrylic polyol 70 parts by mass (manufactured by Soken Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name: Thermolac SU100A)
・Isocyanate 25 parts by mass (Mitsui Chemicals, trade name: Takenate D-110N)
・ Ethyl acetate 161 parts by mass ・Methyl isobutyl ketone 56 parts by mass
<離型層形成用インキ>
・アクリルポリオール 70質量部
(綜研化学社製、商品名:サーモラックSU100A)
・イソシアネート 25質量部
(三井化学社製、商品名:タケネートD-110N)
・酢酸エチル 161質量部
・メチルイソブチルケトン 56質量部 Next, a release layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied to the entire surface of the resin layer and dried to form a release layer having a thickness of 0.5 μm.
<Ink for forming release layer>
・
・ Ethyl acetate 161 parts by mass ・
次いで、離型層の第2領域内の突出部及び周辺突出部上に、乾燥後の付着量が1g/m2(約1μm)となるように、下記処方の着色層形成用インキを塗布、乾燥して、着色層を形成し、離型シートCを得た。第1領域R1と、第2領域R2A、R2Bとの間隔P4は118mmであった。
<着色層形成用インキ>
・黒顔料(カーボンブラック) 8.4質量部
・アクリルポリオール 19.4質量部
(綜研化学社製、商品名:サーモラックSU100A)
・イソシアネート 5.1質量部
(三井化学社製、商品名:タケネートD-110N)
・溶媒 67.1質量部
(酢酸エチル/酢酸ブチル混合溶媒)
(混合比率2/1) Next, the colored layer forming ink of the following formulation is applied on the protrusions in the second region of the release layer and the peripheral protrusions so that the adhesion amount after drying is 1 g / m 2 (about 1 μm). By drying, a colored layer was formed, and a release sheet C was obtained. A distance P 4 between the first region R 1 and the second regions R 2A and R 2B was 118 mm.
<Colored layer forming ink>
Black pigment (carbon black) 8.4 parts by mass Acrylic polyol 19.4 parts by mass (manufactured by Soken Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name: Thermolac SU100A)
・ Isocyanate 5.1 parts by mass (Mitsui Chemicals, trade name: Takenate D-110N)
・ Solvent 67.1 parts by mass (ethyl acetate / butyl acetate mixed solvent)
(Mixingratio 2/1)
<着色層形成用インキ>
・黒顔料(カーボンブラック) 8.4質量部
・アクリルポリオール 19.4質量部
(綜研化学社製、商品名:サーモラックSU100A)
・イソシアネート 5.1質量部
(三井化学社製、商品名:タケネートD-110N)
・溶媒 67.1質量部
(酢酸エチル/酢酸ブチル混合溶媒)
(混合比率2/1) Next, the colored layer forming ink of the following formulation is applied on the protrusions in the second region of the release layer and the peripheral protrusions so that the adhesion amount after drying is 1 g / m 2 (about 1 μm). By drying, a colored layer was formed, and a release sheet C was obtained. A distance P 4 between the first region R 1 and the second regions R 2A and R 2B was 118 mm.
<Colored layer forming ink>
Black pigment (carbon black) 8.4 parts by mass Acrylic polyol 19.4 parts by mass (manufactured by Soken Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name: Thermolac SU100A)
・ Isocyanate 5.1 parts by mass (Mitsui Chemicals, trade name: Takenate D-110N)
・ Solvent 67.1 parts by mass (ethyl acetate / butyl acetate mixed solvent)
(Mixing
2-4.離型シートD(比較例2用の離型シート)の作製
上記「2-3」において、下記処方の着色層形成用インキに変更して着色層を形成した以外は、上記2-3と同様にして、離型シートDを得た。第1領域R1と、第2領域R2A、R2Bとの間隔P4は118mmであった。
<着色層形成用インキ>
・黒顔料(カ―ボンブラック) 4.3質量部
・塩化ビニル樹脂と酢酸ビニル樹脂の共重合体 1.3質量部
・アクリル系樹脂 5.4質量部
・ポリメタクリル酸メチル樹脂 7.0質量部
・溶媒 82質量部
(メチルエチルケトン/酢酸エチル/メチルイソブチルケトン混合溶媒)
(混合比率4/4/2) 2-4. Production of Release Sheet D (Release Sheet for Comparative Example 2) Same as 2-3 above, except that in the above “2-3”, a colored layer was formed by changing to the colored layer forming ink having the following formulation. Thus, a release sheet D was obtained. A distance P 4 between the first region R 1 and the second regions R 2A and R 2B was 118 mm.
<Colored layer forming ink>
-Black pigment (carbon black) 4.3 parts by mass-Copolymer of vinyl chloride resin and vinyl acetate resin 1.3 parts by mass-Acrylic resin 5.4 parts by mass-Polymethyl methacrylate resin 7.0 parts by mass Parts / solvent 82 parts by mass (mixed solvent of methyl ethyl ketone / ethyl acetate / methyl isobutyl ketone)
(Mixingratio 4/4/2)
上記「2-3」において、下記処方の着色層形成用インキに変更して着色層を形成した以外は、上記2-3と同様にして、離型シートDを得た。第1領域R1と、第2領域R2A、R2Bとの間隔P4は118mmであった。
<着色層形成用インキ>
・黒顔料(カ―ボンブラック) 4.3質量部
・塩化ビニル樹脂と酢酸ビニル樹脂の共重合体 1.3質量部
・アクリル系樹脂 5.4質量部
・ポリメタクリル酸メチル樹脂 7.0質量部
・溶媒 82質量部
(メチルエチルケトン/酢酸エチル/メチルイソブチルケトン混合溶媒)
(混合比率4/4/2) 2-4. Production of Release Sheet D (Release Sheet for Comparative Example 2) Same as 2-3 above, except that in the above “2-3”, a colored layer was formed by changing to the colored layer forming ink having the following formulation. Thus, a release sheet D was obtained. A distance P 4 between the first region R 1 and the second regions R 2A and R 2B was 118 mm.
<Colored layer forming ink>
-Black pigment (carbon black) 4.3 parts by mass-Copolymer of vinyl chloride resin and vinyl acetate resin 1.3 parts by mass-Acrylic resin 5.4 parts by mass-Polymethyl methacrylate resin 7.0 parts by mass Parts / solvent 82 parts by mass (mixed solvent of methyl ethyl ketone / ethyl acetate / methyl isobutyl ketone)
(Mixing
3.転写層の形成(転写シートの作製)
3-1.実施例1
上記「2-1」で得られた離型シートA上に、下記処方の保護層形成用インキを乾燥後の付着量が6.5g/m2(6.0μm)となるように塗布し、塗膜を形成した後、フュージョンUVランプシステムを用いて光源をHバルブ、搬送速度20m/min、出力40%の条件で照射し、保護層を半硬化させた。このときの積算光量を、アイグラフィックス社製の照度計(商品名:UVPF-A1)により測定したところ、15mJ/m2であった。
<保護層形成用インキ>
・ウレタンアクリレート系紫外線硬化樹脂組成物 70質量部
(大日精化工業社製、商品名:セイカビームHT-X)
(固形分35%、トルエン/酢酸エチル混合溶剤)
・ウレタンアクリレート系紫外線硬化樹脂組成物 30質量部
(大日精化工業社製、商品名:セイカビームEXF-HT-1)
(固形分40%、トルエン/メチルエチルケトン混合溶剤) 3. Formation of transfer layer (production of transfer sheet)
3-1. Example 1
On the release sheet A obtained in the above “2-1”, a protective layer-forming ink having the following formulation was applied so that the adhesion amount after drying was 6.5 g / m 2 (6.0 μm), After forming the coating film, the protective layer was semi-cured by irradiating the light source with a fusion UV lamp system under conditions of an H bulb, a conveyance speed of 20 m / min, and an output of 40%. The integrated light quantity at this time was 15 mJ / m 2 as measured by an illuminance meter (trade name: UVPF-A1) manufactured by Eye Graphics.
<Protective layer forming ink>
・ 70 parts by mass of urethane acrylate ultraviolet curable resin composition (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Kogyo Co., Ltd., trade name: Seika Beam HT-X)
(Solid content 35%, toluene / ethyl acetate mixed solvent)
-30 parts by mass of urethane acrylate UV curable resin composition (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Kogyo Co., Ltd., trade name: Seika Beam EXF-HT-1)
(Solid content 40%, toluene / methyl ethyl ketone mixed solvent)
3-1.実施例1
上記「2-1」で得られた離型シートA上に、下記処方の保護層形成用インキを乾燥後の付着量が6.5g/m2(6.0μm)となるように塗布し、塗膜を形成した後、フュージョンUVランプシステムを用いて光源をHバルブ、搬送速度20m/min、出力40%の条件で照射し、保護層を半硬化させた。このときの積算光量を、アイグラフィックス社製の照度計(商品名:UVPF-A1)により測定したところ、15mJ/m2であった。
<保護層形成用インキ>
・ウレタンアクリレート系紫外線硬化樹脂組成物 70質量部
(大日精化工業社製、商品名:セイカビームHT-X)
(固形分35%、トルエン/酢酸エチル混合溶剤)
・ウレタンアクリレート系紫外線硬化樹脂組成物 30質量部
(大日精化工業社製、商品名:セイカビームEXF-HT-1)
(固形分40%、トルエン/メチルエチルケトン混合溶剤) 3. Formation of transfer layer (production of transfer sheet)
3-1. Example 1
On the release sheet A obtained in the above “2-1”, a protective layer-forming ink having the following formulation was applied so that the adhesion amount after drying was 6.5 g / m 2 (6.0 μm), After forming the coating film, the protective layer was semi-cured by irradiating the light source with a fusion UV lamp system under conditions of an H bulb, a conveyance speed of 20 m / min, and an output of 40%. The integrated light quantity at this time was 15 mJ / m 2 as measured by an illuminance meter (trade name: UVPF-A1) manufactured by Eye Graphics.
<Protective layer forming ink>
・ 70 parts by mass of urethane acrylate ultraviolet curable resin composition (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Kogyo Co., Ltd., trade name: Seika Beam HT-X)
(Solid content 35%, toluene / ethyl acetate mixed solvent)
-30 parts by mass of urethane acrylate UV curable resin composition (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Kogyo Co., Ltd., trade name: Seika Beam EXF-HT-1)
(
次いで、保護層上に下記処方のアンカー層形成用インキを乾燥後の付着量が3.0g/m2となるように塗布し、塗膜を形成した後、40℃で72時間乾燥し、硬化させ、厚さ2μmのアンカー層を形成した。
<アンカー層用インキ>
・アクリルポリオール 100質量部
(大日精化工業社製、商品名:TM-VMAC、固形分25%)
(トルエン/酢酸エチル/メチルエチルケトン混合溶剤)
・キサンメチレンジイソシアネート 10質量部
(大日精化工業社製、商品名:PTC-RC3)
(固形分75%、溶剤:酢酸エチル) Next, the anchor layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied onto the protective layer so that the amount of adhesion after drying was 3.0 g / m 2, and after forming a coating film, the film was dried at 40 ° C. for 72 hours and cured. An anchor layer having a thickness of 2 μm was formed.
<Ink for anchor layer>
Acrylic polyol 100 parts by mass (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Kogyo Co., Ltd., trade name: TM-VMAC, solid content 25%)
(Toluene / ethyl acetate / methyl ethyl ketone mixed solvent)
・ 10 parts by mass of xanthethylene diisocyanate (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Kogyo Co., Ltd., trade name: PTC-RC3)
(Solid content 75%, solvent: ethyl acetate)
<アンカー層用インキ>
・アクリルポリオール 100質量部
(大日精化工業社製、商品名:TM-VMAC、固形分25%)
(トルエン/酢酸エチル/メチルエチルケトン混合溶剤)
・キサンメチレンジイソシアネート 10質量部
(大日精化工業社製、商品名:PTC-RC3)
(固形分75%、溶剤:酢酸エチル) Next, the anchor layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied onto the protective layer so that the amount of adhesion after drying was 3.0 g / m 2, and after forming a coating film, the film was dried at 40 ° C. for 72 hours and cured. An anchor layer having a thickness of 2 μm was formed.
<Ink for anchor layer>
(Toluene / ethyl acetate / methyl ethyl ketone mixed solvent)
・ 10 parts by mass of xanthethylene diisocyanate (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Kogyo Co., Ltd., trade name: PTC-RC3)
(Solid content 75%, solvent: ethyl acetate)
次いで、アンカー層上に下記処方の接着剤層形成用インキを乾燥後の付着量が2.5g/m2となるように塗布し、塗膜を形成した。該塗膜を乾燥し、厚さ2μmの接着剤層を形成し、2面付けの転写シートを得た。
<接着剤層用塗工液>
・アクリル系樹脂 100質量部
(大日精化工業社製、商品名:TM-R600、固形分20%)
(酢酸エチル/酢酸-n-プロピル/メチルエチルケトン混合溶剤)
・メチルエチルケトン 40質量部 Next, an adhesive layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied onto the anchor layer so that the adhesion amount after drying was 2.5 g / m 2 to form a coating film. The coating film was dried to form an adhesive layer having a thickness of 2 μm to obtain a two-sided transfer sheet.
<Coating solution for adhesive layer>
-100 parts by mass of acrylic resin (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Kogyo Co., Ltd., trade name: TM-R600,solid content 20%)
(Ethyl acetate / n-propyl / methyl ethyl ketone mixed solvent)
・Methyl ethyl ketone 40 parts by mass
<接着剤層用塗工液>
・アクリル系樹脂 100質量部
(大日精化工業社製、商品名:TM-R600、固形分20%)
(酢酸エチル/酢酸-n-プロピル/メチルエチルケトン混合溶剤)
・メチルエチルケトン 40質量部 Next, an adhesive layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied onto the anchor layer so that the adhesion amount after drying was 2.5 g / m 2 to form a coating film. The coating film was dried to form an adhesive layer having a thickness of 2 μm to obtain a two-sided transfer sheet.
<Coating solution for adhesive layer>
-100 parts by mass of acrylic resin (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Kogyo Co., Ltd., trade name: TM-R600,
(Ethyl acetate / n-propyl / methyl ethyl ketone mixed solvent)
・
3-2.比較例1
離型シートを上記「2-2」で得られた離型シートBに変更した以外は、上記3-1(実施例1)と同様にして、2面付けの転写シートを得た。 3-2. Comparative Example 1
A two-sided transfer sheet was obtained in the same manner as in 3-1 (Example 1) except that the release sheet was changed to the release sheet B obtained in the above “2-2”.
離型シートを上記「2-2」で得られた離型シートBに変更した以外は、上記3-1(実施例1)と同様にして、2面付けの転写シートを得た。 3-2. Comparative Example 1
A two-sided transfer sheet was obtained in the same manner as in 3-1 (Example 1) except that the release sheet was changed to the release sheet B obtained in the above “2-2”.
3-3.実施例2
離型シートを上記「2-3」で得られた離型シートCに変更した以外は、上記3-1(実施例1)と同様にして、2面付けの転写シートを得た。 3-3. Example 2
A two-sided transfer sheet was obtained in the same manner as in 3-1 (Example 1) except that the release sheet was changed to the release sheet C obtained in “2-3” above.
離型シートを上記「2-3」で得られた離型シートCに変更した以外は、上記3-1(実施例1)と同様にして、2面付けの転写シートを得た。 3-3. Example 2
A two-sided transfer sheet was obtained in the same manner as in 3-1 (Example 1) except that the release sheet was changed to the release sheet C obtained in “2-3” above.
3-4.比較例2
離型シートを上記「2-4」で得られた離型シートDに変更した以外は、上記3-1(実施例1)と同様にして、2面付けの転写シートを得た。 3-4. Comparative Example 2
A two-sided transfer sheet was obtained in the same manner as in 3-1 (Example 1) except that the release sheet was changed to the release sheet D obtained in the above “2-4”.
離型シートを上記「2-4」で得られた離型シートDに変更した以外は、上記3-1(実施例1)と同様にして、2面付けの転写シートを得た。 3-4. Comparative Example 2
A two-sided transfer sheet was obtained in the same manner as in 3-1 (Example 1) except that the release sheet was changed to the release sheet D obtained in the above “2-4”.
4.転写シートのスリット加工、枚葉への抜き加工
上記「3-1」、「3-3」及び「3-4」で得られた2面付けの転写シート(実施例1、2及び比較例2の転写シート)を、第2領域R2Aの光透過率差のコントラストを利用してスリット加工した。その結果、正確な位置でスリット加工することができた。一方、上記「3-2」で得られた2面付けの転写シート(比較例1の転写シート)は、1本の突出部の周辺に生じた地汚れの影響により、スリット加工の際の位置合わせがずれることがあった。
また、上記「3-1」、「3-3」及び「3-4」で得られた2面付けの転写シート(実施例1、2及び比較例2の転写シート)を、第2領域R2A、R2Bの光透過率差のコントラストを利用して枚葉に抜き加工した。その結果、正確な位置で抜き加工することができた。一方、上記「3-2」で得られた2面付けの転写シート(比較例1の転写シート)は、流れ方向の位置合わせ手段がなく、また、1本の突出部の周辺に地汚れが生じていることから、正確な位置で枚葉に抜き加工することが困難であった。 4). Slit processing of transfer sheet and punching out of single sheet Transfer sheet with two faces obtained in the above “3-1”, “3-3” and “3-4” (Examples 1 and 2 and Comparative Example 2) The transfer sheet) was slit using the contrast of the light transmittance difference of the second region R2A . As a result, it was possible to slit at an accurate position. On the other hand, the two-sided transfer sheet obtained in the above “3-2” (transfer sheet of Comparative Example 1) is positioned at the time of slit processing due to the influence of background contamination generated around one protrusion. There were times when the alignment was shifted.
In addition, the two-sided transfer sheet (transfer sheets of Examples 1 and 2 and Comparative Example 2) obtained in the above “3-1”, “3-3” and “3-4” is used as the second region R. Sheets were punched using the contrast of the light transmittance difference between 2A and R 2B . As a result, it was possible to perform punching at an accurate position. On the other hand, the two-sided transfer sheet obtained in the above “3-2” (transfer sheet of Comparative Example 1) has no alignment means in the flow direction, and there is no background stain around one protrusion. As a result, it was difficult to punch into a sheet at an accurate position.
上記「3-1」、「3-3」及び「3-4」で得られた2面付けの転写シート(実施例1、2及び比較例2の転写シート)を、第2領域R2Aの光透過率差のコントラストを利用してスリット加工した。その結果、正確な位置でスリット加工することができた。一方、上記「3-2」で得られた2面付けの転写シート(比較例1の転写シート)は、1本の突出部の周辺に生じた地汚れの影響により、スリット加工の際の位置合わせがずれることがあった。
また、上記「3-1」、「3-3」及び「3-4」で得られた2面付けの転写シート(実施例1、2及び比較例2の転写シート)を、第2領域R2A、R2Bの光透過率差のコントラストを利用して枚葉に抜き加工した。その結果、正確な位置で抜き加工することができた。一方、上記「3-2」で得られた2面付けの転写シート(比較例1の転写シート)は、流れ方向の位置合わせ手段がなく、また、1本の突出部の周辺に地汚れが生じていることから、正確な位置で枚葉に抜き加工することが困難であった。 4). Slit processing of transfer sheet and punching out of single sheet Transfer sheet with two faces obtained in the above “3-1”, “3-3” and “3-4” (Examples 1 and 2 and Comparative Example 2) The transfer sheet) was slit using the contrast of the light transmittance difference of the second region R2A . As a result, it was possible to slit at an accurate position. On the other hand, the two-sided transfer sheet obtained in the above “3-2” (transfer sheet of Comparative Example 1) is positioned at the time of slit processing due to the influence of background contamination generated around one protrusion. There were times when the alignment was shifted.
In addition, the two-sided transfer sheet (transfer sheets of Examples 1 and 2 and Comparative Example 2) obtained in the above “3-1”, “3-3” and “3-4” is used as the second region R. Sheets were punched using the contrast of the light transmittance difference between 2A and R 2B . As a result, it was possible to perform punching at an accurate position. On the other hand, the two-sided transfer sheet obtained in the above “3-2” (transfer sheet of Comparative Example 1) has no alignment means in the flow direction, and there is no background stain around one protrusion. As a result, it was difficult to punch into a sheet at an accurate position.
上記「3-3」で得られた2面付けの転写シート(実施例2の転写シート)は、スリット加工及び枚葉に抜き加工で着色層を切断しても箔チリは発生しなかった。一方、上記「3-4」で得られた2面付けの転写シート(比較例2の転写シート)は、スリット加工及び枚葉に抜き加工で着色層を切断した際に箔チリが発生してしまった。
The two-sided transfer sheet obtained in the above “3-3” (transfer sheet of Example 2) did not generate foil dust even when the colored layer was cut by slit processing and sheet cutting. On the other hand, the two-sided transfer sheet obtained in the above “3-4” (transfer sheet of Comparative Example 2) generated foil dust when the colored layer was cut by slitting and punching a sheet. Oops.
5.加飾成形品の作製
上記「4」の実施例1、2の転写シートを用いたスリット加工及び枚葉に抜き加工において、第2領域を残存させるように加工した。スリット加工及び枚葉に抜き加工した転写シートを用いて、以下の(z1)~(z5)の工程により加飾成形品を作製した。 5). Production of Decorative Molded Product In the slit processing using the transfer sheet of Examples 1 and 2 in the above “4” and the punching out of the single wafer, the second region was processed. A decorative molded product was produced by the following steps (z1) to (z5) using a slit sheet and a transfer sheet punched into sheets.
上記「4」の実施例1、2の転写シートを用いたスリット加工及び枚葉に抜き加工において、第2領域を残存させるように加工した。スリット加工及び枚葉に抜き加工した転写シートを用いて、以下の(z1)~(z5)の工程により加飾成形品を作製した。 5). Production of Decorative Molded Product In the slit processing using the transfer sheet of Examples 1 and 2 in the above “4” and the punching out of the single wafer, the second region was processed. A decorative molded product was produced by the following steps (z1) to (z5) using a slit sheet and a transfer sheet punched into sheets.
(z1)転写シートの転写層側をインモールド成形用金型の内側に向けて配置する工程
(z2)インモールド成形用金型内に樹脂を射出注入する工程、
(z3)転写シートと、樹脂とを一体化させて、樹脂成形体(被転写物)の表面上に上記転写シートの転写層を転写する工程、
(z4)樹脂成形体(被転写物)を金型から取り出した後、転写シートの離型シートを剥離する工程
(z5)第2領域をトリミング(除去)する工程 (Z1) a step of disposing the transfer layer side of the transfer sheet toward the inside of the in-mold mold (z2) a step of injecting and injecting resin into the in-mold mold,
(Z3) a step of integrating the transfer sheet and the resin, and transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet onto the surface of the resin molded body (transfer object);
(Z4) Step of removing the release sheet of the transfer sheet after removing the resin molded body (transfer object) from the mold (z5) Step of trimming (removing) the second region
(z2)インモールド成形用金型内に樹脂を射出注入する工程、
(z3)転写シートと、樹脂とを一体化させて、樹脂成形体(被転写物)の表面上に上記転写シートの転写層を転写する工程、
(z4)樹脂成形体(被転写物)を金型から取り出した後、転写シートの離型シートを剥離する工程
(z5)第2領域をトリミング(除去)する工程 (Z1) a step of disposing the transfer layer side of the transfer sheet toward the inside of the in-mold mold (z2) a step of injecting and injecting resin into the in-mold mold,
(Z3) a step of integrating the transfer sheet and the resin, and transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet onto the surface of the resin molded body (transfer object);
(Z4) Step of removing the release sheet of the transfer sheet after removing the resin molded body (transfer object) from the mold (z5) Step of trimming (removing) the second region
上記工程では、(z1)工程で転写シートを配置する際に、第2領域R2A、R2Bの光透過率差のコントラストを利用して、金型の正確な位置に転写シートを配置することができた。このため、被転写物(樹脂成形品)の正確な位置に転写層を転写することができた。
なお、第2領域R2A、R2Bが残存した転写シートは、転写シートの転写層側の表面に微細な出っ張りが形成されていた。このため、第2領域R2A、R2Bが残存したスリット加工した転写シートを巻き取ったり、第2領域R2A、R2Bが残存した枚葉の転写シートを多数重ねたりしても、第1領域のブロッキングを抑制できるものであった。 In the above step, when the transfer sheet is arranged in the step (z1), the transfer sheet is arranged at an accurate position of the mold using the contrast of the light transmittance difference between the second regions R 2A and R 2B. I was able to. For this reason, the transfer layer was able to be transferred to the exact position of the material to be transferred (resin molded product).
The transfer sheet in which the second regions R 2A and R 2B remained had fine protrusions formed on the transfer layer side surface of the transfer sheet. Therefore, the second region R 2A, or wound transfer sheet was slit machining R 2B remained, the second region R 2A, even or overlaid many transfer sheet sheet remaining is R 2B, the first The blocking of the region could be suppressed.
なお、第2領域R2A、R2Bが残存した転写シートは、転写シートの転写層側の表面に微細な出っ張りが形成されていた。このため、第2領域R2A、R2Bが残存したスリット加工した転写シートを巻き取ったり、第2領域R2A、R2Bが残存した枚葉の転写シートを多数重ねたりしても、第1領域のブロッキングを抑制できるものであった。 In the above step, when the transfer sheet is arranged in the step (z1), the transfer sheet is arranged at an accurate position of the mold using the contrast of the light transmittance difference between the second regions R 2A and R 2B. I was able to. For this reason, the transfer layer was able to be transferred to the exact position of the material to be transferred (resin molded product).
The transfer sheet in which the second regions R 2A and R 2B remained had fine protrusions formed on the transfer layer side surface of the transfer sheet. Therefore, the second region R 2A, or wound transfer sheet was slit machining R 2B remained, the second region R 2A, even or overlaid many transfer sheet sheet remaining is R 2B, the first The blocking of the region could be suppressed.
(第3の実施の形態に係る転写シートの実施例)
[測定及び評価]
実施例及び比較例で作製した転写シートについて、以下の測定及び評価を行った。結果を表1に示す。 (Example of transfer sheet according to the third embodiment)
[Measurement and evaluation]
The transfer sheets prepared in the examples and comparative examples were measured and evaluated as follows. The results are shown in Table 1.
[測定及び評価]
実施例及び比較例で作製した転写シートについて、以下の測定及び評価を行った。結果を表1に示す。 (Example of transfer sheet according to the third embodiment)
[Measurement and evaluation]
The transfer sheets prepared in the examples and comparative examples were measured and evaluated as follows. The results are shown in Table 1.
<箔チリ評価>
実施例及び比較例で作製した転写シートの位置合わせ用マークを切断するように、10cm角に切り出した時に生じる箔チリのサイズと個数で評価した。10箇所切り出した際に、2cm角以上の箔チリが生じた個数の平均を算出した。
A:0.5個未満
B:0.5個以上2.0個未満
C:2.0個以上 <Foil Chile Evaluation>
Evaluation was made based on the size and number of foil dust produced when the transfer sheet produced in Examples and Comparative Examples was cut into 10 cm square so as to cut the alignment marks. When 10 places were cut out, the average of the number of foil dust of 2 cm square or more was calculated.
A: Less than 0.5 B: 0.5 or more and less than 2.0 C: 2.0 or more
実施例及び比較例で作製した転写シートの位置合わせ用マークを切断するように、10cm角に切り出した時に生じる箔チリのサイズと個数で評価した。10箇所切り出した際に、2cm角以上の箔チリが生じた個数の平均を算出した。
A:0.5個未満
B:0.5個以上2.0個未満
C:2.0個以上 <Foil Chile Evaluation>
Evaluation was made based on the size and number of foil dust produced when the transfer sheet produced in Examples and Comparative Examples was cut into 10 cm square so as to cut the alignment marks. When 10 places were cut out, the average of the number of foil dust of 2 cm square or more was calculated.
A: Less than 0.5 B: 0.5 or more and less than 2.0 C: 2.0 or more
<密着性1>
実施例及び比較例で作製した転写シートの離型シートに植物系のセロハンテープ(ニチバン株式会社製、幅25mm)を貼り付けた後、セロハンテープの先端を持ち、45度の角度を保ちながら0.5秒で引張り剥がし、密着性を評価した。
A:離型シートと転写層の界面で剥離した
C:離型シートと転写層の界面以外で剥離した <Adhesion 1>
After sticking plant cellophane tape (manufactured by Nichiban Co., Ltd.,width 25 mm) to the release sheet of the transfer sheet prepared in Examples and Comparative Examples, the tip of the cellophane tape is held and the angle of 45 degrees is maintained. The film was pulled off in 5 seconds and evaluated for adhesion.
A: Peeled at the interface between the release sheet and the transfer layer C: Peeled at other than the interface between the release sheet and the transfer layer
実施例及び比較例で作製した転写シートの離型シートに植物系のセロハンテープ(ニチバン株式会社製、幅25mm)を貼り付けた後、セロハンテープの先端を持ち、45度の角度を保ちながら0.5秒で引張り剥がし、密着性を評価した。
A:離型シートと転写層の界面で剥離した
C:離型シートと転写層の界面以外で剥離した <
After sticking plant cellophane tape (manufactured by Nichiban Co., Ltd.,
A: Peeled at the interface between the release sheet and the transfer layer C: Peeled at other than the interface between the release sheet and the transfer layer
<密着性2>
実施例及び比較例で作製した転写シートの離型シートに植物系のセロハンテープ(ニチバン株式会社製、幅25mm)を貼り付けた後、セロハンテープの先端を持ち、180度の角度を保ちながら1秒で引張り剥がし、密着性を評価した。
A:離型シートと転写層の界面で剥離した
C:離型シートと転写層の界面以外で剥離した <Adhesion 2>
After sticking a plant-based cellophane tape (Nichiban Co., Ltd.,width 25 mm) to the release sheet of the transfer sheet prepared in the examples and comparative examples, hold the tip of the cellophane tape and keep the angle of 180 degrees 1 The film was pulled off in seconds and the adhesion was evaluated.
A: Peeled at the interface between the release sheet and the transfer layer C: Peeled at other than the interface between the release sheet and the transfer layer
実施例及び比較例で作製した転写シートの離型シートに植物系のセロハンテープ(ニチバン株式会社製、幅25mm)を貼り付けた後、セロハンテープの先端を持ち、180度の角度を保ちながら1秒で引張り剥がし、密着性を評価した。
A:離型シートと転写層の界面で剥離した
C:離型シートと転写層の界面以外で剥離した <
After sticking a plant-based cellophane tape (Nichiban Co., Ltd.,
A: Peeled at the interface between the release sheet and the transfer layer C: Peeled at other than the interface between the release sheet and the transfer layer
<位置合わせ用パターンの鮮明性>
実施例及び比較例で作製した転写シートの位置合わせ用パターンを顕微鏡写真で撮影し、位置合わせ用パターンの鮮明性の評価を行った。鮮明性について、10箇所の着色層の線幅を計測し、以下の評価を行った。
A:転写シートを平面方向から観察した際の着色層の線幅の変動が5%以内
B:転写シートを平面方向から観察した際の着色層の線幅の変動が10%以内
C:転写シートを平面方向から観察した際の着色層の線幅の変動が10%を超える <Clarity of alignment pattern>
The alignment patterns of the transfer sheets prepared in Examples and Comparative Examples were photographed with micrographs, and the clarity of the alignment patterns was evaluated. Regarding the sharpness, the line widths of 10 colored layers were measured, and the following evaluation was performed.
A: The variation of the line width of the colored layer when the transfer sheet is observed from the plane direction is within 5% B: The variation of the line width of the color layer when the transfer sheet is observed from the plane direction is within 10% C: The transfer sheet The variation of the line width of the colored layer when observed from the plane direction exceeds 10%
実施例及び比較例で作製した転写シートの位置合わせ用パターンを顕微鏡写真で撮影し、位置合わせ用パターンの鮮明性の評価を行った。鮮明性について、10箇所の着色層の線幅を計測し、以下の評価を行った。
A:転写シートを平面方向から観察した際の着色層の線幅の変動が5%以内
B:転写シートを平面方向から観察した際の着色層の線幅の変動が10%以内
C:転写シートを平面方向から観察した際の着色層の線幅の変動が10%を超える <Clarity of alignment pattern>
The alignment patterns of the transfer sheets prepared in Examples and Comparative Examples were photographed with micrographs, and the clarity of the alignment patterns was evaluated. Regarding the sharpness, the line widths of 10 colored layers were measured, and the following evaluation was performed.
A: The variation of the line width of the colored layer when the transfer sheet is observed from the plane direction is within 5% B: The variation of the line width of the color layer when the transfer sheet is observed from the plane direction is within 10% C: The transfer sheet The variation of the line width of the colored layer when observed from the plane direction exceeds 10%
(実施例3)
1.離型シートの作製
厚さ75μmのポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム上に、下記処方の樹脂層形成用インキを塗布、乾燥し、厚さ8.0μmの未硬化の樹脂層を形成した。
<樹脂層形成用インキ>
・電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物 40質量部
(共栄化学社製、アクリル系樹脂)
・光重合開始剤 3質量部
・メチルエチルケトン 60質量部
・シリコーン系レベリング剤 0.5質量部 (Example 3)
1. Production of Release Sheet On a polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 75 μm, a resin layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied and dried to form an uncured resin layer having a thickness of 8.0 μm.
<Resin layer forming ink>
・ Ionizing radiationcurable resin composition 40 parts by mass (made by Kyoei Chemical Co., Ltd., acrylic resin)
・Photopolymerization initiator 3 parts by mass ・ Methyl ethyl ketone 60 parts by mass ・ Silicone leveling agent 0.5 parts by mass
1.離型シートの作製
厚さ75μmのポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム上に、下記処方の樹脂層形成用インキを塗布、乾燥し、厚さ8.0μmの未硬化の樹脂層を形成した。
<樹脂層形成用インキ>
・電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物 40質量部
(共栄化学社製、アクリル系樹脂)
・光重合開始剤 3質量部
・メチルエチルケトン 60質量部
・シリコーン系レベリング剤 0.5質量部 (Example 3)
1. Production of Release Sheet On a polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 75 μm, a resin layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied and dried to form an uncured resin layer having a thickness of 8.0 μm.
<Resin layer forming ink>
・ Ionizing radiation
・
次いで、以下の第1領域R1及び第2領域R2と相補的な形状を有する版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層を賦形すると同時に、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム側から電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層を硬化させた。
<第1領域R1と相補的な形状>
・平滑
<第2領域R2と相補的な形状>
・凸部と相補的形状を有する溝部:幅0.2mm、深さ7.0μm
・溝部の端部同士の間隔:0.6mm
・溝部の数:25本
<賦形した樹脂層の形状>
・凸部:幅0.2mm、高さ5.0μm
・凸部の端部同士の間隔:0.6mm
・溝部の数:24本 Then, using a plate having the first region R 1 and the second region R 2 and the complementary shape, and at the same time the uncured resin layer to shape, by irradiating ionizing radiation a polyethylene terephthalate film side, The shaped resin layer was cured.
<First region R 1 and the complementary shapes>
· Smoothing <second region R 2 and the complementary shapes>
-Groove part complementary to the convex part: width 0.2 mm, depth 7.0 μm
・ Distance between the ends of the groove: 0.6 mm
・ Number of grooves: 25 <Shape of shaped resin layer>
・ Protrusions: width 0.2mm, height 5.0μm
・ Spacing between the ends of the protrusions: 0.6 mm
・ Number of grooves: 24
<第1領域R1と相補的な形状>
・平滑
<第2領域R2と相補的な形状>
・凸部と相補的形状を有する溝部:幅0.2mm、深さ7.0μm
・溝部の端部同士の間隔:0.6mm
・溝部の数:25本
<賦形した樹脂層の形状>
・凸部:幅0.2mm、高さ5.0μm
・凸部の端部同士の間隔:0.6mm
・溝部の数:24本 Then, using a plate having the first region R 1 and the second region R 2 and the complementary shape, and at the same time the uncured resin layer to shape, by irradiating ionizing radiation a polyethylene terephthalate film side, The shaped resin layer was cured.
<First region R 1 and the complementary shapes>
· Smoothing <second region R 2 and the complementary shapes>
-Groove part complementary to the convex part: width 0.2 mm, depth 7.0 μm
・ Distance between the ends of the groove: 0.6 mm
・ Number of grooves: 25 <Shape of shaped resin layer>
・ Protrusions: width 0.2mm, height 5.0μm
・ Spacing between the ends of the protrusions: 0.6 mm
・ Number of grooves: 24
次いで、得られた樹脂層上に、下記処方の離型層形成用インキを全面に塗布した後、40℃で72時間乾燥し、厚さ0.5μmの離型層を形成し、離型シートを得た。
<離型層形成用インキ>
・アクリルポリオール 70質量部
(綜研化学社製、商品名:サーモラックSU100A)
・イソシアネート 25質量部
(三井化学社製、商品名:タケネートD-110N)
・酢酸エチル 161質量部
・メチルイソブチルケトン 56質量部 Next, a release layer-forming ink having the following formulation was applied over the entire surface of the obtained resin layer, and then dried at 40 ° C. for 72 hours to form a release layer having a thickness of 0.5 μm. Got.
<Ink for forming release layer>
Acrylic polyol 70 parts by mass (manufactured by Soken Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name: Thermolac SU100A)
・Isocyanate 25 parts by mass (Mitsui Chemicals, trade name: Takenate D-110N)
・ Ethyl acetate 161 parts by mass ・Methyl isobutyl ketone 56 parts by mass
<離型層形成用インキ>
・アクリルポリオール 70質量部
(綜研化学社製、商品名:サーモラックSU100A)
・イソシアネート 25質量部
(三井化学社製、商品名:タケネートD-110N)
・酢酸エチル 161質量部
・メチルイソブチルケトン 56質量部 Next, a release layer-forming ink having the following formulation was applied over the entire surface of the obtained resin layer, and then dried at 40 ° C. for 72 hours to form a release layer having a thickness of 0.5 μm. Got.
<Ink for forming release layer>
・
・ Ethyl acetate 161 parts by mass ・
2.転写層の作製
上記「1」で得られた離型シート上に、下記処方の保護層形成用インキを乾燥後の付着量が5.0g/m2となるように塗布し、塗膜を形成した後、フュージョンUVランプシステムを用いて光源をHバルブ、搬送速度20m/min、出力40%の条件で照射し、保護層を半硬化させた。このときの積算光量を、アイグラフィックス社製の照度計(商品名:UVPF-A1)により測定したところ、15mJ/m2であった。
<保護層形成用インキ>
・ウレタンアクリレート系紫外線硬化樹脂組成物 70質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:セイカビームHT-X)
(固形分35%、トルエン/酢酸エチル混合溶剤)
・ウレタンアクリレート系紫外線硬化樹脂組成物 30質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:セイカビームEXF-HT-1)
(固形分40%、トルエン/メチルエチルケトン混合溶剤) 2. Preparation of transfer layer On the release sheet obtained in the above "1", a protective layer-forming ink having the following formulation was applied so that the adhesion amount after drying was 5.0 g / m 2 to form a coating film. Then, using a fusion UV lamp system, the protective layer was semi-cured by irradiating the light source under the conditions of an H bulb, a conveyance speed of 20 m / min, and an output of 40%. The integrated light quantity at this time was 15 mJ / m 2 as measured by an illuminance meter (trade name: UVPF-A1) manufactured by Eye Graphics.
<Protective layer forming ink>
・ 70 parts by mass of urethane acrylate UV curable resin composition (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: Seika Beam HT-X)
(Solid content 35%, toluene / ethyl acetate mixed solvent)
-30 parts by mass of urethane acrylate UV curable resin composition (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: Seika Beam EXF-HT-1)
(Solid content 40%, toluene / methyl ethyl ketone mixed solvent)
上記「1」で得られた離型シート上に、下記処方の保護層形成用インキを乾燥後の付着量が5.0g/m2となるように塗布し、塗膜を形成した後、フュージョンUVランプシステムを用いて光源をHバルブ、搬送速度20m/min、出力40%の条件で照射し、保護層を半硬化させた。このときの積算光量を、アイグラフィックス社製の照度計(商品名:UVPF-A1)により測定したところ、15mJ/m2であった。
<保護層形成用インキ>
・ウレタンアクリレート系紫外線硬化樹脂組成物 70質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:セイカビームHT-X)
(固形分35%、トルエン/酢酸エチル混合溶剤)
・ウレタンアクリレート系紫外線硬化樹脂組成物 30質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:セイカビームEXF-HT-1)
(固形分40%、トルエン/メチルエチルケトン混合溶剤) 2. Preparation of transfer layer On the release sheet obtained in the above "1", a protective layer-forming ink having the following formulation was applied so that the adhesion amount after drying was 5.0 g / m 2 to form a coating film. Then, using a fusion UV lamp system, the protective layer was semi-cured by irradiating the light source under the conditions of an H bulb, a conveyance speed of 20 m / min, and an output of 40%. The integrated light quantity at this time was 15 mJ / m 2 as measured by an illuminance meter (trade name: UVPF-A1) manufactured by Eye Graphics.
<Protective layer forming ink>
・ 70 parts by mass of urethane acrylate UV curable resin composition (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: Seika Beam HT-X)
(Solid content 35%, toluene / ethyl acetate mixed solvent)
-30 parts by mass of urethane acrylate UV curable resin composition (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: Seika Beam EXF-HT-1)
(
次いで、保護層上に下記処方のアンカー層形成用インキを乾燥後の付着量が3.0g/m2となるように塗布し、塗膜を形成した後、40℃で72時間乾燥し、硬化させ、厚さ2μmのアンカー層を形成した。
<アンカー層形成用インキ>
・アクリルポリオール 100質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:TM-VMAC、固形分25%)
(トルエン/酢酸エチル/メチルエチルケトン混合溶剤)
・キサンメチレンジイソシアネート 10質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:PTC-RC3)
(固形分75%、溶剤:酢酸エチル)
・溶媒 65質量部
(メチルエチルケトン、固形分が22%になるように希釈) Next, the anchor layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied onto the protective layer so that the amount of adhesion after drying was 3.0 g / m 2, and after forming a coating film, the film was dried at 40 ° C. for 72 hours and cured. An anchor layer having a thickness of 2 μm was formed.
<Ink for anchor layer formation>
・ Acrylic polyol 100 parts by mass (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: TM-VMAC,solid content 25%)
(Toluene / ethyl acetate / methyl ethyl ketone mixed solvent)
・ 10 parts by mass of xanthethylene diisocyanate (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: PTC-RC3)
(Solid content 75%, solvent: ethyl acetate)
・ Solvent 65 parts by mass (Methyl ethyl ketone, diluted so that the solid content is 22%)
<アンカー層形成用インキ>
・アクリルポリオール 100質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:TM-VMAC、固形分25%)
(トルエン/酢酸エチル/メチルエチルケトン混合溶剤)
・キサンメチレンジイソシアネート 10質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:PTC-RC3)
(固形分75%、溶剤:酢酸エチル)
・溶媒 65質量部
(メチルエチルケトン、固形分が22%になるように希釈) Next, the anchor layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied onto the protective layer so that the amount of adhesion after drying was 3.0 g / m 2, and after forming a coating film, the film was dried at 40 ° C. for 72 hours and cured. An anchor layer having a thickness of 2 μm was formed.
<Ink for anchor layer formation>
・ Acrylic polyol 100 parts by mass (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: TM-VMAC,
(Toluene / ethyl acetate / methyl ethyl ketone mixed solvent)
・ 10 parts by mass of xanthethylene diisocyanate (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: PTC-RC3)
(Solid content 75%, solvent: ethyl acetate)
・ Solvent 65 parts by mass (Methyl ethyl ketone, diluted so that the solid content is 22%)
次いで、アンカー層上に下記処方の接着剤層形成用インキを乾燥後の付着量が2.5g/m2となるように塗布し、塗膜を形成した。該塗膜を乾燥し、厚さ2μmの接着剤層を形成し、転写シートを得た。
<接着剤層形成用インキ>
・アクリル系樹脂 100質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:TM-R600、固形分20%)
(酢酸エチル/酢酸-n-プロピル/メチルエチルケトン混合溶剤)
・メチルエチルケトン 40質量部
・ヒドロキシフェニルトリアジン系紫外線吸収剤 1.28質量部
(BASF社製、商品名:Tinuvin479) Next, an adhesive layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied onto the anchor layer so that the adhesion amount after drying was 2.5 g / m 2 to form a coating film. The coating film was dried to form an adhesive layer having a thickness of 2 μm to obtain a transfer sheet.
<Ink for forming the adhesive layer>
-100 parts by mass of acrylic resin (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: TM-R600,solid content 20%)
(Ethyl acetate / n-propyl / methyl ethyl ketone mixed solvent)
・Methyl ethyl ketone 40 parts by mass ・ Hydroxyphenyl triazine ultraviolet absorber 1.28 parts by mass (trade name: Tinuvin 479, manufactured by BASF)
<接着剤層形成用インキ>
・アクリル系樹脂 100質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:TM-R600、固形分20%)
(酢酸エチル/酢酸-n-プロピル/メチルエチルケトン混合溶剤)
・メチルエチルケトン 40質量部
・ヒドロキシフェニルトリアジン系紫外線吸収剤 1.28質量部
(BASF社製、商品名:Tinuvin479) Next, an adhesive layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied onto the anchor layer so that the adhesion amount after drying was 2.5 g / m 2 to form a coating film. The coating film was dried to form an adhesive layer having a thickness of 2 μm to obtain a transfer sheet.
<Ink for forming the adhesive layer>
-100 parts by mass of acrylic resin (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: TM-R600,
(Ethyl acetate / n-propyl / methyl ethyl ketone mixed solvent)
・
<接着剤層に形成された突出部の形状>
・突出部の高さ:4.5μm
・突出部の端部同士の間隔:0.5mm <Shape of the protrusion formed on the adhesive layer>
-Height of protrusion: 4.5 μm
・ Spacing between ends of protrusions: 0.5 mm
・突出部の高さ:4.5μm
・突出部の端部同士の間隔:0.5mm <Shape of the protrusion formed on the adhesive layer>
-Height of protrusion: 4.5 μm
・ Spacing between ends of protrusions: 0.5 mm
次いで、接着剤層における突出部上に、下記処方の着色層形成用インキ1を乾燥後の付着量が1g/m2となるようにグラビアリバース印刷法にて塗布し、乾燥して、着色層を形成し実施例1の転写シートを得た。得られた転写シートについて、評価した結果を表1に示す。
<着色層形成用インキ1>
・黒顔料(カ―ボンブラック) 4.3質量部
・塩化ビニル樹脂と酢酸ビニル樹脂の共重合体 1.3質量部
・アクリル系樹脂 5.4質量部
・ポリメタクリル酸メチル樹脂 7.0質量部
・溶媒 82質量部
(メチルエチルケトン/酢酸エチル/メチルイソブチルケトン混合溶媒)
(混合比率4/4/2) Next, the coloredlayer forming ink 1 having the following formulation is applied onto the protruding portion in the adhesive layer by a gravure reverse printing method so that the adhesion amount after drying is 1 g / m 2 , dried, and the colored layer. And a transfer sheet of Example 1 was obtained. Table 1 shows the evaluation results of the obtained transfer sheet.
<Coloredlayer forming ink 1>
-Black pigment (carbon black) 4.3 parts by mass-Copolymer of vinyl chloride resin and vinyl acetate resin 1.3 parts by mass-Acrylic resin 5.4 parts by mass-Polymethyl methacrylate resin 7.0 parts by mass Parts / solvent 82 parts by mass (mixed solvent of methyl ethyl ketone / ethyl acetate / methyl isobutyl ketone)
(Mixingratio 4/4/2)
<着色層形成用インキ1>
・黒顔料(カ―ボンブラック) 4.3質量部
・塩化ビニル樹脂と酢酸ビニル樹脂の共重合体 1.3質量部
・アクリル系樹脂 5.4質量部
・ポリメタクリル酸メチル樹脂 7.0質量部
・溶媒 82質量部
(メチルエチルケトン/酢酸エチル/メチルイソブチルケトン混合溶媒)
(混合比率4/4/2) Next, the colored
<Colored
-Black pigment (carbon black) 4.3 parts by mass-Copolymer of vinyl chloride resin and vinyl acetate resin 1.3 parts by mass-Acrylic resin 5.4 parts by mass-Polymethyl methacrylate resin 7.0 parts by mass Parts / solvent 82 parts by mass (mixed solvent of methyl ethyl ketone / ethyl acetate / methyl isobutyl ketone)
(Mixing
(実施例4)
実施例3において、着色層を形成する方法として、熱転写シートを用いた溶融熱転写とした以外は同様とし、実施例2の転写シートを得た。得られた転写シートについて、評価した結果を表1に示す。 Example 4
The transfer sheet of Example 2 was obtained in the same manner as in Example 3 except that the heat transfer using a thermal transfer sheet was used as a method for forming the colored layer. Table 1 shows the evaluation results of the obtained transfer sheet.
実施例3において、着色層を形成する方法として、熱転写シートを用いた溶融熱転写とした以外は同様とし、実施例2の転写シートを得た。得られた転写シートについて、評価した結果を表1に示す。 Example 4
The transfer sheet of Example 2 was obtained in the same manner as in Example 3 except that the heat transfer using a thermal transfer sheet was used as a method for forming the colored layer. Table 1 shows the evaluation results of the obtained transfer sheet.
実施例4で用いた熱転写シートの製造方法としては、まず、厚さ70μmのアート紙に、下記組成の感熱接着剤をキシレンに溶解して固形分基準で20g/m2の割合でグラビアコーティングし、熱転写受像シートを作製した。次いで、背面に耐熱層が形成されている厚さ6μmのポリエステルフィルムの表面に、下記処方の着色層形成用インキ2を乾燥後の付着量が1.5g/m2となるようにグラビアリバース印刷法にて塗布し、乾燥して、熱転写シートを作製した。
<感熱接着剤>
・スチレンブタジエンゴム 2.4質量部
(旭化成製、商品名:ソルプレン1204)
・塩素化ポリプロピレン 2.0質量部
(山陽国策パルプ製、商品名:スーパークロン907LL)
・塩化ビニル/酢酸ビニル共重合体 10.0質量部
(住友化学製、商品名:スミテートKC10)
・石油樹脂 5.0質量部
(日本石油製、商品名:ネオポリマー130)
・マイクロシリカ 0.4質量部
(デグサ製、商品名:エロジールOK-412)
・ポリエチレンワックス 1.5質量部
(グッドイヤー製、商品名:マイクロファインSFゴールド)
・アマイドワックス 1.5質量部
(デンカポリマー製、商品名:AP65)
・トルエン 80.0質量部
<着色層形成用インキ2>
・黒顔料(カーボンブラック) 4.3質量部
・塩化ビニル樹脂と酢酸ビニル樹脂の共重合体 1.3質量部
・アクリル系樹脂 5.4質量部
・ポリメタクリル酸メチル樹脂 7.0質量部
・ポリエチレンワックス 0.8質量部
(BASF製、商品名:Aワックス)
・溶媒 81.2質量部
(メチルエチルケトン/酢酸エチル/メチルイソブチルケトン混合溶媒)
(混合比率4/4/2) As a method for producing the thermal transfer sheet used in Example 4, first, a thermosensitive adhesive having the following composition was dissolved in xylene and gravure coated at a rate of 20 g / m 2 on a solid basis on art paper having a thickness of 70 μm. Then, a thermal transfer image receiving sheet was prepared. Next, gravure reverse printing is performed on the surface of a 6 μm-thick polyester film having a heat-resistant layer formed on the back so that the amount of adhesion after drying coloredlayer forming ink 2 having the following formulation is 1.5 g / m 2. It was applied by the method and dried to prepare a thermal transfer sheet.
<Thermal adhesive>
-Styrene butadiene rubber 2.4 parts by mass (product name: Sorprene 1204, manufactured by Asahi Kasei)
・ 2.0 parts by mass of chlorinated polypropylene (manufactured by Sanyo Kokusaku Pulp, trade name: Super Clone 907LL)
-10.0 parts by mass of vinyl chloride / vinyl acetate copolymer (manufactured by Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name: Summitate KC10)
-Petroleum resin 5.0 parts by mass (manufactured by Nippon Oil, trade name: Neopolymer 130)
・ 0.4 parts by mass of microsilica (manufactured by Degussa, trade name: Erogil OK-412)
・ 1.5 parts by weight of polyethylene wax (Goodyear, trade name: Microfine SF Gold)
-Amide wax 1.5 parts by mass (Denka Polymer, trade name: AP65)
-Toluene 80.0 parts by mass <coloredlayer forming ink 2>
-Black pigment (carbon black) 4.3 parts by mass-Copolymer of vinyl chloride resin and vinyl acetate resin 1.3 parts by mass-Acrylic resin 5.4 parts by mass-Polymethyl methacrylate resin 7.0 parts by mass- Polyethylene wax 0.8 parts by mass (made by BASF, trade name: A wax)
-Solvent 81.2 parts by mass (Methyl ethyl ketone / ethyl acetate / methyl isobutyl ketone mixed solvent)
(Mixingratio 4/4/2)
<感熱接着剤>
・スチレンブタジエンゴム 2.4質量部
(旭化成製、商品名:ソルプレン1204)
・塩素化ポリプロピレン 2.0質量部
(山陽国策パルプ製、商品名:スーパークロン907LL)
・塩化ビニル/酢酸ビニル共重合体 10.0質量部
(住友化学製、商品名:スミテートKC10)
・石油樹脂 5.0質量部
(日本石油製、商品名:ネオポリマー130)
・マイクロシリカ 0.4質量部
(デグサ製、商品名:エロジールOK-412)
・ポリエチレンワックス 1.5質量部
(グッドイヤー製、商品名:マイクロファインSFゴールド)
・アマイドワックス 1.5質量部
(デンカポリマー製、商品名:AP65)
・トルエン 80.0質量部
<着色層形成用インキ2>
・黒顔料(カーボンブラック) 4.3質量部
・塩化ビニル樹脂と酢酸ビニル樹脂の共重合体 1.3質量部
・アクリル系樹脂 5.4質量部
・ポリメタクリル酸メチル樹脂 7.0質量部
・ポリエチレンワックス 0.8質量部
(BASF製、商品名:Aワックス)
・溶媒 81.2質量部
(メチルエチルケトン/酢酸エチル/メチルイソブチルケトン混合溶媒)
(混合比率4/4/2) As a method for producing the thermal transfer sheet used in Example 4, first, a thermosensitive adhesive having the following composition was dissolved in xylene and gravure coated at a rate of 20 g / m 2 on a solid basis on art paper having a thickness of 70 μm. Then, a thermal transfer image receiving sheet was prepared. Next, gravure reverse printing is performed on the surface of a 6 μm-thick polyester film having a heat-resistant layer formed on the back so that the amount of adhesion after drying colored
<Thermal adhesive>
-Styrene butadiene rubber 2.4 parts by mass (product name: Sorprene 1204, manufactured by Asahi Kasei)
・ 2.0 parts by mass of chlorinated polypropylene (manufactured by Sanyo Kokusaku Pulp, trade name: Super Clone 907LL)
-10.0 parts by mass of vinyl chloride / vinyl acetate copolymer (manufactured by Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name: Summitate KC10)
-Petroleum resin 5.0 parts by mass (manufactured by Nippon Oil, trade name: Neopolymer 130)
・ 0.4 parts by mass of microsilica (manufactured by Degussa, trade name: Erogil OK-412)
・ 1.5 parts by weight of polyethylene wax (Goodyear, trade name: Microfine SF Gold)
-Amide wax 1.5 parts by mass (Denka Polymer, trade name: AP65)
-Toluene 80.0 parts by mass <colored
-Black pigment (carbon black) 4.3 parts by mass-Copolymer of vinyl chloride resin and vinyl acetate resin 1.3 parts by mass-Acrylic resin 5.4 parts by mass-Polymethyl methacrylate resin 7.0 parts by mass- Polyethylene wax 0.8 parts by mass (made by BASF, trade name: A wax)
-Solvent 81.2 parts by mass (Methyl ethyl ketone / ethyl acetate / methyl isobutyl ketone mixed solvent)
(Mixing
(比較例3)
1.離型シートの作製
実施例3の「1」で得られた離型シートの樹脂層における第2領域内に設けられた凸部上に、実施例4で得られた熱転写シート用いて溶融熱転写法で転写し、着色層を形成した。その他は、実施例3と同様に離型シートを作製した。 (Comparative Example 3)
1. Production of release sheet Melting thermal transfer method using the thermal transfer sheet obtained in Example 4 on the convex portion provided in the second region of the resin layer of the release sheet obtained in “1” of Example 3 Was transferred to form a colored layer. Otherwise, a release sheet was prepared in the same manner as in Example 3.
1.離型シートの作製
実施例3の「1」で得られた離型シートの樹脂層における第2領域内に設けられた凸部上に、実施例4で得られた熱転写シート用いて溶融熱転写法で転写し、着色層を形成した。その他は、実施例3と同様に離型シートを作製した。 (Comparative Example 3)
1. Production of release sheet Melting thermal transfer method using the thermal transfer sheet obtained in Example 4 on the convex portion provided in the second region of the resin layer of the release sheet obtained in “1” of Example 3 Was transferred to form a colored layer. Otherwise, a release sheet was prepared in the same manner as in Example 3.
2.転写層の作製
上記「1」で得られた離型シート及び着色層上に、実施例3で示した保護層、アンカー層、接着剤層を順に積層し、転写層を作製した。
以上の工程により、比較例1の転写シートを得た。得られた転写シートについて、評価した結果を表1に示す。 2. Production of Transfer Layer On the release sheet and colored layer obtained in the above “1”, the protective layer, anchor layer, and adhesive layer shown in Example 3 were laminated in order to produce a transfer layer.
The transfer sheet of Comparative Example 1 was obtained through the above steps. Table 1 shows the evaluation results of the obtained transfer sheet.
上記「1」で得られた離型シート及び着色層上に、実施例3で示した保護層、アンカー層、接着剤層を順に積層し、転写層を作製した。
以上の工程により、比較例1の転写シートを得た。得られた転写シートについて、評価した結果を表1に示す。 2. Production of Transfer Layer On the release sheet and colored layer obtained in the above “1”, the protective layer, anchor layer, and adhesive layer shown in Example 3 were laminated in order to produce a transfer layer.
The transfer sheet of Comparative Example 1 was obtained through the above steps. Table 1 shows the evaluation results of the obtained transfer sheet.
<接着剤層に形成された突出部の形状>
・突出部の高さ:4.7μm
・突出部の端部同士の間隔:0.5mm <Shape of the protrusion formed on the adhesive layer>
-Height of protrusion: 4.7 μm
・ Spacing between ends of protrusions: 0.5 mm
・突出部の高さ:4.7μm
・突出部の端部同士の間隔:0.5mm <Shape of the protrusion formed on the adhesive layer>
-Height of protrusion: 4.7 μm
・ Spacing between ends of protrusions: 0.5 mm
(第4の実施の形態に係る転写シートの実施例)
[測定及び評価]
実施例及び比較例で作製した転写シートについて、以下の測定及び評価を行った。結果を表2に示す。 (Example of transfer sheet according to the fourth embodiment)
[Measurement and evaluation]
The transfer sheets prepared in the examples and comparative examples were measured and evaluated as follows. The results are shown in Table 2.
[測定及び評価]
実施例及び比較例で作製した転写シートについて、以下の測定及び評価を行った。結果を表2に示す。 (Example of transfer sheet according to the fourth embodiment)
[Measurement and evaluation]
The transfer sheets prepared in the examples and comparative examples were measured and evaluated as follows. The results are shown in Table 2.
<光電センサー評価>
実施例及び比較例で作製した転写シートの位置合わせ用マークに対して、光電センサーとして回帰反射型のレーザセンサー(キーエンス製、商品名:LV-NH62)を用いて光量を測定した。位置合わせ用マークの無い箇所の光量に対する測定した位置合わせ用マークの有る箇所の光量の比率を算出し、以下の評価を行った。
A:70%未満
B:70%以上90%個未満
C:90%以上 <Photoelectric sensor evaluation>
For the alignment marks of the transfer sheets prepared in Examples and Comparative Examples, the amount of light was measured using a regression reflection type laser sensor (manufactured by Keyence, product name: LV-NH62) as a photoelectric sensor. The ratio of the measured amount of light at the location with the alignment mark to the amount of light at the location without the alignment mark was calculated, and the following evaluation was performed.
A: Less than 70% B: 70% or more and less than 90% C: 90% or more
実施例及び比較例で作製した転写シートの位置合わせ用マークに対して、光電センサーとして回帰反射型のレーザセンサー(キーエンス製、商品名:LV-NH62)を用いて光量を測定した。位置合わせ用マークの無い箇所の光量に対する測定した位置合わせ用マークの有る箇所の光量の比率を算出し、以下の評価を行った。
A:70%未満
B:70%以上90%個未満
C:90%以上 <Photoelectric sensor evaluation>
For the alignment marks of the transfer sheets prepared in Examples and Comparative Examples, the amount of light was measured using a regression reflection type laser sensor (manufactured by Keyence, product name: LV-NH62) as a photoelectric sensor. The ratio of the measured amount of light at the location with the alignment mark to the amount of light at the location without the alignment mark was calculated, and the following evaluation was performed.
A: Less than 70% B: 70% or more and less than 90% C: 90% or more
<画像センサー評価>
実施例及び比較例で作製した転写シートの位置合わせ用マークに対して、画像処理システム(キーエンス製、商品名:XG-8000)及びカメラユニット(キーエンス製、商品名:XG-200M)を組み合わせて使用して評価した。具体的には、光源として同軸落射照明を用いて位置合わせ用マークに光を照射し、画像センサー(200万画素エリアセンサー)を用いて撮像した。位置合わせ用マークの撮像結果に対し、以下の評価を行った。
A:凸部と凹部の境界が鮮明に撮像可能
B:凸部と凹部の境界が多少不鮮明に撮像可能
C:凸部と凹部の境界が撮像不可 <Image sensor evaluation>
An image processing system (manufactured by Keyence, product name: XG-8000) and a camera unit (manufactured by Keyence, product name: XG-200M) are combined with the alignment marks of the transfer sheets prepared in the examples and comparative examples. Used and evaluated. Specifically, coaxial alignment illumination was used as a light source, the alignment mark was irradiated with light, and an image was captured using an image sensor (2 million pixel area sensor). The following evaluation was performed on the imaging result of the alignment mark.
A: The boundary between the convex part and the concave part can be imaged clearly. B: The boundary between the convex part and the concave part can be imaged somewhat unclear. C: The boundary between the convex part and the concave part cannot be imaged.
実施例及び比較例で作製した転写シートの位置合わせ用マークに対して、画像処理システム(キーエンス製、商品名:XG-8000)及びカメラユニット(キーエンス製、商品名:XG-200M)を組み合わせて使用して評価した。具体的には、光源として同軸落射照明を用いて位置合わせ用マークに光を照射し、画像センサー(200万画素エリアセンサー)を用いて撮像した。位置合わせ用マークの撮像結果に対し、以下の評価を行った。
A:凸部と凹部の境界が鮮明に撮像可能
B:凸部と凹部の境界が多少不鮮明に撮像可能
C:凸部と凹部の境界が撮像不可 <Image sensor evaluation>
An image processing system (manufactured by Keyence, product name: XG-8000) and a camera unit (manufactured by Keyence, product name: XG-200M) are combined with the alignment marks of the transfer sheets prepared in the examples and comparative examples. Used and evaluated. Specifically, coaxial alignment illumination was used as a light source, the alignment mark was irradiated with light, and an image was captured using an image sensor (2 million pixel area sensor). The following evaluation was performed on the imaging result of the alignment mark.
A: The boundary between the convex part and the concave part can be imaged clearly. B: The boundary between the convex part and the concave part can be imaged somewhat unclear. C: The boundary between the convex part and the concave part cannot be imaged.
(実施例5)
1.離型シートの作製
厚さ75μmのポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム上に、下記処方の樹脂層形成用インキを塗布、乾燥し、厚さ8.0μmの未硬化の樹脂層を形成した。
<樹脂層形成用インキ>
・電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物 40質量部
(共栄化学社製、アクリル系樹脂)
・光重合開始剤 3質量部
・メチルエチルケトン 60質量部
・シリコーン系レベリング剤 0.5質量部 (Example 5)
1. Production of Release Sheet On a polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 75 μm, a resin layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied and dried to form an uncured resin layer having a thickness of 8.0 μm.
<Resin layer forming ink>
・ Ionizing radiationcurable resin composition 40 parts by mass (made by Kyoei Chemical Co., Ltd., acrylic resin)
・Photopolymerization initiator 3 parts by mass ・ Methyl ethyl ketone 60 parts by mass ・ Silicone leveling agent 0.5 parts by mass
1.離型シートの作製
厚さ75μmのポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム上に、下記処方の樹脂層形成用インキを塗布、乾燥し、厚さ8.0μmの未硬化の樹脂層を形成した。
<樹脂層形成用インキ>
・電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物 40質量部
(共栄化学社製、アクリル系樹脂)
・光重合開始剤 3質量部
・メチルエチルケトン 60質量部
・シリコーン系レベリング剤 0.5質量部 (Example 5)
1. Production of Release Sheet On a polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 75 μm, a resin layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied and dried to form an uncured resin layer having a thickness of 8.0 μm.
<Resin layer forming ink>
・ Ionizing radiation
・
次いで、以下の第1領域R1及び第2領域R2と相補的な形状を有する版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層を賦形すると同時に、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム側から電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層を硬化させた基材層を得た。
<第1領域R1と相補的な形状>
・平滑
<第2領域R2と相補的な形状>
・凸部と相補的形状を有する溝部:幅100μm、深さ5.0μm
・溝部の端部同士の間隔:300μm
・溝部の数:25本
<賦形した樹脂層の形状>
・凸部:幅100μm、高さ3.0μm
・凸部の端部同士の間隔:300μm
・溝部の数:24本 Then, using a plate having the first region R 1 and the second region R 2 and the complementary shape, and at the same time the uncured resin layer to shape, by irradiating ionizing radiation a polyethylene terephthalate film side, A base material layer obtained by curing the shaped resin layer was obtained.
<First region R 1 and the complementary shapes>
· Smoothing <second region R 2 and the complementary shapes>
-Grooves having a shape complementary to the convex part:width 100 μm, depth 5.0 μm
・ Spacing between the ends of the groove: 300 μm
・ Number of grooves: 25 <Shape of shaped resin layer>
-Convex part:width 100 μm, height 3.0 μm
・ Spacing between the ends of the protrusions: 300 μm
・ Number of grooves: 24
<第1領域R1と相補的な形状>
・平滑
<第2領域R2と相補的な形状>
・凸部と相補的形状を有する溝部:幅100μm、深さ5.0μm
・溝部の端部同士の間隔:300μm
・溝部の数:25本
<賦形した樹脂層の形状>
・凸部:幅100μm、高さ3.0μm
・凸部の端部同士の間隔:300μm
・溝部の数:24本 Then, using a plate having the first region R 1 and the second region R 2 and the complementary shape, and at the same time the uncured resin layer to shape, by irradiating ionizing radiation a polyethylene terephthalate film side, A base material layer obtained by curing the shaped resin layer was obtained.
<First region R 1 and the complementary shapes>
· Smoothing <second region R 2 and the complementary shapes>
-Grooves having a shape complementary to the convex part:
・ Spacing between the ends of the groove: 300 μm
・ Number of grooves: 25 <Shape of shaped resin layer>
-Convex part:
・ Spacing between the ends of the protrusions: 300 μm
・ Number of grooves: 24
次いで、得られた基材層の樹脂層上に、下記処方の離型層形成用インキを全面に塗布した後、40℃で72時間乾燥し、厚さ0.5μmの離型層を形成し、離型シートを得た。
<離型層形成用インキ>
・アクリルポリオール 70質量部
(綜研化学社製、商品名:サーモラックSU100A)
・イソシアネート 25質量部
(三井化学社製、商品名:タケネートD-110N)
・酢酸エチル 161質量部
・メチルイソブチルケトン 56質量部 Next, on the entire surface of the resin layer of the base material layer, a release layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied over the entire surface, and then dried at 40 ° C. for 72 hours to form a release layer having a thickness of 0.5 μm. A release sheet was obtained.
<Ink for forming release layer>
Acrylic polyol 70 parts by mass (manufactured by Soken Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name: Thermolac SU100A)
・Isocyanate 25 parts by mass (Mitsui Chemicals, trade name: Takenate D-110N)
・ Ethyl acetate 161 parts by mass ・Methyl isobutyl ketone 56 parts by mass
<離型層形成用インキ>
・アクリルポリオール 70質量部
(綜研化学社製、商品名:サーモラックSU100A)
・イソシアネート 25質量部
(三井化学社製、商品名:タケネートD-110N)
・酢酸エチル 161質量部
・メチルイソブチルケトン 56質量部 Next, on the entire surface of the resin layer of the base material layer, a release layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied over the entire surface, and then dried at 40 ° C. for 72 hours to form a release layer having a thickness of 0.5 μm. A release sheet was obtained.
<Ink for forming release layer>
・
・ Ethyl acetate 161 parts by mass ・
2.転写層の作製
上記「1」で得られた離型シート上に、下記処方の保護層形成用インキを乾燥後の付着量が5.0g/m2となるように塗布し、塗膜を形成した後、フュージョンUVランプシステムを用いて光源をHバルブ、搬送速度20m/min、出力40%の条件で照射し、保護層を半硬化させた。このときの積算光量を、アイグラフィックス社製の照度計(商品名:UVPF-A1)により測定したところ、15mJ/m2であった。
<保護層形成用インキ>
・ウレタンアクリレート系紫外線硬化樹脂組成物 70質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:セイカビームHT-X)
(固形分35%、トルエン/酢酸エチル混合溶剤)
・ウレタンアクリレート系紫外線硬化樹脂組成物 30質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:セイカビームEXF-HT-1)
(固形分40%、トルエン/メチルエチルケトン混合溶剤) 2. Preparation of transfer layer On the release sheet obtained in the above "1", a protective layer-forming ink having the following formulation was applied so that the adhesion amount after drying was 5.0 g / m 2 to form a coating film. Then, using a fusion UV lamp system, the protective layer was semi-cured by irradiating the light source under the conditions of an H bulb, a conveyance speed of 20 m / min, and an output of 40%. The integrated light quantity at this time was 15 mJ / m 2 as measured by an illuminance meter (trade name: UVPF-A1) manufactured by Eye Graphics.
<Protective layer forming ink>
・ 70 parts by mass of urethane acrylate UV curable resin composition (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: Seika Beam HT-X)
(Solid content 35%, toluene / ethyl acetate mixed solvent)
-30 parts by mass of urethane acrylate UV curable resin composition (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: Seika Beam EXF-HT-1)
(Solid content 40%, toluene / methyl ethyl ketone mixed solvent)
上記「1」で得られた離型シート上に、下記処方の保護層形成用インキを乾燥後の付着量が5.0g/m2となるように塗布し、塗膜を形成した後、フュージョンUVランプシステムを用いて光源をHバルブ、搬送速度20m/min、出力40%の条件で照射し、保護層を半硬化させた。このときの積算光量を、アイグラフィックス社製の照度計(商品名:UVPF-A1)により測定したところ、15mJ/m2であった。
<保護層形成用インキ>
・ウレタンアクリレート系紫外線硬化樹脂組成物 70質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:セイカビームHT-X)
(固形分35%、トルエン/酢酸エチル混合溶剤)
・ウレタンアクリレート系紫外線硬化樹脂組成物 30質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:セイカビームEXF-HT-1)
(固形分40%、トルエン/メチルエチルケトン混合溶剤) 2. Preparation of transfer layer On the release sheet obtained in the above "1", a protective layer-forming ink having the following formulation was applied so that the adhesion amount after drying was 5.0 g / m 2 to form a coating film. Then, using a fusion UV lamp system, the protective layer was semi-cured by irradiating the light source under the conditions of an H bulb, a conveyance speed of 20 m / min, and an output of 40%. The integrated light quantity at this time was 15 mJ / m 2 as measured by an illuminance meter (trade name: UVPF-A1) manufactured by Eye Graphics.
<Protective layer forming ink>
・ 70 parts by mass of urethane acrylate UV curable resin composition (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: Seika Beam HT-X)
(Solid content 35%, toluene / ethyl acetate mixed solvent)
-30 parts by mass of urethane acrylate UV curable resin composition (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: Seika Beam EXF-HT-1)
(
次いで、保護層上に下記処方のアンカー層形成用インキを乾燥後の付着量が3.0g/m2となるように塗布し、塗膜を形成した後、40℃で72時間乾燥し、硬化させ、厚さ2μmのアンカー層を形成した。
<アンカー層形成用インキ>
・アクリルポリオール 100質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:TM-VMAC、固形分25%)
(トルエン/酢酸エチル/メチルエチルケトン混合溶剤)
・キサンメチレンジイソシアネート 10質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:PTC-RC3)
(固形分75%、溶剤:酢酸エチル)
・溶媒 65質量部
(メチルエチルケトン、固形分が22%になるように希釈) Next, the anchor layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied onto the protective layer so that the amount of adhesion after drying was 3.0 g / m 2, and after forming a coating film, the film was dried at 40 ° C. for 72 hours and cured. An anchor layer having a thickness of 2 μm was formed.
<Ink for anchor layer formation>
・ Acrylic polyol 100 parts by mass (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: TM-VMAC,solid content 25%)
(Toluene / ethyl acetate / methyl ethyl ketone mixed solvent)
・ 10 parts by mass of xanthethylene diisocyanate (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: PTC-RC3)
(Solid content 75%, solvent: ethyl acetate)
・ Solvent 65 parts by mass (Methyl ethyl ketone, diluted so that the solid content is 22%)
<アンカー層形成用インキ>
・アクリルポリオール 100質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:TM-VMAC、固形分25%)
(トルエン/酢酸エチル/メチルエチルケトン混合溶剤)
・キサンメチレンジイソシアネート 10質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:PTC-RC3)
(固形分75%、溶剤:酢酸エチル)
・溶媒 65質量部
(メチルエチルケトン、固形分が22%になるように希釈) Next, the anchor layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied onto the protective layer so that the amount of adhesion after drying was 3.0 g / m 2, and after forming a coating film, the film was dried at 40 ° C. for 72 hours and cured. An anchor layer having a thickness of 2 μm was formed.
<Ink for anchor layer formation>
・ Acrylic polyol 100 parts by mass (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: TM-VMAC,
(Toluene / ethyl acetate / methyl ethyl ketone mixed solvent)
・ 10 parts by mass of xanthethylene diisocyanate (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: PTC-RC3)
(Solid content 75%, solvent: ethyl acetate)
・ Solvent 65 parts by mass (Methyl ethyl ketone, diluted so that the solid content is 22%)
次いで、アンカー層上に下記処方の接着剤層形成用インキを乾燥後の付着量が2.5g/m2となるように塗布し、塗膜を形成した。該塗膜を乾燥し、厚さ2μmの接着剤層を形成し、転写シートを得た。
<接着剤層形成用インキ>
・アクリル系樹脂 100質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:TM-R600、固形分20%)
(酢酸エチル/酢酸-n-プロピル/メチルエチルケトン混合溶剤)
・メチルエチルケトン 40質量部
・ヒドロキシフェニルトリアジン系紫外線吸収剤 1.28質量部
(BASF社製、商品名:Tinuvin479) Next, an adhesive layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied onto the anchor layer so that the adhesion amount after drying was 2.5 g / m 2 to form a coating film. The coating film was dried to form an adhesive layer having a thickness of 2 μm to obtain a transfer sheet.
<Ink for forming the adhesive layer>
-100 parts by mass of acrylic resin (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: TM-R600,solid content 20%)
(Ethyl acetate / n-propyl / methyl ethyl ketone mixed solvent)
・Methyl ethyl ketone 40 parts by mass ・ Hydroxyphenyl triazine ultraviolet absorber 1.28 parts by mass (trade name: Tinuvin 479, manufactured by BASF)
<接着剤層形成用インキ>
・アクリル系樹脂 100質量部
(大日精化社製、商品名:TM-R600、固形分20%)
(酢酸エチル/酢酸-n-プロピル/メチルエチルケトン混合溶剤)
・メチルエチルケトン 40質量部
・ヒドロキシフェニルトリアジン系紫外線吸収剤 1.28質量部
(BASF社製、商品名:Tinuvin479) Next, an adhesive layer forming ink having the following formulation was applied onto the anchor layer so that the adhesion amount after drying was 2.5 g / m 2 to form a coating film. The coating film was dried to form an adhesive layer having a thickness of 2 μm to obtain a transfer sheet.
<Ink for forming the adhesive layer>
-100 parts by mass of acrylic resin (manufactured by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd., trade name: TM-R600,
(Ethyl acetate / n-propyl / methyl ethyl ketone mixed solvent)
・
<接着剤層に形成された突出部の形状>
・突出部の高さ:3.0μm <Shape of the protrusion formed on the adhesive layer>
-Height of protrusion: 3.0 μm
・突出部の高さ:3.0μm <Shape of the protrusion formed on the adhesive layer>
-Height of protrusion: 3.0 μm
(実施例6~9、比較例4~7)
表1に示す第2領域R2と相補的な形状を有する版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層を賦形すると同時に、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム側から電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層を硬化させた以外は、実施例5と同様にして、実施例6~9、比較例4~7の転写シートを得た。 (Examples 6 to 9, Comparative Examples 4 to 7)
A second region R 2 shown in Table 1 by using a plate having a complementary shape, and at the same time the uncured resin layer to shape, by irradiating ionizing radiation a polyethylene terephthalate film side, with vehicle resin layer Except for curing, transfer sheets of Examples 6 to 9 and Comparative Examples 4 to 7 were obtained in the same manner as Example 5.
表1に示す第2領域R2と相補的な形状を有する版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層を賦形すると同時に、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム側から電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層を硬化させた以外は、実施例5と同様にして、実施例6~9、比較例4~7の転写シートを得た。 (Examples 6 to 9, Comparative Examples 4 to 7)
A second region R 2 shown in Table 1 by using a plate having a complementary shape, and at the same time the uncured resin layer to shape, by irradiating ionizing radiation a polyethylene terephthalate film side, with vehicle resin layer Except for curing, transfer sheets of Examples 6 to 9 and Comparative Examples 4 to 7 were obtained in the same manner as Example 5.
本発明の転写シートは、携帯電話などの通信機器、自動車内部の情報機器、家電製品などの加飾成形品の製造に好適に用いることができる。
The transfer sheet of the present invention can be suitably used for the production of decorative molded products such as communication devices such as mobile phones, information devices inside automobiles, and home appliances.
1:支持体
2:樹脂層
3、3A、3B:突出部
4、4A、4B:周辺突出部
5:凹凸部
6:第2の突出部
7:第2の凹凸部
11:基材層
12、12A、12B:着色層
13:離型層
14:第2の着色層
10:離型シート
20:転写層
21:保護層
22:接着剤層
23:印刷層
24:凸部
25:追従突出部
30:着色層
100:転写シート
200:被転写物
300:加飾成形品 1: Support 2: Resin layer 3, 3A, 3B: Protrusion 4, 4A, 4B: Peripheral protrusion 5: Concavity and convexity 6: Second protrusion 7: Second concavity and convexity 11: Base material layer 12, 12A, 12B: Colored layer 13: Release layer 14: Second colored layer 10: Release sheet 20: Transfer layer 21: Protective layer 22: Adhesive layer 23: Print layer 24: Convex portion 25: Following protrusion 30 : Colored layer 100: Transfer sheet 200: Transfer object 300: Decorated molded product
2:樹脂層
3、3A、3B:突出部
4、4A、4B:周辺突出部
5:凹凸部
6:第2の突出部
7:第2の凹凸部
11:基材層
12、12A、12B:着色層
13:離型層
14:第2の着色層
10:離型シート
20:転写層
21:保護層
22:接着剤層
23:印刷層
24:凸部
25:追従突出部
30:着色層
100:転写シート
200:被転写物
300:加飾成形品 1: Support 2:
Claims (33)
- 離型シート上に転写層を有する転写シートであって、前記離型シートは、前記転写層側の面に第1領域及び第2領域を有する基材層を有し、前記基材層の第2領域内に突出部を有し、さらに、前記突出部上に着色層を有する、転写シート。 A transfer sheet having a transfer layer on a release sheet, the release sheet having a base material layer having a first region and a second region on a surface on the transfer layer side, The transfer sheet which has a protrusion part in 2 area | region, and also has a colored layer on the said protrusion part.
- 前記突出部が、高さ1~10μmの構造体から形成されてなる請求項1に記載の転写シート。 2. The transfer sheet according to claim 1, wherein the protrusion is formed of a structure having a height of 1 to 10 μm.
- 前記突出部が、高さと幅との比が1:10,000~1:10の構造体から形成されてなる請求項1又は2に記載の転写シート。 3. The transfer sheet according to claim 1, wherein the protrusion is formed of a structure having a height to width ratio of 1: 10,000 to 1:10.
- 前記基材層の第1領域内に凹凸部を有し、[前記凹凸部の最大高さ<前記突出部の高さ]の関係を満たす請求項1~3の何れか1項に記載の転写シート。 The transfer according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the first layer of the base material layer has a concavo-convex portion and satisfies a relationship of [maximum height of the concavo-convex portion <height of the protruding portion]. Sheet.
- [前記突出部の高さ/前記転写層の厚さ]が0.1~5.0である請求項1~4の何れか1項に記載の転写シート。 5. The transfer sheet according to claim 1, wherein [the height of the protruding portion / the thickness of the transfer layer] is 0.1 to 5.0.
- 下記(A1)~(A3)工程により離型シートを製造した後、離型シートの少なくとも一部に転写層を形成する、請求項1に記載の転写シートの製造方法。
(A1)支持体上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む樹脂層形成用インキを塗布し、未硬化の樹脂層を形成する工程。
(A2)第1領域及び第2領域と相補的な形状を有する版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層を賦形すると同時に、電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層を硬化させ、支持体上に樹脂層が形成された基材層を得る工程。
(A3)基材層の第2領域内の突出部上に着色層を形成する工程。 The method for producing a transfer sheet according to claim 1, wherein after the release sheet is produced by the following steps (A1) to (A3), a transfer layer is formed on at least a part of the release sheet.
(A1) The process of apply | coating the ink for resin layer formation containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition on a support body, and forming an uncured resin layer.
(A2) Using a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region, the uncured resin layer is shaped, and simultaneously irradiated with ionizing radiation to cure the shaped resin layer and support The process of obtaining the base material layer in which the resin layer was formed on the body.
(A3) The process of forming a colored layer on the protrusion part in the 2nd area | region of a base material layer. - 請求項1~5の何れか1項に記載の転写シートの転写層を被転写物に転写する工程と、前記転写シートの前記離型シートを剥離する工程とを有する、加飾成形品の製造方法。 A process for producing a decorative molded article, comprising: a step of transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet according to any one of claims 1 to 5 to a transfer target; and a step of peeling the release sheet of the transfer sheet. Method.
- 離型シート上に転写層を有する転写シートであって、前記離型シートは、前記転写層側の面に第1領域及び第2領域を有する基材層を有し、前記基材層の前記第2領域は、突出部と、前記突出部の周辺に位置する周辺領域とを有し、前記周辺領域内には、部分的に配置された複数の周辺突出部を有し、前記突出部及び前記周辺突出部上に着色層を有する、転写シート。 A transfer sheet having a transfer layer on a release sheet, wherein the release sheet has a base layer having a first region and a second region on a surface on the transfer layer side, The second region has a protrusion and a peripheral region located around the protrusion, and has a plurality of peripheral protrusions partially disposed in the peripheral region, and the protrusion and A transfer sheet having a colored layer on the peripheral protrusion.
- 前記周辺領域の全面積に占める前記周辺突出部の面積の割合が、15~85%である請求項8に記載の転写シート。 The transfer sheet according to claim 8, wherein a ratio of the area of the peripheral protrusion to the total area of the peripheral region is 15 to 85%.
- 隣り合う周辺突出部の端部同士の間隔が2.0mm以下である請求項8又は9に記載の転写シート。 The transfer sheet according to claim 8 or 9, wherein an interval between the ends of adjacent peripheral protrusions is 2.0 mm or less.
- 前記突出部は、その外縁形状として、転写シートの流れ方向に平行な2本の直線及び/又は転写シートの幅方向に平行な2本の直線を有し、前記周辺領域及び前記周辺突出部は、前記突出部との関係で、下記条件1~3の何れかを満たす、請求項8~10の何れか1項に記載の転写シート。
<条件1>
前記突出部の外縁形状として、転写シートの流れ方向に平行な2本の直線を有する場合、前記突出部の幅方向の両側に前記周辺領域を配置する。
<条件2>
前記突出部の外縁形状として、転写シートの幅方向に平行な2本の直線を有する場合、前記突出部の流れ方向の両側に周辺領域を配置する。
<条件3>
前記突出部の外縁形状として、転写シートの流れ方向に平行な2本の直線及び幅方向に平行な2本の直線を有する場合、前記突出部の流れ方向の両側及び/又は前記突出部の幅方向の両側に前記周辺領域を配置する。 The protrusion has, as its outer edge shape, two straight lines parallel to the transfer sheet flow direction and / or two straight lines parallel to the width direction of the transfer sheet, and the peripheral region and the peripheral protrusion are The transfer sheet according to any one of claims 8 to 10, wherein any one of the following conditions 1 to 3 is satisfied in relation to the protruding portion.
<Condition 1>
When there are two straight lines parallel to the flow direction of the transfer sheet as the outer edge shape of the protrusion, the peripheral region is arranged on both sides in the width direction of the protrusion.
<Condition 2>
When there are two straight lines parallel to the width direction of the transfer sheet as the outer edge shape of the protrusion, peripheral regions are arranged on both sides of the protrusion in the flow direction.
<Condition 3>
When there are two straight lines parallel to the flow direction of the transfer sheet and two straight lines parallel to the width direction as the outer edge shape of the protrusion, both sides in the flow direction of the protrusion and / or the width of the protrusion The peripheral area is arranged on both sides of the direction. - 前記基材層の第1領域内に凹凸部を有する請求項8~11の何れか1項に記載の転写シート。 The transfer sheet according to any one of claims 8 to 11, which has an uneven portion in the first region of the base material layer.
- [前記凹凸部の最大高さ<前記突出部及び前記周辺突出部の高さ]の関係を満たす請求項12に記載の転写シート。 The transfer sheet according to claim 12, satisfying a relationship of [maximum height of the uneven portion <height of the protruding portion and the peripheral protruding portion].
- 前記基材層は、前記突出部及び前記周辺突出部が設けられた樹脂層と、前記樹脂層上に設けられた離型層とを有する請求項8~13の何れか1項に記載の転写シート。 The transfer according to any one of claims 8 to 13, wherein the base material layer includes a resin layer provided with the protrusion and the peripheral protrusion, and a release layer provided on the resin layer. Sheet.
- 前記転写層は、保護層を有し、
前記着色層は、前記突出部及び前記周辺突出部上に設けられた前記離型層上に接して設けられ、かつ、前記保護層と接して設けられている請求項14に記載の転写シート。 The transfer layer has a protective layer,
The transfer sheet according to claim 14, wherein the colored layer is provided in contact with the release layer provided on the protrusion and the peripheral protrusion, and is provided in contact with the protective layer. - 前記離型層は、アクリルポリオール及びイソシアネートを含有する樹脂組成物の硬化物を含み、
前記保護層は、水酸基を有するウレタンアクリレートを含有する樹脂組成物の硬化物を含み、
前記着色層は、アクリルポリオール及びイソシアネートを含有する樹脂組成物の硬化物を含む請求項14又は15に記載の転写シート。 The release layer includes a cured product of a resin composition containing acrylic polyol and isocyanate,
The protective layer includes a cured product of a resin composition containing a urethane acrylate having a hydroxyl group,
The transfer sheet according to claim 14 or 15, wherein the colored layer includes a cured product of a resin composition containing an acrylic polyol and an isocyanate. - 下記(A1)~(A3)工程により離型シートを製造した後、離型シートの少なくとも一部に転写層を形成する、請求項8に記載の転写シートの製造方法。
(A1)支持体上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む樹脂層形成用インキを塗布し、未硬化の樹脂層を形成する工程。
(A2)第1領域及び第2領域と相補的な形状を有する版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層を賦形すると同時に、電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層を硬化させ、支持体上に樹脂層が形成された基材層を得る工程。
(A3)基材層の第2領域内の突出部及び周辺突出部上に着色層を形成する工程。 The method for producing a transfer sheet according to claim 8, wherein after the release sheet is produced by the following steps (A1) to (A3), a transfer layer is formed on at least a part of the release sheet.
(A1) The process of apply | coating the ink for resin layer formation containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition on a support body, and forming an uncured resin layer.
(A2) Using a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region, the uncured resin layer is shaped, and simultaneously irradiated with ionizing radiation to cure the shaped resin layer and support The process of obtaining the base material layer in which the resin layer was formed on the body.
(A3) The process of forming a colored layer on the protrusion part in a 2nd area | region of a base material layer, and a peripheral protrusion part. - 請求項8~16の何れか1項に記載の転写シートの転写層を被転写物に転写する工程と、前記転写シートの前記離型シートを剥離する工程とを有する、加飾成形品の製造方法。 A process for producing a decorative molded product, comprising: a step of transferring the transfer layer of the transfer sheet according to any one of claims 8 to 16 to a transfer target; and a step of peeling the release sheet of the transfer sheet. Method.
- 離型シート上に転写層を有する転写シートであって、
前記離型シートは、被転写物に転写するための第1領域及び位置合わせ用パターンを設けるための第2領域を有し、前記第2領域は、前記転写層側の面側に凸部を有し、
前記転写層は、前記離型シートが設けられた面の反対側の表面に前記凸部を基礎とする追従突出部を有する位置合わせ用パターン部を備え、前記追従突出部上に着色層を有する、転写シート。 A transfer sheet having a transfer layer on a release sheet,
The release sheet has a first region for transferring to a transfer object and a second region for providing an alignment pattern, and the second region has a convex portion on the surface side of the transfer layer. Have
The transfer layer includes an alignment pattern portion having a tracking protrusion portion based on the convex portion on a surface opposite to the surface on which the release sheet is provided, and has a colored layer on the tracking protrusion portion. , Transfer sheet. - 前記追従突出部の高さは、1.0μm以上である請求項19に記載の転写シート。 20. The transfer sheet according to claim 19, wherein the follow-up protrusion has a height of 1.0 μm or more.
- 前記追従突出部の端部同士の間隔は、0.05~3.0mmである請求項19又は20に記載の転写シート。 The transfer sheet according to claim 19 or 20, wherein an interval between the end portions of the following protrusion is 0.05 to 3.0 mm.
- 前記着色層は、線幅の平均値が0.01~4.0mmのライン状パターンであり、前記線幅の変動が10%以内である請求項19~21のいずれか1項に記載の転写シート。 The transfer according to any one of claims 19 to 21, wherein the colored layer is a line pattern having an average line width of 0.01 to 4.0 mm, and the variation of the line width is within 10%. Sheet.
- 支持体上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む樹脂層形成用インキを塗布し、未硬化の樹脂層を形成する工程と、
第1領域及び第2領域と相補的な形状を有する版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層を賦形すると同時に、電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層を硬化させる工程と、
硬化させた前記樹脂層上に、離型層形成用インキを塗布し、離型層を形成する工程と、
前記離型層上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む保護層形成用インキを塗布し、保護層を形成する工程と、
前記保護層上に、接着剤層形成用インキを塗布し、接着剤層を形成する工程と、
前記接着剤層における前記第2領域に相当する位置に形成された追従突出部上に、着色層形成用インキを塗布し、着色層を形成する工程と、を含む請求項19に記載の転写シートの製造方法。 Applying a resin layer forming ink containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition on a support, and forming an uncured resin layer;
Using a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region, forming an uncured resin layer and simultaneously irradiating with ionizing radiation to cure the shaped resin layer;
A step of applying a release layer forming ink on the cured resin layer, and forming a release layer;
Applying a protective layer forming ink containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition on the release layer, and forming a protective layer;
Applying an adhesive layer forming ink on the protective layer, forming an adhesive layer;
The transfer sheet according to claim 19, further comprising: applying a colored layer forming ink on a follow-up protruding portion formed at a position corresponding to the second region in the adhesive layer to form a colored layer. Manufacturing method. - 請求項19~22のいずれか1項に記載の転写シートの転写層を被転写物に転写する工程と、前記転写シートの前記離型シートを剥離する工程とを有する、加飾成形品の製造方法。 A process for producing a decorative molded product, comprising: a step of transferring a transfer layer of the transfer sheet according to any one of claims 19 to 22 to a transfer target; and a step of peeling the release sheet of the transfer sheet. Method.
- 離型シート上に転写層を有する転写シートであって、
前記離型シートは、被転写物に転写するための第1領域及び位置合わせ用パターンを設けるための第2領域を有する基材層を有し、前記基材層の前記第2領域には、前記転写層側の面側に凸部を有し、
前記転写層は、前記離型シートとは反対側の表面に前記凸部を基礎とする追従突出部を有する位置合わせ用パターン部を備え、
前記凸部の高さhは、1.0~6.0μmであり、
前記凸部の端部同士の間隔dは、10~500μmである、転写シート。 A transfer sheet having a transfer layer on a release sheet,
The release sheet has a base layer having a first region for transferring to a transfer object and a second region for providing an alignment pattern, and in the second region of the base layer, A convex portion on the surface side of the transfer layer,
The transfer layer is provided with a pattern part for alignment having a follow-up protruding part based on the convex part on the surface opposite to the release sheet,
The height h of the convex part is 1.0 to 6.0 μm,
The transfer sheet has an interval d between ends of the convex portions of 10 to 500 μm. - 前記凸部の高さhと前記凸部の端部同士の間隔dとの比率h/dは、0.003~0.100である請求項25に記載の転写シート。 The transfer sheet according to claim 25, wherein a ratio h / d between a height h of the convex portion and a distance d between the end portions of the convex portion is 0.003 to 0.100.
- 前記凸部の幅bは、5~200μmである請求項25又は26に記載の転写シート。 The transfer sheet according to claim 25 or 26, wherein a width b of the convex portion is 5 to 200 μm.
- 前記凸部の高さhと前記凸部の幅bとの比率h/bは、0.010~0.050である請求項25~27のいずれか1項に記載の転写シート。 The transfer sheet according to any one of claims 25 to 27, wherein a ratio h / b between a height h of the convex portion and a width b of the convex portion is 0.010 to 0.050.
- 前記突出部の高さHは、1.0μm以上である請求項25~28のいずれか1項に記載の転写シート。 The transfer sheet according to any one of claims 25 to 28, wherein a height H of the protrusion is 1.0 μm or more.
- 前記突出部上に着色層を有する請求項25~29のいずれか1項に記載の転写シート。 The transfer sheet according to any one of claims 25 to 29, further comprising a colored layer on the protruding portion.
- 支持体上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む樹脂層形成用インキを塗布し、未硬化の樹脂層を形成する工程と、
前記第1領域及び前記第2領域と相補的な形状を有する版を用いて、未硬化の樹脂層を賦形すると同時に、電離放射線を照射して、賦形した樹脂層を硬化させる工程と、
硬化させた前記樹脂層上に、離型層形成用インキを塗布し、離型層を形成する工程と、
前記離型層上に、電離放射線硬化性樹脂組成物を含む保護層形成用インキを塗布し、保護層を形成する工程と、
前記保護層上に、接着剤層形成用インキを塗布し、接着剤層を形成する工程と、を含む請求項25に記載の転写シートの製造方法。 Applying a resin layer forming ink containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition on a support, and forming an uncured resin layer;
Using a plate having a shape complementary to the first region and the second region, forming an uncured resin layer and simultaneously irradiating with ionizing radiation to cure the shaped resin layer;
A step of applying a release layer forming ink on the cured resin layer, and forming a release layer;
Applying a protective layer forming ink containing an ionizing radiation curable resin composition on the release layer, and forming a protective layer;
The manufacturing method of the transfer sheet of Claim 25 including the process of apply | coating the ink for adhesive bond layer formation on the said protective layer, and forming an adhesive bond layer. - 前記接着剤層における前記第2領域に相当する位置に形成された突出部上に、着色層形成用インキを塗布し、着色層を形成する工程をさらに含む請求項31に記載の転写シートの製造方法。 32. The production of a transfer sheet according to claim 31, further comprising a step of applying a colored layer forming ink on a protruding portion formed at a position corresponding to the second region in the adhesive layer to form a colored layer. Method.
- 請求項25~30のいずれか1項に記載の転写シートの転写層を被転写物に転写する工程と、前記転写シートの前記離型シートを剥離する工程とを有する、加飾成形品の製造方法。 A process for producing a decorative molded product, comprising: a step of transferring a transfer layer of the transfer sheet according to any one of claims 25 to 30 to a transfer target; and a step of peeling the release sheet of the transfer sheet. Method.
Applications Claiming Priority (8)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2016-155289 | 2016-08-08 | ||
JP2016155289A JP6759829B2 (en) | 2016-08-08 | 2016-08-08 | Transfer sheet, manufacturing method of transfer sheet, and manufacturing method of decorative molded product |
JP2016168148 | 2016-08-30 | ||
JP2016-168148 | 2016-08-30 | ||
JP2017-084549 | 2017-04-21 | ||
JP2017084549A JP6794916B2 (en) | 2017-04-21 | 2017-04-21 | Transfer sheet, manufacturing method of transfer sheet and manufacturing method of decorative molded product |
JP2017086410A JP6891616B2 (en) | 2016-08-30 | 2017-04-25 | Transfer sheet, manufacturing method of transfer sheet, and manufacturing method of decorative molded product |
JP2017-086410 | 2017-04-25 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2018030334A1 true WO2018030334A1 (en) | 2018-02-15 |
Family
ID=61162203
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2017/028568 WO2018030334A1 (en) | 2016-08-08 | 2017-08-07 | Transfer sheet, method for manufacturing transfer sheet, and method for manufacturing decorative molded article |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
WO (1) | WO2018030334A1 (en) |
Cited By (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2019150988A (en) * | 2018-03-01 | 2019-09-12 | 大日本印刷株式会社 | Transfer sheet, method of manufacturing transfer sheet, and method of manufacturing decorative molding article |
CN112793291A (en) * | 2020-12-25 | 2021-05-14 | 浙江亚欣包装材料有限公司 | Method for manually preparing UV (ultraviolet) plate assembly |
Citations (7)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPH01202491A (en) * | 1988-02-08 | 1989-08-15 | Dainippon Printing Co Ltd | Thermal transfer sheet |
JPH08142597A (en) * | 1994-11-21 | 1996-06-04 | Dainippon Printing Co Ltd | Transfer foil and decorative glass therewith |
JP5095598B2 (en) * | 2008-12-25 | 2012-12-12 | 日本写真印刷株式会社 | Method for producing partial mat transfer sheet |
JP2013001047A (en) * | 2011-06-21 | 2013-01-07 | Dainippon Printing Co Ltd | Thermal transfer sheet |
JP2014100823A (en) * | 2012-11-19 | 2014-06-05 | Nissha Printing Co Ltd | Decorative sheet, decorative article, and production method of the same |
WO2015163129A1 (en) * | 2014-04-25 | 2015-10-29 | 旭化成イーマテリアルズ株式会社 | Function-transferring body and function-transferring film roll |
WO2015191058A1 (en) * | 2014-06-11 | 2015-12-17 | Assa Abloy Ab | Intermediate transfer film having substantially transparent alignment marks |
-
2017
- 2017-08-07 WO PCT/JP2017/028568 patent/WO2018030334A1/en active Application Filing
Patent Citations (7)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPH01202491A (en) * | 1988-02-08 | 1989-08-15 | Dainippon Printing Co Ltd | Thermal transfer sheet |
JPH08142597A (en) * | 1994-11-21 | 1996-06-04 | Dainippon Printing Co Ltd | Transfer foil and decorative glass therewith |
JP5095598B2 (en) * | 2008-12-25 | 2012-12-12 | 日本写真印刷株式会社 | Method for producing partial mat transfer sheet |
JP2013001047A (en) * | 2011-06-21 | 2013-01-07 | Dainippon Printing Co Ltd | Thermal transfer sheet |
JP2014100823A (en) * | 2012-11-19 | 2014-06-05 | Nissha Printing Co Ltd | Decorative sheet, decorative article, and production method of the same |
WO2015163129A1 (en) * | 2014-04-25 | 2015-10-29 | 旭化成イーマテリアルズ株式会社 | Function-transferring body and function-transferring film roll |
WO2015191058A1 (en) * | 2014-06-11 | 2015-12-17 | Assa Abloy Ab | Intermediate transfer film having substantially transparent alignment marks |
Cited By (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2019150988A (en) * | 2018-03-01 | 2019-09-12 | 大日本印刷株式会社 | Transfer sheet, method of manufacturing transfer sheet, and method of manufacturing decorative molding article |
JP7110623B2 (en) | 2018-03-01 | 2022-08-02 | 大日本印刷株式会社 | Transfer sheet, method for producing transfer sheet, and method for producing decorative molding |
CN112793291A (en) * | 2020-12-25 | 2021-05-14 | 浙江亚欣包装材料有限公司 | Method for manually preparing UV (ultraviolet) plate assembly |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
JP6812853B2 (en) | A transfer sheet, a method for manufacturing a decorative molded product using the transfer sheet, and a mold for molding the transfer sheet. | |
WO2018030334A1 (en) | Transfer sheet, method for manufacturing transfer sheet, and method for manufacturing decorative molded article | |
CN110809518A (en) | Decorative molded article, method for producing decorative molded article, transfer sheet, and display device | |
JP6891568B2 (en) | Decorative molded products and manufacturing methods for decorative molded products | |
JP6922536B2 (en) | Transfer sheet, manufacturing method of transfer sheet and manufacturing method of decorative molded product | |
JP6794916B2 (en) | Transfer sheet, manufacturing method of transfer sheet and manufacturing method of decorative molded product | |
JP6891616B2 (en) | Transfer sheet, manufacturing method of transfer sheet, and manufacturing method of decorative molded product | |
JP2019038233A (en) | Decorative sheet, structure including decorative sheet and method for producing decorative sheet | |
CN110770021B (en) | Decorative molded article, method for producing decorative molded article, transfer sheet, and display device | |
JP6759829B2 (en) | Transfer sheet, manufacturing method of transfer sheet, and manufacturing method of decorative molded product | |
JP6907571B2 (en) | Manufacturing method of release sheet, transfer sheet, decorative molded product | |
JP7275562B2 (en) | DECORATIVE MOLDED PRODUCT, METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING DECORATIVE MOLDED PRODUCT, TRANSFER SHEET, AND IMAGE DISPLAY DEVICE | |
WO2012176921A1 (en) | Hairline transfer sheet | |
JP2019043067A (en) | Transfer sheet, production method of transfer sheet and production method of decorative molded product | |
JP2023043665A (en) | Resin panel, transfer sheet and infrared sensor | |
JP2018126984A (en) | Intermediate substrate of irregular transfer sheet with polygon attachment parts, release sheet using the same, and irregular transfer sheet with polygon attachment parts, and method of manufacturing decorative molded article using the same | |
JP6932922B2 (en) | Transfer sheet, manufacturing method of decorative molded product using transfer sheet, and decorative molded product | |
JP7110623B2 (en) | Transfer sheet, method for producing transfer sheet, and method for producing decorative molding | |
WO2020079931A1 (en) | Release liner, adhesive film in which same is used, and method for producing release liner | |
JP2020023132A (en) | Release sheet, transfer sheet, manufacturing method of release sheet, manufacturing method of transfer sheet, and manufacturing method of decorative molded article | |
JP6922240B2 (en) | Manufacturing method of release sheet, transfer sheet, decorative molded product | |
JP7000653B2 (en) | Decorative film, transfer sheet, decorative molded product and its manufacturing method | |
JP2020049886A (en) | Decorative molded article, image display device using the same, and transfer sheet | |
JP2024067443A (en) | Decorative sheet, substrate sheet, method for producing substrate sheet, and method for producing decorative sheet | |
JP6641864B2 (en) | Printed matter |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 17839405 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 17839405 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |